Content Manager User Guide
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Content Manager User Guide as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 104,127
- Pages: 508
Content Manager 2.1 User Guide
September 2006
PM-2006-1213 v2
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction About Content Manager ............................................................2 About This Guide .....................................................................2 Logging In to Content Manager ..................................................3 Changing Your Login and Password Information ...........................3 Logging Out .......................................................................4
The Content Manager Interface ..................................................5 The Welcome Screen ............................................................5 Viewing and Working With Lists ...............................................6 Using the Filters Screen ........................................................8
Chapter 2 Understanding Rights Content Manager and Rights Management ................................. 12 Account Rights ...................................................................... 12 Group Rights ......................................................................... 12 Navigation Rights................................................................... 14 Service Rights ....................................................................... 14 System History Rights ............................................................ 15 Content Provider Rights .......................................................... 15 Content Category Rights ......................................................... 16 Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights ................................ 17 Catalog Rights ....................................................................... 18 Content Topic Rights............................................................... 18 System Administration Rights .................................................. 19 Tracking Rights ...................................................................... 19 Offer Rights .......................................................................... 19
Chapter 3 Getting Started Configuring a Bulk Campaign................................................... 22 Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure.................. 22 Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository .............................. 23
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
i
Step 3: Import Accounts ..................................................... 25 Step 4: Creating Content ..................................................... 28 Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options ...................................... 33 Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface ...................................... 36 Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process ................................... 37
Chapter 4 Back-Office Management Managing Back-Office Groups .................................................. 41 Viewing Back-Office Groups .................................................. 41 Searching Back-Office Groups ............................................... 42 Creating a New Back-Office Group.......................................... 43 Editing a Back-Office Group .................................................. 44 Deleting Back-Office Groups ................................................. 49 Defining Back-Office Global Rights ......................................... 49
Managing Back-Office Accounts................................................ 51 Viewing Back-Office Accounts ............................................... 51 Searching Back-Office Accounts ............................................. 52 Creating a New Back-Office Account ....................................... 53 Editing a Back-Office Account ............................................... 54 Deleting Back-Office Accounts ............................................... 59
Chapter 5 Front-Office Management Managing Services ................................................................. 61 Viewing Services ............................................................... 61 Searching Services ............................................................ 62 Creating a New Service ....................................................... 62 Editing a Service ............................................................... 64 Deleting a Service ............................................................. 69 Managing Global Service Rights ............................................. 69
Managing Front-Office Groups.................................................. 71 Viewing Front-Office Groups ................................................. 71 Searching Front-Office Groups .............................................. 72 Creating a New Front-Office Group ......................................... 73 Editing a Front-Office Group ................................................. 74 Deleting a Front-Office Group ............................................... 80
Managing Front-Office Accounts ............................................... 81 Searching for a Front-Office Account ....................................... 81 Creating a New Front-Office Account ....................................... 83 Editing a Front-Office Account ............................................... 84 Deleting a Front-Office Account ............................................. 97
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
ii
Searching Front-Office Account History Logs .............................. 98 Managing Mobile Devices ........................................................ 99 Searching for a Device by IMEI ............................................. 99 Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI .............................. 100 Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs ................................. 100
Uploading Accounts .............................................................. 101 Viewing Account Imports ................................................... 101 Searching Bulk Account Imports .......................................... 102 Creating a Bulk Account Import File ...................................... 102
Chapter 6 Content Management Managing Content Providers .................................................. 107 Viewing Content Providers ................................................. 107 Searching Content Providers ............................................... 108 Creating a New Content Provider ......................................... 109 Editing a Content Provider ................................................. 110 Deleting a Content Provider ................................................ 113 Defining Global Content Provider Rights ................................. 113
Managing Content Categories ................................................ 114 Viewing Categories .......................................................... 115 Searching Categories ........................................................ 116 Creating a New Category ................................................... 116 Editing a Category ........................................................... 117 Deleting a Category ......................................................... 121 Managing Global Category Rights ......................................... 121
Using Content Templates....................................................... 123 Viewing Content Templates ................................................ 123 Editing Content Templates ................................................. 124 Editing a Content Template Version ...................................... 124
Managing Content ................................................................ 137 Viewing Content .............................................................. 137 Searching Content ........................................................... 138 Creating New Content ....................................................... 139 Editing Content ............................................................... 140 Cloning Content .............................................................. 157 Deleting Content ............................................................. 157
Importing Bulk Contents ....................................................... 158 Searching Import Processes ............................................... 159 Starting a Bulk Import Process ............................................ 160 Creating a Process ........................................................... 160
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
iii
Accessing a Bulk Process ................................................... 164 Deleting a Bulk Process ..................................................... 164
Using Zip Files ..................................................................... 164 Algorithms of Zip File Processing.......................................... 164 Zip File Structure and XML Files ........................................... 165
Chapter 7 Device Management Managing Devices by Brand................................................... 172 Searching Devices by Brand ............................................... 173 Creating a Brand ............................................................. 174 Editing a Brand ............................................................... 174 Deleting a Brand ............................................................. 177 Activating a Brand ........................................................... 177 Deactivating a Brand ........................................................ 177
Managing Devices by Model................................................... 178 Searching Devices by Model ............................................... 179 Creating a Device ............................................................ 180 Editing a Device .............................................................. 180 Deleting a Device ............................................................ 194 Activating Devices ........................................................... 194 Deactivating Devices ........................................................ 194
Managing Features ............................................................... 195 Searching Features .......................................................... 196 Creating a Feature ........................................................... 197 Editing a Feature ............................................................. 197 Deleting a Feature ........................................................... 200 Activating Features .......................................................... 200 Deactivating Features ....................................................... 200
Managing Capability Groups .................................................. 201 Viewing Capability Groups.................................................. 201 Searching Capability Groups ............................................... 202 Editing a Capability Group .................................................. 203 Creating a Capability Group ................................................ 204 Deleting a Capability Group ................................................ 205
Managing Capability Group Handlers....................................... 206 Viewing Capability Group Handlers ....................................... 206 Searching Capability Group Handlers .................................... 207 Creating a Capability Group Handler ..................................... 207 Editing a Capability Group Handler ....................................... 208 Deleting a Capability Group Handler ..................................... 211 Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
iv
Managing Formatting Tokens ................................................. 212 Viewing Formatting Tokens ................................................ 212 Searching Formatting Tokens.............................................. 213 Editing a Formatting Token ................................................ 213 Creating a Formatting Token .............................................. 216 Deleting a Formatting Token ............................................... 218
Managing Device Detection Rules ........................................... 218 Viewing Detection Rules .................................................... 218 Searching Detection Rules ................................................. 219 Editing a Detection Rule .................................................... 220 Creating a Detection Rule .................................................. 222 Deleting a Detection Rule .................................................. 223
Managing Device Detection Sets ............................................ 224 Viewing Detection Sets ..................................................... 224
Using the Detection Tool ....................................................... 225 Managing Device Application Types......................................... 226 Viewing Device Application Types ......................................... 226 Searching Device Application Types ...................................... 228 Editing a Device Application Type ......................................... 228 Creating a Device Application Type ....................................... 230 Deleting a Device Application Type ....................................... 231 Activating Device Application Types ...................................... 231 Deactivating Device Application Types ................................... 231
Managing Device Applications ................................................ 232 Viewing Device Applications................................................ 232 Searching Device Applications ............................................. 233 Editing a Device Application................................................ 233 Creating a Device Application .............................................. 236 Deleting a Device Application .............................................. 237 Activating Device Applications ............................................. 238 Deactivating Device Applications .......................................... 238
Managing Device Application Versions ..................................... 238 Viewing Device Application Versions ..................................... 238 Searching Device Application Versions ................................... 240 Editing a Device Application Version ..................................... 240 Creating a Device Application Version ................................... 243 Deleting a Device Application Version .................................... 244 Activating Device Application Versions ................................... 244 Deactivating Device Application Versions................................ 244
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
v
Managing Formatting Systems ............................................... 245 Viewing Formatting Systems............................................... 245 Searching Formatting Systems ............................................ 245
Chapter 8 DKB Management Managing Devices Through a Search....................................... 248 Searching Devices Using Quick Search .................................. 248 Searching Devices by IMEI Range ........................................ 249 Managing Devices By IMEI Range ........................................ 249 Searching Devices by User Agent ......................................... 252 Managing Devices by User Agent ......................................... 253
Searching Device Profiles ...................................................... 255 Managing Device Profiles ................................................... 256 Creating a Device Profile ................................................... 258 Editing a Device Profile ..................................................... 258
Searching Device Profile Capabilities....................................... 277 Managing Device Profile Capabilities ..................................... 278
Managing Trust Sources ........................................................ 282 Viewing Trust Sources ...................................................... 282 Editing a Trust Source ...................................................... 283 Creating a Trust Source .................................................... 286 Deleting a Trust Source ..................................................... 287
Managing DKB Versions ........................................................ 287 Viewing DKB Versions ....................................................... 287 Searching DKB Versions .................................................... 288 Editing a DKB Version ....................................................... 289 Deleting a Version ........................................................... 290
Managing DKB Archives ........................................................ 290 Managing DKB Synchronizations ............................................ 291 Viewing Synchronization Processes ....................................... 292 Searching Synchronization Processes .................................... 293 Monitoring a Synchronization Process.................................... 293 Creating a Synchronization Process ...................................... 296
Managing Device and DKB Rights ........................................... 297 Granting Device and DKB Rights .......................................... 297 Revoking Device and DKB Rights ......................................... 298
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
vi
Chapter 9 Delivery Management Managing Categories ............................................................ 300 Viewing Categories .......................................................... 300 Searching Categories ........................................................ 302 Creating a New Category ................................................... 302 Editing a Category ........................................................... 304 Deleting a Category ......................................................... 309
Managing Offers .................................................................. 310 Viewing Offers ................................................................ 310 Searching Offers ............................................................. 312 Creating a New Offer ........................................................ 312 Editing an Offer............................................................... 314 Managing Global Offer Rights .............................................. 334 Managing Download Codes ................................................. 335 Deleting an Offer ............................................................. 336
Managing Bundles ................................................................ 337 Viewing Bundles .............................................................. 337 Searching Bundles ........................................................... 339 Creating a Bundle ............................................................ 339 Editing a Bundle .............................................................. 341 Deleting a Bundle ............................................................ 355 Downloading a Bundle ...................................................... 355 Creating a Bundle Bulk Process ........................................... 357
Viewing Popular Downloads ................................................... 362 Managing Triggers................................................................ 363 Searching Triggers ........................................................... 364
Managing Subscriptions ........................................................ 365 Editing or Deleting a Subscription ........................................ 366
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights ...................................... 367 Managing Content Topics....................................................... 368 Viewing Topics ................................................................ 368 Searching Topics ............................................................. 370 Creating a New Topic ........................................................ 370 Editing a Topic ................................................................ 372 Deleting a Topic .............................................................. 377 Managing Topic Rights ...................................................... 377 Publishing Topics ............................................................. 379
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
vii
Managing Content Systems ................................................... 381 Viewing Content Systems .................................................. 381 Searching Content Systems ................................................ 382 Creating a New Content System .......................................... 382 Editing a Content System .................................................. 384 Deleting a Content System ................................................. 385
Chapter 10 System Configuration Cache Management .............................................................. 387 Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details.................... 387
Managing Messaging Credentials ............................................ 391 Viewing Credentials .......................................................... 391 Searching Credentials ....................................................... 392 Creating New Credentials ................................................... 393 Editing Credentials ........................................................... 394 Deleting Credentials ......................................................... 394
Managing Message Patterns................................................... 395 Viewing Message Patterns .................................................. 395 Searching Message Patterns ............................................... 396 Creating a New Message Pattern .......................................... 396 Editing a Message Pattern .................................................. 399 Deleting a Message Pattern ................................................ 403
Managing Session Sequences ................................................ 403 Viewing Session Sequences ................................................ 403 Searching Session Sequences ............................................. 404 Creating a New Session Sequence ........................................ 404 Editing a Session Sequence ................................................ 406 Deleting a Session Sequence .............................................. 406 Understanding Session Sequences ....................................... 407
Managing Workflows............................................................. 408 Viewing Workflows ........................................................... 408 Searching Workflows ........................................................ 409 Creating a New Workflow ................................................... 409 Editing a Workflow ........................................................... 410 Deleting a Workflow ......................................................... 423
Managing System Administration Rights .................................. 424 Managing Bulk Content Processes .......................................... 425 Viewing Bulk Content Processes........................................... 425 Searching Bulk Content Processes ........................................ 426 Accessing a Bulk Content Process ........................................ 426
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
viii
Managing Sessions............................................................... 428 Viewing Session Reports .................................................... 428 Editing Session Details ...................................................... 430 Purging Sessions ............................................................. 432
Managing Retry Sessions ...................................................... 432 Viewing Retry Sessions ..................................................... 432 Searching Retry Sessions................................................... 433 Viewing Session Details ..................................................... 433 Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process.................................. 434 Purging Retry Sessions ..................................................... 435
Managing Purges ................................................................. 435 Viewing Purges ............................................................... 436 Searching Purged Sessions................................................. 437 Viewing Purge Details ....................................................... 437 Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports .................................. 439
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights .............................. 439
Chapter 11 Statistics Managing Statistics Processes................................................ 442 Searching Statistic Processes .............................................. 442 Viewing Process Details ..................................................... 443
Statistics Tracking ................................................................ 447 Searching Statistics Compilations ......................................... 448 Viewing Statistic Compilation Details ..................................... 448
Device Statistics .................................................................. 451 Downloads Per Brand ....................................................... 451 Downloads Per Model........................................................ 452
Content Statistics................................................................. 453 Downloads Per Provider..................................................... 453 Downloads Per Content ..................................................... 454 Content Per Provider ........................................................ 454
Other Statistics.................................................................... 455 Downloads Per Offer ......................................................... 455 Downloads Per Service ...................................................... 456
Chapter 12 System Information Managing Countries.............................................................. 459 Viewing Countries ............................................................ 459 Searching Countries ......................................................... 460 Adding a Country ............................................................ 461
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
ix
Editing a Country ............................................................ 461 Deleting a Country ........................................................... 462
Managing Mobile Network Operators ....................................... 463 Viewing Mobile Network Operators ....................................... 463 Searching Operators......................................................... 464 Creating a New Operator ................................................... 465 Editing an Operator .......................................................... 465 Deleting an Operator ........................................................ 466
Managing Phone Prefixes ...................................................... 467 Viewing Prefixes .............................................................. 467 Searching Prefixes ........................................................... 468 Creating New Prefixes ....................................................... 469 Editing a Prefix ............................................................... 469 Deleting a Prefix.............................................................. 470
History File Configuration ...................................................... 471 Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration ................................. 471
Managing History Rights ....................................................... 473
Glossary ................................................................................. 474 Index ..................................................................................... 479
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
x
1
Introduction
This chapter includes the following information: About Content Manager.............................................................................................. About This Guide ....................................................................................................... Logging In to Content Manager ................................................................................... Changing Your Login and Password Information ............................................................. Logging Out.............................................................................................................. The Content Manager Interface ................................................................................... The Welcome Screen.................................................................................................. Viewing and Working With Lists ................................................................................... Using the Filters Screen .............................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 8
1
Introduction
About Content Manager Content Manager 2.1 is a powerful new content management solution that integrates a comprehensive device database, intelligent content adaptation, powerful storefront publishing, flexible APIs, subscription services, Application Manager, and WAP billing capabilities into a single, powerful platform. Content Manager brings together the key elements of mobile content management—from content creation to billing and settlement on a global basis—enabling you to consolidate mobile content offerings and reach the largest possible number of operators, handsets, and mobile subscribers. Content Manager provides:
• Support for the broadest range of mobile devices and content formats • An intelligent workflow that streamlines the process of creating, adapting, organizing, rating, and publishing mobile content
• Content aggregation tools, enabling you to centralize content from a variety of sources into a single global hosting environment
• Web tools and APIs that enable you to automatically publish both Web and WAP storefronts
• A workflow engine, enabling you to implement creative campaigns and complex subscriber interactions
• A direct link into Mobile 365’s robust and reliable APEX Network, enabling reach into mobile markets worldwide
• Distribution to more than 500 global operators • Detailed statistical and transactional reporting
About This Guide This guide describes all back-office (administrative level) and front-office (end-user level) tasks performed and functionality available in Content Manager 2.1. NOTE: You may not have access to all functions listed in this document, depending on the
rights attributed to your account. For more information, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
2
Introduction
Logging In to Content Manager 1. To access the Mobile 365 Content Manager 2.1 interface, type the Web URL of the Content Manager 2.1 server into your browser’s address field and press the Enter key.
3 The Content Manager 2.1 Login screen displays.
Figure 1.1: Login Screen
2. Enter your Login and Password. 3. Click Enter.
3 The Welcome screen displays (Figure 1.3 on page 5). NOTE: It is recommended that you change your login and password as soon as possible
during your first Content Manager session.
Changing Your Login and Password Information 1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts. 2. Click Show table.
3 The List accounts screen displays. 3. From the Name list, click the appropriate account.
3 The Edit account screen for the selected account displays (Figure 1.2 on page 4).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
3
Introduction
Figure 1.2: The Edit account Screen
4. In the New password field, enter a new password. 5. In the Confirm new password field, enter the new password again. 6. Click Submit.
3 Your changes will take effect the next time you log into Content Manager. Logging Out To log out of Content Manager, click Logout in the upper right corner of the application (see Figure 1.3 or Figure 1.5 on page 6, for more detail).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
4
Introduction
The Content Manager Interface This section provides an overview to using the Content Manager interface. CAUTION: While using the Content Manager application, it is recommended that you do
not use your browser’s Back and Next buttons to navigate the program. Instead, use the menus, buttons, and links provided by Content Manager.
The Welcome Screen The Content Manager Welcome screen is the first screen you see when you log in to the application. From here, you can access all Content Manager functions using the menu bar.
Figure 1.3: The Welcome Screen
The Menu Bar
Figure 1.4: The Menu Bar
The menu bar consists of the following menus: NOTE: Depending on the implementation of Content Manager and rights granted, you may
only have access to certain menus and functions. For more information, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
• Administrators — Manage back-office (or administrator/client) groups, accounts, and rights. For more information, see “Back-Office Management” on page 40.
• End-users — Manage front-office (or end-user) services, groups, accounts, and rights. For more information, see “Front-Office Management” on page 60.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
5
Introduction
• Content — Manage content categories, providers, and templates. For more information, see “Content Management” on page 106.
• Device — Manage devices as well as the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). For more information, see “Device Management” on page 170 and “DKB Management” on page 247.
• Delivery — Manage the content delivery service logic and delivery system configuration. For more information, see “Delivery Management” on page 299 and “System Configuration” on page 386.
• Statistics — Access statistics tables on the platform. For more information, see “Statistics” on page 441.
• System — Manage system configuration. For more information, see “System Information” on page 458.
Additional Options Additional menu options are located in the far upper right corner of the Welcome screen:
• You are — Your login information • Preferences — Click to modify interface (skin, language, and Welcome screen) preferences
• Logout — Click to end the current session
Figure 1.5: Additional Menu Options
Content Manager Version Information To access information about the Content Manager application, click the Mobile 365 logo located in the far upper left corner of the Welcome screen.
3 The Version Information screen displays, listing information about both the Content Manager application and the platform on which it operates.
Viewing and Working With Lists Elements of Content Manager include entities such as back-office (administrator-level) and front-office (end-user) groups, services, content, devices, and more. Each time you view a list of groups, for example, Content Manager displays a screen similar to Figure 1.6 on page 7. NOTE: The List groups screen is used in this generic example. Functions available at the
top of the screen may differ depending on the element you are viewing. Elementspecific functionality is described in its appropriate section of this guide.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
6
Introduction
Figure 1.6: The List groups Screen
1. This area displays the current location of the application. Click available links to jump to that location in Content Manager. 2. Click Edit filters to modify filter settings for searches within an element. For more information, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 3. Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters. 4. Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria. 5. Use the pull-down menu to show a specific number of items per page — 5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100, or 500 items per page. 6. Click Refresh to update the list of elements. 7. Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page. 8. If present, click the
next to each filter to delete.
9. Select an item using the check box located in the first column on the left. Click the top check box to select all items in the list. 10. Click available column headings to sort column items alphabetically (default is descending; click again to sort ascending). NOTE: Some columns may not be available for sorting.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
7
Introduction
Using the Filters Screen Whenever you perform a search using Content Manager, you can create a filter using various search criteria in order to sift records and return a specific set of search results. Although the filter criteria may differ between the type of information you are searching, the process of creating and applying filters is the same.
Figure 1.7: List groups > Filters Screen
From the Filters screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Show table to view a list of elements matching criteria set in the current filter. If no filter is currently selected, the Show table link returns you to the full list of elements.
• Enter filter criteria and click the corresponding
to add a new filter.
• Check the not box to reverse the operator. For example, “contains” becomes “does not contain”.
• Click Reset filters to delete active filters for the related element. When a filter is applied, the following information is provided in the Current filters area of the Filters screen:
• The criteria on which the filter is applied. • The operator used for the filter (for example, “contains”). • The variable value entered for the filter. • Click the
next to the filter to delete.
Filter Criteria and Operators A search is defined using both text and numeric filter criteria. Filter criteria is considered the information by which to perform your search. For example, searching by a Name. Filter operators narrow the search by defining the criteria further. For example, searching for an account containing a specific Name. NOTE: Depending on the search you are conducting, filter criteria and operators available
may differ.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
8
Introduction
Text Operators Text criteria is information used in a search that is textual in value — a search by a name or description, for example. The following table describes the textual filter operators available: NOTE: The following operators may or may not be available depending on the type of filter
you are creating or viewing.
Operator contains
Description Returns records containing a specific case-sensitive search string.
contains (insensitive)
Returns records containing a specific search string (not case-sensitive).
equal to
Returns records exactly equal to a specific case-sensitive search string.
equal to (insensitive)
Returns records exactly equal to a specific search string (not case-sensitive).
is like
Returns records containing a certain case sensitive search string with specified parameters. For more information, see the table below.
like (insensitive)
Returns records containing a certain search string with specified parameters (not case-sensitive). For more information, see the table below.
greater than
Returns records larger than a specific search string.
less than
Returns records smaller than a specific search string.
less than or equal to
Returns records smaller than or equal to a specific search string.
greater than or equal to
Returns records larger than or equal to a specific search string.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
9
Introduction
The following values are also available for more precise filtering the text operator “is like”: Operator
Values
is like
%
Effect
Examples
Replace any character string. Name | is like | %pont Displays only groups with name ending in “pont” Description | is not like | 336%6 Displays only groups for which description does not start with “336” and end with “6”
–
[]
Replace any character
Name | is like | d_pont Displays only groups with name equal to “d...pont” (for example, “dupont,” “depont,” etc.)
Replace a predefined list of Name | is not like | d[a-d]pont characters in a range: [a-z] Displays only groups for which name is not equal to “d...pont” where “...” is comprised between or in a list: [abc] “a” and “d”: “dapont,” “dbpont,” “dcpont,” “ddpont” Name | is like | d[aeiou]pont Displays only groups for which name is equal to “d...pont” where “...” is equal to a, e, i, o, or u: “dapont,” “depont,” “dipont,” “dopont,” “dupont”
[^]
Replace all characters except a predefined list of characters in a range: [a-z] or in a list: [abc]
Name | is not like | d[^r-u]pont Displays only groups for which name is not equal to “d...pont” where “...” is not comprised between “r” and “u”: “drpont,” “dspont,” “dtpont,” “dupont” Name | is like \ d[^kzj]pont Displays only groups for which name is equal to “d...pont” where “...” is not equal to k, z, or j: “dkpont,” “dzpont,” “djpont”
Additional Operators Other criteria includes information used in a search that is numeric in value — a search by a phone number or IMEI, for example. The following table describes additional filter operators available: NOTE: The following operators may or may not be available depending on the type of filter
you are creating or viewing. Operator equal to greater than
greater than or equal to less than or equal to less than
Description Returns records equal to a specific search string. Returns records greater than a specific search string. Returns records greater than or equal to a specific search string. Returns records less than or equal to a specific search string. Returns records less than a specific search string.
NOTE: Date and time criteria formats are YYYY-MM-DD and HH:MM:SS.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
10
2
Understanding Rights
This chapter includes the following information: Content Manager and Rights Management .................................................................. Account Rights ........................................................................................................ Group Rights .......................................................................................................... Navigation Rights .................................................................................................... Service Rights......................................................................................................... System History Rights.............................................................................................. Content Provider Rights............................................................................................ Content Category Rights .......................................................................................... Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights .................................................................. Catalog Rights ........................................................................................................ System Administration Rights.................................................................................... Tracking Rights ....................................................................................................... Offer Rights ............................................................................................................ Content Topic Rights ................................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
12 12 12 14 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 19 19 18
11
Understanding Rights
This chapter defines the rights granted to various elements within Content Manager.
Content Manager and Rights Management Content Manager uses a user type and rights hierarchy structure that allows for customized group, account, and individual user levels of access and functionality within the application. Every user of the system uses an account to access specific Content Manager functions. Users may include content providers, brand marketers, or portal owners, for example. Depending on the rights assigned to each user type, functionality available may include access to all or several elements of the Content Manager application.
Account Rights Back-office (administrator) account rights are associated to only those user accounts with access to the functions available in the Administrator menu. Back-office accounts inherit the same rights as their associated parent groups. NOTE: If the back-office account is not associated with a parent group, then the account
will have no rights. If you log in using an account that does not have rights, the only screen available is the Welcome screen (Figure 1.3 on page 5).
Front-office (end-user) account rights are inherited from their associated parent groups. If there is no parent group associated with an account, the account assumes the rights granted to its associated end-user group determined by the service(s) to which it is subscribed.
Group Rights Groups are designed to organize and give user accounts a structure. For instance, a portal owner may have back-office groups such as “Backend administrators”, “Storefront administrators”, and “Content validators”. Front-office groups are used to collectively manage a client's target end-users. Front-office groups may include groups such as “News subscribers” and “Content download service users”. There are three types of group rights:
• global back-office — Rights are granted to groups affecting all groups simultaneously. For information about managing back-office global rights, see “Defining Back-Office Global Rights” on page 49.
• back-office group — Administrator groups inherit rights from associated parent groups. If there is no parent group associated with the administrator group, rights must be assigned to the administrator group itself. For information about managing individual back-office group rights, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
12
Understanding Rights
• front-office group — End-user groups are designed to collectively manage a client’s target end-users. When a group subscribes to a service, the group assumes the rights granted to the service. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 76. The following table describes the rights available for association with Content Manager groups: Right all rights read any account
Description Assigns all rights for all resource to a selected group
3
View all back-office accounts
3 3
create accounts anywhere Create an account member for any backoffice group update any account
Modify any back-office account
manage any account
Change the parent groups of any account
delete any account read any group create groups anywhere
Delete any account View all groups Create a group no matter what its parent group may be
update any group
Edit any back-office group
manage any group
Assign rights to any back-office group
delete any group read children accounts
Global Back-Office Back-Office Group
Delete any back-office group
Front-Office Group
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
View account members associated with the edited group.
3
create children accounts
Create an account member for the edited group.
3
update children accounts
Modify accounts associated with the edited group.
3
3
3
3
Delete accounts associated with the edited group.
3
3
read children groups
View the edited group and its associated child groups.
3
create children groups
Create a child group associated with the edited group.
3
update children groups
Modify child groups associated with the edited group.
3
manage children groups
Assign rights to child groups associated with the edited group.
3
delete children groups
Delete child groups associated with the edited group.
3
manage children accounts Change the parent groups of the accounts currently associated with the edited group. delete children accounts
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
3
13
Understanding Rights
Navigation Rights The Navigation rights tab allows you to define resource access to the Web administration pages. You cannot use the Navigation rights tab to define rights directly to managed objects. For example, you may give access to a back-office group to the End-users menu, but you will also need to grant rights for end-user services and groups to enable this back-office group to completely manage end-users. The “view navigation node” right allows resources to access a Content Manager menu or menu option. For information about managing navigation rights, see “Using the Navigation Rights Tab” on page 48.
Service Rights There are two types of service rights available for association with Content Manager services: global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all available services. For information about managing global service rights, see “Managing Global Service Rights” on page 69. service — Rights are granted to groups individually affecting a selected service. For information about managing individual service rights, see “Editing a Service” on page 64. The following table describes the service rights available: Right read services
Description Allows the group to view services.
create services
Allows groups to create new services.
update services
Allows groups to update services.
delete services
Allows groups to delete services.
subscribe services read children groups
Allows the group to subscribe users to a service. Allows the group to view children groups of a service.
Global
Service
3 3 3 3 3 3
3
3 3
create children groups
Allows the group to create children groups for the service.
3
3
update children groups
Allows the group to update children groups associated with the service.
3
3
manage children groups
Allows the group to manage children groups associated with the service.
3
3
Allows the group to delete children groups associated with the service.
3
3
delete children groups
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
14
Understanding Rights Right
Description
Global
Service
read children accounts
Allows the group to view end-user accounts subscribed to the service. NOTE: You must have the “read services right granted in order to list accounts on which you have rights.
3
3
create children accounts
Allows groups to create new end-user accounts. NOTE: This right can be assigned only from the Rights on all services screen.
3
update children accounts
Allows the group to modify accounts in the service.
3 3
3 3
3
3
manage children accounts Allows a group to change the parent groups of accounts associated with the service. delete children accounts
Allows a group to delete accounts subscribed to the service
System History Rights History rights are granted to allow groups to view and/or store history logs. History logs track user activity within Content Manager. For more information about defining history rights, see “Managing History Rights” on page 473. The following table describes the system history rights used by Content Manager: Right
Description
read history traces
allows the group to view history logs
store history traces
allows the group to store history logs
Content Provider Rights Content provider rights are granted to allow groups to manage content and content versions. There are two types of content provider rights:
• global — Rights are granted to groups affecting all existing content providers simultaneously. For information about managing global content provider rights, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
• new provider — While creating a new provider, rights are granted to groups affecting only the new provider. For more information about creating a new provider, see “Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109. NOTE: You can grant only those rights that you already have on content providers.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
15
Understanding Rights
The following table describes the content provider rights available: Right
Global
New Provider
Allows groups to view a content provider and its published content.
3
3
update content provider
Allows groups to modify content provider information.
3
create content provider
Allows groups to create new content providers.
delete content provider
Allows groups to delete content providers.
3 3 3
read content provider
Description
publish as content provider Allows groups to add contents using the content provider identity. NOTE: You must also have rights granted to each category associated to the content provider in order for administrators to create contents for that provider.
3
Content Category Rights Category rights are granted to allow groups to manage content and content categories. There are two types of content category rights:
• global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all content categories simultaneously. For more information, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121.
• new category — When creating a category, rights are granted to groups affecting the only the new category. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117. The following table describes the content category rights used by Content Manager: Right read content category
Description Allows groups to view categories.
update content category
Allows groups to modify category descriptions, content providers, and rights.
delete content category
Allows groups to delete categories.
create content category
Allows groups to create new categories.
read content
Allows groups to view content in a category.
Global
New Category
3 3
3 3
3 3 3 3
3 3 3
update content
Allows groups to modify content in a category. Administrators must also have the rights that the content provider associates with the edited content.
add content
Allows groups to add content to a category. NOTE: You must also have the “publish contents” right on at least one content provider in order to add content.
3
3
Allows groups to delete content from a category.
3
3
delete content
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
16
Understanding Rights Right
Description
Global
New Category
validate content
Allows groups to change the status of contents in a category to “validated”. Administrators must also have the rights that the content provider associates with the edited content.
3
3
update content version
Allows groups to modify content versions associated with contents published in a category.
3
3
Allows groups to add content versions to contents published in a category.
3
3
Allows groups to delete content versions associated with contents published in a category.
3
3
Allows groups to change the status of content versions associated with contents published in a category.
3
3
add content version delete content version validate content version
In order to view or modify content, you must have the following rights:
• “Read content” granted to the content parent category • “Read published contents” granted to the content provider NOTE: When viewing or modifying content, the following rules apply:
• If you have only the “update content” right on parent categories of the content, you can modify all elements of the content except the content status.
• If you have only the “validate content” right on all parent categories of the content, you can modify only the content status.
• If you have both rights, you can modify all elements of the content, even if the content status is “validation pending”. NOTE: When viewing or editing a content version, the following rules apply:
• If you have only the “edit content version” right, you can modify all elements of • •
the content version except the status. If you have only the “validate content version” right, you can modify only the content version status. If you have both rights, you can modify all elements of the content, even if the content status is “validation pending”, or the content version is stored as “validated”.
Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights Device rights are granted to groups to manage devices and information in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). For more information, see “Managing Device and DKB Rights” on page 297. The following table describes the device rights used by Content Manager: Right Global read Manage structure
Copyright 2006
Description Allows groups total read access to the DKB. Allows groups to manage system structure and the DKB.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
17
Understanding Rights Right
Description
Sign structure
Allows groups to sign (certify) data in the knowledge database that can be exported to a DKB archive.
Delete structure
Allows groups to delete data from the DKB.
Import archive
Allows groups to manage DKB archive import (synchronization) processes.
Export archive
Allows groups to manage DKB archive export (generation) processes.
Manage applications
Allows groups to manage applications types, applications, application versions, associated user agents, and detection rules.
Delete applications
Allows groups to delete applications types, applications, application versions, associated user agents, and detection rules.
Manage profiles
Allows groups to manage device profiles and profile capabilities, as well as data related to a device model (aliases, IMEI, and so on).
Delete profiles
Allows groups to delete device profiles and profile capabilities, as well as data related to a device model (aliases, IMEI, and so on). All
Catalog Rights Catalog rights are granted to allow groups to manage catalog items for a specific service. For more information, see “Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights” on page 367. The following table describes the administrator-level catalog rights used by Content Manager: Right
Description
create catalog item
Allows groups to create offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
update catalog item
Allows groups to modify offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
delete catalog item
Allows groups to delete offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
read catalog item
Allows groups to view offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
Content Topic Rights Content topic rights are granted to allow groups to manage content topics. For more information, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377. The following table describes the administrator-level content topic rights used by Content Manager: Right
Copyright 2006
Description
create topics
Allows groups to create topics.
update topics
Allows groups to modify topics.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
18
Understanding Rights Right delete topics read topics
Description Allows groups to delete topics. Allows groups to view topics associated with the selected content system.
System Administration Rights System administration rights are granted to allow groups to manage system elements. For more information, see “Managing System Administration Rights” on page 424. The following table describes the administrator-level system configuration rights used by Content Manager: Right
Description
create system item
Allows back-office groups to create system elements.
update system item
Allows back-office groups to modify system elements.
delete system item
Allows back-office groups to delete system elements.
read system item
Allows back-office groups to view system elements.
Tracking Rights Tracking rights (session and bulk process rights) are granted to allow groups to manage delivery operations for a selected service. For more information, see “Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights” on page 439. The following table describes the administrator-level tracking rights available for all sessions and bulk-processes used by Content Manager: Right
Description
create sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to start new sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service. update sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to modify sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service. delete sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to delete sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service. read sessions and bulk processes
Allows back-office groups to view sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service.
Offer Rights There are two offer rights:
• The “buy offer” right is the only offer right available to front-office groups. • The “Read catalog item” right is the only right available to back-office groups. There are two ways to grant the “buy offer” right:
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
19
Understanding Rights
• global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all offers. For more information, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
• new offers — While creating a new offer, rights are assigned to groups affecting only the new offer. For more information, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
20
3
Getting Started
This chapter contains the following information: Configuring a Bulk Campaign .................................................................................... Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure .................................................. Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository ................................................................ Step 3: Import Accounts .......................................................................................... Step 4: Creating Content.......................................................................................... Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options.......................................................................... Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface ......................................................................... Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process ......................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
22 22 23 25 28 33 36 37
21
Getting Started
This chapter is intended as a quick start guide to configuring a bulk campaign.
Configuring a Bulk Campaign This section provides instruction on how to configure Content Manager to quickly start a Short Message Service (SMS) bulk campaign.
Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure 1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Services.
3 The Services screen displays. 2. Click New service.
3 The New service screen displays.
Figure 3.1: New service Screen
3. Provide the following information:
• Name: type a name for the new service (for example “CM2”) • Check Subscribe anonymous account. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
22
Getting Started
4. Click Submit.
3 The new service is created, and the Edit service screen displays. 5. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Groups.
3 The Groups screen displays. 6. Click New group.
3 The New group screen displays.
Figure 3.2: New group Screen
7. Provide the following information:
• Name: type a name for the new group • Description: type a brief description of the new group • User association: choose Automatic 8. Click Submit.
3 The new group is created, and the Edit group screen displays. For information about editing a group, see “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Providers.
3 The Providers screen displays. 2. Click New provider.
3 The New provider screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
23
Getting Started
Figure 3.3: New provider Screen
3. In the Name field, type a name for the new provider. 4. From the Templates list box, select all available templates. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. 5. Click Submit.
3 The new provider is created. 6. From the Content menu, select Structure > Categories.
3 The Categories screen displays. 7. Click New category.
3 The New category screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
24
Getting Started
Figure 3.4: New category Screen
8. In the Name field, type a name for the new category. 9. From the Content providers list box, select the provider you created. 10. Click Submit.
3 The new category is created. Step 3: Import Accounts 1. From the End-users menu, select Bulk Operations > List imports.
3 The List imports screen displays. 2. Click Create import.
3 The Import accounts screen (1 of 2) displays (Figure 3.5 on page 26).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
25
Getting Started
Figure 3.5: Import accounts Screen (1 of 2)
3. Select the following options:
• Select file: select the file you have previously imported to the CM server • New accounts: choose Create • Existing accounts: choose Update, and check ALL options (Account details, Billing, Device, Activate last device, and Services) 4. Click Next.
3 The Import accounts screen (2 of 2) displays (Figure 3.6 on page 27).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
26
Getting Started
Figure 3.6: Import accounts Screen (2 of 2)
5. Review the options you selected, and click Start to start the bulk operation. 6. To refresh your view of the operation status until the Progression (fourth from the bottom) has reached 100%, repeatedly click Refresh. NOTE: To check that accounts were successfully imported, search for one of the MSISDNs
you imported to ensure that it is attached to the created service.
Searching for an MSISDN 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > Search account.
3 The Search account screen displays (Figure 3.7 on page 28).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
27
Getting Started
Figure 3.7: Search account Screen
2. On the Search by address tab, type the MSISDN you imported in the Address field. 3. Click List accounts by address.
3 Search results display on the right. Step 4: Creating Content 1. From the Content menu, select Data > New content.
3 The New content screen displays.
Figure 3.8: New content Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
28
Getting Started
2. Provide the following information:
• • • •
Content provider: select the provider you created Template: select SMS Message system Content categories: select the category you created Name: type a name for the new content (for example, “Alert Message”)
3. Click Submit.
3 The new content is created, and the Details tab on the Edit content screen displays. 4. Click the Versions tab. 5. Click New content version.
3 The Add content version screen displays.
Figure 3.9: Add content version Screen
6. Provide the following information:
• • • • •
Content version template: select SHORT Name: type a name for the new version (for example, “Default”) Status: select Published Language: select none Short content: type the text that will be sent by default (if no language was selected for the campaign) NOTE: You can utilize variables in the message: “$firstname” or “$lastname” for
the first and last names of the user. You may change the text later. For more information about content variables, see “Adding Content Versions” on page 144.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
29
Getting Started
7. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab on the Edit content version screen for the new content version displays (Figure 3.10 on page 31). 8. Check the Selected brands box.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a list of available devices by brand. 9. Select the brands to associate with the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 10. To list the specific features for the selected brands, check the Selected features box.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a drop-down list of features. 11. To list available device profiles, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a list of available device profiles. Figure 3.10 on page 31 shows the Compatibilities tab expanded to display features, brands, and device profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
30
Getting Started
Figure 3.10: Edit content version Screen — Compatibilities Tab
12. Select the device profiles to use with the content version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
31
Getting Started
13. Click Submit.
3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the Edit content screen. 14. Click New content version. 15. Provide the following information:
• • • • •
Content version template: select SHORT Name: type a name for the new version (for example, “English”) Status: select Published Language: select English Short content: type the text that will be sent in English
16. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab for the new content version displays. 17. Check the Selected brands box. In the list of brands that displays, select all brand devices for the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 18. To list the device profiles available for the selected brands, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab expands to show device profiles. 19. Check the boxes next to all compatible devices. 20. Click Submit.
3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the screen. 21. Click New content version. 22. Provide the following information:
• • • • •
Content version template — select SHORT Name — type a name for the new version (for example, “French”) Status — select Published Language — select French Short content — type the text that will be sent in French
23. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab for the new content version displays. 24. Check the Selected brands box. From the list of brands that displays, select the brand devices for the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brand devices.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
32
Getting Started
25. To list the specific device profiles for the selected brands, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab expands to show device profiles. 26. Select all compatible devices. 27. Click Submit.
3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the screen.
Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options 1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Topics. 2. Click Show table to view a list of created topics. 3. Ensure that a topic was created following the new content creation. It should have the same name. 4. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Offers. 5. Click New offer.
3 The Create offer screen displays.
Figure 3.11: Create offer Screen
6. Provide the following information for the new offer:
• • • •
Name — type a name (for example, “Offer 1”) End-user service — select the service you previously created Application ID — select the ID that applies to your account Status — select Draft
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
33
Getting Started
• Technical — check this box to indicate that this is a technical offer NOTE: Technical offers are used for passwords, activation codes, credit notifications, or
any kind of “dynamic content” depending on end-users profiles. These offers are not reachable from storefronts.
7. Click Submit.
3 The Edit offer screen displays. 8. Click the Bundles tab. 9. Click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle screen displays.
Figure 3.12: Create bundle Screen
10. Provide the following information for the new bundle:
• Offer — select an offer for the bundle • Name — type a name for the bundle (for example, “Bundle 1”) • Session sequence — select Simple session 11. Click Submit.
3 The bundle is created, and the Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays. 12. To manage topics associated with the bundle, click the Topics tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
34
Getting Started
Figure 3.13: Edit bundle Screen — Topics Tab
13. Click a topic from the Topic name column corresponding to the previously created content (it should have the same name). 14. Click Add topic.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays.
Figure 3.14: Topic and message patterns Screen
15. Select the previously created Message pattern. 16. Click Add.
3 The pattern is added to the list of authorized patterns for this topic. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
35
Getting Started
17. To return to the Edit bundle screen, which now lists the selected topic and its associated topic patterns, click Edit bundle.
Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface NOTE: This step is optional. You need to perform the following actions only if you want to
configure an MO keyword enabling users to request the content you defined above.
1. On the Edit bundle screen, click the Triggers on message tab. 2. Click New trigger.
3 The Create trigger on message screen displays. NOTE: This screen enables you to create a new trigger by defining several rules. This
trigger will enable the user to download content. To be activated, all conditions defined in the trigger must be met.
3. Select filter(s) for the trigger. Upon reception of a message respecting these filters on the Application ID associated with the parent offer, the content delivery will automatically be triggered. For example, for text criteria Content:
• Select the operator “contains” (default) • Type “SMS” as the value to be checked NOTE: These two criteria together stipulate that the search for content will find all
records that contain the text string “SMS.”
• Click the corresponding
to add the filter
3 The new filter displays in the Current filters list on the right. 4. In the Type area:
• Select the operator “equal to” (default) • Select the value “SMS” NOTE: These two criteria together stipulate that the trigger will only be activated
by SMS messages.
• Click the corresponding
to add the filter
3 The new filter displays in the Current filters list on the right. 5. After you have specified all filters, click Create trigger.
3 The Triggers on message tab displays again, listing the new trigger and its Current filters. All SMS-MO received on the Application ID containing the keyword “SMS” will trigger a content delivery. NOTE: Notice that you can edit or remove the new trigger using the links at the far
right.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
36
Getting Started
6. To return to the Edit offer screen, click Edit offer. 7. To define front-office (end-user) groups’ rights for the offer, click the End-users rights tab.
Figure 3.15: Edit offer Screen — End-users rights Tab
8. Check the Buy offer box. 9. Select the group (previously created) from the Groups list. 10. Click Add right.
3 The end-user “Buy offer” right is assigned to the selected group, and displays on the right. NOTE: To delete a listed group and its associated right, click the
next to the
corresponding group.
Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process 1. From the Content menu, select Import contents > Bulk process.
3 The Bulk process screen displays. 2. Click Create process.
3 The Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 3.16 on page 38).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
37
Getting Started
Figure 3.16: Create bulk process Screen
3. Check Publish content to publish the contents created. 4. Check Publish content version to publish the content version created. 5. Select Skip to skip content bundles that already exist. 6. From the Content provider list, select a provider for the content. 7. Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 3.17: Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
8. Select a Target type:
• Select ZIP file on file server allows you to select a .zip file that exists on the server. • Upload zip allows you to upload a zip file containing the content to import. Enter the complete file path in the field.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
38
Getting Started
9. Click Next.
3 The Bulk flow control strategy tab displays. 10. Click Next.
3 The Timeslots tab displays. 11. Specify the days of the week and running time on which the process runs. Click Add timeslot when finished. EXAMPLE: Select every day of the week, select “08:00” as the Authorized start time,
select “20:00” as the Authorized end time, and click Add timeslot.
12. Click Next.
3 The Confirmation tab displays 13. Review the information and click Submit to launch the process.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
39
4
Back-Office Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Back-Office Groups.................................................................................... Viewing Back-Office Groups ...................................................................................... Searching Back-Office Groups ................................................................................... Creating a New Back-Office Group ............................................................................. Editing a Back-Office Group ...................................................................................... Deleting Back-Office Groups...................................................................................... Defining Back-Office Global Rights ............................................................................. Managing Back-Office Accounts ................................................................................. Viewing Back-Office Accounts.................................................................................... Searching Back-Office Accounts................................................................................. Creating a New Back-Office Account........................................................................... Editing a Back-Office Account.................................................................................... Deleting Back-Office Accounts ...................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
41 41 42 43 44 49 49 51 51 52 53 54 59
40
Back-Office Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the Administrators menu. The options in the Administrators menu are intended only for those users who have administrative rights on the applications: administrators and back-office accounts. In addition, the Administrators menu is accessible only if you are a member of an authorized group. Authorized groups are groups with at least one right over a back-office group. For a complete listing of rights used by Content Manager, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
Managing Back-Office Groups The Administrators menu enables management of administrator groups. They are groups of administrators to which you can attribute rights for specific resources: contents, frontoffice groups, other back-office groups, and more.
Viewing Back-Office Groups The List Groups option found under the Administrators menu lists all authorized administrator groups. NOTE: Only groups to which you have rights are listed.
To view a list of all back-office groups: 1. From the Administrators menu, select Groups > List groups.
3
The List groups > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The List groups screen displays. For information about the List groups > Filters screen, see “Searching Back-Office Groups” on page 42.
Figure 4.1: List groups Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
41
Back-Office Management
The List groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group name to edit. For more information about editing a group, see “Editing a Back-Office Group” on page 44.
• Click New Group to create a new back-office group. For more information, see “Creating a New Back-Office Group” on page 43.
• Click Delete to remove all selected groups. For more information, see “Deleting BackOffice Groups” on page 49. NOTE: You must have the “delete children groups” right for all parent groups from
which to remove child groups. The Parent groups column displays the parent groups to which a child group is assigned.
• Click Global Rights to modify permissions on all back-office groups. For more information, see “Defining Back-Office Global Rights” on page 49.
Searching Back-Office Groups The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of groups specific to that criteria. To manage back-office group filters: 1. From the List groups screen (Figure 4.1 on page 41), click Edit filters.
3
The List groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 4.2: List groups > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
42
Back-Office Management
Creating a New Back-Office Group NOTE: To create a new back-office group associated with an existing group, you must have
the “create children groups” right for the existing group or the “create groups anywhere” right.
To create a back-office group: 1. From the Administrators menu, select Groups > List groups.
3
The List groups screen displays (Figure 4.1 on page 41).
2. Click New group.
3
The New group screen displays. NOTE: The New group function is also available when searching for or editing a
group. For more information, see “Searching Back-Office Groups” on page 42 and “Editing a Back-Office Group” on page 44.
Figure 4.3: New group Screen
3. In the Name field, type a name for the group. 4. In the Description field, type a short description of the group (optional). 5. From the Parent groups list, select the parent groups with which to associate the group. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple parent groups. NOTE: Only groups for which you have the “create children groups” right display in
the Parent groups list.
6. Click Submit to create the new group.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
43
Back-Office Management
Editing a Back-Office Group NOTE: To edit a group, you must have the appropriate rights. For more about these rights,
see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To edit a group: 1. From the Name column on the List groups screen (Figure 4.1 on page 41), click a group to edit.
3
The Edit group screen displays.
Figure 4.4: Edit group Screen — Details Tab
The Edit group screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the group. The group name can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group. The name should be unique (two groups cannot have the same name).
• Description (optional) — A description of the group. The group description can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group.
• Pass on rights — Select Yes to automatically transmit rights to each child group associated to the group you are modifying. If you select no, then rights will not be automatically transmitted and will have to be changed manually for each child of the edited group. This setting can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right for a parent group. All groups that have rights for the edited group automatically inherit rights for its child groups.
• Creation date — The date on which the group was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the group was last modified (updated automatically).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
44
Back-Office Management
Using the Edit Group Screen From the Edit group screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information about creating a group, see “Creating a New Back-Office Group” on page 43.
• If you have the appropriate rights, click Delete to remove the edited group. For more information about deleting a group, see “Deleting Back-Office Groups” on page 49.
• Click Associated accounts to list accounts using a filter to display only accounts attached to this group.
• Click List groups to return to the List groups screen. For more information about viewing groups, see “Viewing Back-Office Groups” on page 41.
• Click Submit to apply any changes to the group. • Click the Parent groups tab to manage associated parent groups. For more information about parent groups, see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 56.
• Click the Rights on group tab to grant rights to the edited group to other back-office groups. For more information about granting rights, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47.
• Click the Navigation rights tab to display all navigation rights granted to this group. For more information about navigation rights, see “Using the Navigation Rights Tab” on page 48.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
45
Back-Office Management
Using the Parent Groups Tab The Parent groups tab on the Edit group screen allows you to add or remove parent groups from the edited group.
Figure 4.5: Edit group Screen — Parent groups Tab
The Parent groups tab displays the following information:
• Available groups — A list of the authorized groups that are not already a parent of the edited group.
• Parent groups — A list of the groups that are currently parents of the edited group. Adding a Parent Group To add a parent group: 1. From the Available groups list, select a group or set of groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click Add to selected groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list. Deleting a Parent Group To remove a parent group: 1. From the Parent groups list, select a group or set of groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
46
Back-Office Management
2. Click < Remove from selected groups to remove the selected group or groups from the Parent groups list and add them to the Available groups list. NOTE: If you de-select all groups from the list, you will no longer be able to see the edited
group unless you have all rights granted on all back-office groups.
Using the Rights On Group Tab The Rights on group tab allows you to define rights granted to other back-office groups associated with the edited group. For information about granting rights to all back-office groups simultaneously, see “Group Rights” on page 12. NOTE: You may only grant rights that you already have on the target group(s).
Figure 4.6: Edit group Screen — Rights on group Tab
Adding Rights to Groups 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of back-office group rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted to each group selected is displayed on the right side of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
47
Back-Office Management
Revoking Group Rights To remove rights, click the
next to each right to revoke.
Using the Navigation Rights Tab The Navigation rights tab on the Edit group screen allows you to define access to the Web administration pages. You cannot use the Navigation rights tab to define rights directly to managed objects. For example, you may give access to a back-office group to the End-users menu, but you will also need to grant rights for end-user services and groups to enable this back-office group to completely manage end-users. Granting Access to a Resource To grant access to a resource: 1. From the Edit group screen, click the Navigation rights tab.
3
The Navigation rights tab displays.
Figure 4.7: Edit group Screen — Navigation rights Tab
2. From the Resources list, select the resources (navigation nodes on the back-office interface). Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple resources. You can also select All navigation nodes to grant rights on all menus. All menus are listed in the Resources list, from the most generic level down to the most detailed level.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
48
Back-Office Management
• For example, in the Administrators menu, you can grant rights on the whole Administrators menu by selecting it, or select a more specific item to which to grant rights, such as the List Groups function. NOTE: These rights apply only to navigation resources (menus on the Web
administration interfaces). External systems using the platform APIs are not affected by these rights.
3. Click Add right.
3
The right and resource display in the two-column list on the right.
Revoking Resource Access To revoke access by a resource, click the access.
next to each resource from which to remove
Deleting Back-Office Groups NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to delete a group. For more
information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To delete a back-office group: 1. From the List groups screen, check the box next to the groups to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all groups. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited group by clicking Delete on the Edit group screen.
Defining Back-Office Global Rights The Global rights screen allows you to manage rights affecting all back-office groups and accounts. For information about granting rights to a specific group, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47. NOTE: You may manage only those rights already granted to you.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
49
Back-Office Management
Granting Global Rights To grant global rights: 1. From the List Groups screen, click Global rights.
3
The Global rights screen displays.
Figure 4.8: Global rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of group rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12. 3. From the Groups list, select the groups that will benefit from the rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights and their associated groups are displayed on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Global Rights To remove global rights: 1. Click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to revoke.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
50
Back-Office Management
Managing Back-Office Accounts The Administrators menu also enables management of administrator accounts. An account can be used by a physical user (an administrator) or a virtual user (an external system), and can be attached to one or several parent groups from which it inherits rights.
Viewing Back-Office Accounts The List accounts screen lists all authorized back-office accounts. NOTE: Only accounts members of groups for which you have rights are listed. A default
filter is active to hide all “system” accounts and show only “user” accounts.
1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts.
3
The List accounts > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The List accounts screen displays a list of all back-office accounts. For information about List accounts > Filters screen, see “Searching Back-Office Accounts” on page 52.
Figure 4.9: List accounts Screen
The List accounts screen displays the following information:
• Name — The account login name. Click a name to edit the account. For more information about editing an account, see “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
• Description — A short description of the account. • Status — The account status: Active (can login) or Inactive (cannot login). • Type — The account type: External system (an application or system accessing the system using the API) or User (physical user accessing the Web interfaces).
• First name — The first name of the administrator. • Last name — The last name of the administrator.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
51
Back-Office Management
• Parent Groups — Parent group(s) associated with each account. Accounts automatically inherit rights from all associated parent groups.
• Allowed IPs — IP limitations for the account. Using the List Accounts Screen The List accounts screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List accounts screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click an item in the Name column to edit an account. For more information about editing accounts, see “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information about creating accounts, see “Creating a New Back-Office Account” on page 53. NOTE: New account is available only if the “create children accounts” right is
granted for a back-office group, or the “create account anywhere” right is granted.
• Click Delete to remove selected account(s). You must have the right to “delete any account”, or the right to “delete children accounts” by a parent group.
Searching Back-Office Accounts The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of groups specific to that criteria. To edit account filters: 1. From the List accounts screen, click Edit filters.
3
The List accounts > Filters screen displays (Figure 4.10 on page 53).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
52
Back-Office Management
Figure 4.10: List accounts > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Back-Office Account NOTE: To create a new group associated with an existing group, you must have the
“create children groups” right for the existing group, or the “create groups anywhere” right.
To create an account: 1. From the List accounts screen (Figure 4.9 on page 51), click New account.
3
The New account screen displays (Figure 4.11 on page 54).
NOTE: The New account function is also available when searching for or editing an
account. For more information, see “Searching Back-Office Accounts” on page 52 and “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
53
Back-Office Management
Figure 4.11: New account Screen
2. In the Login field, enter a login name for the account. The login name must be unique. 3. In the Password field, enter a login password for the account. 4. In the Password confirmation field, enter the login password a second time for confirmation. 5. Select the status of the account: Active or Inactive. If Inactive is selected, the administrator will not be able to access Content Manager. 6. From the Parent groups list, select one or several parent groups for the new account. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple parent groups. NOTE: Only groups for which you have the “create children accounts” right are listed in the
Parent groups list.
7. Click Submit.
Editing a Back-Office Account To edit an account, you must have at least one of the following rights for one of its parent groups (or for all groups):
• “update children accounts” (or “update any account”) — to modify its properties • “manage children accounts” (or “manage any account”) — to change its parent groups
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
54
Back-Office Management
To edit an account: 1. From the Name column on the List accounts screen, click an account to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit account screen displays.
Figure 4.12: Edit account Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit account screen, you can also perform the following tasks:
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information, see “Creating a New Back-Office Account” on page 53.
• Click Delete to remove the edited account. This is available only if you have the appropriate rights. For more information, see “Deleting Back-Office Accounts” on page 59.
• Click List accounts to return to the List accounts screen. For more information, see “Viewing Back-Office Accounts” on page 51.
• Click the Details tab to view and modify general information about the account. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 56.
• Click the Parent groups tab to access parent group information for the edited account. Groups displayed are groups to which you have the “manage child groups” right. For more information, see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 56.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
55
Back-Office Management
• Click the IP restrictions tab to access IP verification rules for the edited account. For more information, see “Using the IP Restrictions Tab” on page 58.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit account screen displays the following account information:
• Login — The login name for the account. This name can be modified, but it must be unique (two accounts cannot have the same login).
• New password — Type a new password for the account. • Confirm new password — Type the new password for a second time for confirmation.
• Description (optional) — Type a description of the account. • Type — The type of account. Select User (a physical user accessing the web interface), or External system (an application or system accessing the system using the API).
• Status — Select Active to allow login to back-office accounts, or select Inactive to disable the login.
• Last name — Last name of the administrator who will use the account. • First name — First name of the administrator who will use the account. • E-mail address — E-mail address of the administrator who will use the account. • Phone number — Phone number of the administrator who will use the account. • Creation date — Creation date of the account. Cannot be modified. • Last modification date — Date of last modification; automatically updated. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Parent Groups Tab The Parent groups tab on the Edit account screen allows you to add or remove parent groups from the edited account. NOTE: To associate an account to a parent group, you must have the “manage children
accounts” right for one of its current parent groups AND for the target groups (or have the “manage any account” right for all groups).
To manage parent groups for the selected account, from the Edit account screen, click the Parent groups tab.
3
The Parent groups tab displays (Figure 4.13 on page 57).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
56
Back-Office Management
Figure 4.13: Edit account Screen — Parent groups Tab
Adding Parent Groups to an Account To add parent groups: 1. From the Available groups list, select a group or set of groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click Add to selected groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list. Removing Parent Groups From an Account To remove parent groups: 1. From the Parent groups list, select a group or set of groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click < Remove from selected groups to remove the selected group or groups from the Parent groups list and add them to the Available groups list. NOTE: If you remove all groups from the list, you will no longer be able to see the edited
group unless you have all rights granted on all back-office groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
57
Back-Office Management
Using the IP Restrictions Tab When an administrator or external system tries to connect to Content Manager, the system checks the coherence of its login, password, and IP address. Adding Authorized IP Addresses To add authorized IP addresses to the selected account: 1. From the Edit account screen, click the IP restrictions tab.
3
The IP restrictions tab displays.
Figure 4.14: Edit accounts Screen — IP restrictions Tab
2. Specify a range of IP addresses that are authorized to access Content Manager using the edited account.
• IP range: Enter a minimum IP and a maximum IP, then click Add to add them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
• IP subnet: Enter the IP address and NetMask to define the IP addresses authorized to access Content Manager using the edited account. Click Add to add them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
• IP address: Specify individual IP addresses that are authorized to access Content Manager using the edited account. Enter one IP address at a time. Click Add to add them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses. 3. Local VM — This option only applies to external systems that are executed in the same java virtual machine as Content Manager and, consequently, are located on the same server. Click Add to add the option.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
58
Back-Office Management
Removing Authorized IP Addresses To remove authorized IP addresses: 1. From the Authorized IP addresses list, select the addresses to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple addresses. 2. Click Remove selected IPs.
Deleting Back-Office Accounts NOTE: You must have the “delete any account” right in order to delete an account.
To delete an account: 1. From the List accounts screen (Figure 4.9 on page 51), check the box next to one or several accounts to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all accounts. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected accounts?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited account by clicking Delete on the Edit account
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
59
5
Front-Office Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Services................................................................................................... 61 Viewing Services ..................................................................................................... 61 Searching Services .................................................................................................. 62 Creating a New Service ............................................................................................ 62 Editing a Service ..................................................................................................... 64 Deleting a Service ................................................................................................... 69 Managing Global Service Rights ................................................................................. 69 Managing Front-Office Groups ................................................................................... 71 Viewing Front-Office Groups...................................................................................... 71 Searching Front-Office Groups................................................................................... 72 Creating a New Front-Office Group ............................................................................ 73 Editing a Front-Office Group...................................................................................... 74 Deleting a Front-Office Group.................................................................................... 80 Managing Front-Office Accounts ................................................................................ 81 Searching for a Front-Office Account .......................................................................... 81 Creating a New Front-Office Account .......................................................................... 83 Editing a Front-Office Account ................................................................................... 84 Deleting a Front-Office Account ................................................................................. 97 Searching Front-Office Account History Logs ............................................................... 98 Managing Mobile Devices.......................................................................................... 99 Searching for a Device by IMEI ................................................................................. 99 Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI ................................................................ 100 Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs.................................................................... 100 Uploading Accounts ............................................................................................... 101 Viewing Account Imports ........................................................................................ 101 Searching Bulk Account Imports .............................................................................. 102 Creating a Bulk Account Import File ......................................................................... 102
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
60
Front-Office Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the End-users menu. The options in the End-users menu are available for managing users without administration rights on front-office applications. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
Managing Services Services correspond to different branded sites that distribute content stored in Content Manager. A service may be associated with several groups.
Viewing Services NOTE: You must have the right to “read service” in order to view services.
To view a list of authorized services: 1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > List services.
3
The Services > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of services on the Services screen. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Services” on page 62.
3
The Services screen displays a list of all available services.
Figure 5.1: Services Screen
Using the Services Screen The Services screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Services screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a service name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Service” on page 64.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
61
Front-Office Management
• Click New service to create a new service. For more information, see “Creating a New Service” on page 62.
• Click Delete to remove all selected services. For more information, see “Deleting a Service” on page 69.
• Click Rights on all services to modify permissions on all services. For more information, see “Managing Global Service Rights” on page 69.
Searching Services The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of services specific to that criteria. To manage service filters: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click Edit filters.
3
The Services > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.2: Services > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Service NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to create a new service. For
more information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To create a new service: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click New service. NOTE: The New service function is also available when searching for or editing a service.
For more information, see “Searching Services” on page 62 and “Editing a Service” on page 64.
3
The New service screen displays (Figure 5.3 on page 63).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
62
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.3: New service Screen
2. From the Service type list, select a type for the new service. 3. In the Name field, type a name for the service. The service name must be unique (two services cannot have the same name). 4. Check the Subscribe anonymous account box to automatically subscribe the “anonymous_login” account to the service. 5. In the Description field, enter a short description of the service (optional). 6. From the Languages list, select the languages to use with the service. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages. 7. From the Countries & Operators list, select the available country and operator codes to use with the service. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple codes. 8. Click Submit.
3
The Edit service screen displays allowing you to modify details about the service and rights associated to it. For more information, see “Editing a Service” on page 64.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
63
Front-Office Management
Editing a Service NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to edit services. For more
information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To modify a service: 1. From the Name column on the Services screen, click a service to edit. NOTE: The Edit service screen also displays immediately after you create a new service.
3
The Details tab on the Edit service screen displays.
Figure 5.4: Edit service Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit services screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New service to create a new service. For more information, see “Creating a New Service” on page 62.
• Click Delete to delete the selected service. For more information, see “Deleting a Service” on page 69.
• Click Associated groups to access the front-office groups list using a filter to show only those groups that are associated with this service.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general information about the service. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 65.
• Click the Languages tab to view or modify the languages used with the service. For more information, see “Using the Languages Tab” on page 65.
• Click the Rights tab to view or modify rights affecting the edited service. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 66.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
64
Front-Office Management
• Click the Countries & Operators tab to view or modify the country and operator codes used with the service. For more information, see “Using the Countries & Operators Tab” on page 67.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit services screen (Figure 5.4 on page 64) displays the following information about the service:
• Service type —the type of service defined during service setup; cannot be modified • Name — the name of the service; can be modified • Description — an optional description of the service; can be modified • Creation date — the date on which the service was created; cannot be modified • Last modification date — the date on which the service was last modified; updated automatically Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Languages Tab The Languages tab on the Edit service screen allows you to add or remove language support from the service.
Figure 5.5: Edit service Screen — Languages Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
65
Front-Office Management
Adding Language Support To add language support to the service: 1. From the Available languages list, select the languages for which to add support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages. 2. Click Add to selected languages >.
3
The selected languages display in the Languages list.
Removing Language Support To remove language support from the service: 1. From the Languages list, select the languages from which to remove support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages. 2. Click < Remove from selected languages.
3
The selected languages display in the Available languages list.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit service screen allows you to add or remove rights to groups associated with the service. Adding Service Rights To grant service rights to associated groups: 1. From the Edit service screen, click the Rights tab.
3
The Rights tab displays (Figure 5.6 on page 67).
NOTE: Only back-office groups to which you have rights are listed. You can grant or revoke
only those rights you already have on services.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
66
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.6: Edit service Screen — Rights Tab
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of each right available, see “Service Rights” on page 14. 3. From the Groups list, select the back office groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted and their associated groups display on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Service Rights To remove service rights from groups, click the
next to each right to revoke.
Using the Countries & Operators Tab The Countries & Operators tab on the Edit service screen allows you to select specific country and operators to use with the service. NOTE: Countries and operators must be added to the database before they can be used
with a service. For more information, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
67
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.7: Edit service Screen > Countries & Operators Tab
Adding Country and Operator Support To add country and operator support to the service: 1. From the Available countries & operators list, select the countries and operators for which to add support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items. 2. Click Add to selected countries & operators >.
3
The selected countries and operators display in the Associated countries & operators list.
Removing Country and Operator Support To remove country and operator support from the service: 1. From the Associated countries & operators list, select the items from which to remove support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items. 2. Click < Remove from selected countries & operators.
3
The selected languages display in the Available countries & operators list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
68
Front-Office Management
Deleting a Service NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to delete services. For more
information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To delete a service: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), check the box next to the services to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all services. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected services?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited service by clicking Delete on the Edit service
screen.
Managing Global Service Rights The Rights on services screen (Figure 5.8 on page 70) allows you to manage rights on groups affecting all services. To manage rights on groups for a selected service, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 66. NOTE: Only back-office children groups to which you have rights are listed. You can grant
or revoke only those rights already granted on services.
To view or modify rights granted to all services: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click Rights on services.
3
The Rights on services screen displays (Figure 5.8 on page 70).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
69
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.8: Rights on services Screen
Granting Service Rights To add service rights: 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of each service right available, see “Service Rights” on page 14. NOTE: You may only grant rights that you already have on services, and you must
have the “Read service” right granted in order to list accounts on which you have rights.
NOTE: The “create children accounts” right can be granted from the Rights on
services screen only. In order to enable an administrator group to create new accounts for only a certain service, you must grant the right “subscribe service” to that specific service.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted and their associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
70
Front-Office Management
Revoking Service Rights To delete a service right, click the
next to each right you to revoke.
Managing Front-Office Groups Front-office groups are sets of consumer accounts within a specific service. The Groups option found under the End-users menu lists all authorized front-office groups.
Viewing Front-Office Groups To view a list of front-office groups: 1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Groups.
3
The Groups > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to display the list of front-office groups. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Front-Office Groups” on page 72. NOTE: Only groups associated with services to which you have rights are listed.
Figure 5.9: Groups Screen
The Groups screen displays the following information:
• Name — group name • Description — group description (if available) • User association — indicates whether end-users are associated to the group automatically or manually
• Service — name of the parent service for each group NOTE: Each group is associated to one service to which rights are granted.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
71
Front-Office Management
Using the Groups Screen The Groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
• Click New Group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to remove all selected groups. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
Searching Front-Office Groups The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of front-office groups specific to that criteria. To edit filters, from the List groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), click Edit filters.
3
The Groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.10: Groups > Filters Screen
3. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
72
Front-Office Management
Creating a New Front-Office Group NOTE: You must have the “create children groups” right granted to the parent service in
order to create a group.
To create a new group: 1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), click New group.
3
The New group screen displays.
NOTE: The New group function is also available when searching for or editing a group.
For more information, see “Searching Front-Office Groups” on page 72 and “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
Figure 5.11: New group Screen
2. From the Service list, select a parent service for the new group. NOTE: Only those services to which you have rights are available.
3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the group. No two groups can have the same name. 4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the group (optional). 5. Select the type of user association for the group. Choose Automatic to associate endusers to the group automatically, or Manual to associate end-users manually. NOTE: You must associate at least one active rule in order to use automatic association.
For information about group rules, see “Adding and Editing Rules” on page 79.
6. Click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
73
Front-Office Management
Editing a Front-Office Group NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to edit a front-office group.
For information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To access the Edit Group screen: 1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), select a group by clicking the group Name in the list.
3
Depending on the User association setting of the selected group, one of two screens displays:
• If the group selected is set with a Manual user association, the Edit group screen displays two tabs: Details and Rights.
Figure 5.12: Edit group Screen, (Manual user association) — Details Tab
• If the group selected is set with an Automatic user association, the Edit group screen displays four tabs: Details, Rights, Active rules, and Draft rules tabs (Figure 5.13 on page 75).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
74
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.13: Edit group Screen, (Automatic user association) — Details Tab
Using the Edit Group Screen From the Edit group screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information about creating a group, see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to delete the edited group. For more information about deleting a group, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify group details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 76.
• Click the Rights tab to grant rights to the selected group. For more information about granting rights, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 76. The following tasks are available only if the selected group uses Automatic user association:
• Click the Active rules tab to view rules currently used to associate users to the group. For more information, see “Using the Active Rules Tab” on page 78.
• Click the Draft rules tab to define new association rules used to automatically associate or disassociate users with the group. For more information, see “Using the Draft Rules Tab” on page 78.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
75
Front-Office Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit group screen is available to groups with either Automatic or Manual user associations. The Details tab (Figure 5.13 on page 75) displays the following information about the selected group:
• Name — The name of the group. The group name can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group. The name should be unique (two groups cannot have the same name).
• Description — A description of the group. The group description can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group (optional).
• User association — Indicates how end-users are associated with the group. Automatic associates end-users to the group automatically, while Manual associates end-users manually.
• Parent service — The name of the parent service associated with the group (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — Creation date of the group (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — Date of last modification (automatically updated). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit group screen (Figure 5.14 on page 77) allows you to manage the edited group’s rights to manage accounts associated with select parent groups. NOTE: Only those parent groups to which you have rights are listed. You may only assign
rights to parent groups that are already granted to you.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
76
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.14: Edit group Screen — Rights Tab EXAMPLE: Figure 5.14 shows that the edited group, Group 41, has been granted all rights
to children accounts of both the Super administrators and System accounts groups.
Granting Rights To grant group account rights: 1. Check the box each right to grant. For a description of each front-office group rights available, see “Group Rights” on page 12. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted to each group display in the list on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Rights To remove group account rights: Click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to revoke.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
77
Front-Office Management
Using the Active Rules Tab NOTE: The Active rules tab is available only when editing a group using automatic user
association. The information displayed is view-only.
To add or edit rules, click the Draft rules tab. For more information, see “Using the Draft Rules Tab” on page 78. NOTE: The User association status at the top of the screen displays whether a current
association process is running.
Using the Draft Rules Tab The Draft rules tab allows you to define new association rules to be used to automatically associate users to the selected group. NOTE: The Draft rules tab is available only when editing a group using Automatic user
association.
If rules are currently active for the group, the Draft rules tab displays information regarding each rule. Click Edit to modify the corresponding rule, or click Remove to delete the corresponding rule. In addition to viewing, editing, and removing currently active rules from the Draft rules tab, you can also perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to delete the selected group. You must have the proper rights to perform this task. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
• Click Add new rule to define a rule for the association process. For more information, see “Adding and Editing Rules” on page 79.
• Click Set as “All Users group” to remove all rules and automatically associate ALL users to the group. You must then click Activate draft rules to perform this operation.
• Click Activate draft rules to activate all rules. This function is available only after a rule or set of rules has been defined for the group. A background process is launched to check all existing accounts to see if they can be associated with the group or not. It make take some time for large user bases. You can follow the progress of the process through the Dynamic group process counter.
• Click Reset draft rules to delete all draft rules. This function is available only if draft rules are active. Only rules already active are displayed.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
78
Front-Office Management
Adding and Editing Rules Rules apply to all information stored in the user account: account details, associated devices, and addresses. To add or modify rules: 1. From the Draft rules tab, click Add new rule.
3
The Edit rule > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.15: Edit rule > Filters Screen
2. Enter the filter criteria as necessary, then click the corresponding to add the rule. For more information about applying filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. NOTE: Check the not box to reverse the operator. For example, “contains” becomes “does
not contain”.
The following filter criteria is available:
• • • •
Last modification date — date account was last modified Status — active/inactive Billing type — prepaid/postpaid Device address — MSISDN number
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
79
Front-Office Management
• • • • • • • • •
3
Address type — mobile, email, fax, or phone Address index — a range of addresses associated with the account IMSI — SIM card ID Device type — mobile, email, or phone Unresolved device model — true/false Device brand — brand of the device Device model — model of the device Device software version — software version used by the device Accounts in group — the group associated with the accounts to include in the rule
Defined rules are then displayed in the Current filters portion of the screen. Filter criteria includes the following:
• Account id — original name of the account • Account alias — replacement name of the account • Creation date — date account was created 3. Click Submit when finished to validate the defined rules, or click Cancel to return to the Draft rules tab. 4. Before your rules can be applied, you must activate them. Click Activate draft rules to start the activation process.
3
A confirmation message “Are you are sure you want to activate all draft rules?” displays.
5. Click Ok to continue, or Cancel to void the activation.
Deleting a Front-Office Group NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted to parent services in order to delete
an associated group. For more information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
NOTE: Deleting a group will not delete its associated accounts.
To delete a front-office group: 1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), check the box next to each group to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all groups. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited group by clicking Delete on the Edit group screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
80
Front-Office Management
Managing Front-Office Accounts The End-users menu enables management of end-user accounts. An account can be used by a physical user (an administrator) or a virtual user (an external system), and can be attached to one or several services.
Searching for a Front-Office Account You can search for an end-user account based on its address (MSISDN, email, or fixed-line phone) or alias. To search for an account: 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > Search account.
3
The Search by address tab on the Search account screen displays. NOTE: Only accounts associated with services on which you have the “view children
groups” and “view children accounts” rights are available on the Search account screen.
Figure 5.16: Search account Screen — Search by address Tab
The Search account screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit anonymous account to directly edit the “anonymous” account. • Click the Search by address tab to search by address. For more information, see “Performing a Search by Address” on page 82.
• Click the Search by alias tab to search by account alias. For more information, see “Performing a Search by Alias” on page 82.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
81
Front-Office Management
Performing a Search by Address To perform a search by address: 1. Click the Search by address tab on the Search account screen.
3
The Search by address tab displays (Figure 5.16 on page 81).
2. In the Address field on the Search account screen, enter a mobile phone number or email address associated with the desired accounts. 3. Click List accounts by address to perform the search.
3
If at least one account is found with a matching address, corresponding account details are listed on the right side of the screen.
4. To edit a listed account, click Edit account next to the account to edit.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85). For information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Performing a Search by Alias To search for accounts based on an alias name: 1. From the Search account screen, click the Search by alias tab.
3
The Search by alias tab displays.
Figure 5.17: Search account Screen — Search by alias Tab
2. In the Alias field, enter an alias name by which to search accounts. 3. Click List accounts by alias to perform the search.
3
If at least one account is found with a matching alias, corresponding account details are listed on the right side of the screen.
4. To edit a listed account, click Edit account next to the account to edit.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85). For information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
82
Front-Office Management
Creating a New Front-Office Account NOTE: You must have the “create children accounts” right on all services in order to create
an end-user account. In order to subscribe the account to a service, you must have the “subscribe services” right on the desired service. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
To create a new end-user account: 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > New account.
3
The New account screen displays.
Figure 5.18: New account Screen
2. From the Available services list, select one or several parent services for the account. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple services. 3. In the Alias field, enter an alias name for the account. NOTE: The alias does not have to be unique. You can group accounts into search groups by
using the same alias for multiple accounts.
4. In the Password field, enter a password for the account. The account will not be created without a password. 5. In the Password confirmation field, enter your password again to confirm. The password entered here match the password entered in the Password field. 6. In the First name field, enter the first name of the end-user of this account.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
83
Front-Office Management
7. In the Last name field, enter the last name of the end-user of this account. 8. Select whether the account status is Active or Inactive. If the account status is Inactive, the end-user on this account cannot access the front-office interface. 9. Click Submit.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.20 on page 87) allowing you to modify the account further. For information about editing an account, see “Editing a FrontOffice Account”.
Editing a Front-Office Account NOTE: The Edit account screen is available only after a new end-user account is created,
or after an existing account has been found through a search. For information about creating an account, see “Creating a New Front-Office Account” on page 83. For information about searching for an account, see “Searching for a Front-Office Account” on page 81.
To edit an end-user account: NOTE: The parent service or group on this account must have the “update children
accounts” right granted in order to modify end-user account properties. The parent service or group must also have the “manage children accounts” right granted in order to change the account’s parent groups. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11
1. From the Edit account screen, select a group by clicking the account Name in the list.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
84
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.19: Edit account Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify as necessary the account attributes on each of the following tabs:
• Details (see “Using the Details Tab” on page 86) • Services (see “Using the Services Tab” on page 87) • Parent groups (see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 87) • Devices (see “Using the Devices Tab” on page 89) • Addresses (see “Using the Addresses Tab” on page 91) • Sim cards (see “Using the SIM Cards Tab” on page 93) • Manage timeslots (see “Using the Manage Timeslots Tab” on page 94) • Credit information (see “Using the Credit Information Tab” on page 95) • History (see “Using the History Tab” on page 96)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
85
Front-Office Management
In addition to modifying account information, you can also perform the following tasks from the Edit account screen:
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information, see “Creating a New Front-Office Account” on page 83.
• Click Delete account to remove the edited account. This is available only if you have the appropriate rights granted. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Account” on page 97.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit account screen (Figure 5.19 on page 85) displays the following following account information:
• Alias — The alias name for the account (can be modified). NOTE: The alias does not have to be unique. You can group accounts into
searchable groups by using the same alias for multiple accounts.
• New password — Enter a new password for the account. • Confirm password — Enter the password again to confirm. The password entered here match the password entered in the Password field.
• Status — Select whether the account is Active or Inactive. If the account status is Inactive, the end-user on this account cannot access the front-office interface.
• Billing type — Select whether the account is Prepaid or Postpaid. • Devices — If any devices are associated with this account, a list is displayed here. Click the Devices tab to manage devices associated with this account. For more information, see “Using the Devices Tab” on page 89.
• Addresses — If any mobile phone numbers (MSISDNs) or email addresses are associated with this account a list is displayed here. Click Addresses to manage addresses associated with this account. For more information, see “Using the Addresses Tab” on page 91.
• First name (optional) — Type the first name of the end-user of this account. • Last name (optional) — Type the last name of the end-user of this account. • Address (optional) — Type the end-user’s residential street address. • City (optional) — Type the end-user’s city of residence. • Country (optional) — Type the end-user’s country of residence. • Language (optional) — Using one of the following 2-character combinations, type the primary language for the end-user account:
• “en” = English • “ar” = Arabic
“fr” = French “es” = Spanish
Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
86
Front-Office Management
Using the Services Tab The Services tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the services to which the edited account is subscribed.
Figure 5.20: Edit account Screen — Services Tab
Subscribing to a Service To subscribe to a service: NOTE: You must have the “subscribe services” right on the target service in order to
associate an account with a service.
1. From the Service list, select the service to which to subscribe to the account. 2. Click Subscribe to service.
3
The new service subscription is listed on the right side of the Services tab.
Removing a Service Subscription To remove a service subscription: 1. Click Unsubscribe next to the service subscription to remove from the account.
Using the Parent Groups Tab The Parent groups tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage parent groups associated to the account. NOTE: To associate an account to a parent group, you must have the “manage children
accounts” right granted to a parent service or group associated with the account.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
87
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.21: Edit account Screen — Parent groups Tab
From the Service drop-down list, select the service from which to view Available groups and Parent groups. NOTE: Only those services to which the end-user is subscribed and on which you have
rights are listed.
Adding Parent Groups To add a parent group: 1. From the Available groups list, select the groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click Add groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list. Removing Parent Groups To remove a parent group: 1. From the Parent groups list, select the groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click < Remove groups to remove the selection from the Parent groups list.
3
The groups redisplay in the Available groups list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
88
Front-Office Management
Using the Devices Tab The Devices tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the devices associated with the selected account.
Figure 5.22: Edit account Screen — Devices Tab
Adding a Device To add a new device: 1. From the Device type list, select the type of device (Mobile, email, or phone) for this account. 2. In the Name field, enter a personal name for the device (optional). 3. Select the method by which the device is created: IMEI or Terminal.
3
If you select IMEI, the Devices tab refreshes. Enter the IMEI number in the new IMEI field. Content Manager will attempt to identify the device model based on the IMEI. If Content Manager cannot identify the device model, the device will be added as “unknown”.
3
If you select Terminal, the Device tab refreshes. Select the brand of device from the Brand list, then select a device model from the Terminal list.
4. Click Create new device.
3
The newly created device details are listed on the right side of the tab.
Deleting a Device To remove a device from the account, click Remove next to each active device to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
89
Front-Office Management
Editing Device Details To edit a device’s details: 1. From the Device column in the list of added devices, click a device to view or modify device details.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device details screen displays.
Figure 5.23: Edit device details Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify the necessary device details. Details include the following:
• Type — the device type (mobile phone, email, or fixed-line phone); cannot be modified
• Brand — the device brand • Terminal — the device model • IMEI — the International Mobile Equipment Identity (if available) NOTE: If you modify the IMEI, the device brand and model may be updated.
• Name — the personal name assigned to the device 3. Click Submit to save any changes. Viewing or Removing Referencing Devices To view or remove an existing device already associated to the account: 1. From the Edit device details screen, click the referencing device tab.
3
The referencing device tab displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
90
Front-Office Management
The referencing device tab displays the following information:
• Type — the type of device: Mobile, Email, or Phone • Name — the personal name of the device • Device — the device brand and model Click Remove next to the device to remove from the account.
Using the Addresses Tab The Addresses tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the addresses and associated devices defined for the selected account. An address can be a mobile phone number (MSISDN), an email address, or a fixed-line phone number.
Figure 5.24: Edit account Screen — Addresses Tab
1. From the Address type list, select a type of address (Mobile, Email, or Phone).
3
Depending on the address type selected, the Addresses tab refreshes and displays one of the following fields just below the Name field:
• MSISDN — type the MSISDN address for the Mobile address type • Email — type the email address for the Email address type • Land phone — type the fixed-line phone number for the Phone address type 2. In the Name field, enter a name for the address (optional). 3. From the Device list, select an currently associated device. 4. From the Mcc list, select a Mobile Country Code (if available). 5. From the Mnc list, select a Mobile Network Code (if available). Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
91
Front-Office Management
6. Click Create new address to add the address to the account.
3
The newly created address displays in detail on the right side of the Addresses tab.
• To delete an address from the account, click Remove next to the address to delete from the list.
• To modify a device in the list, click an item under the Device column to modify.
3The Edit device details screen displays (Figure 5.23 on page 90). • To modify an address in the list, click an item under the Address column to modify.
3The Edit address details screen displays.
Figure 5.25: Edit address details Screen
Editing Address Details To edit address details: 1. Make changes as necessary on the Edit address details screen. The following information is provided:
• Type —the type of device: Mobile, Email, or Phone (cannot be modified) • MSISDN, Email, or Phone — the address for a Mobile type, the email address for an Email type, or fixed-line phone number for a Phone type (cannot be modified)
• Name (optional) — the name for the address • Device — the type of device 2. From the Mcc list, select a Mobile Country Code (if available).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
92
Front-Office Management
3. From the Mnc list, select a Mobile Network Code (if available). 4. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the SIM Cards Tab The SIM Cards tab on the Edit account screen allows you to modify the SIM cards associated to the account. CM uses the IMSI number to identify SIM cards used by mobile subscribers. An IMSI can be attached to only one end-user. However, several IMSI can be active at the same time if the end-user has several SIM cards active at the same time.
Figure 5.26: Edit account Screen — SIM cards Tab
Adding SIM Cards to an Account To add a SIM card: 1. In the IMSI field, enter the IMSI number located on the back of the SIM card to add to the account. 2. From the Associated address list, select the address of the device. 3. Click Create.
3
The newly added SIM card information displays on the right side of the SIM cards tab.
Deleting SIM Cards From an Account To delete a SIM card, click Remove next to the active SIM card to remove from the account. NOTE: SIM cards associated with an address cannot be removed.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
93
Front-Office Management
Editing a SIM Card To edit a SIM card: 1. From the list of associated SIM cards, click Edit next to the SIM card to edit.
• To edit an address: from the list of associated SIM cards, click the address to edit.
3The Edit address details screen displays. For more information about editing an address, see the “Edit address details Screen” on page 92.
• To edit a device: from the list of associated SIM cards, click the device to edit.
3The Edit device details screen displays. For more information about editing a device, see the “Editing Device Details” on page 90.
Using the Manage Timeslots Tab The Manage timeslots tab on the Edit account screen allows you to define the time frame in which message reception for the account is authorized. NOTE: If no timeslots are defined, reception on the device is always active. If one or
several timeslots are defined, then reception is active only during those timeslots.
Figure 5.27: Edit account Screen — Manage timeslots Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
94
Front-Office Management
Adding a Timeslot To add a timeslot: 1. Check the box next to each day of the week the account is authorized for reception. 2. Select the time of day at which to start reception authorization. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 3. Select the time of day at which to end reception authorization. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 4. From the On drop-down list, select the device on which the timeslot will apply. 5. Click Add time slot.
3
All applied timeslots display on the right side of the Manage timeslots tab, and are noted on the graph at the bottom of the tab. Green cells on the graph represent active reception during those hours, while blue cells represent inactive reception.
Removing a Timeslot To remove a timeslot, click Remove next to the timeslot to remove.
Using the Credit Information Tab Users that use their accounts to make purchases sometimes receive discount “points” from the storefronts from which they buy. Points are awarded for loyalty purchases, for example: recurring purchases or purchases over a designated cost. Points can then be deducted from an account to offset purchase prices. The Credit information tab on the Edit account screen keeps track of the number of points available to the account. Points displayed may be updated automatically by Content Manager, or updated manually by an administrator. To manage credit information: 1. Click the Credit information tab on the Edit account screen.
3
The Credit information tab displays (Figure 5.28 on page 96).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
95
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.28: Edit account Screen — Credit information Tab
2. In the Credit field, enter a credit value on the account. 3. Click Submit.
Using the History Tab The History tab on the Edit account screen allows you to view a list of any and all operations performed by a Content Manager end-user. To view a list of user operations: 1. From the Edit account screen, click the History tab.
3
The History tab displays.
Figure 5.29: Edit account Screen — History Tab
2. From the Search past days list, select the past number of days to search.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
96
Front-Office Management
3. Select one of the following types of operations to display:
• Content — displays only configuration downloads completed by this user • Device modifications — displays only device creations, activations, and deletions performed by this user
• All operations — displays all operations related to this user 4. Click Search.
3
A list of operations performed by this user displays in the table at the bottom of the History tab. The following table describes the information provided: NOTE: The information displayed on the History tab is view-only. Information Mobile Operation
Address Date created Date finished Status
Offer Content Description
Description The model of device used for the operation. The type of operation. Operation types include the following: • configuration • creation (device) • activation (device; associated with an address) • deactivation (device; disassociated with an address) The mobile phone number (MSISDN) associated with the operation. The date on which the operation began. The date on which the operation ended. The operation status. Status types include the following: • Pending — operation has not yet started (it is not yet “time to live”) • Processing — operation is currently processing • Processing wait — operation is currently processing but waiting for another operation • Sleep — operation has been paused and will restart at the “time next continue” date • Done — main operation is finished • Processing child session — main operation is finished, and a related operation is currently processing • Error — an error has occurred The parent offer of the downloaded content. The downloaded content. The type of downloaded content or source of the operation.
Deleting a Front-Office Account NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to delete an account. For
information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To delete an account: 1. Click Delete from anywhere within the Edit account screen.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to this current account?” displays.
2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
97
Front-Office Management
Searching Front-Office Account History Logs To view a list of end-user history logs: 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > History.
3
The History screen displays.
Figure 5.30: History Screen
2. In the Address field, enter the address (MSISDN, email address, or fixed-line phone number) for the logs to view. 3. From the Search past days list, select the past number of days to search. 4. Click Search.
3
The following table describes the information provided about each history log found: Information Session Date created Date finished
The date on which the operation began. The date on which the operation ended.
Status
The operation status. Status types include the following: • Pending — operation has not yet started (it is not yet “time to live”) • Processing — operation is currently processing • Processing wait — operation is currently processing but waiting for another operation • Sleep — operation has been paused and will restart at the “time next continue” date • Done — main operation is finished • Processing child session — main operation is finished, and a related operation is currently processing • Error — an error has occurred
Mobile
The device model used for the operation.
Offer Content Description
Copyright 2006
Description The ID number of the associated configuration session.
The parent offer of the downloaded content. The downloaded content. The type of downloaded content or source of the operation.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
98
Front-Office Management
Managing Mobile Devices The Device inventory portion of the End-users menu allows you to search for a device by an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) or by an unresolved IMEI. You can then view account information based on the device.
Searching for a Device by IMEI To search for a device based on its IMEI: 1. From the End-users menu, select Device inventory > Search a device.
3
The Search a device screen displays.
Figure 5.31: Search a device Screen
2. In the IMEI field, enter the IMEI associated with the accounts to locate. 3. Click List accounts by IMEI.
3
If at least one account is found related to this IMEI, the following account details display on the right side of the screen:
• • • • • •
IMEI — the IMEI used in the search Alias — the alias name belonging to the account Status — indicates whether the account status is Active or Inactive First name — the first name of the end-user Last name — the last name of the end-user Addresses — addresses associated with the account (mobile phone (MSISDN), email, or fixed-line phone)
4. To edit an end-user account, click the Edit account next to the account to modify.
3
The Edit account screen displays, allowing you to make changes to the account. For more information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
99
Front-Office Management
Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI An unresolved IMEI is an IMEI detected by or created by end-users that could not be associated to any device. NOTE: Only IMEI-associated accounts on which you have rights are listed. To resolve an
IMEI manually, see “Creating an IMEI Range” on page 185.
To locate devices with an unresolved IMEI: 1. From the End-users menu, select Device inventory > Unresolved IMEIs.
3
The Unresolved IMEIs > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all unresolved IMEIs. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs” on page 100.
Using the Unresolved IMEIs Screen The Unresolved IMEIs screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Unresolved IMEIs screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the IMEI column, click a device to edit. For more information, see “Edit address details Screen” on page 92.
• Click Download file to download or open the unresolvedIMEIs.csv file. Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of unresolved IMEIs specific to that criteria. To manage service filters: 1. From the Unresolved IMEIs screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Unresolved IMEIs > Filters screen displays (Figure 5.32 on page 101).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
100
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.32: Unresolved IMEIs > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Uploading Accounts A bulk account import operation is a process in which multiple account content is uploaded at the same time. The Bulk operations portion of the End-users menu allows you to manage all account upload operations.
Viewing Account Imports To view a complete list of account imports: 1. From the End-users menu, select Bulk operations > List imports.
3
The List imports > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all account imports. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Bulk Account Imports” on page 102.
3
The List imports screen displays.
Figure 5.33: List imports Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
101
Front-Office Management
Using the List Imports Screen The List imports screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List imports screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Current import to automatically create a report for the current import file. The report displays as shown in Figure 5.36 on page 104.
Searching Bulk Account Imports The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of import files specific to that criteria. To manage import filters: 1. From the List imports screen (Figure 5.33 on page 101), click Edit filters.
3
The List imports > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.34: List imports > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Bulk Account Import File NOTE: Files to be used for the import operation must be imported to the directory on the
platform defined during implementation.
1. From the Filters screen, click Create import.
3
The Import accounts screen (1 of 2) displays (Figure 5.35 on page 103).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
102
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.35: Import accounts Screen
2. Select the file to import. 3. Select Create to create a new account for the imported file, or select Skip if you choose not to create a new account. 4. Select Update to update existing accounts using one or more of the following options: NOTE: If you choose not to update existing accounts, select Skip.
• Account details — the alias and passwords will be replaced • Billing — the billing type will be modified • Device — the device information will be modified • Activate last device — the device imported in the bulk file will be activated • Services — the service information will be modified 5. Click Next.
3
The Import accounts screen (2 of 2) displays (Figure 5.36 on page 104).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
103
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.36: Import accounts (Step 2/2) Screen
6. Review the options you selected, and click Start to start the bulk operation. 7. To refresh your view of the operation status until the Progression (fourth from the bottom) has reached 100%, repeatedly click Refresh. NOTE: To ensure that accounts were successfully imported, search for one of the MSISDNs
you imported to ensure that it is attached to the created service. For more information about searching by MSISDN, see “Performing a Search by Address” on page 82.
8. To stop the operation, click Stop.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
104
Front-Office Management
Import File Formats Imported files should be in .csv file format. The file should be formatted to be one line per end-user account separated by a semicolon (;), and should include the information described in the following table: Elements Login
Type String
Description AccountFO login (the key of the object) Example: 00000103446BB74F-00002
Required? No
Alias
String
AccountFO alias
No
Password
String
AccountFO password
Yes
Language
String
Language code Examples: en = English; fr = French
No
Integer
0 = postpaid 1 = prepaid
Yes
String
MSISDN in international format (without +)
Yes
Integer
A device flag should always be followed by a Device data field. A line can contain multiple pairs [Device flag; Device data]
No
Billing type Address Device flag
0 = create a device of an unknown type 1 = create a device from IMEI 2 = create a device from ModelID Device data
String
Device flag 0 = empty Device flag 1 = IMEI Device flag 2 = ModelID
No
For example: DO;; D1;35014412345678 D2;150001 Service flag
Integer
A service flag should always be followed by a Service data field. A line can contain multiple pairs [Service flag;Service data]
No
0 = Subscribe to service 1 = Unsubscribe from service Service name
Copyright 2006
String
The service name is required in order to subscribe a user.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
No
105
6
Content Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Content Providers.................................................................................... Viewing Content Providers ...................................................................................... Searching Content Providers ................................................................................... Creating a New Content Provider ............................................................................. Editing a Content Provider ...................................................................................... Deleting a Content Provider .................................................................................... Defining Global Content Provider Rights.................................................................... Managing Content Categories.................................................................................. Viewing Categories ................................................................................................ Searching Categories ............................................................................................. Creating a New Category........................................................................................ Editing a Category ................................................................................................. Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... Managing Global Category Rights ............................................................................ Using Content Templates ........................................................................................ Managing Content ................................................................................................. Viewing Content .................................................................................................... Searching Content ................................................................................................. Creating New Content ............................................................................................ Editing Content ..................................................................................................... Cloning Content .................................................................................................... Deleting Content ................................................................................................... Importing Bulk Contents ........................................................................................ Searching Import Processes .................................................................................... Starting a Bulk Import Process ................................................................................ Creating a Process................................................................................................. Accessing a Bulk Process ........................................................................................ Deleting a Bulk Process .......................................................................................... Using Zip Files ...................................................................................................... Algorithms of Zip File Processing ............................................................................. Zip File Structure and XML Files...............................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
107 107 108 109 110 113 113 114 115 116 116 117 121 121 123 137 137 138 139 140 157 157 158 159 160 160 164 164 164 164 165
106
Content Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the Content menu. The options in the Content menu allow you to manage components of the content database. NOTE: The Content menu is available only if you are a member of an authorized group.
Managing Content Providers Content providers are entities with rights to publish contents. Each content provider is associated with one or more back-office groups. Members of these groups can publish or view contents on behalf of content providers.
Viewing Content Providers To view a list of content providers: 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Providers.
3
The Providers > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view all existing providers. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Content Providers” on page 108.
3
The Providers screen displays a list of all available content providers.
Figure 6.1: Providers Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
107
Content Management
Using the Providers Screen The Providers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Providers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a provider name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
• Click New provider to create a new content provider. For more information, see “Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109.
• Click Delete to remove all selected providers. For more information, see “Deleting a Content Provider” on page 113.
• Click Rights to manage rights for all content providers. For more information, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
Searching Content Providers The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content providers specific to that criteria. To edit content provider filters: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click Edit filters.
3
The Providers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.2: Providers > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
108
Content Management
Creating a New Content Provider To create a new content provider: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click New provider. NOTE: The New provider function is also available when searching for or editing a provider.
For more information, see “Searching Content Providers” on page 108 and “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
3
The New provider screen displays.
Figure 6.3: New provider Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the new provider. Two content providers cannot have the same name. 3. From the Templates list, select one or more templates that can be used by the content provider to create contents. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. For a list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123. 4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the provider (optional). 5. Click Submit.
3
The Edit provider screen displays, allowing you to modify details about the provider, as well as the templates and rights associated with it. For more information, see “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
109
Content Management
Editing a Content Provider NOTE: Only back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights are listed. You
can only grant rights you already have on content providers. For more information about these rights, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15.
To make changes to a content provider: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click the name of the provider to modify. NOTE: The Edit provider screen also displays immediately after you create a new
provider.
3
The Details tab on the Edit provider screen displays.
Figure 6.4: Edit provider Screen — Details Tab
The Edit provider screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New provider to create a new content provider. For more information, see “Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109.
• Click Delete to delete the edited provider. For more information, see “Deleting a Content Provider” on page 113.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify provider details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 111.
• Click the Templates tab to view or modify content templates associated with the provider. For more information, see “Using the Templates Tab” on page 111.
• Click the Rights tabs to manage rights on the selected content provider. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 112.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
110
Content Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit provider screen (Figure 6.4 on page 110) allows you to modify the following details of the selected provider:
• Name: The unique name for the provider. Two providers cannot have the same name. • Description: A short description of the provider. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Templates Tab The Templates tab on the Edit providers screen allows you to add or remove authorized templates for the selected content provider.
Figure 6.5: Edit providers Screen — Templates Tab
Adding Templates to a Provider To authorize templates for use by the selected provider: 1. Select one or more templates from the Available templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Add.
3
The selected providers display in the Associated templates list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
111
Content Management
Removing Templates From a Provider To remove templates for use by the selected provider: 1. Select one or more templates from the Associated templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Remove.
3
The selected templates redisplay in the Available templates list.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit provider screen allows you to define back-office group rights for the selected provider. For information about granting rights to groups affecting all content providers simultaneously, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights that you already have on providers.
Figure 6.6: Edit provider Screen — Rights Tab
Adding Content Provider Rights to Groups To add rights to groups for this content provider: 1. Select one or more rights from the Rights list in which to grant. For a description of each right available, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15. 2. Select one or several groups from the Groups list to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
112
Content Management
3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights tab.
Revoking Content Provider Rights From Groups To remove rights from groups for this content provider, click the right to remove.
next to each granted
Deleting a Content Provider To delete a provider: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), check the box next each provider to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all providers. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected providers?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited provider by clicking Delete on the Edit provider
screen.
Defining Global Content Provider Rights The Rights on providers screen (Figure 6.7) allows you to grant rights to groups affecting all categories. To grant rights to groups for a single category, see “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights that you already have on content providers.
Granting Provider Rights To rights to groups affecting all categories: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click Rights.
3
The Rights on providers screen displays (Figure 6.7 on page 114).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
113
Content Management
Figure 6.7: Rights on providers Screen
2. Check the box next to one or more rights in which to grant. For a description of each right available, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15. 3. From the Groups list, select one or more groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights on categories screen.
Revoking Provider Rights To remove content provider rights from groups, click the
next to each right to remove.
Managing Content Categories The Categories selection on the Content menu allows you to categorize all contents entered into Content Manager. NOTE: This menu selection is available only if you have rights associated to categories. For
more information, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
114
Content Management
Viewing Categories To view a list of categories: 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Categories.
3
The Categories > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view all existing categories. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Categories” on page 116.
3
The Categories screen displays a list of existing categories.
Figure 6.8: Categories Screen
Using the Categories Screen The Categories screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Categories screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a category name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117.
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 116.
• Click Delete to remove all selected categories. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 121.
• Click Rights to manage all category rights for groups. For more information, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
115
Content Management
Searching Categories The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of categories specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click Edit filters.
3
The Categories > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.9: Categories > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Category To create a new category and attach it to existing content providers: 1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click New category. NOTE: The New category function is also available when searching for or editing a
category. For more information, see “Searching Categories” on page 116 and “Editing a Category” on page 117.
3
The New category screen displays (Figure 6.10 on page 117).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
116
Content Management
Figure 6.10: New category Screen
2. From the Parent category list, select a category. 3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the new category. Two categories may have the same name only if they have different parent categories. 4. From the Content providers list, select the content providers able to add contents to this category. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 5. In the Description field, enter a short description of the category (optional). 6. Click Submit.
3
The Edit category screen displays, allowing you to modify details about the category, as well as the content providers and rights associated with it. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117.
Editing a Category To modify a category: 1. From the Name column on the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click a category to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit category screen displays (Figure 6.11 on page 118).
NOTE: The Edit category screen also displays immediately after a new category is
created.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
117
Content Management
Figure 6.11: Edit category Screen — Details Tab
The Edit category screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 116.
• Click Delete to delete the edited category. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 121.
• Click Associated content to view a list of contents published only in the edited category.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify category details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 119.
• Click the Content providers tab to view or modify content providers associated with the category. For more information, see “Using the Content Providers Tab” on page 119.
• Click the Rights tab to manage rights for the edited category. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 120.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
118
Content Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 6.11) allows you to modify the following details of the selected category:
• From the Parent category list, select a new parent category from the list of existing categories.
• In the Name field, change the unique name for the new category. Two categories may have the same name only if they have different parent categories.
• In the Description field, change the category description (optional). • For the Pass on rights option: Choose Yes to automatically transmit rights associated with this category to its child categories. Choose No to associate rights to child categories manually. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Content Providers Tab The Content providers tab on the Edit category screen allows you to assign or add or remove authorized content providers in the edited category.
Figure 6.12: Edit category Screen — Content providers Tab
Adding Providers to a Category To add providers to the category: 1. From the Available providers list, select one or more content providers to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Add.
3
The selected providers redisplay in the Associated providers list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
119
Content Management
Removing Providers From a Category To remove providers from the category: 1. From the Associated providers list, select one or more content providers to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Remove.
3
The selected providers redisplay in the Available providers list.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit category screen allows you to define back-office group rights for the edited category. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available.
Figure 6.13: Edit category Screen — Rights Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
120
Content Management
Adding Group Rights From the Rights tab, you can grant or revoke rights to groups for the selected category. For information about managing rights for all categories, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121. To add rights to groups for this category: 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16. 2. From the Groups list, select one or several groups affected by the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights tab.
Revoking Group Rights To remove rights from groups for this category, click the
next to the rights to remove.
Deleting a Category To delete a category: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), check the box next to one or more categories to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all categories. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected categories?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited category by clicking Delete on the Edit category
screen.
Managing Global Category Rights The Rights on categories screen (Figure 6.14) allows you to grant rights to groups affecting ALL categories. To grant rights to groups for a selected category, see “Editing a Category” on page 117. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights you already have on categories.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
121
Content Management
To manage rights to groups on all categories: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click Rights.
3
The Rights on categories screen displays.
Figure 6.14: Rights on categories Screen
Adding Global Category Rights To add global content category rights to groups: 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected category rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights on categories screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
122
Content Management
Revoking Global Category Rights To remove global category rights from groups: 1. Click the
next to each right to remove.
Using Content Templates Content templates define the type of content managed by Content Manager. Each template includes content version templates which define the different parts of content that can be added. Each version template is associated to handlers that define actions to be applied when content is entered. NOTE: Depending on your software license, you may or may not have access to all of the
templates defined in this section.
Viewing Content Templates To view a list of available templates: 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Content templates.
3
The Content templates screen displays content templates available.
Figure 6.15: Content templates Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
123
Content Management
The Content templates screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Content template screen, you can perform the following task:
• From the Name column, click a content template name to edit. For more information, see “Editing Content Templates”.
Editing Content Templates To view details about and make changes to a template: 1. From the Content templates screen, click the name of a template to view.
3
The Edit Content template screen displays.
Figure 6.16: Edit content template Screen
Editing a Content Template Version To view details about and make changes to a content version template: 1. From the Edit content template screen, click the name of a content version template.
3
The Edit content version template screen displays (Figure 6.17 on page 125).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
124
Content Management
Figure 6.17: Edit content version template Screen
The Edit content version template screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click the name of a content handler to view. The Edit content handler screen displays details about the content handler. The details displayed here are view-only.
• Click the name of a content validator to edit. The Edit content validator screen displays.
Figure 6.18: Edit content validator Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
125
Content Management NOTE: Constraints provided are different according to the content template and the
content handler. For example, for a content validator of the FILE_SIZE type, the constraints represent the maximum size of the file (in bytes) that can be imported by the content provider. This can be modified.
The following list describes each content type and their associated templates and version templates. MMS_MESSAGE Content template:
• MMS_MESSAGE: A multimedia message delivered without formatting (as is). Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • MMS_POSTCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID MMS_POSTCARD Content template:
• MMS_POSTCARD: A multimedia message downloaded by MMS. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • MMS_POSTCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS Content template:
• Text (SMS): A short text (160 characters) sent using SMS. Content version templates:
• SHORT_TEXT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION (metadata) • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
126
Content Management
SMS_ANIMATION Content template:
• SMS_ANIMATION: An animated logo downloaded by SMS. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_ANIMATION_8_8 • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_BINARY Content template:
• SMS_BINARY: a binary SMS message delivered without formatting (as is). Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_BINARY • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_LOGO_GROUP Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_GROUP: A black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be associated to a contact of the address book. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_GROUP_72_14 • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
127
Content Management
SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE: A black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be forwarded between users. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_16_16 • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_32_32 • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_72_14 • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR: A black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be used as the default screen background. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_16_16 • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_32_32 • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_72_14 • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
128
Content Management
SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER: a black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be used as the phone screensaver. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_16_16 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_32_32 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_72_14 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_72_28 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS Message System Content template:
• Text (SMS): A short text (160 characters) that can be sent using SMS. Content version templates:
• SHORT_TEXT: A short text message • TEXT_DESCRIPTION: A short description (metadata)
• CONTENT ID SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC Content template:
• SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC: a monophonic ringtone downloaded by SMS. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
129
Content Management
SMS_VCALENDAR Content template:
• SMS_VCALENDAR: A calendar item formatted on the fly according to recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. It can be stored in the device agenda. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_VCALENDAR • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_VCARD Content template:
• SMS_VCARD: A contact item formatted on the fly according to recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. It can be stored in the device address book. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_VCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
130
Content Management
WAP_ANIMATION Content template:
• WAP_ANIMATION: An animated picture downloaded by WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_ANIMATION_101_080 • WAP_ANIMATION_120_160 • WAP_ANIMATION_128_128 • WAP_ANIMATION_128_160 • WAP_ANIMATION_130_130 • WAP_ANIMATION_132_176 • WAP_ANIMATION_176_220 • WAP_ANIMATION_208_320 • WAP_ANIMATION_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_APPLICATION Content template:
• WAP_APPLICATION: A smartphone application downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_APPLICATION_SIS • WAP_APPLICATION_CAB • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
131
Content Management
WAP_BOOKMARK Content template:
• WAP_BOOKMARK: A URL formatted on the fly according to recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. It can be stored in the device WAP favorites list. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_BOOKMARK • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_FILE Content template:
• WAP_FILE: A file downloaded through WAP, associated to the WAP Push feature. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_FILE • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_JAVA Content template:
• WAP_JAVA: A java application downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_JAVA_JAR • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
132
Content Management
WAP_PICTURE Content template:
• WAP_PICTURE: a full color picture downloaded by WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_PICTURE_101_080 • WAP_PICTURE_120_160 • WAP_PICTURE_128_128 • WAP_PICTURE_128_160 • WAP_PICTURE_130_130 • WAP_PICTURE_132_176 • WAP_PICTURE_176_220 • WAP_PICTURE_208_320 • WAP_PICTURE_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_PUSH Content template:
• WAP_PUSH: A URL formatted on the fly according to the recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. Upon reception, the user is invited to connect directly to the WAP site. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_PUSH • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
133
Content Management
WAP_REALTONE Content template:
• WAP_REALTONE: A sound extract downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_REALTONE_AMR • WAP_REALTONE_AMR-WB • WAP_REALTONE_WAV • WAP_REALTONE_RMF • WAP_REALTONE_MP3 • WAP_REALTONE_AAC • WAP_REALTONE_MPEG • WAP_REALTONE_SMAF • WAP_REALTONE_SP-MIDI • WAP_REALTONE_MIDI • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC Content template:
• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC: A polyphonic ringtone downloaded by WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
134
Content Management
WAP_RINGTONE_PREFORMATTED Content template:
• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC: a polyphonic ringtone delivered without formatting (“as is”) by WAP Download. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_REALTONE_RMF • WAP_REALTONE_SMAF • WAP_REALTONE_SP-MIDI • WAP_REALTONE_MIDI • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
135
Content Management
WAP_VIDEO Content template:
• WAP_VIDEO: A video extract downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_VIDEO_ MPEG • WAP_ VIDEO_ QUICKTIME • WAP_ VIDEO_ REALMEDIA • WAP_ VIDEO_ AVI • WAP_ VIDEO_ 3GPP • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID Rich Text Content template:
• Rich Text: Multimedia elements that can be sent by SMS or MMS. Content versions templates
• PREVIEW • MMS_POSTCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
136
Content Management
Managing Content Contents are downloadable files that can be delivered to handsets. Several versions are available within each content file to match different handset compatibilities. Contents may also have several templates, depending on the type of content. For a complete list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
Viewing Content Only contents meeting one of the following criteria are listed:
• contents were published in at least one parent category on which you have rights • contents were published by a content provider on which you have rights NOTE: A default filter is activated to hide all Deprecated contents.
To view a list of content files: 1. From the Contents menu, select Data > Contents.
3
The Contents > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all contents. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Content” on page 138.
Figure 6.19: Contents Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
137
Content Management
Using the Contents Screen The Contents screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Contents screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a content name to edit. For more information, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
• Click New content to create a new content file. For more information, see “Creating New Content” on page 139.
• Click Delete content to remove all selected content files. This is available only if you have the “Delete” right on the parent category for selected content files. For more information, see “Deleting Content” on page 157.
• Click Clone content to make a copy of the selected content file. For more information, see “Cloning Content” on page 157.
Searching Content The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content specific to that criteria. To manage content filters: 1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click Edit filters.
3
The Contents > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.20: Contents > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
138
Content Management
Creating New Content NOTE: You must have the “publish contents” right on a content provider, and the “add
contents” right on at least one of the categories associated with the content provider.
To create new content: 1. From the Content menu, select Data > New content, or click New content from anywhere on the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137).
3
The New content screen displays.
Figure 6.21: New content Screen
2. From the Content provider list, select a content provider. Only those providers on which you have rights are available. For more information, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15. 3. From the Template list, select a template for the content. Only those templates authorized for the selected provider are available. 4. From the Content categories list, select one or more categories. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. Only categories associated with the content provider are available. NOTE: You must have the “add contents” right on those categories you want to select.
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the content.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
139
Content Management
6. In the Validity start field, enter the date on which to start content validity. By default, the date is equal to the current day’s date. The date format required is YYYY-MM-DD HHMM-SS. For example, 2006-1-31 23:59:59 equals January 31, 2006, 11:59:59 PM. 7. In the Validity end field, enter the date to end content validity. The date format required is YYYY-MM-DD HH-MM-SS. For example, 2006-1-31 23:59:59 equals January 31, 2006, 11:59:59 PM. 8. Select one of the following options from the Status drop-down list:
• Draft — content not ready • Validation pending — content ready, requires validation 9. Enter a short description for the content. This is optional, and is stored as metadata. 10. Click Submit.
3
The Edit content screen displays, allowing you to modify the new content. For more information, see “Editing Content”.
Editing Content NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to view or modify content. For more
information about these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16.
To edit content: 1. From the Name column on the List contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click a content file to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit content screen displays (Figure 6.22 on page 141).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
140
Content Management
Figure 6.22: Edit content Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Content Screen From the Edit content screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New content to create a new content file. For more information about creating a content file, see “Creating New Content” on page 139.
• Click Delete to remove the edited content. For more information about deleting content, see “Deleting Content” on page 157.
• Click Clone content to duplicate a content file. For more information about cloning content, see “Cloning Content” on page 157.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify content details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 142.
• Click the Versions tab to list all versions registered for the content. For more information about viewing versions, see “Using the Versions Tab” on page 143.
• Click the MetaDatas tab to list all metadata registered for the content. For more information about viewing metadata, see “Using the MetaDatas Tab” on page 150.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
141
Content Management
• Click the Compatibilities tab to list all devices compatible with and authorized to use the content. For more information about viewing compatible devices, see “Using the Compatibilities Tab” on page 153.
• Click the Versions coverages tab to view all version compatibilities associated with the content. For more information about viewing version compatibilities, see “Using the Versions Coverages Tab” on page 156.
Using the Details Tab NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify content. For more information, see
“Content Category Rights” on page 16.
The Details tab on the Edit content screen displays the following details of an existing content file:
• Template — The content template information (cannot be modified). For a complete list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Content provider — The content provider information (cannot be modified). • Content categories — Select one or more parent categories associated with the content provider. NOTE: You can only select from categories on which you have the “update content”
and “add content” rights.
• Name — The content name (can be modified). • Validity start — The beginning date for content validity (can be modified). NOTE: You cannot modify content validity if the content status is “Published”.
• Validity end (optional) — The end date for content validity (can be modified). NOTE: You cannot modify content validity if the content status is “Published”.
• Status — The content status. Status options include: • Draft — Content is currently being edited; cannot be downloaded • Validation pending — Content is ready for validation; at least one content version is attached and listed as “validated”
• Published — Content and its validation versions can be downloaded NOTE: You can select this status only if you have the “validate contents” right on all
of the content’s parent categories and if at least one content version is published for the content.
• Deprecated — Content was cancelled and cannot be modified NOTE: You can select this status only if you have the “delete contents” right on all
selected categories.
Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
142
Content Management
3
The changes are validated. You may validate contents only if you have the “validate content” right on all content parent categories and if at least one content version is published.
Using the Versions Tab The Versions tab displays all content version associated to the edited content. Content versions are variations of the same content optimized for different devices. As such, there can be only one published version of the same content per device.
Figure 6.23: Edit contents Screen — Versions Tab
The Versions tab displays the following information:
• Name — the name of the content version. Click the name to edit the selected version. For more information about editing content versions, see “Editing a Content Version” on page 147.
• Content version template — the name of the content version template. For a complete list of content templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Preview — a preview of the content (if available). • Language — the language of the content version. • Status — the status of the content version. Possible values include the following: • Draft — content version is currently being edited • Not validated — content version is ready for validation • Published — content version is validated NOTE: This is selected automatically whenever the content is to be downloaded on
one of the compatible devices listed. These devices cannot be selected for another version.
• Deprecated — content version was cancelled • Creation date — the date on which the content version was created. • Last modification — the date on which the content version was last modified. • Author — the name of the back-office account that created this content version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
143
Content Management
In addition to the functions available on the Edit content screen, the Versions tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New content version to create a new version of the content. For more information, see “Adding Content Versions” on page 144.
• Click Delete content version to remove selected content version. For more information, see “Deleting Content Versions” on page 149. Adding Content Versions NOTE: You must have the “add content version” right granted to at least one of the
content’s parent categories in order to add a new content version.
To add a new content version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit content screen (Figure 6.23 on page 143), click New content version.
3
The Add content version screen displays.
Figure 6.24: Add content version Screen
2. From the Content version template list, select a content version template to use for the content version. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the content version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
144
Content Management
4. From the Status list, select a status for the content version. Status options include the following:
• Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled 5. From the Language list, select a language for the content version. 6. For the External content option, if the binary data is stored on an external system, select Yes. Select No to upload the data and store it on the Content Manager server. The following information is required for external content:
• External content data system — the content system used to store the content. • Fetch mode — the method by which content is retrieved. If On create is selected, the content is retrieved from the remote service and stored in Content Manager. If On delivery is selected, the content is retrieved only when it needs to be delivered.
• URL — the URL to the location of the content. If you are uploading a file, select the Mime type (format of the file) that you are uploading. NOTE: Content Manager verifies that the file extension matches the selected Mime type
before uploading the content. Content Manager then associates the uploaded file to the selected Mime type and transmits it to the receiving device. For a list of available Mime types and associated file extensions, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
For short SMS, Rich Text, and SMS Message System templates, enter some short or long text. NOTE: For short text, make sure the text to be sent is not more than 160 characters long
(70 characters in Arabic language).
The following table describes variables can be used in short and long text messages and will be replaced by information retrieved from the user account: User Information
Variable
First Name
$firstName
User’s first name
Last Name
$lastName
User’s last name
Language
$language
Address
$address
Alias
$alias
City
$city
Country
$country
State
$countryState
Password
$password
Zip Code
$zipCode
Copyright 2006
Description
User’s preferred language User’s address User’s alias User’s home city User’s home country User’s home state User’s password User’s zip code
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
145
Content Management User Information
Variable
Billing Type
$billingType
Description
Device Brand
$deviceBrand
Brand of device associated with the user’s address
Device Model
$deviceModel
Model of device associated with the user’s address
Subscribed service
$subservice
User’s billing type: prepaid/postpaid
Service the user tries to subscribe to or unsubscribe from (SMS Message System template only)
7. Click Submit when finished. NOTE: When defining your content version, you can also enter a script to generate the
message content. The script is compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/velocity/user-guide.html.
Script Sample #1. This example can be included in the short content form to personalize the content using the user’s first and last name. ##If the user first and last name are available #if($firstName && $lastName) Welcome $firstName $lastName. #end Script Sample #2. This example uses a rule to personalize the content according to the preferred language of the user. ##If the user’s preferred language is French #if(language==”fr”) ##If the user first and last name is available #if($firstName && $lastName) Bienvenue $firstName $lastName. #end ##Otherwise, if the user’s preferred language is not French #else ##If the user’s first and last name is available #if($firstName && $lastName) Welcome $firstName $lastName. #end #end Script Sample #3. This example uses a rule to add device information to the content. ##If the user’s device information is available #if($deviceBrand && $deviceModel) Your mobile: $deviceBrand $deviceModel. ##Otherwise, if the user device is not known #else Your mobile is unknown #end
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
146
Content Management
Editing a Content Version To edit a content version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit content screen (Figure 6.23 on page 143), click a content version name from the Name column.
3
The Edit content version screen displays.
Figure 6.25: Edit content version Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify the following content version information as needed: NOTE: The information displayed on the Edit content version screen may vary
depending on the content version template used.
• Content version template — The template used for the content version (cannot be modified). For a complete list of content version templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Content name — The name of the content version. • Status — The status of the content version. Status options include the following: • Draft — content version is currently being edited • Not validated — content version is ready for validation • Published — content version is validated • Deprecated — content version was cancelled
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
147
Content Management
• Language — The content version language (cannot be modified if a device is associated).
• External content — Indicates whether the content binary data is stored on an external system (Yes) or already uploaded to Content Manager (No). This cannot be modified). If the content is stored externally, the following information is displayed:
• External content data system — the content system used to store the content. • Fetch mode — the method by which content is retrieved. If On create is selected, the content is retrieved from the remote service and stored in Content Manager. If On delivery is selected, the content is retrieved only when it needs to be delivered.
• URL — the URL to the location of the content. • Mime type — The Mime type (format of the file). NOTE: Content Manager verifies that the file extension matches the selected Mime
type before uploading the content. Content Manager then associates the uploaded file to the selected Mime type and transmits it to the receiving device. For a list of available Mime types and associated file extensions, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
Managing Compatible Devices for a Content Version In previous versions of Content Manager, compatibility was managed at the device level. Content Manager 2.1 allows you to associate content versions with device profiles, enabling you to associate the same device with several different versions corresponding to different profiles. To manage devices compatible with the content version: 1. From the Edit content version screen (Figure 6.25 on page 147), click the Compatibilities tab.
3
The Compatibilities tab displays.
Figure 6.26: Edit content version Screen — Compatibilities Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
148
Content Management
2. Define the devices to list by selecting from the criteria described below. A list of device profiles matching the criteria selected displays on the right side of the tab. Device profiles are ranked by brand/manufacturer.
• Selected features — Select the device feature compatible with the content version template. You can associate each device to the content version for SMS features, MMS features, or both. NOTE: Currently, the RICH template is the only template compatible with multiple
features.
• Selected brands — Select one or more brands to include in the device list. Only those devices attached to selected brands that are compatible with selected features are listed.
• Inherited device profiles — Specify whether or not to associate and select device profiles from which the content version inherits information.
• Hide unavailable device profiles — If selected, only those devices not associated to any content version are listed.
• Click Show device profiles to view and select profiles available for the edited content version. NOTE: From the list of device profiles, Checked profiles are listed as compatible and
authorized with the content version by the provider. Unchecked profiles are compatible with the content version, but are not listed as “authorized” and cannot receive the content version. Device profiles marked with a are already listed as compatible with another validated version for the same content, and cannot be selected as authorized with the current version. Click the icon to edit the content version already associated with the device profile.
• Set version as default for selected device feature — If checked, all new device profiles compatible with the content version template will be associated to this version. Deleting Content Versions NOTE: You must have the “delete content version” right in order to delete a content
version. If the version status is “published”, all associated devices can then be associated to other content versions and the status will be set as “deprecated”. If the version was not validated, it is directly deleted. The content version cannot be deleted if it is the last published version available for the parent content.
To delete a content version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit contents screen, check the box next to the each version to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions. 2. Click Delete content version.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected content versions?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
149
Content Management
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited content versions by clicking Delete on the Edit content
version screen.
Using the MetaDatas Tab The MetaDatas tab allows you to view all metadata associated with the content. Metadata represents information that can be added to the content, but will not be used for download. To view metadata related to the selected content: 1. From the Edit content screen, click the MetaDatas tab.
3
The MetaDatas tab displays.
Figure 6.27: Edit content Screen — MetaDatas Tab
The MetaDatas tab on the Edit content screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the metadata. Click a name to edit the metadata. For more information, see “Editing Metadata” on page 152.
• Preview — A preview of the metadata (if available). • Content version template — The name of the content version template. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Language — The language of the metadata. • Status — The status of the metadata. Possible values include the following: • Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled • Creation date — The date on which the metadata was created. • Last modification date— The date on which the metadata was last modified. • Author — The name of the back-office account that created this metadata. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
150
Content Management
In addition to the functions available on the Edit content screen, the MetaDatas tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New meta data to create new metadata for the content. For more information, see “Adding Metadata” on page 151.
• Click Delete meta data to remove the selected metadata. For more information, see “Deleting Metadata” on page 153. Adding Metadata To add metadata to content: 1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit content screen, click New meta data.
3
The Add Meta data screen displays.
Figure 6.28: Add meta data Screen
2. From the Content version template list, select a template for the content version. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the metadata. 4. From the Status list, select one of the following status options:
• Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled 5. From the Language list, select a language for the metadata. 6. In the Description field, enter a short description of the metadata (optional).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
151
Content Management NOTE: Other details available depend upon the type of content metadata created.
7. Click Submit.
3
The Edit meta data screen displays. For more information about editing meta data, see “Editing Metadata” on page 152.
Editing Metadata To edit existing metadata: 1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit contents screen, click the name of the metadata to modify.
3
The Edit meta data screen displays.
Figure 6.29: Edit meta data Screen
2. Make changes to the following as necessary:
• Content version template — cannot be modified • Content name — the name of the metadata • Status — the status of the metadata; status options include the following: • Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled • Language — the language of the metadata Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
152
Content Management
• Description — a short description of the metadata NOTE: If a preview file was uploaded, you can browse, locate, and upload a new preview
file for the metadata.
3. Click Submit to save any changes. Deleting Metadata To delete metadata: 1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit contents screen, select the metadata to remove and click Delete meta data.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected meta datas?” displays.
2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete on the Edit meta data
screen.
Using the Compatibilities Tab The Compatibilities tab allows you to view all devices compatible with the edited content. Both devices that are associated to a version and those that are not associated to a version are listed here.
Figure 6.30: Edit content Screen — Compatibilities Tab
1. Select the criteria by which to display devices. Criteria available includes the following:
• Language — Select the language assigned to the device profile.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
153
Content Management
• Device feature — Select the feature compatible with the content template. Only those devices compatible with the template and this feature are displayed.
• Selected brands — Select one or more device brands. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. Only those devices that are attached to these brands and are compatible with the selected feature are displayed. 2. Select the method of display. Methods include the following:
• Show all device profiles (compatible or not): Show all devices available in the device repository
• Show all compatible device profiles: Show only devices compatible with the content template and selected feature
• Show only assigned device profiles: Show only the devices currently associated to a content version
• Show only unassigned compatible device profiles: Show only devices compatible with the content template and selected feature. and not associated to a content version
• Show not compatible device profiles: Show only devices not compatible with the content template and selected feature 3. Click Show device profiles when finished.
3
A list of device profiles organized by brand/model displays at the bottom of the Compatibilities tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
154
Content Management
Figure 6.31: Edit content Screen — Compatibilities Tab (With Results) NOTE: Devices marked with an arrow are already listed as compatible with a content
version for this content.
Devices marked with a checkbox are compatible with the content template and selected feature, but are not associated to any content version. Devices in grey are not compatible with the content template and selected feature. If a default version is available, click the default version to edit. For more information about editing versions, see “Editing a Content Version” on page 147.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
155
Content Management
Using the Versions Coverages Tab The Versions coverages tab on the Edit content screen allows you to list all versions and their compatible devices.
Figure 6.32: Edit content Screen — Versions coverages Tab
1. From the Versions coverages tab, define the following criteria for your version coverage search:
• Device brand • Device model • Device profile (inherited or not) • The method by which to display search results. Options include: • Show all versions coverage — show all missing content versions, associated • • •
content versions, and incompatible content versions Show missing coverages — show only missing content versions for the device Show existing coverages — show only content versions associated with the device Show incompatible features — show only features that are not available for the device
2. Click Show versions.
3
A list of related versions displays at the bottom of the Versions coverages tab (Figure 6.33 on page 157).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
156
Content Management
Figure 6.33: Edit content Screen — Versions coverages Tab (With Results)
Cloning Content To duplicate a content file or group of files: 1. From the Content screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), check the box next to each content file to duplicate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all content files. 2. Click Clone content.
3
The newly copied content files are listed in the list of content files.
NOTE: You can also clone an edited content file by clicking Clone content on the Edit
content screen. For more information about editing content, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
Deleting Content To delete content: NOTE: You must have the “delete content” right in order to delete content. If the version
status is “published”, the content status is set as “deprecated”. If the content was not validated, it is directly deleted.
1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), check the box next to each content file to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all content files. 2. Click Delete content. 3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete this content?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
157
Content Management
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited content by clicking Delete on the Edit content screen.
Importing Bulk Contents A bulk import operation is a process in which several content bundles are imported at one time. To view a list of all bulk import processes on the content database: 1. From the Content menu, select Import contents > Bulk process.
3
The Bulk process screen displays listing all previously established bulk import processes.
Figure 6.34: Bulk process Screen
If there are existing processes on the system, the Bulk process screen displays the following information:
• ID — The identifier of the bulk operation. • Sequence type — The sequence type associated with the process. • Status — The status of the process: pending (not yet started), processing, processing wait, done, or paused.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
158
Content Management
• Time created — The time at which the process was started. • Time finished — The time at which the process was completed. Using the Bulk Process Screen The Bulk process screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bulk process screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a process to access. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Process” on page 164.
• Click Create process to create a new process. For more information, see “Creating a Process” on page 160.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove ALL past bulk process reports. For more information, see “Deleting a Bulk Process” on page 164.
Searching Import Processes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of import processes specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Bulk process screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Bulk process > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.35: Bulk process > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
159
Content Management
Starting a Bulk Import Process Before you can start a new process, you must first upload the content. Content files used for bulk import processes must be imported on the platform in the directory defined during system setup.
Understanding Content.csv Files The report.csv file is a report that is generated after a process is run. The file is formatted as follows: one line per imported file using a column structure separated by semicolons (;). Criteria
Type
Description
Example Logo1_12.gif
Required?
Filename
String
Exact name of the file to be imported. This file must be in the same directory as the CSV file.
Mimetype
String
The Mime type of the imported file, for WAP and image/gif MMS content. If empty, Content Manager uses the default Mime type associated with the imported file.
Content Name
String
Name of the content and content version. If empty, the filename (without the extension) is used.
Content Provider Name
String
Name of the content provider. If the content pro- cp vider does not exist, a name is automatically created.
Yes
Categories
String
Categories to which the content should be asso- Favorites|New ciated, separated by “|”. If categories do not exist, they are created automatically.
Yes
Content bundle type
String
Content template
Yes
Content type
String
Content version template. If empty, the template WAP Picture is deduced from the content template. 101x80px
No
Status
String
OK — File was imported. KO — An error occurred.
KO
N/A
Reason
String
A description of the error that occurred if the process status is KO.
Invalid file type
N/A
Logo
WAP_PICTURE
Yes No
No
Creating a Process NOTE: You must have rights over bulk processes in order to create a bulk import process.
For more information, see “Tracking Rights” on page 19.
To create a new process: 1. Click Create process from the Bulk process screen.
3
The Bulk operation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 6.36 on page 161).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
160
Content Management
Figure 6.36: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk operation Tab
2. From the Action type list, select the action to be performed during the process. 3. Check the Publish content box to indicate whether to automatically set the status of the imported content to “published”. 4. Check the Publish content version box to indicate whether you want the status of the imported content versions automatically set to “published”. 5. Select one or more of the following options to apply to existing content:
• Skip — existing content will not be modified • Update — existing content will be updated in whole or part, depending on the following options:
• Binary file — content binary files will be updated • Compatible devices — the list of compatible devices will be updated 6. From the Content provider list, select the content provider to automatically associate to the new content. 7. Click Next.
3
The Targets tab displays (Figure 6.37 on page 162).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
161
Content Management
Figure 6.37: The Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
8. From the Target type list, select the method by which targets should be selected:
• Select ZIP on server folder — uploads content stored in a ZIP file on the Content Manager server. The file must be stored on the import directory defined during implementation. NOTE: If you select this option, you will have the option to select a ZIP file from a
list of files stored in the Content Manager database.
• Upload ZIP — uploads a ZIP file stored locally using the web browser. NOTE: If you select this option, you must enter the full file path to the file to
upload. Click Browse to locate the file on a local drive.
9. Click Next.
3
The Bulk flow control strategy tab displays.
Figure 6.38: The Create bulk process Screen — Bulk flow control strategy Tab
10. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed according to the workflow strategy defined here. 11. Click Next.
3
The Timeslots tab displays (Figure 6.39 on page 163).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
162
Content Management
Figure 6.39: The Create bulk process Screen — Timeslots Tab
12. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 13. Click Add timeslot.
3
A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen. NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the
next
to each timeslot to remove. 14. Click Next.
3
The Confirmation tab displays.
15. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit.
3
When the process is complete, all imported contents are moved to a new folder containing a file called “report.csv”. This file is generated containing a list of all contents that were imported successfully. For information regarding .csv file formats, see “Understanding Content.csv Files” on page 160.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
163
Content Management
Accessing a Bulk Process To view, start, or stop a process: 1. From the Id column on the Bulk process screen (Figure 6.34 on page 158), click the process ID to access.
3
The Details tab on the Edit bulk process screen displays. NOTE: The information displayed both the Details and Timeslots tabs on the Edit
bulk process screen is view-only.
2. To start, pause, or stop the selected process, click Start process, Pause process, or Stop process at the top of the Edit bulk process screen.
Deleting a Bulk Process To delete a bulk process: 1. From the Bulk process screen (Figure 6.34 on page 158), check the box next to one or several processes to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all processes. 2. Click Purge bulk processes.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes purge.” displays.
3. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void the purge.
Using Zip Files This section provides information regarding the use of .zip files and .xml files with Content Manager.
Algorithms of Zip File Processing There are two cases in which Content Manager manages ZIP file processing:
• Selecting a .zip file on the server: the .zip file is hosted by the server, and the bulk process retrieves and processes it to import the file’s content to Content Manager.
• Uploading a .zip file on the server using a web browser from a client computer: the .zip file is uploaded to the server, and the bulk process retrieves and processes it to import the file’s content to Content Manager.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
164
Content Management
Selecting a Zip File The .zip file must be transferred by an external system, using FTP for example, and stored in the following directory: ..\web\WEB-INF\scc\domains\bulkcontentcreation\contentProviderBaseDirectory\{content provider name}\
Uploading a Zip File Content Manager can manage transfer and storage of .zip files. The selected .zip file is uploaded to the directory corresponding to the selected content provider, and stored with the current date in the file name.
Zip File Structure and XML Files A .zip file contains one .xml file for each content bundle. If content data is not included, and the external content system is not defined in the .xml file, the archive can contain data files as well. NOTE: You can find sample .zip files in the Content Manager pack in the
..\sample\bulkcreation\ directory.
Understanding XML Files There are several ways XML files are used in .zip files containing content:
• XML files with included content data • XML files with external file content • XML files using an external content system XML Files Containing Content Data
Each .xml file corresponds to a content bundle. The .xml file defines the name, author, start date of validity, and type of content bundle (the content bundle’s type ID is defined within the content). For example: Content_Bundle_1 WAP_PICTURE 2006-04-19 11:55:49.775 CEST admin
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
165
Content Management
A content bundle corresponds to at least one category. The full name of the associated category is listed. For example: <string>Fun
If the content bundle is to be referenced by keywords, the keywords must be listed. For example: <string>Moto <string>Sport
The file must define all content versions associated to the content bundle. For example:
Each content version is defined by a name, a content type (the content type ID is defined within the content), and a status (Draft, Published, or Deprecated).Content_1 WAP_PICTURE_101_080 <status>DRAFT
A content version can also be a content bundle metadata. For example: <metadata>false
The data can be defined directly in an .xml file, with a file included in a .zip file, or using an URL with external content. In this example, a content data is defined in an .xml file using 64bit encoding. A content data is defined by the corresponding java class. NOTE: These java class names are defined in a separate .xml file: ..\web\WEB-INF\scc\domains\bulkcontentcreation\conf\XSTREAM_ClassToName.xml
The contentData is defined by a PictureContentData class which contains a MimeData class. A MimeData class is defined by a file name, a mimetype and data. <mimedata class="MIMEDATA"> WAP_PICTURE_101_080.gif <mimetype>image/gif R0lGODlhZQBQAPcAAAAAAAAACAAIAAAICAgAAAgACAgAEAgIAAgICBAAAB AEBBgAABAAEAgMEBgAEBAKEBgIABgQACEAABwFDCsCACcGEDkCADsDE0wEDFgIDE4NHloNIG UHDWMMIWANKWsIIXQEEH4C
Because there is not any external content, the externalmode value is NONE. <externalmode>NONE
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
166
Content Management
Each content is compatible with device models which are defined by an ID defined in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB) archive. <devicecompatibilities> 320002 630002
XML Files and External File Content Content_Bundle_2 WAP_PICTURE 2006-04-19 11:55:49.775 CEST admin <string>Fun Content_1 WAP_PICTURE_101_080 <status>DRAFT <metadata>false
In this example, the data is not included in .xml file, but the data is created by a data file contained in the same .zip file. The file name of this data file is present in the .xml file. <mimedata class="MIMEDATA"> WAP_PICTURE_101_080.gif <mimetype>image/gif
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
167
Content Management
Because the data is stored on the server, the externalmode value is NONE. <externalmode>NONE <devicecompatibilities> 320002 630002
XML Files and an External Content System Content_Bundle_1 WAP_PICTURE 2006-04-19 11:55:49.775 CEST admin <string>Fun dfhdfhdh WAP_PICTURE_101_080 <status>DRAFT <metadata>false <mimedata class="MIMEDATA">
Because external content data is used, the external mode is now set to either CREATE or DELIVERY. The CREATE mode uploads data files when the content is created, while the DELIVERY mode uploads data files when the content is sent. <externalmode>CREATE
The external content system manages the upload mode according to specific parameters. There is one external content system plug-in which uses a URL to upload data. In this example, the type of external content system is URL. <externalsystemtype>URL
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
168
Content Management
Parameters used by this external content system are referenced in the URLExternalContentDataSystemParam class file which contains a URL. <externalsystemparam class="URLEXTERNALCONTENTDATASYSTEMPARAM">http://www.mobile365.com/images/CM-haut.jpg
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
169
7
Device Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Devices by Brand .................................................................................... Searching Devices by Brand.................................................................................... Creating a Brand ................................................................................................... Editing a Brand ..................................................................................................... Deleting a Brand ................................................................................................... Activating a Brand ................................................................................................. Deactivating a Brand.............................................................................................. Managing Devices by Model .................................................................................... Searching Devices by Model.................................................................................... Creating a Device .................................................................................................. Editing a Device .................................................................................................... Deleting a Device .................................................................................................. Activating Devices ................................................................................................. Deactivating Devices.............................................................................................. Managing Features ................................................................................................ Searching Features ................................................................................................ Creating a Feature................................................................................................. Editing a Feature ................................................................................................... Deleting a Feature ................................................................................................. Activating Features ................................................................................................ Deactivating Features ............................................................................................ Managing Capability Groups.................................................................................... Viewing Capability Groups ...................................................................................... Searching Capability Groups ................................................................................... Editing a Capability Group ...................................................................................... Creating a Capability Group .................................................................................... Deleting a Capability Group .................................................................................... Managing Capability Group Handlers ........................................................................ Viewing Capability Group Handlers........................................................................... Searching Capability Group Handlers........................................................................ Creating a Capability Group Handler ........................................................................ Editing a Capability Group Handler........................................................................... Deleting a Capability Group Handler......................................................................... Managing Formatting Tokens................................................................................... Viewing Formatting Tokens ..................................................................................... Searching Formatting Tokens .................................................................................. Editing a Formatting Token ..................................................................................... Creating a Formatting Token ................................................................................... Deleting a Formatting Token ................................................................................... Managing Device Detection Rules ............................................................................ Viewing Detection Rules ......................................................................................... Searching Detection Rules ...................................................................................... Editing a Detection Rule ......................................................................................... Creating a Detection Rule ....................................................................................... Deleting a Detection Rule ....................................................................................... Managing Device Detection Sets ..............................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
172 173 174 174 177 177 177 178 179 180 180 194 194 194 195 196 197 197 200 200 200 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 206 207 207 208 211 212 212 213 213 216 218 218 218 219 220 222 223 224
170
Device Management Viewing Detection Sets........................................................................................... Using the Detection Tool......................................................................................... Managing Device Application Types .......................................................................... Viewing Device Application Types............................................................................. Searching Device Application Types.......................................................................... Editing a Device Application Type............................................................................. Creating a Device Application Type .......................................................................... Deleting a Device Application Type........................................................................... Activating Device Application Types.......................................................................... Deactivating Device Application Types ...................................................................... Managing Device Applications ................................................................................. Viewing Device Applications .................................................................................... Searching Device Applications ................................................................................. Editing a Device Application .................................................................................... Creating a Device Application .................................................................................. Deleting a Device Application .................................................................................. Activating Device Applications ................................................................................. Deactivating Device Applications.............................................................................. Managing Device Application Versions ...................................................................... Viewing Device Application Versions ......................................................................... Searching Device Application Versions ...................................................................... Editing a Device Application Version ......................................................................... Creating a Device Application Version....................................................................... Deleting a Device Application Version ....................................................................... Activating Device Application Versions ...................................................................... Deactivating Device Application Versions .................................................................. Managing Formatting Systems ................................................................................ Viewing Formatting Systems ................................................................................... Searching Formatting Systems ................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
224 225 226 226 228 228 230 231 231 231 232 232 233 233 236 237 238 238 238 238 240 240 243 244 244 244 245 245 245
171
Device Management
The Device menu allows you to manage devices and features, as well as information stored in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). This chapter describes the device management portions of the Device menu. For information about using the Device menu to manage device repository and DKB information, see Chapter 8, “DKB Management” on page 247. NOTE: The menu is available only if you are a member of an authorized group.
Managing Devices by Brand To manage devices by brand: 1. From the Device menu, select Models > Brands.
3
The Brands > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Brands screen displays a list of all device brands. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Brand” on page 173.
Figure 7.1: Brands Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
172
Device Management
The Brands screen displays the following information:
• Name — Click on a brand name to modify the selected brand. For more information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Brand Id — The brand’s identification number. • Status — The brand status: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Creation Date — The date on which the brand was added to the database. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device brand. • Associated Devices — The number of devices associated with the brand. Using the Brands Screen The Brands screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the brands screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a brand to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Click New Brand to create a new brand. For more information, see “Creating a Brand” on page 174.
• Click Delete to delete selected brands. For more information, see “Deleting a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive brands. For more information, see “Activating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active brands. For more information, see “Deactivating a Brand” on page 177.
Searching Devices by Brand The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of devices specific to that criteria. To manage device filters: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), click Edit filters.
3
The Brands > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.2 on page 174).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
173
Device Management
Figure 7.2: Brands > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Brand NOTE: The New brand function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a brand, you
must have the appropriate rights, and a master trust source must be available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Brand NOTE: To modify brand information, you must have the appropriate rights. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a brand: 1. From the Brands screen, click the brand name of a device to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit brand screen displays (Figure 7.3 on page 175).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
174
Device Management
Figure 7.3: Edit brand Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit device screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New Brand to create a new brand. For more information, see “Creating a Brand” on page 174.
• Click Delete to delete the edited brand. For more information, see “Deleting a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Activate to activate the edited brand. For more information, see “Activating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited brand. For more information, see “Deactivating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Associated devices to view a list of devices associated to the edited brand only. Fore more information, see “Using the Devices Screen” on page 179.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify brand details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 175.
• Click the Aliases tab to add or remove aliases associated with the brand. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit brand screen (Figure 7.3 on page 175) allows you to view or modify the following details of an existing brand:
• Status — The status of the brand: Active (contracted) or Inactive (not contracted). This cannot be modified.
• Brand Id — The brand’s identification number. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
175
Device Management
• Name — The name of the brand. This is used on both front and back-office interfaces. • Picture — This picture is used to help both front-office and back-office users identify their device. Click Browse to locate a different picture file to represent the device. To restore the default picture, click Restore default picture.
• DKB version — An identifier that helps identify when the brand was added to the database.
• Creation date — The date on which the brand was added to the database (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the brand was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Aliases Tab The Aliases tab on the Edit brand screen allows you to add or remove aliases associated with the edited brand. NOTE: By default, a one-letter alias is automatically generated by Content Manager. DO
NOT REMOVE THE DEFAULT ALIAS.
Figure 7.4: Edit brand Screen — Aliases Tab
Adding an Alias to a Device To add an alias: 1. In the Alias field, enter a new unique alias (a name or short description). No two device brands can have the same alias. 2. Click Add.
3
The newly added alias displays in a list of aliases on the Aliases tab.
Removing an Alias from a Device To remove an alias, click Remove next to the alias to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
176
Device Management
Deleting a Brand NOTE: If a selected brand comes from a trust source archive, it is not deleted, but rather
passed in a deprecated state.
To delete a brand: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. NOTE: You can also delete an edited brand by clicking Delete on the Edit brand screen.
2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Activating a Brand To activate a brand: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. Only those brands that are currently inactive are modified. NOTE: The Activate function is also available for edited brands on the Edit brand screen.
2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation.
Deactivating a Brand To deactivate a brand: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. Only those brands that are currently active are modified. NOTE: The Deactivate function is also available for edited brands on the Edit brand
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
177
Device Management
2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Managing Devices by Model To view a list of available devices by model: 1. From the Device menu, select Models > Devices.
3
The Devices > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of devices. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Model” on page 179.
3
The Devices screen displays.
Figure 7.5: Devices Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
178
Device Management
Using the Devices Screen The Devices screen displays the following information:
• Model — The model name of the device. Click on a model name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Brand — The brand name of the device. • Terminal Id — The terminal ID associated with the device. • Status — The status of the device: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Added By — The first DKB version to include the device. The Devices screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Devices screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Model column, click a device to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Click New device to create a new device. For more information, see “Creating a Device” on page 180.
• Click Delete to delete selected devices. For more information, see “Deleting a Device” on page 194.
• Click Activate to activate selected devices. For more information, see “Activating Devices” on page 194. Only those devices not currently active are modified.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate all selected devices. For more information, see “Deactivating Devices” on page 194. Only those devices currently active are modified.
• Click Rights to manage rights associated with the device. For more information, see “Managing Device and DKB Rights” on page 297.
Searching Devices by Model The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of devices specific to that criteria. To manage device filters: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), click Edit filters.
3
The Devices > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.6 on page 180).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
179
Device Management
Figure 7.6: Devices > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Device NOTE: The New device function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a device, you
must have the appropriate rights, and a master trust source must be available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Device NOTE: To modify device information, you must have the appropriate rights. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), click the model name of a device to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.7 on page 181).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
180
Device Management
Figure 7.7: Edit device Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Screen From the Edit device screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab to view or modify device details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 182.
• Click the Aliases tab to add or remove aliases associated with the device. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182.
• Click the IMEI Ranges tab to define IMEI ranges for the device. For more information about defining IMEI ranges, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183.
• Click the User Agents tab to view all user agent profiles associated to the device. For more information about viewing user agents, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 187.
• Click the Device profiles tab to view all device profiles associated to the device. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Tab” on page 191.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
181
Device Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.7 on page 181) allows you to view or modify the following details of an existing content file:
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated (deleted and waiting to be purged). This cannot be modified.
• Terminal ID — A unique number assigned by a system administrator that identifies the handset device for administrative purposes (for example, adding, editing, or deleting handsets). This cannot be modified.
• Name — The device name used for both front-office and back-office users. This field can be modified. To restore the default name, click Restore default name.
• Brand — The brand of device. To edit the brand, click the brand name. For more information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Picture — This picture is used to help both front-office and back-office users identify their device. Click Browse to locate a different picture file to represent the device. To restore the default picture, click Restore default picture.
• DKB version — An identifier that helps identify when the device was added to Content Manager. If the device was added manually, the identifier reads Manually added.
• Comment — A short comment regarding the device (optional). • Created Date — The date on which the device was added to Content Manager. • Last modification date — The date on which the device was last modified. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Aliases Tab In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the Aliases tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage the aliases associated to the edited device. These aliases help users identify their device.
Figure 7.8: Edit device Screen — Aliases Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
182
Device Management
Adding an Alias to a Device To add an alias: 1. In the Alias field, enter a new unique alias (a name or short description). No two devices can have the same alias. 2. Click Add.
3
The newly added alias displays in a list of aliases on the Aliases tab.
Removing an Alias From a Device To remove an alias, click Remove next to the alias to remove.
Using the IMEI Ranges Tab The IMEI Ranges tab on the Edit device screen allows you to define IMEI ranges for the edited device. The IMEI Ranges tab displays the following information:
• TAC — The Type Approval Code. This consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI that identifies the device. Click a TAC to edit the associated IMEI range. For more information, see “Editing an IMEI Range” on page 184.
• Serial Begin — The beginning of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Serial End — The end of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Status — The IMEI range status: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range. In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the IMEI ranges tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New IMEI range to create an IMEI range for the device. For more information, see “Creating an IMEI Range” on page 185.
• Click Delete IMEI range to delete selected ranges. For more information, see “Deleting an IMEI Range” on page 186.
• Click Activate IMEI range to activate selected ranges. For more information, see “Activating an IMEI Range” on page 186.
• Click Deactivate IMEI range to deactivate selected ranges. For more information, see “Deactivating an IMEI Range” on page 186.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
183
Device Management
Editing an IMEI Range To edit an IMEI range: 1. Click an item from the TAC column to edit.
3
The Edit device > Edit IMEI Range screen displays.
Figure 7.9: Edit device > Edit IMEI Range Screen
2. Make changes to the following information as necessary:
• Tac — Type Approval Code. The TAC consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI number and is used to identify the device.
• Serial Begin — The beginning number of the serial number range. • Serial End — The end number of the serial number range. • Brand — The brand name of the device. • Model — The model name of the device. • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range (cannot be modified). • Creation date — The date on which the IMEI range was created. • Last modification date — The date on which the IMEI range was last modified (updated automatically). 3. Click Submit when finished.
3
The IMEI ranges screen displays, allowing you to view a complete list or set up a filter to search for existing IMEI ranges. For more information about viewing IMEI ranges, see “Managing Devices By IMEI Range” on page 249.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
184
Device Management
Creating an IMEI Range To create a new IMEI range for the edited device: 1. From the IMEI Ranges screen, click New IMEI range.
3
The New IMEI range screen displays.
Figure 7.10: New IMEI range Screen
2. From the Brand list, select the device brand for the IMEI range. 3. From the Model list, select the device model for the IMEI range. 4. In the Tac field, enter the Type Approval Code. The TAC consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI number and is used to identify the device. 5. In the Serial Begin field, enter the beginning number of the serial number range. 6. In the Serial End field, enter the end number of the serial number range. 7. Select whether to keep the existing TAC (if detected) or replace it with the new TAC. 8. From the Trust source list, select the certified source of the IMEI range. 9. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the IMEI range. 10. Click Submit.
3
The IMEI ranges screen displays, allowing you to view a complete list or set up a filter to search for existing IMEI ranges. For more information about viewing IMEI ranges, see “Managing Devices By IMEI Range” on page 249.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
185
Device Management
Deleting an IMEI Range To delete an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each IMEI range to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all ranges. 2. Click Delete IMEI range.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. Activating an IMEI Range To activate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI range tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each inactive IMEI range to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive ranges. 2. Click Activate IMEI range.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. Deactivating an IMEI Range To deactivate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI range tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each active IMEI range to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active ranges. 2. Click Deactivate IMEI range.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
186
Device Management
Using the User Agents Tab The User agents tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage user agents associated with the selected device.
Figure 7.11: Edit device Screen — User agents Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the User agents tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click an agent from the User agent column to view or modify. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
• Click New User Agent to create a new user agent. For more information, see “Creating a New User Agent” on page 189.
• Click Delete User Agent to delete selected agents. For more information, see “Deleting a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Activate User Agent to activate selected user agents. For more information, see “Activating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Deactivate User Agent to deactivate selected user agents. For more information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 190. Editing a User Agent To view or modify an existing user agent on a device: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187), click on the name of a user agent from the User agent column to edit.
3
The Edit user agent screen displays (Figure 7.12 on page 188).
NOTE: The Edit user agent screen also displays after searching for and editing a user
agent. For more information, see “Managing Devices by User Agent” on page 253.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
187
Device Management
Figure 7.12: Edit user agent Screen
The Edit user agent screen allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The user agent status (cannot be modified). • User agent — The name of the user agent. • Brand — The device brand with which the agent is associated. • Model — The device model with which the agent is associated. • Device profile — The device profile with which the agent is associated. • Resolved — Indicates whether the user agent is resolved. • Defined as default — Indicates whether the selected user agent is the default. • Application — The device application for the user agent. • Application version — The device application version for the user agent. • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the user agent (cannot be modified). • Creation date — The date on which the user agent was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the user agent was last modified (updated automatically).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
188
Device Management
The Edit user agent screen also allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete User Agent to delete the edited user agent. For more information, see “Deleting a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Activate User Agent to activate the edited user agent. For more information, see “Activating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Deactivate User Agent to deactivate the edited user agent. For more information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Edit associated model to return to the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187). Creating a New User Agent To create a new user agent for a device: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187), click New user agent.
3
The New user agent screen displays.
Figure 7.13: New user agent Screen
2. In the User agent field, enter a name for the user agent. 3. From the Device profile list, select the device profile for the user agent. 4. From the Application version list, select the device application version for the user agent. 5. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the user agent.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
189
Device Management
6. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the user agent. 7. Specify whether the user agent is Resolved (Yes/No). 8. Specify whether the user agent is Defined as default (Yes/No). 9. Click Submit.
3
The user agent is created, and the User agent tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.11 on page 187).
Deleting a User Agent To delete a user agent: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each user agent to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all agents. 2. Click Delete User Agent.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. Activating a User Agent To activate a user agent: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each inactive user agent to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive agents. 2. Click Activate User Agent.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. Deactivating a User Agent To deactivate a user agent: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each active user agent to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active agents.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
190
Device Management
2. Click Deactivate User Agent.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Using the Device Profiles Tab The Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage device profiles associated with the device.
Figure 7.14: Edit device Screen — Device profiles Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the Device profiles tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click a profile from the Name column to view or modify. The process for editing a device profile for a selected device is the same as editing a profile after a search. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258.
• Click New device profile to create a new device profile. For more information, see “Creating a New Device Profile” on page 191.
• Click Import device profile to import an existing device profile for the edited device. For more information, see “Importing a Device Profile” on page 192.
• Click Delete device profile to delete selected profiles. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile” on page 193. Creating a New Device Profile To create a new device profile for a device: 1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.14 on page 191), click New device profile.
3
The New device profile screen displays (Figure 7.15 on page 192).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
191
Device Management
Figure 7.15: New device profile Screen
2. In the Url field, enter the URL address for the profile. 3. From the Inherit list, select the device profile from which the new profile will inherit properties. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the profile. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the profile. 6. Click Submit.
3
The device profile is created, and the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.14 on page 191).
Importing a Device Profile To import an existing device profile for use with the edited device: 1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen, click Import device profile.
3
The Import device profile screen displays (Figure 7.16 on page 193).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
192
Device Management
Figure 7.16: Import device profile Screen
2. In the Url field, type the URL address for the device profile to import (required). 3. From the Inherit list, select the profile from which the imported profile inherits properties. 4. In the UAProf field, enter the full path and filename to the User Agent Profile for the device profile. Click Browse to search (required). 5. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the device profile. 6. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device profile. 7. Click Submit.
3
The device profile is imported, and the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.14 on page 191).
Deleting a Device Profile To delete a device profile: 1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each profile to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all profiles. 2. Click Delete device profile.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
193
Device Management
Deleting a Device To delete a device: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each device to remove. Check the box at the top of the screen to quickly select all devices. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected models?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device by clicking Delete from any tab on the Edit
device screen.
Activating Devices To activate devices: 1. From any tab on the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each inactive device to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive devices. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected models?” displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate an edited device by clicking Activate from any tab on the
Edit device screen.
Deactivating Devices To deactivate devices: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each active device to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active devices. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected models?” displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited device by clicking Deactivate from any tab on
the Edit device screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
194
Device Management
Managing Features The Features portion of the Device menu allows you to manage features available for all device models known to Content Manager, based on imported DKB archives. To view a list of features available: 1. From the Device menu, select Features > Features.
3
The Features > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Features screen displays a list of features. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Features” on page 196.
Figure 7.17: Features Screen
The Features screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the feature. Click a feature to edit. For more information about editing a feature, see “Editing a Feature” on page 197.
• Feature Id — The feature’s identification number. • Status — Indicates whether the feature is Active, Inactive, Supported (but not contracted), or Not used.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the feature.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
195
Device Management
Using the Features Screen The Features screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Features screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a feature to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Feature” on page 197.
• Click New feature to create a new feature. For more information, see “Creating a Feature” on page 197.
• Click Delete to delete selected features. For more information, see “Deleting a Feature” on page 200.
• Click Activate to activate all selected features for all devices. For more information, see “Activating Features” on page 200.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate all selected features for all devices. For more information, see “Deactivating Features” on page 200.
Searching Features The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of features specific to that criteria. To manage feature filters: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), click Edit filters.
3
The Features > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.18: Features > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
196
Device Management
Creating a Feature NOTE: The New feature function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a feature,
you must have the appropriate rights, and a master trusted source must be available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Feature NOTE: To modify a feature, you must have the appropriate rights. For more information
about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To modify a feature: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), click the name of a feature to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit feature screen displays.
Figure 7.19: Edit feature Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Feature Screen From the Edit feature screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab to view or modify feature details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 198.
• Click the Compatible device profiles tab to add or remove aliases associated with the device. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
197
Device Management
• Click the IMEI Ranges tab to define IMEI ranges for the device. For more information about defining IMEI ranges, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183.
• Click the User Agents tab to view all user agent profiles associated to the device. For more information about viewing user agents, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 187.
• Click the Device profile tab to view all device profiles associated to the device. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Tab” on page 191.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit feature screen (Figure 7.19 on page 197) allows you to view or modify the following details of an existing feature:
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Deactivated, Not contracted, or Not Supported (cannot be modified).
• Feature id — The feature’s identification number (cannot be modified). • Name — The name of the feature. • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the feature (cannot be modified). • Comment (optional) — A short comment regarding the feature. • Created Date — The date on which the feature was added to the database. • Last modification date — The date on which the feature was last modified. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Compatible Device Profiles Tab In addition to the functionality on the Edit feature screen, the Compatible device profiles tab on the Edit feature screen (Figure 7.20 on page 199) allows you to manage the device profiles compatible with the selected feature.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
198
Device Management
Figure 7.20: Edit feature Screen — Compatible device profiles Tab
To view a list of compatible device profiles: 1. From the Show brands list, select the brand names to view. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 2. Select whether to view brands with or without inherited profiles. 3. Click Show device profiles.
3
Device profiles matching the selected criteria display by brand on the Compatible device profiles tab.
From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the current feature, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another feature. Click the icon to edit the device profile. To associate specific profiles with the feature, check the box next to any candidate profiles. To quickly select all candidate profiles to associate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. To disassociate specific profiles from the feature, check the box next to any associated profiles. To quickly select all associated profiles to disassociate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
199
Device Management
Deleting a Feature To delete a feature: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each feature to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all features. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected features?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited feature by clicking Delete on the Edit feature
screen.
Activating Features To activate features: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each inactive feature to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive features. Only those features that are currently inactive are modified. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected features?” displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation.
Deactivating Features To deactivate features: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each active feature to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active features. Only those features that are currently active are modified. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected features?” displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
200
Device Management
Managing Capability Groups Capability groups are associated to features and are defined automatically by Content Manager. You can, however, manually add or remove devices in a capability group.
Viewing Capability Groups To view a list of capability groups: 1. From the Devices menu, select Features > Capability groups.
3
The Capability groups >Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Capability groups screen displays a list of all capability groups. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Capability Groups” on page 202.
Figure 7.21: Capability groups Screen
The Capability group screen displays the following information:
• Name —The name of the capability group. Click a group name to modify. For information about editing a capability group, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
201
Device Management
• Handled feature — The feature associated with the group. • Handler — The type of handler that manages the group. For more information, see “Managing Capability Group Handlers” on page 206.
Using the Capability Groups Screen The Capability groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Capability groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203.
• Click New capability group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a Capability Group” on page 204.
• Click Delete to delete selected capability groups. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group” on page 205.
Searching Capability Groups The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of capability groups specific to that criteria. To manage capability group filters: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click Edit filters.
3
The Capability groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.22: Capability groups > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
202
Device Management
Editing a Capability Group NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a capability group. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a capability group: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click a group from the Name column to modify.
3
The Associated devices tab on the Edit capability group screen displays.
Figure 7.23: Edit capability group Screen — Associated devices Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
203
Device Management
Using the Edit Capability Group Screen From the Edit Capability group screen, you can manage the device profiles associated with the capability group. To manage device profiles: 1. Define the devices to list by selecting device brands from the Show brands list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 2. Click Show device profiles to list device profiles by selected brands. From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the current capability group, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another capability group. Click the icon to edit the device profile. To associate specific profiles with the group, check the box next to any candidate profiles. To quickly select all candidate profiles to associate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. To disassociate specific profiles from the group, check the box next to any associated profiles. To quickly select all associated profiles to disassociate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. Resetting a Capability Group You can reassociate all disassociated device profiles with the edited capability group simultaneously. NOTE: You must have the “manage capability groups” right in order to reset groups.
To reassociate all device profiles with the edited capability group, click Reset capability group on the Edit capability group screen (Figure 7.23 on page 203).
Creating a Capability Group To create a new capability group: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click New capability group.
3
The New capability group screen displays (Figure 7.24 on page 205).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
204
Device Management
Figure 7.24: New capability group Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of capability group to create. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the capability group. 4. From the Feature list, select a feature for the capability group. 5. In the Description field, type a short description of the capability group (optional). 6. Click Submit.
3
The Edit capability group screen displays, allowing you to define device profiles for the capability group. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203.
Deleting a Capability Group To delete a capability group: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), check the box next to each group to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly delete all groups. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected capability groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited capability groups by clicking Delete on the Edit
capability group screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
205
Device Management
Managing Capability Group Handlers Capability group handlers are used to automatically define capability groups.
Viewing Capability Group Handlers To view a list of current capability group handlers: 1. From the Device menu, select Features > Capability group handlers.
3
The Capability group handlers > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Capability group handlers screen displays.
Figure 7.25: Capability group handlers Screen
The Capability group handlers screen displays the following information:
• Type — The type of group handler. Click the name of a handler to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
• Feature — The feature associated with the handler.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
206
Device Management
Using the Capability Group Handlers Screen The Capability group handlers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Capability group handlers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Type column, click a handler to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
• Click Create capability groups handler to create a new handler. For more information, see “Creating a Capability Group Handler” on page 207.
• Click Delete to delete selected capability group handlers. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group Handler” on page 211.
Searching Capability Group Handlers The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of capability group handlers specific to that criteria. To manage capability group handler filters: 1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click Edit filters.
3
The Capability group handlers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.26: Capability group handlers > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Capability Group Handler NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to create a capability group handler. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
207
Device Management
To create a capability group handler: 1. From the Capability group handler screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click Create capability group handler.
3
The Create capability group handler screen displays.
NOTE: The Create capability group handler function is also available when viewing,
searching, or editing a capability group handler.
Figure 7.27: Create capability group handler Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of capability group created by the handler. 3. From the Feature list, select the feature managed by the capability group created by the handler. 4. In the Description field, type a short description of the handler (optional). 5. Click Submit.
3
The capability group handler is created, and the BLAH screen displays.
Editing a Capability Group Handler NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a capability group handler. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a capability group handler: 1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click a handler from the Type column to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit capability group handler screen displays (Figure 7.28 on page 209).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
208
Device Management
Figure 7.28: Edit capability group handler Screen — Details Tab
The Edit capability group handler screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Reset to initialize the handler. • Click Create capability groups handler to create a new capability group handler. For more information, see “Creating a Capability Group Handler” on page 207.
• Click Delete capability groups handler to deleted the edited capability group handler. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group Handler” on page 211.
• Click the Details tab to view the following information about the capability group handler: • Id — the capability group handler identifier
• Type — the type of group created by the capability group handler • Feature — the feature managed by the groups created by the capability group •
handler Description — a short description of the capability group handler
• Click the Capability Groups tab to view groups created by the edited capability group handler. For more information, see “Using the Capability Groups Tab” on page 209.
Using the Capability Groups Tab The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen (Figure 7.29 on page 210) lists the capability groups created by the edited capability groups handler. NOTE: Capability groups created by capability group handlers are listed when editing a
specific handler. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
209
Device Management
Figure 7.29: Edit capability groups handler Screen — Capability Groups Tab
The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, the Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Search for capability groups by applying a set of search filters. For more information, see “Applying Search Filters” on page 210.
• Edit a listed capability group by clicking a capability group name from the Name column. For more information about editing a capability group, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203. Applying Search Filters The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen allows you filter through the list of capability groups by applying a set of search criteria (Figure 7.30 on page 211). Several filters can be created and applied simultaneously as a set. NOTE: Only those capability group records that meet all applied filter criteria will display.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
210
Device Management
Figure 7.30: Edit capability groups handler Screen — Capability Groups Tab > Filters Screen
Resetting Filters. To remove all existing filters for the search, click Reset filters. Viewing Applied Filters. To apply the filters and view a list of groups meeting the search criteria, click Show table.
3
The Capability Groups tab displays an updated list of capability groups.
Adding and Removing Filters. To modify the set of filters currently applied to the search, click Edit filters.
3
The Capability Groups tab displays a list of applied filters.
To add a new filter to the set, use the Filters fields to create the filter, then click the add the new filter to the set. To remove a filter from the set, click the
to
next to the applied filter to remove.
Deleting a Capability Group Handler To delete a capability group handler: 1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), check the box next to the handlers to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly delete all handlers. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected capability group handlers?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited capability group handlers by clicking Delete capability
groups handler on the Edit capability group handler screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
211
Device Management
Managing Formatting Tokens Formatting tokens are used to balance the load between two formatting applications sending content to any given handset. For example, say you have Application 1 and Application 2, each using its own DKB and formatting data for adapting content to a device. You can use formatting tokens to specify that Application 1 sends Content A to Handset A, but Application 2 sends Content A to Handset B. NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify formatting token
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Viewing Formatting Tokens To view a list of formatting tokens: 1. From the Devices menu, select Features > Formatting tokens.
3
The Formatting tokens >Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Formatting tokens screen displays a list of all formatting tokens. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Formatting Tokens” on page 213.
The Formatting tokens screen displays the following information:
• Description — The description of the formatting token. Click a token description to modify the token. For information about editing a formatting token, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
• Feature — The feature associated with the formatting token. • Type — The formatter type. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the formatting token. Using the Formatting Tokens Screen The Formatting tokens screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Formatting tokens screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Description column, click a formatting token to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
• Click New formatting token to create a new formatting token. For more information, see “Creating a Formatting Token” on page 216.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
212
Device Management
• Click Delete to delete selected formatting tokens. For more information, see “Deleting a Formatting Token” on page 218.
Searching Formatting Tokens The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of formatting tokens specific to that criteria. To manage formatting token filters: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Formatting tokens > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.31: Formatting tokens > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Formatting Token NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify a formatting token. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a formatting token: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click a token from the Description column to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen displays (Figure 7.32 on page 214).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
213
Device Management
Figure 7.32: Edit formatting token Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Formatting Token Screen The Edit formatting token screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New formatting token to create a new formatting token. For more information, see “Creating a Formatting Token” on page 216.
• Click Delete to delete the edited formatting token. For more information, see “Deleting a Formatting Token” on page 218.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify token details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 214.
• Click the Device profile capabilities tab to view or modify device profiles associated with the token. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Capabilities Tab” on page 215.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen (Figure 7.32) allows you to modify the following details of the selected token:
• Feature — The feature associated with the token. • Description — A short description of the token (optional). • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the formatting token (cannot be modified).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
214
Device Management
• Type — The formatter type (cannot be modified). • Brand — The brand name of the device. If the formatter type is HM formatter, the brand name is used to locate the correct formatting algorithm.
• Model — The model name of the device. If the formatter type is HM formatter, the model name is used to locate the correct formatting algorithm.
• Creation date — The date on which the token was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the token was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Device Profiles Capabilities Tab The Device profiles capabilities tab allows you to manage device profiles associated with the selected token.
Figure 7.33: Edit formatting token Screen — Device profiles capabilities Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
215
Device Management
Define the device profiles to list by selecting from the criteria described below. A list of device profiles matching the criteria selected displays on the right side of the tab. Device profiles are ranked by brand/manufacturer.
• Show brands — Select the brands to include in the device list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
• Inherited device profiles — Specify whether or not to view inherited device profiles. • Click Show device profiles to view and select profiles available for the edited token. From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the formatting token, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another formatting token with the same feature. Click the icon to edit the token already associated with the device profile. To select specific profiles, check the box next to any candidate profile. To quickly select all candidate profiles, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. To disassociate specific profiles, uncheck the box next to any associated profile. To quickly select all associated profiles, click Unselect all. Click Submit when finished.
Creating a Formatting Token NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to create a formatting token. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a formatting token: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click New formatting token.
3
The New formatting token screen displays (Figure 7.34 on page 217).
NOTE: The New formatting token function is also available when searching for or editing
a formatting token. For more information, see “Searching Formatting Tokens” on page 213 and “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
216
Device Management
Figure 7.34: New formatting token Screen
2. In the Description field, type a description for the formatting token. 3. From the Feature list, select a feature type for the token. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the token. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the token. This helps to identify when the token was added to Content Manager. 6. From the Formatting system list, select the formatting type for the token. 7. From the Brand list, select a brand name for the device. If the formatting type is HM formatter, the brand name is used to locate the right formatting algorithm. 8. From the Model list, select a model name for the device. If the formatting type is HM formatter, the model name is used to locate the right formatting algorithm. 9. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen displays. For more information about editing a formatting token, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
217
Device Management
Deleting a Formatting Token To delete a formatting token: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, check the box next to each token to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all tokens. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected formatting tokens?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited formatting token by clicking Delete on the Edit
formatting token screen.
Managing Device Detection Rules Detection rules are used to automatically send content to a handset once it is detected on the network.
Viewing Detection Rules To view a list of detection rules: 1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection rules.
3
The Detection rules > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Detection rules screen displays a list of all existing detection rules. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Detection Rules” on page 219.
Figure 7.35: Detection rules Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
218
Device Management
The Detection rules screen displays the following information:
• Detection regular expression — The regular expression used to identify the rule. • Brand — The device brand associated with the rule. • Model — The device model associated with the rule. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the detection rule. Using the Detection Rules Screen The Detection rules screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Detection rules screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit to edit an existing detection rule. For more information, see “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
• Click New detection rule to create a new detection rule. For more information, see “Creating a Detection Rule” on page 222.
• Click Delete to delete selected detection rules. For more information, see “Deleting a Detection Rule” on page 223.
Searching Detection Rules The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of detection rules specific to that criteria. To manage detection rule filters: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click Edit filters.
3
The Detection rules > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.36: Detection rules > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
219
Device Management
Editing a Detection Rule NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify a detection rule. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a detection rule: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click Edit next to a detection rule to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen displays.
Figure 7.37: Edit detection rule Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Detection Rule Screen The Edit detection rule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New detection rule to create a new detection rule. For more information, see “Creating a Detection Rule” on page 222.
• Click Delete to delete the edited detection rule. For more information, see “Deleting a Detection Rule” on page 223.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
220
Device Management
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen (Figure 7.37 on page 220) allows you to modify the following details of the selected detection rule:
• Detection set — The handler used to extract corresponding headers and attempts to detect a device.
• DKB version — The first DKB package to include the rule (cannot be modified). • Detection regular expression — The regular expression, with its match groups, used by the selected handler to resolve rule headers.
• Match group model — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias.
• Match group device profile — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile.
• Match group application — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application.
• Match group application version — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application version.
• Brand — The device brand of the devices to be detected (can be either a device profile or a user agent).
• Model — The device model on which detected items are associated. If None is selected, the model information is extracted from the http header. NOTE: The following fields are relevant only when editing a user agent detection set.
• Device profile — The device profile on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device profile information is extracted from the http header. If the device profile cannot be extracted, the device profile is defined by default using the corresponding model.
• Device application — The device application on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application is extracted from the http header.
• Device application version — The device application version on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application version is extracted from the http header.
• Creation date — The date on which the detection rule was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the detection rule was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
221
Device Management
Creating a Detection Rule NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to create a detection rule. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a detection rule: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click New detection rule.
3
The New detection rule screen displays.
NOTE: The New detection rule function is also available when searching for or editing a
detection rule. For more information, see “Searching Detection Rules” on page 219 and “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
Figure 7.38: New detection rule Screen
2. From the Detection set list, select the handler used to extract corresponding headers and attempts to detect a device. This is required. 3. In the Detection regular expression field, enter the regular expression, with its match groups, used by the selected handler to resolve rule headers. This is required. 4. In the Match group model field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias. 5. In the Match group device profile field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
222
Device Management
6. In the Match group application field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application. 7. In the Match group application version field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application version. 8. From the Brand list, select the device brand of the devices to be detected (can be either a device profile or a user agent). This is required. 9. From the Model list, select the device model on which detected items are associated. If None is selected, the model information is extracted from the http header. This is required. NOTE: Steps 10-12 are relevant only when creating a user agent detection set. If you are
not creating a user agent detection set, go to step 13.
10. From the Device profile list, select a device profile on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device profile information is extracted from the http header. If the device profile cannot be extracted, a profile is defined by default using the corresponding model. 11. From the Device application list, select the device application on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application is extracted from the http header. 12. From the Device application version list, select the device application version on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application version is extracted from the http header. 13. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the new detection rule. 14. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB package to include the rule. This helps to identify when the rule was added to Content Manager. 15. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen displays. For more information about editing a detection rule, see “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
Deleting a Detection Rule To delete a detection rule: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), check the box next to each rule to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all rules. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected detection rules?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
223
Device Management
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited detection rules by clicking Delete on the Edit detection
rule screen.
Managing Device Detection Sets Detection sets are available handset identifiers that help to detect handsets.
Viewing Detection Sets To view a list of detection sets: 1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection set.
3
The Detection set screen displays.
Figure 7.39: Detection set Screen
The Detection set screen displays the following information:
• Order — The detection set location in the cycle order, where 0 = first. • Type — The handler than enables you to extract desired headers. Using the Detection Set Screen The Detection set screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
224
Device Management
Using the Detection Tool The Detection tool allows you to verify the behavior of a detection rule. For more information about detection rules, see “Managing Device Detection Rules” on page 218. To check the behavior of a detection rule: 1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection tool.
3
The Detection tool screen displays.
Figure 7.40: Detection tool Screen
1. In the Header field, type the http header on which the regular expression applies. This is required. 2. In the Detection regular expression field, type the regular expression, with its match groups, that extracts information from the handler. This is required. 3. In the Match group model field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias. 4. In the Match group device profile field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile. 5. In the Match group application field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application. 6. In the Match group application version field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds the name of a device application version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
225
Device Management
7. Click Submit when finished.
3
The regular expression is verified. Once the verification process is done, one of two results is possible:
• Regular expression does not match header and must be redefined — In this case, return to steps 1 and 2 to redefine the expression. OR
• The following information is extracted from the header: • Model — The name or alias of a device model. • Device profile — The URL of a device profile. • Device application — The name of a device application. • Device application version — The name of a device application version.
Managing Device Application Types The Structure portion of the Device menu allows you to define types of applications (for example: Firmware, Games, and MMS agents), names of applications (for example: Nokia MMS agent and Tetris), and versions of applications (for example: Tetris v1.0.0 and Tetris v1.0.23).
Viewing Device Application Types NOTE: Content Manager provides the Firmware application type.
To view a list of device application types: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device application types.
3
The Device application types > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Device application types screen displays a list of device application types (Figure 7.41 on page 227). For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Application Types” on page 228.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
226
Device Management
Figure 7.41: Device application types Screen
The Device application types screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device application type. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
• Type — The type of device application. • Status — The status of the device application type: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the application type. Using the Device Application Types Screen The Device application types screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device application rules screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application type. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
• Click New device application type to create a new device application type. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Type” on page 230.
• Click Delete to delete selected device application types. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Type” on page 231.
• Click Activate to activate selected device application types. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Types” on page 231.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device application rules. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Types” on page 231.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
227
Device Management
Searching Device Application Types The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device application types specific to that criteria. To manage device application type filters: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click Edit filters.
3
The Device application types > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.42: Device application types > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Device Application Type NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application type
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device application type: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click the name of a device application type to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application type screen displays (Figure 7.43 on page 229).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
228
Device Management
Figure 7.43: Edit device application type Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Type Screen The Edit device application type screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application type to create a new device application type. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Type” on page 230.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application type. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Type” on page 231.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application type. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Types” on page 231.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application type. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Types” on page 231. The Edit device application type screen allows you to modify the name and the type of the device application type. Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
229
Device Management
Creating a Device Application Type NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application type
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a device application type: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click New device application type.
3
The New device application type screen displays.
NOTE: The New device application type function is also available when searching for or
editing a device application type. For more information, see “Searching Device Application Types” on page 228 and “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
Figure 7.44: New device application type Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application type. 3. In the Type field, enter the device application type. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application type. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application type. This helps to identify when the device application type was added to Content Manager. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application type screen displays. For more information about editing a device application type, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
230
Device Management
Deleting a Device Application Type To delete a device application type: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box next to each application type to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all application types. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device application types?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited device application types by clicking Delete on the Edit
device application type screen.
Activating Device Application Types To activate device application types: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box next to each inactive device application type to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device application types. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device application types?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited device application types by clicking Activate on the
Edit device application type screen.
Deactivating Device Application Types To deactivate device application types: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box next to each active device application type to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device application types. 2. Click Deactivate. 3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device application types?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device application types by clicking Deactivate on the Edit device application type screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
231
Device Management
Managing Device Applications NOTE: Content Manager provides the Default firmware application.
Viewing Device Applications To view a list of device applications: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device applications.
3
The Device applications > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Device applications screen displays a list of device applications. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Applications” on page 233.
Figure 7.45: Device applications Screen
The Device applications screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device application. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
• Type — The type of device application type. • Status — The status of the device application type: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device application. Using the Device Applications Screen The Device applications screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device applications screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
232
Device Management
• Click New device application to create a new device application. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application” on page 236.
• Click Delete to delete selected device applications. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application” on page 237.
• Click Activate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Activating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Applications” on page 238.
Searching Device Applications The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device applications specific to that criteria. To manage device application type filters: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click Edit filters.
3
The Devie applications > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.46: Device applications > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Device Application NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
233
Device Management
To edit a device application: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click the name of a device application to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application screen displays.
Figure 7.47: Edit device application Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Screen The Edit device application screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application to create a new device application. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application” on page 236.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application” on page 237.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application. For more information, see “Activating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application type. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click the Details tab to modify general device application information. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 235.
• Click the User agents tab to modify the user agents associated with the device application. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 235.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
234
Device Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device application screen (Figure 7.47 on page 234) allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The status of the device application: Active or Inactive (cannot be modified).
• Name — The name of the device application. • Type — The device application type. • Description — A short description of the device application (optional). • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the device application (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device application was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device application was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Application Versions Tab The Application versions tab allows you to manage application versions associated with the device application.
Figure 7.48: Edit device application Screen — Application versions Tab
Click an application version name from the Name column to view or modify the application version. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
Using the User Agents Tab The User agents tab on the Edit device application screen (Figure 7.49 on page 236) allows you to view a list of user agents associated with the device application.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
235
Device Management
Figure 7.49: Edit device application Screen — User agents Tab
From the User agent column, click a user agent name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
Creating a Device Application NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a device application: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click New device application.
3
The New device application screen displays (Figure 7.50 on page 237).
NOTE: The New device application function is also available when searching for or
editing a device application. For more information, see “Searching Device Applications” on page 233 and “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
236
Device Management
Figure 7.50: New device application Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application. 3. In the Type field, enter the device application. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application. This helps to identify when the device application was added to Content Manager. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application screen displays. For more information about editing a device application, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
Deleting a Device Application To delete a device application: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to each application type to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all application types. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device applications?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device application by clicking Delete on the Edit
device application screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
237
Device Management
Activating Device Applications To activate device applications: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to each inactive device application to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device applications. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device applications?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited device applications by clicking Activate on the Edit
device application screen.
Deactivating Device Applications To deactivate device applications: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to each active device application to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device applications. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device applications?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device applications by clicking Deactivate on the
Edit device application screen.
Managing Device Application Versions NOTE: Content Manager provides the Default application version.
Viewing Device Application Versions To view a list of device application versions: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device application versions. 3 The Device application versions > Filters screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
238
Device Management
2. Click Show table.
3
The Device application versions screen displays a list of device application versions. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Application Versions” on page 240.
Figure 7.51: Device application versions Screen
The Device application versions screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device application version. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
• Application — The device application used in the application version. • Status — The status of the device application version: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device application version. Using the Device Application Versions Screen The Device application versions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device application versions screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application version. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
• Click New device application to create a new device application version. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Version” on page 243.
• Click Delete to delete selected device application versions. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Version” on page 244.
• Click Activate to activate selected device application versions. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device application versions. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
239
Device Management
Searching Device Application Versions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device application versions specific to that criteria. To manage device application version filters: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click Edit filters.
3
The Device application versions > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.52: Device application versions > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Device Application Version NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application version
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device application version: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click the name of a device application version to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen displays (Figure 7.52 on page 240).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
240
Device Management
Figure 7.53: Edit device application version Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Version Screen The Edit device application version screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application version to create a new device application version. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Version” on page 243.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application version. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Version” on page 244.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application version. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application version. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click the Details tab to modify general device application version information. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 241.
• Click the User agents tab to modify the user agents associated with the device application. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 242.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen (Figure 7.53) allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The status of the device application version: Active or Inactive (cannot be modified).
• Name — The name of the device application version. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
241
Device Management
• Application — The device application used in the version. • Description — A short description of the device application version (optional). • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the device application version (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device application version was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device application version was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the User Agents Tab The User agents tab on the Edit device application version screen allows you to view a list of user agents associated with the device application.
Figure 7.54: Edit device application version Screen — User agents Tab
From the User agent column, click a user agent name to edit. The process for editing a user agent for a selected device application version is the same as editing a user agent for a selected device. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
242
Device Management
Creating a Device Application Version NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application version
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a device application version: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click New device application version.
3
The New device application version screen displays.
NOTE: The New device application version function is also available when searching for
or editing a device application version. For more information, see “Searching Device Application Versions” on page 240 and “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
Figure 7.55: New device application version Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application version. 3. From the Application list, select the device application version. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application version. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application version. This helps to identify when the device application version was added to Content Manager. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen displays. For more information about editing a device application version, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
243
Device Management
Deleting a Device Application Version To delete a device application version: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box next to each application version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all application versions. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device application versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device application version by clicking Delete on the
Edit device application version screen.
Activating Device Application Versions To activate device application versions: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box next to each inactive device application version to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device application versions. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device application versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited device application versions by clicking Activate on the
Edit device application version screen.
Deactivating Device Application Versions To deactivate device application versions: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box next to each active device application version to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device application versions. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device application versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device application versions by clicking Deactivate
on the Edit device application version screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
244
Device Management
Managing Formatting Systems Formatting systems are the applications that encode contents in order to adapt them to any given handset.
Viewing Formatting Systems To view a list of formatting systems: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Formatting systems.
3
The Formatting systems > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Formatting systems screen displays a list of formatting systems. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Formatting Systems” on page 245.
Figure 7.56: Formatting systems Screen
The Formatting systems screen displays the following information and is view-only:
• Name — The name of the formatting system. • Type — The type of formatting system. • Description — A description of the formatting system. Searching Formatting Systems To manage formatting system filters: 1. From the Formatting systems screen (Figure 7.56 on page 245), click Edit filters.
3
The Formatting systems > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.57 on page 246).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
245
Device Management
Figure 7.57: Formatting systems > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
246
8
DKB Management
This chapter contains the following information: Managing Devices Through a Search ........................................................................ Searching Devices Using Quick Search ..................................................................... Searching Devices by IMEI Range ............................................................................ Managing Devices By IMEI Range ............................................................................ Searching Devices by User Agent............................................................................. Managing Devices by User Agent ............................................................................. Searching Device Profiles........................................................................................ Managing Device Profiles ........................................................................................ Editing a Device Profile........................................................................................... Searching Device Profile Capabilities ........................................................................ Managing Device Profile Capabilities......................................................................... Managing Trust Sources ......................................................................................... Viewing Trust Sources ............................................................................................ Editing a Trust Source ............................................................................................ Creating a Trust Source .......................................................................................... Deleting a Trust Source .......................................................................................... Managing DKB Versions.......................................................................................... Viewing DKB Versions ............................................................................................ Searching DKB Versions ......................................................................................... Editing a DKB Version ............................................................................................ Deleting a Version ................................................................................................. Managing DKB Archives.......................................................................................... Managing DKB Synchronizations .............................................................................. Viewing Synchronization Processes .......................................................................... Searching Synchronization Processes ....................................................................... Monitoring a Synchronization Process....................................................................... Creating a Synchronization Process.......................................................................... Managing Device and DKB Rights ............................................................................ Granting Device and DKB Rights.............................................................................. Revoking Device and DKB Rights .............................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
248 248 249 249 252 253 255 256 258 277 278 282 282 283 286 287 287 287 288 289 290 290 291 292 293 293 296 297 297 298
247
DKB Management
The Device Knowledge Base (DKB) stores all device information (based on the license that defines available device brands and features) when working with Content Manager. Updates to the device repository are made by uploading files containing device information from the DKB. This chapter describes device repository and DKB management using the Device menu. For information about managing devices and features, see Chapter 7, “Device Management” on page 170.
Managing Devices Through a Search The Searches portion of the Devices menu allows you to conduct searches for devices by Quick Search, IMEI ranges, user agents, device profile, or device profile capabilities.
Searching Devices Using Quick Search Quick search allows you to search devices using several types of criteria. To search using Quick search: 1. From the Devices menu, select Searches > Quick Search.
3
The Quick search screen displays.
Figure 8.1: Quick search Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to base your search. 3. Click OK to search.
3
The Quick search screen displays a list of devices matching the search criteria.
4. From the list of displayed devices, click a device to modify.
3
The Edit device screen displays, allowing you to modify the device. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
248
DKB Management
Searching Devices by IMEI Range An International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) is a unique identification number typically found on the back of cellular phone batteries. An IMEI range allows you to manage devices within a defined range of serial numbers. You can directly manage IMEI ranges associated with devices through the Device menu. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of ranges specific to that criteria. To manage IMEI range filters: 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > IMEI Ranges screen.
3
The IMEI Ranges > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.2: IMEI Ranges > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Managing Devices By IMEI Range To manage devices by IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI Ranges > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The IMEI Ranges screen displays (Figure 8.3 on page 250).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
249
DKB Management
Figure 8.3: IMEI Ranges Screen
The IMEI Ranges screen displays the following information:
• TAC — The Type Approval Code. Consists of the first 6-8 digits of the IMEI number and is used to identify a device.
• Brand — The device brand. • Model — The commercial name of the device. • Serial Begin — The beginning of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Serial End — The end of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Status — The status of the device: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range. Using the IMEI Ranges Screen The IMEI Ranges screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the IMEI Ranges screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Tac column, click a type approval code to edit the associated IMEI range. The process for editing an IMEI range is the same as editing an IMEI range associated with a selected device. For more information, see “Editing an IMEI Range” on page 184.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
250
DKB Management
• Click Delete to delete selected IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Deleting an IMEI Range”.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Activating an IMEI Range”.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Deactivating an IMEI Range”. Creating an IMEI Range IMEI ranges are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183. Deleting an IMEI Range To delete an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each IMEI range to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all ranges. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited IMEI ranges by clicking Delete on the Edit IMEI screen
screen.
Activating an IMEI Range To activate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each inactive IMEI range to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive IMEI ranges. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited IMEI ranges by clicking Activate on the Edit IMEI
range screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
251
DKB Management
Deactivating an IMEI Range To deactivate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each active IMEI range to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active IMEI ranges. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited IMEI ranges by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
IMEI range screen.
Searching Devices by User Agent User agent information is included in the http headers of a WAP page or the Multimedia Messaging Services Center (MMS-C). This information is detected when a device accesses a WAP page or the MMS-C. The correct device can be identified based on the user agent profile. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of user agents specific to that criteria. To manage user agent filters: 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > User agents.
3
The User agents > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.4: User Agents > Filters Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
252
DKB Management
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Managing Devices by User Agent 1. From the User agents > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The User agents screen displays.
Figure 8.5: User Agents Screen
The User agents screen displays the following information:
• User agent — The commercial name of the device. Click on a model name to modify the user agents for the selected device.
• Brand — The device brand associated with the user agent. • Device profile — The device profile associated with the user agent. • Status — The user agent status. Status can include: Active (agent profile capabilities are used) or Inactive (agent profile capabilities are not used).
• Resolved — Indicates whether the user agent is resolved: Yes or No. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the user agent.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
253
DKB Management
Using the User Agents Screen The User agents screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the User agents screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the User agent column, click a model to edit the user agents for the selected model. The editing process is the same as when editing a user agent on a selected device. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
• Click Delete to delete selected user agents. For more information, see “Deleting a User Agent” on page 254.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive user agents. For more information, see “Activating a User Agent” on page 255.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active user agents. For more information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 255.
• In order to create a user agent, you must add it to a selected device. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180. Creating a User Agent User agents are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 187. Deleting a User Agent To delete a user agent: 1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each user agent to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all user agents. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited user agent by clicking Delete on the Edit user agent
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
254
DKB Management
Activating a User Agent To activate a user agent: 1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each inactive user agent to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive user agents. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate an edited user agent by clicking Activate on the Edit user
agent screen.
Deactivating a User Agent To deactivate a user agent: 1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each active user agent to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active user agents. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited user agent by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
user agent screen.
Searching Device Profiles Device profiles can be inherited and passed down from profile to profile, allowing you to further manage devices by reusing common device details, features, or capabilities. 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > Device profiles.
3
The Device profiles > Filters screen displays (Figure 8.6 on page 256).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
255
DKB Management
Figure 8.6: Device profiles > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Managing Device Profiles To manage device profiles: From the Device profiles > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The Device profiles screen displays (Figure 8.7 on page 257).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
256
DKB Management
Figure 8.7: Device profiles Screen
The Device profiles screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device profile. • Model — The device model associated with the device profile. • Resolved — Indicates whether the device profile is resolved: Yes or No. • Status — The device profile status: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device profile. Using the Device Profiles Screen The Device profiles screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device profiles screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a device profile to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258.
• Click Delete to delete selected device profiles. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile” on page 276.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive device profiles. For more information, see “Activating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
257
DKB Management
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active device profiles. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Creating a Device Profile Device profiles are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Creating a New Device Profile” on page 191.
Editing a Device Profile To edit a device profile: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), click a device profile from the Name column to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device profile screen displays.
Figure 8.8: Edit device profile Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit device profile screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited device profile. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile” on page 276.
• Click Edit associated model to view or modify the device model associated with the device profile. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device profile. For more information, see “Activating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
258
DKB Management
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device profile. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profiles” on page 276.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general device profile information. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 259.
• Click the Capabilities tab to view or modify capabilities of the device profile. For more information, see “Using the Capabilities Tab” on page 260.
• Click the Hardware tab to view or modify device profile hardware information. For more information, see “Using the Hardware Tab” on page 263.
• Click the Hardware ext tab to view or modify device profile hardware extension information. For more information, see “Using the Hardware Ext Tab” on page 264.
• Click the Software tab to view or modify device profile software information. For more information, see “Using the Software Tab” on page 265.
• Click the Browser tab to view or modify device profile browser information. For more information, see “Using the Browser Tab” on page 266.
• Click the Network tab to view or modify device profile network information. For more information, see “Using the Network Tab” on page 268.
• Click the Wap tab to view or modify device profile WAP information. For more information, see “Using the Wap Tab” on page 268.
• Click the Push tab to view or modify device profile Push information. For more information, see “Using the Push Tab” on page 270.
• Click the MMS tab to view or modify device profile MMS information. For more information, see “Using the MMS Tab” on page 271.
• Click the Settings tab to view or modify device profile settings. For more information, see “Using the Settings Tab” on page 272.
• Click the SMS tab to view or modify device profile SMS information. For more information, see “Using the SMS Tab” on page 273.
• Click the OMA DM CP tab to view or modify available OMA DM access lists of a device for each configurable feature. For more information, see “Using the OMA DM CP Tab” on page 275.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.8 on page 258) allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The device profile status: Active or Inactive. • Url — The URL address of the device profile. • Name — The name of the device profile. • Inherit — If the device profile inherits properties from another device profile, select the other device profile from this list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
259
DKB Management
• Resolved — Indicates whether a detection set is associated with the profile: Yes or No.
• Creation date — The date on which the device profile was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device profile was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Capabilities Tab The Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify device profile capabilities.
Figure 8.9: Edit device profile Screen — Capabilities Tab
The Capabilities tab displays the following information:
• Feature — The feature name. Click a feature name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability” on page 261.
• Status — The feature status: Active or Inactive. • Inherited — Indicates whether the device profile inherits properties from another device profile: Yes or No.
• Added By — The DKB version to first include the feature. • Creation Date — The date on which the device profile was created. In addition to the functions available on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.8 on page 258), from the Capabilities tab, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Feature column, click a feature to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability” on page 261.
• Click New device profile capability to create a new feature. For more information, see “Creating a Capability” on page 262.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
260
DKB Management
• Click Delete device profile capability to delete selected device features. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability” on page 262. Editing a Capability To edit a capability: 1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, click New device profile capability.
3
The Details tab on the Device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.10: Device profile capability Screen — Details Tab
From the Details tab on the Device profile capability screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited device profile capability. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability” on page 262.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device profile capability. For more information, see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device profile capability. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• From the Formatting token list, select a different formatting token for the capability. Click Submit to save changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
261
DKB Management
Creating a Capability To create a capability: 1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, click New device profile capability.
3
The New device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.11: New device profile capability Screen
2. From the Feature list, select a feature for the capability. 3. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the capability. 4. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the capability. 5. Click Submit.
3
The device profile capability is created, and the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen displays.
Deleting a Capability To delete a device profile capability: 1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, check the box next to each capability to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all capabilities. 2. Click Delete device profile capability.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
262
DKB Management
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device profile capability by clicking Delete on the
Edit device profile capability screen.
Using the Hardware Tab The Hardware tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify hardware information for the device profile. This information comes from the Hardware component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.12: Edit device profile Screen — Hardware Tab
The Hardware tab allows you to modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding hardware information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Bits per pixel • Keyboard • CPU • Vendor • Model • Number of soft keys Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
263
DKB Management
• Pointing resolution • Pixel aspect ratio • Screen size • Screen size char • Specify whether the hardware associated with the device profile includes the following (Yes/No):
• • • • • •
Color capable Image capable Sound output capable Standard font proportional Text input capable Voice input capable
Click Submit to save any changes. In addition, you can add a Bluetooth profile, input character set, or an output character set to the hardware settings for the device profile. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Hardware Ext Tab The Hardware ext tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.13 on page 264) allows you to view or modify the additional hardware information for the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 to further detail the hardware characteristics of the device.
Figure 8.13: The Edit device profile Screen — Hardware ext Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
264
DKB Management
The Hardware ext tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Polyphonic channels — The number of polyphonic channels for the hardware extension.
• Camera — Specify whether the hardware extension is a camera: Yes or No. • Countries — Lists countries wehere the device is deployed. • Radio stack — Lists radio protocols supported by the device. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Software Tab The Software tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.14 on page 265) allows you to view or modify software run on devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the Software component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.14: Edit device profile Screen — Software Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
265
DKB Management
The Software tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding software information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Mexe specification • OS name • OS vendor • OS version • Recipient application agent • Software number • Specify whether the software for the device profile includes the following (Yes/No): • Accept downloadable software • Java enabled • Mexe secure domains Click Submit to save any changes. In addition, you can the following to the software settings for the device profile: Audio inputEncoder Common language infrastructure platform CCPP accept CCPP accept encoding CCPP accept language Downloadable software support
Email URL schemes JVM version Java package Java platform Java protocol Mexe classmarks Video input encoder
To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Browser Tab The Browser tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.15 on page 267) allows you to view or modify the WEB/WAP browser used by devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the BrowserUA component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
266
DKB Management
Figure 8.15: Edit device profile Screen — Browser Tab
The Browser tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding browser information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Browser name • Browser version • Html version • JavaScript version • XHTML version • Specify whether the browser for the device profile includes the following (Yes/No): • Frames capable • Java applet enabled • JavaScript enabled • Preference for frames • Tables capable Click Submit to save any changes. In addition, you can add downloadable browser applications and XHTML modules to the browser settings for the device profile. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
267
DKB Management
Using the Network Tab The Network tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify bearer services (SMS, 3G, etc.) supported by devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the NetworkCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.16: Edit device profile Screen — Network Tab
The Network tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding network information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Current bearer service • Supported bluetooth version In addition, you can add security support or supported bearers information to the network settings for the device profile. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Wap Tab The Wap tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.17 on page 269) allows you to view or modify how the WAP protocol is supported in devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the WapCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
268
DKB Management
Figure 8.17: Edit device profile Screen — Wap Tab
The Wap tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding Wap information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Wap device class • WAP version • WML deck size • WTA version • Specify whether the WAP includes a Oma download (Yes/No). In addition, you can add the following information to the WAP settings for the device profile:
• Drm class • Drm constraints • Supported pictogramset • WML script libraries • WML script version • WTAI libraries To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
269
DKB Management
Using the Push Tab The Push tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify WAP protocol implementation details for the devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the PushCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.18: Edit device profile Screen — Push Tab
The Push tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding Push information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Max push request • Message size In addition, you can add the following information to the WAP settings for the device profile:
• Push accept • Push accept application Id • Push accept charset • Push accept encoding • Push accept language To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
270
DKB Management
Using the MMS Tab The MMS tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify MMS protocol for the devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the MMSCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.19: Edit device profile Screen — MMS Tab
The MMS tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding MMS information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Max message size • Max image resolution • Specify whether the MMS includes the following (Yes/No): • CCPP streaming capable • Suppress content adaptation In addition, you can add the following information to the MMS settings for the device profile:
• CCPP accept • CCPP accept charset • CCPP accept language • CCPP accept encoding • MMS version
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
271
DKB Management
• Smil baseset • Content class To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Settings Tab The Settings tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify various settings for devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and describes a device’s behavior while receiving a setting.
Figure 8.20: Edit device profile Screen — Settings Tab
The Settings tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• PIN size — Number of digit of the PIN code of the device (used to accept installation of the setting in the device):
• • •
0 : The device uses no PIN Code 1 : PIN Code of the device contains 1 digit 4 : PIN Code of the device contains 4 digit
• OMA bootstrap connection included — Indicates whether the device accepts a OMA DM Bootstrap that contains connection information.
• OMA bootstrap notification included — Indicates if the device accepts a OMA DM Bootstrap which contains the notification (an event that signals the device to launch an OMA DM session).
• PIN enabled features — Define features that can be installed on the device after the correct PIN is entered.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
272
DKB Management
• IMSI enabled features — Define features that can be installed on the device after the correct IMSI code from the device‘s SIM card is validated.
• WAP 2.0 enabled features — Define features that can be used with the protocol WAP 2.0. All available features not contained in this list must automatically be used with old protocol WAP 1.2.
• Manual activation features — Define features that can be installed on the device without using any type of authentication process. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the SMS Tab The SMS tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.21 on page 274) allows you to view or modify details about different SMS content types supported by devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and defines the logo size a device can accept.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
273
DKB Management
Figure 8.21: Edit device profile Screen — SMS Tab
The SMS tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Specify whether the device includes the following (Yes/No): • EMS R4 support • EMS R5 support
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
274
DKB Management
In addition, you can add the following information to the SMS settings for the device profile: Logo black and white 16x16 Logo black and white 72x14 Logo black and white 32x12 Logo black and white 32x40 Logo black and white 80x41 Logo black and white 88x41 Logo black and white 96x41 Logo black and white 96x65 Logo black and white less than 101x29 Logo black and white less than 101x46 Logo black and white less than 101x50 Logo black and white less than 101x64 Logo grey scale less than 96x65 Logo 64 colors less than 96x64 Logo black and white 8x24 Logo black and white 16x64 Logo black and white 24x42 Logo black and white 40x25
Logo black and white 48x21 Logo black and white 56x18 Logo black and white 64x16 Logo black and white 80x12 Logo black and white 88x11 Logo black and white 96x10 Logo black and white 104x9 Logo black and white 112x9 Logo black and white 120x8 Logo black and white 128x8 Animation black and white 16x16x4 Animation black and white 32x32x4 Logo black and white less than 96x65 Logo black and white less than 96x29 Logo black and white less than 96x46 Logo black and white less than 96x50 Logo black and white less than 96x64
To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the OMA DM CP Tab The OMA DM CP tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.21 on page 274) allows you to view or modify details about different SMS content types supported by devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and defines available OMA DM access lists (the rights around actions on OMA DM Tree Nodes) on a device for each configurable feature.
Figure 8.22: Edit Device profile Screen — OMA DM CP Tab
The OMA DM CP tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Read — Define features that can be read (those which have settings that exist on the OMA DM Tree Node for the device).
• Create — Define features on which a new setting can be created by OMA DM protocol. In this case, new nodes are created on the OMA DM Tree for the device.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
275
DKB Management
• Update — Define features that can be updated (those which have settings that exist on the OMA DM Tree Node for the device).
• Delete — Define features that can be deleted (those which have settings that exist on the OMA DM Tree Node of the device). In this case, existing nodes can be removed from the OMA DM Tree for the device.
Deleting a Device Profile To delete a device profile: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each device profile to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device profiles. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device profile by clicking Delete on the Edit device
profile screen.
Activating Device Profiles To activate device profiles: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each inactive device profile to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive device profiles. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate an edited device profile by clicking Activate on the Edit
device profile screen.
Deactivating Device Profiles To deactivate device profiles: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each active device profile to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
276
DKB Management
2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited device profile by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
device profile screen.
Searching Device Profile Capabilities Device profile capabilities define the features associated with a device profile. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device profile capabilities specific to that criteria. To manage device profile capability filters: 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > Device profile capabilities.
3
The Device profile capabilities > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.23: Device profile capability > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
277
DKB Management
Managing Device Profile Capabilities To view a list of device profile capabilities: 1. From the Device profile capabilities > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The Device profile capabilities screen displays a list of device profile capabilities.
Figure 8.24: Device profile capabilities Screen
The Device profile capabilities screen displays the following information:
• Device profile — The name of the device profile. Click the corresponding Edit to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile Capability” on page 279.
• Feature — The feature associated with the device profile. • Status — The status of the device capability type: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Added by — The first Handset Manager version from which the device profile was added.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
278
DKB Management
Using the Device Profile Capabilities Screen The Device profile capabilities screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device profile capabilities screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit next to a device profile capability to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile Capability” on page 279.
• Click Delete to delete selected device applications. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile Capability” on page 280.
• Click Activate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281. Editing a Device Profile Capability NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a device profile capability. For more
information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device profile capability: 1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), click Edit next to the name of a capability to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.25: Device profile capability Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
279
DKB Management
The Device profile capability screen displays the following information:
• Status — Indicates whether the device profile capability is active, inactive or deprecated (cannot be modified).
• Device profile — The name of the device profile (cannot be modified). • Feature — The name of the feature (cannot be modified). • Device profile capability handler — Indicates which (if any) handler created the capability. These handlers are responsible for automatically creating a capability according to specific information contained within device profile components (cannot be modified).
• Formatting token — Specifies the formatting token used by Handset Manager to find the right algorithm in order to format a content to the device destination.
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the capability (cannot be modified). • Creation date — The date on which the device profile capability was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device profile capability was last modified (updated automatically). 2. Click Submit to save changes. The Device profile capability screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited capability. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile Capability” on page 280.
• Click Activate to activate the edited capability. For more information, see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited capability. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281. Creating a Device Profile Capability To create a device profile capability, you must first edit the device profile to which the capability corresponds. From there, you can create a device profile capability on the Capabilities tab of the Edit Device profile screen. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258. Deleting a Device Profile Capability To delete a device profile capability: 1. From the Device profile capability screen (Figure 8.23 on page 277), check the box next to each capability to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all capabilities.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
280
DKB Management
2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited capability by clicking Delete on the Device profile
capability screen.
Activating Device Profile Capabilities To activate device profile capabilities: 1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), check the box next to each inactive capability to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all capabilities. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited capabilities by clicking Activate on the Device profile
capabilities screen.
Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities To deactivate device profile capabilities: 1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), check the box next to each active capability to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active capabilities. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited capabilities by clicking Deactivate on the Device
profile capability screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
281
DKB Management
Managing Trust Sources A trust source is a certified source for all device information stored within a Device Knowledge Database (DKB).
Viewing Trust Sources To view a list of trust sources: 1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge database > Trust sources.
3
The Trust sources screen displays.
Figure 8.26: Trust sources Screen
The Trust sources screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the trust source. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Private key — Private keys are created in order to securely allow you to modify information.
• Creation date — The date on which the trust source was created. Using the Trust Sources Screen From the Trust sources screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit a trust source. For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Click New trust source to create a new trust source. For more information, see “Creating a Trust Source” on page 286.
• Click Delete to delete selected trust sources. For more information, see “Deleting a Trust Source” on page 287.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
282
DKB Management
Editing a Trust Source To edit a trust source: 1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), click the name of a trust source to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit trust source screen displays.
Figure 8.27: Edit trust source Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Trust Source Screen The Edit device application version screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New trust source to create a new trust source. For more information, see “Creating a Trust Source” on page 286.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application version. For more information, see “Deleting a Trust Source” on page 287.
• Click the Details tab to view general trust source information. Information on the Details tab is view-only.
• Click the Versions tab to modify the versions associated with the trust source. For more information, see “Using the Versions Tab”.
Using the Versions Tab The Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen (Figure 8.28 on page 284) allows you to view a list of versions associated with the trust source.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
283
DKB Management
Figure 8.28: Edit trust source Screen — Versions Tab
In addition to the functions available on the Edit trust source screen, the Versions tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• From the Version column, click a version name to edit. The editing process is the same as when editing a version after a search. For more information, see “Editing a DKB Version” on page 289.
• Click New version to create a new version for the trust source. For more information, see “Creating a Version” on page 285.
• Click Delete version to delete selected versions from the trust source. For more information, see “Deleting a Version” on page 285.
• Click the up or down arrows next to versions to prioritize. The topmost version takes priority.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
284
DKB Management
Creating a Version To create a version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen, click New version.
3
The New version screen displays.
Figure 8.29: New version Screen
2. In the Version field, enter the name of the new trust source version. 3. From the Status list, select the version status: Client, Draft, or Released. 4. In the Comment field, type a short comment about the version (optional). 5. Click Submit.
3
The version is created, and the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen displays (Figure 8.28 on page 284).
Deleting a Version To delete a version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen (Figure 8.28 on page 284), check the box next to each version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions. 2. Click Delete version.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected DKB versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited version by clicking Delete on the Edit version
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
285
DKB Management
Creating a Trust Source NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify trust source information.
For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a trust source: 1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), click New trust source.
3
The New trust source screen displays.
NOTE: The New trust source function is also available when editing a trust source. For
more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
Figure 8.30: New trust source Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the trust source. 3. In the Certification key field, enter the full path and filename to the keystore file for the trust source. Click Browse to search for the file. 4. In the File password field, enter the password required to open the keystore file. 5. In the Private key alias in keystore field, enter the private key alias for the keystore file. 6. In the Password field, enter a password for the trust source. 7. Click Submit.
3
The trust source is created, and the Trust sources screen displays (Figure 8.26 on page 282).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
286
DKB Management
Deleting a Trust Source To delete a trust source: 1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), check the box next to each trust source to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all trust sources. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected trust sources?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited trust source by clicking Delete on the Edit trust
source screen.
Managing DKB Versions You can manage all DKB versions through Content Manager. NOTE: To create a version, you must edit the trust source for which the version is created.
For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
Viewing DKB Versions To view a list of DKB versions: 1. From the Devices menu, select Knowledge base > Versions.
3
The Versions > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Versions screen displays (Figure 8.31 on page 288). For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching DKB Versions” on page 288.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
287
DKB Management
Figure 8.31: Versions Screen
The Versions screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• From the Version column, click a version name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a DKB Version” on page 289.
• From the Trust source column, click a trust source name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Click Delete version to delete selected versions. For more information, see “Deleting a Version” on page 285.
Searching DKB Versions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of versions specific to that criteria. To manage version filters: 1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), click Edit filters.
3
The Versions > Filters screen displays (Figure 8.32 on page 289).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
288
DKB Management
Figure 8.32: Versions > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a DKB Version To edit a DKB version: 1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), click the name of a version from the Version column to edit.
3
The Edit version screen displays.
Figure 8.33: Edit version Screen
2. Modify the following version details as necessary:
• Version — The name of the version. • Status — The status of the version: Client, Draft, or Released.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
289
DKB Management
• Trust source — The name of the trust source with which the version is associated (cannot be modified).
• Comment — A short comment about the version (optional). • Creation date — The date on which the version was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the version was last modified (updated automatically). 3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting a Version To delete a version: 1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), check the box next to each version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions. 2. Click Delete version.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected DKB versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited version by clicking Delete on the Edit version
screen.
Managing DKB Archives Content Manager allows you to view, generate, and download DKB archives. DKB archive generation is possible only on platforms that have at least one master trust source. There are several types of archives:
•
Complete — The archive contains all data associated to a selected release-type version. This version is called “the referenced version”. Versions are numbered in order with all other previous release-type versions of the same trust source.
• Complete client — In addition to the complete archive data, the complete client archive contains data associated to specific client-type versions dedicated to a client.
• Partial — The archive contains data only associated to the specific release or clienttype version. These archives contain only new data added since the last previous archive.
• Mobile 365 token — Partial archive containing only new brands, new models or/and new features.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
290
DKB Management
To manage DKB archives: 1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge base > Archives.
3
The Archives screen displays.
2. If there are archive files present:
• Click Download to download the corresponding archive file. • Click Remove from repository to remove the corresponding archive file. Generating an Archive NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to generate a DKB archive. For more
information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To generate a DKB archive: 1. Click Generate archive.
3
The Archives > Export screen displays.
2. In the Archive name field, enter a name for the archive. 3. Select the type of archive to generate: Complete, Complete Client, or Partial. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the archive. 5. From the DKB Version list, select the first DKB version to include the archive. 6. Click Generate archive.
Managing DKB Synchronizations Synchronization processes allow you to automatically synchronize a DKB with the latest version. During a process, data is imported from a DKB archive into a platform database. This data then provides a historical record of the imported DKB archive. The synchronization process occurs in two steps: 1. Notification generation: All data coming from the archive is verified using data coming from the database. In turn, Create, Delete, or Update notifications are generated according to the state of the database and the imported archive. NOTE: While notifications are being generated, the process status displays as Building. NOTE: During the transition between steps 1 and 2, the process status displays as
Pending.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
291
DKB Management
2. Accept or refuse notifications: After all notifications are generated, there are two additional notifications possible:
• Accept notifications: All Create, Delete, or Update notifications that take place within the database are marked Accepted.
• Refuse notifications: All Create, Delete, or Update notifications that do not take place within the database are marked Refused. NOTE: When the process has finished, the process status displays as Done. If an error or a
stop action by an administrator has occurred, the process status displays as Aborted.
Viewing Synchronization Processes To view current processes: 1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge base > Synchronizations.
3
The Synchronizations > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Synchronizations screen displays a list of current processes.
NOTE: Content Manager displays a list of Pending processes by default. To change the
search criteria for synchronizations, see “Searching Synchronization Processes” on page 293.
Figure 8.34: Synchronizations Screen
The Synchronizations screen displays the following information:
• Status — The status of the process. For a description of each status, see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
• Type — The type of archive. For a description of each type, see “Managing DKB Archives” on page 290.
• Trust source — The trust source associated with the archive.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
292
DKB Management
• Archive — The DKB archive path and filename. • Creation date — The date on which the process was created. Using the Synchronizations Screen The Synchronizations screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Synchronizations screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit to monitor the corresponding process. For more information, see “Monitoring a Synchronization Process” on page 293.
• Click New process to create a new process. For more information, see “Creating a Synchronization Process” on page 296.
Searching Synchronization Processes To search processes: 1. From the Synchronizations screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Synchronizations > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.35: Synchronizations > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Monitoring a Synchronization Process To monitor a synchronization process: 1. From the Synchronizations screen, click Edit next to a process to monitor.
3
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen displays (Figure 8.36 on page 294).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
293
DKB Management
Figure 8.36: Synchronizations > Edit process Screen (1 of 2)
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen provides the following information:
• Type — The type of archive. For a description of each archive type, see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
• Status — The current status of the process. For a description of each process status, see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291. NOTE: If the process status is Pending and you have the appropriate rights, you may also
be able to perform the following tasks: • Click Refresh to view the most current process status.
• Click Stop process to stop the process. Once a pending process is stopped, you may be able to, with the appropriate rights, accept or refuse notifications manually. For more information, see “Managing Process Notifications” on page 295. NOTE: If the process status is Done, everything on the Synchronizations > Edit
process screen is view-only.
• Archive — The path to the DKB archive. • Synchronization process state — A detailed description of a process status. • Trust source — The name of the trust source used in the process. • Versions — Versions of the DKB to be synchronized. • Creation date — The date on which the synchronization process was created. • Last modification date — The date on which the synchronization was last modified.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
294
DKB Management
Managing Process Notifications All data coming from the archive is verified using data coming from the database. In turn, Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications are generated according to the state of the database and the imported archive. After all Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications are generated, two additional notifications are assigned, determining the actions taken to the database:
• Accept notifications: All Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications that take place within the database are marked Accepted.
• Refuse notifications: All Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications that do not take place within the database are marked Refused. NOTE: With the appropriate rights, you can elect to accept all or refuse all notifications
during a process. For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To accept or refuse all notifications for a process: 1. From the Synchonization process screen (Figure 8.34 on page 292), click Edit next to a process for which to manage process notifications.
3
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen displays (Figure 8.36 on page 294).
NOTE: In order to accept or refuse the notifications for a process, the process you edit
must have a Pending status.
2. From the Synchronizations > Edit process screen, click Stop process.
3
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen refreshes and displays a list of all process notifications (Figure 8.37 on page 296).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
295
DKB Management
Figure 8.37: Synchronizations > Edit process Screen (2 of 2)
3. To accept all notifications and make the listed changes to the database, click Accept all notifications. To refuse all notifications and leave the database unchanged, click Refuse all notifications.
Creating a Synchronization Process To create a synchronization process: 1. From the Synchronizations or Synchronizations > Edit process screens, click New process.
3
The Create process screen displays (Figure 8.38 on page 297).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
296
DKB Management
Figure 8.38: Create process Screen
2. In the Reference archive field, enter the path and filename to the archive file to access during the process. Click Browse to search for the archive file. 3. Click Submit.
Managing Device and DKB Rights The Global rights screen allows you to manage rights affecting all devices and data in the Device Knowledge Database. NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to manage these rights. You may also
manage only those rights already granted to you. For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Granting Device and DKB Rights To grant rights: 1. From the Device menu, Select Rights > Rights.
3
The Rights screen displays (Figure 8.39 on page 298).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
297
DKB Management
Figure 8.39: Rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of each right, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17. 3. From the Groups list, select the groups that will benefit from selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights and their associated groups are displayed on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Device and DKB Rights To remove device and DKB rights: 1. Click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to revoke.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
298
9
Delivery Management
This chapter contains the following information: Managing Categories ............................................................................................. Viewing Categories ................................................................................................ Searching Categories ............................................................................................. Creating a New Category........................................................................................ Editing a Category ................................................................................................. Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... Managing Offers .................................................................................................... Viewing Offers ...................................................................................................... Searching Offers ................................................................................................... Creating a New Offer ............................................................................................. Editing an Offer..................................................................................................... Managing Global Offer Rights .................................................................................. Managing Download Codes ..................................................................................... Deleting an Offer................................................................................................... Managing Bundles ................................................................................................. Viewing Bundles .................................................................................................... Searching Bundles ................................................................................................. Creating a Bundle.................................................................................................. Editing a Bundle .................................................................................................... Deleting a Bundle .................................................................................................. Downloading a Bundle............................................................................................ Creating a Bundle Bulk Process ............................................................................... Viewing Popular Downloads .................................................................................... Managing Triggers ................................................................................................. Searching Triggers................................................................................................. Managing Subscriptions.......................................................................................... Editing or Deleting a Subscription ............................................................................ Editing or Deleting a Subscription ............................................................................ Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights........................................................................ Managing Content Topics ........................................................................................ Viewing Topics ...................................................................................................... Searching Topics ................................................................................................... Creating a New Topic ............................................................................................. Editing a Topic ...................................................................................................... Deleting a Topic .................................................................................................... Managing Topic Rights............................................................................................ Publishing Topics ................................................................................................... Managing Content Systems..................................................................................... Viewing Content Systems ....................................................................................... Searching Content Systems .................................................................................... Creating a New Content System .............................................................................. Editing a Content System ....................................................................................... Deleting a Content System .....................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
300 300 302 302 304 309 310 310 312 312 314 334 335 336 337 337 339 339 341 355 355 357 362 363 364 365 366 366 367 368 368 370 370 372 377 377 379 381 381 382 382 384 385
299
Delivery Management
This chapter describes the Catalog and Content portions of the Delivery menu, which allow you to manage all elements used in the delivery service logic and delivery content. For additional information about the System management and Tracking portions of the Delivery menu, see “System Configuration” on page 386.
Managing Categories Categories allow you to organize downloaded items and present them on a user’s Content Manager interface, providing users with a method of navigation through which to browse offers. Categories are associated to offers and bundles, and can differ between services. NOTE: One category is always associated to a parent front-office service.
Dynamic categories are associated to bundles using dynamic information provided when creating or editing a category. When the scheduled association time is reached, all bundles that were previously associated to the category are disassociated, allowing new bundles to become associated with the category. For more information about dynamic category information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304. NOTE: To associate a category with a bundle, you must first edit the bundle to which the
category is to be associated. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
Viewing Categories To view categories: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Categories.
3 The Categories > Filters screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Categories” on page 302. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all categories.
• The Categories screen displays (Figure 9.1 on page 301). Categories are listed by each service on the end-user interface.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
300
Delivery Management
Figure 9.1: Categories Screen
The Categories screen displays the following information:
• Full name — The full name of the category. Click a category name to view or modify the category. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.
• Type — The category type. • Description — A short description of the category (if available). • End user service — The front-office service associated with the category. Using the Categories Screen The Categories screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Categories screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Full name column, click a category to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 302.
• Click Delete category to remove all selected categories. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 309.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
301
Delivery Management
Searching Categories The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of categories specific to that criteria. To manage category filters: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click Edit filters.
3 The Categories > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.2: Categories > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Category To create a new category: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click New category. NOTE: The New category function is also available when searching for or editing a
category. For more information, see “Searching Categories” on page 302 and “Editing a Category” on page 304.
3 The Create category screen displays (Figure 9.3 on page 303).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
302
Delivery Management
Figure 9.3: Create category Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select a front-office service with which to associate the category. The category is then accessible through only the service selected here. 3. From the Parent category list, select a parent category (if applicable). 4. In the Name field, enter a name for the category. Two categories can have the same name as long as they have two different parent categories. 5. From the Type list, select the type of category to create: keyword, default, or headline. 6. In the Description field, enter a short description for the category (optional). 7. Check the Dynamic box to apply dynamic-related data to the category. If checked, this category is to be scheduled for dynamic association with one or more bundles. If not checked, you must edit bundles individually in order to associate the category. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• If the category is dynamic, define the maximum number of delivery bundles and timeslots for the dynamic category in the Delivery bundles max count field.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
303
Delivery Management
• Set a schedule for the dynamic category. Check the “repetitive” option if you wish to repeat the schedule several times; otherwise, the category is associated only once. For example: To associate this category each day at 8 AM, from the Hour list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked. To associate this category on the first day of the month only when the first day is a Monday, from the Day of the month list, select “1” and from the Day of the week list, select “Monday”. 8. Click Submit.
3 The Edit category screen displays (Figure 9.4), allowing you to view or modify the new category.
Editing a Category To modify a category: 1. From the List categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click the name of a category to modify. NOTE: The Edit category screen also displays immediately after creating a new category.
3 The Details tab on the Edit category screen displays.
Figure 9.4: Edit category Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit category screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New category to create a category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 302.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
304
Delivery Management
• Click Delete to delete the edited category. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 309.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general category details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 305.
• Click the Data for dynamic category tab to view or modify dynamic data applied to the category. For more information, see “Using the Data For Dynamic Category Tab” on page 305.
• Click the MetaData tab to view or modify metadata information associated with the category. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 307.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit category screen allows you to view or modify a category’s general information, such as the parent category, category name, or description as necessary. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Data For Dynamic Category Tab NOTE: The Data for dynamic category tab applies only when the Dynamic check box is
checked.
The Data for dynamic category tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 9.5 on page 306) allows you to view or modify any dynamic data specified for the category.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
305
Delivery Management
Figure 9.5: Edit category Screen — Data for dynamic category Tab
The Data for dynamic category tab allows you to modify the following information:
• Dynamic — Check the box to dynamically associate the category with one or more bundles. NOTE: The Data for dynamic category tab does not apply to non-dynamic
categories. If the category is to be non-dynamic, skip this section. For information about associating non-dynamic categories with bundles, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• Delivery bundle max count — Specify the maximum number of delivery bundles for the dynamic category.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
306
Delivery Management
• Repetitive — Check the box to repeat the dynamic association schedule. If the box is unchecked, the assocation will occur only once.
• Specify the times and dates on which the dynamic association is to occur. For example: To associate this category each day at 8 AM, from the Hour list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked. To associate this category on the first day of the month only when the first day is a Monday, from the Day of the month list, select “1” and from the Day of the week list, select “Monday”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
• Bundle offer — The category is dynamically associated with bundles belonging to the offer selected here (optional).
• Bundle categories — The category is dynamically associated with bundles associated with the categories selected here (optional). Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple bundle categories.
• Bundle reference date order — The category is dynamically associated with bundles having reference dates that meet the criteria specified here (optional). If a bundle reference date order was specified, define the bundle dates to include. Check the Disable boxes to include all reference dates.
• Popularity type — The category is dynamically associated with bundles having a popularity type selected here (optional). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit category screen allows you to view any metadata associated with the edited category. You can search for metadata by language and type.
Figure 9.6: Edit category Screen — MetaData Tab
In addition to searching metadata by language and type, the MetaData tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New meta data to create metadata for the category. For more information, see “Creating Metadata” below.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
307
Delivery Management
• If metadata exists for the category, a list displays. Click a metadata type to view or modify. For more information, see “Editing Metadata” on page 309.
• Click Delete meta data to delete selected metadata from the category. For more information, see “Deleting Metadata” on page 309. Creating Metadata To create metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create meta data screen displays.
Figure 9.7: Create meta data Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of metadata to create.
3 The Create meta data screen refreshes and displays fields specific to the type selected.
• textdescription — A metadata type made up of a text message. When selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language and enter a text description for the metadata.
• picture_description — A metadata type that includes a picture file. When selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language, enter a text description, and locate the picture file to include in the metadata.
• name — A metadata type that includes a name. When selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language and enter a name for the metadata. 3. Click Submit when finished.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
308
Delivery Management
Editing Metadata To view or modify existing metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen, click a metadata type to edit.
3 The Edit metadata screen displays. NOTE: Metadata information that can be updated depends on the metadata type selected
from the MetaData tab. For more information on metadata types, see “Creating Metadata” on page 308.
2. Make changes as necessary, and click Submit when finished. Deleting Metadata To delete metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 9.6 on page 307), check the box next to one or more listed metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all listed metadata. 2. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected category meta data?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion.
Deleting a Category NOTE: Deleting a category will not delete associated bundles.
To delete a category: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), check the box next to one or more categories to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all categories. 2. Click Delete category.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected categories?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited categories by clicking Delete category on the Edit
category screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
309
Delivery Management
Managing Offers Offers are packages of items that can be downloaded by users that are associated to authorized groups and compatible devices. Offers are composed of the following:
• Bundles — The actual items that can be ordered by users. Each bundle defines the content to be downloaded (through Topics), the method by which they are formatted (using patterns), and which delivery scenario is to be used (through Session sequences).
• Triggers — Define when bundles should be delivered. Viewing Offers To view all authorized offers and their associated bundles: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Offers.
3 The Offers > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all offers. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Offers” on page 312.
Figure 9.8: Offers Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
310
Delivery Management
The Offers screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the offer. Click an offer name to view or modify the offer. For more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
• Description — A short description of the offer (if available). • Application Id — The application ID used to deliver contents from the offer. • End-user service — The front-office service associated with the offer. • Status — The status of the offer. Values include Published (can be downloaded), Not Validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the offer was Published, but has since been deleted).
• Technical — Indicates whether or not the offer is technical. A technical offer is an internal offer, and is linked only to technical bundles. Technical offers and bundles are used for things such as passwords, activation codes, credit notifications, or any other kind of “dynamic” content based upon a user’s profile. Technical offers are not accessible from storefronts. For more information about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
Using the Offers Screen The Offers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Offers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click an offer to edit. For more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
• Click New offer to create a new offer. For more information, see “Creating a New Offer” on page 312.
• Click Delete offer to remove all selected offers. For more information, see “Deleting an Offer” on page 336.
• Click Global end-users rights to manage users rights affecting all offers. For more information, see “Managing Global Offer Rights” on page 334.
• Click Manage download codes to export default SMS download codes associated with one or several offers. For more information, see “Managing Download Codes” on page 335.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
311
Delivery Management
Searching Offers The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of offers specific to that criteria. To manage offer filters: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click Edit filters.
3 The Offers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.9: Offers > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Offer To create a new offer: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click New offer.
3 The Create offer screen displays (Figure 9.10 on page 313). NOTE: The New offer function is also available when searching for or editing an offer. For
more information, see “Searching Offers” on page 312 and “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
312
Delivery Management
Figure 9.10: Create offer Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the offer. No two offers can have the same name. 3. In the Description field, enter a short description for the offer (optional). 4. From the End-user service list, select front-office service with which to associate the offer. Only authorized group users of the selected this service will be able to access the offer. 5. From the Application ID list, select an ID used to deliver messages. Available IDs are retrieved from messaging credentials associated to the selected front-office service. 6. From the Status list, select a status for the offer. Values include Draft or Not Validated. NOTE: Offers can be published only if they contain at least one published bundle.
7. Check the Technical box to indicate whether the offer is technical. 8. Click Submit when finished.
3 The Details tab on the Edit offer screen displays, allowing you to modify the new offer.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
313
Delivery Management
Editing an Offer To edit a offer: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click the name of an offer to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit offer screen displays. NOTE: The Edit offer screen also displays immediately after creating a new offer.
Figure 9.11: Edit offer Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Offer Screen From the Edit offer screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New offer to create a new offer. For more information about creating an offer, see “Creating a New Offer” on page 312.
• Click Delete to remove the edited offer. For more information about deleting offers, see “Deleting an Offer” on page 336.
• Click Manage download codes to export SMS download codes for the edited offer. For more information, see “Managing Download Codes” on page 335.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify offer details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 315.
• Click the Bundle templates tab to manage bundle templates associated with the offer. For more information about managing bundles, see “Using the Bundle Templates Tab” on page 315.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
314
Delivery Management
• Click the Offer capabilities tab to manage devices compatible with the offer. For more information about viewing compatible devices, see “Viewing Offer Compatibilities” on page 330.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the offer. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 331.
• Click the End-user rights tab to manage front-office group rights on the edited offer. For more information, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332.
• Click the Administration rights tab to manage back-office group rights on the edited offer. For more information, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.11 on page 314) allows you to modify the following details about the selected offer:
• Name — The unique name of the offer. No two offers can have the same name. • Description — A short description for the offer (optional). • End-user service — The front-office service associated with the offer (cannot be modified).
• Application ID — The ID used to deliver messages. Available IDs are retrieved from messaging credentials associated to the selected end-user service.
• Status — The status of the offer. Status values include: • Published — offer can be downloaded • Draft/Not validated — offer cannot be downloaded • Deprecated — offer was Published, but has since been deleted NOTE: The offer can be published only if it contains at least one published bundle.
• Technical — Indicates whether the offer is technical. For a full description of a technical offer, see “Viewing Offers” on page 310.
Using the Bundle Templates Tab The Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.12 on page 316) allows you to manage the bundle templates used with the offer. A bundle template is used to automatically create new bundles after a topic is created. A bundle template contains all useful bundle information, delivery triggers, and topic filters. Topic filters determine whether to include or exclude newly-created topics for which to generate bundles. Delivery triggers are then defined in the bundle template and associated to the new bundle.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
315
Delivery Management
Figure 9.12: Edit offer Screen — Bundle templates Tab
The Bundle templates tab displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the bundle template. Click a name to view or modify the bundle template. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Categories — The names of the categories linked to a bundle template. • Content system — The content system used to filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the listed content system.
• Session sequence — The session sequence linked to a bundle template. • Status — The status of the bundle template. Values include: Validated (enables automatic bundle creation) or Draft. The Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bundles tab, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a bundle template to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle template. For more information about creating a bundle, see “Creating a Bundle Template” on page 316.
• Click Delete bundle to remove the edited bundle template. For more information about deleting bundles, see “Deleting a Bundle Template” on page 330.
• Click Published to change the status of selected bundle templates to Published. Creating a Bundle Template To create a bundle template: 1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen, click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle template screen displays (Figure 9.13 on page 317).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
316
Delivery Management
Figure 9.13: Create bundle template Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the bundle template. 3. From the Content system list, select a content system to use to filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the content system selected here. 4. From the Topic type list, select a topic type to use to filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is of the type selected here. 5. In the Bundle name template field, enter the naming convention the bundle template will use to name new bundles. Possible parameters include:
• $topic.name — names the bundle after the topic that triggers bundle creation • $topic.id — names the bundle after the topic ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
317
Delivery Management
• $topic.contentSystem — names the bundle after the content system ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.type — names the bundle after the type of topic that triggers bundle creation • $topic.contentBundleType — names the bundle after the content template of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.categories — names the bundle after the content categories of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.fetch count — names the bundle after the fetch count of the topic that triggers bundle creation 6. From the Session sequence list, select a sequence that defines how the contents in the bundle template are delivered. 7. From the Bundle status list, select the status of newly created bundles. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded). 8. Check the Technical box to indicate whether bundles created using the bundle template are technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337. 9. From the Categories list, select one or more categories to associate when bundles are created. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. 10. In the Reference date field, enter the reference date for each bundle created using the template. The reference date is the date criteria by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. 11. Click Submit.
3 The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen displays allowing you to modify the bundle template. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318. Editing a Bundle Template To edit a bundle template: 1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen, click the name of a bundle template to edit.
3 The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen displays (Figure 9.14 on page 319). NOTE: The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen also displays immediately
after creating a new bundle template.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
318
Delivery Management
Figure 9.14: Edit bundle template Screen — General Tab
From the Edit bundle template screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New template to create a new bundle template. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle Template” on page 316.
• Click Delete template to delete the edited bundle template. For more information, see “Deleting a Bundle Template” on page 330.
• Click the General tab to modify general information about the bundle. For more information, see “Using the General Tab” on page 319.
• Click the Topic details tab to modify topics associated with the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Topic Details Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Topic filters tab to search for topics. For more information, see “Using the Topic Filters Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Bundle Details tab to manage for the bundle template. For more information, see “Using the Bundle Details Tab” on page 321.
• Click the Content templates tab to manage content templates associated with the edited bundle template. For more information, see “Using the Content Templates Tab” on page 323.
• Click the Triggers on content tab to manage “on content” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Trigger On Content Tab” on page 324.
• Click the Triggers on message tab to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers on Message Tab” on page 325.
• Click the Triggers on schedule tab to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab” on page 326. Using the General Tab. The General tab (Figure 9.14) allows you to change the name and status of the bundle template.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
319
Delivery Management
Using the Topic Details Tab. The Topic Details tab (Figure 9.15) allows you to manage topics associated with the bundle template. Topics act as “content selectors” to retrieve contents from the “content” repository or from other content systems. When the bundle delivery is triggered, Content Manager initiates the delivery of all topics associated to the bundle template and compatible with the recipient device. Topics are ordered within a bundle to indicate which topic is delivered first. The delivery sequence of different topics is defined by the session sequence associated with the bundle. Each topic is associated with one or several patterns that define how bundle contents are converted to deliverable contents.
Figure 9.15: Edit bundle template Screen — Topic details Tab
1. From the Content system list, select a content system by which the template will filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the content system selected here. 2. From the Topic type list, select whether the topic is linked to a bundleid (content) or category (content category). When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is of the type selected here. 3. Click Submit when finished. Using the Topic Filters Tab. The Topic filters tab allows you to specify criteria by which to associate topics with the bundle template. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your associations. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
320
Delivery Management
Figure 9.16: Edit bundle template Screen— Topic filters Tab
Using the Bundle Details Tab. The Bundle Details tab (Figure 9.17 on page 322) allows you to view or modify bundle template details.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
321
Delivery Management
Figure 9.17: Edit bundle template Screen — Bundle Details Tab
The Bundle Details tab allows you to view or modify the following details of the associated bundle template:
• Name template — The naming convention used by the template to name newly created bundles. Possible parameters include:
• $topic.name — names the bundle after the topic that triggers bundle creation • $topic.id — names the bundle after the topic ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.contentSystem — names the bundle after the content system ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.type — names the bundle after the type of topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.contentBundleType — names the bundle after the content template of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.categories — names the bundle after the content categories of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.fetch count — names the bundle after the fetch count of the topic that triggers bundle creation
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
322
Delivery Management
• Session sequence — This sequence defines how the contents in a bundle are delivered.
• Bundle status — The status of created bundles. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded).
• Technical — Indicates whether bundles created using the template are technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
• Categories — Select one or more categories to associate with the bundles created using the template. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• Reference date — The date by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. • Enable trigger on demand — Check this box to activate “on demand” triggers for the bundle. Click Submit to save any changes. Using the Content Templates Tab. The Content templates tab allows you to manage content templates associated with the bundle template.
Figure 9.18: Edit bundle template Screen — Content templates Tab
To add a content template: 1. Select one or more templates from the Available content templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. 2. Click Add.
3 The selected templates display in the Associated content templates list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
323
Delivery Management
To remove a content template: 1. Select one or more templates from the Associated content templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. 2. Click Remove.
3 The selected templates display in the Available content templates list. Using the Trigger On Content Tab. The Trigger on content tab (Figure 9.19 on page 324) allows you to manage “on content” triggers (“push” triggers) for the bundle template. This trigger is activated when new content is detected by one of the topics associated with the bundle template. Only one “on content” trigger can be configured per bundle.
Figure 9.19: Edit bundle template Screen — Trigger on content Tab
Enabling an “on content” Trigger To enable an “on content” trigger: 1. Check the Enabled box to activate the trigger. To disable the trigger, uncheck the Enabled box. 2. Select the following information for the trigger:
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include:
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
324
Delivery Management
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously • Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule target sequences only).
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 3. Click Submit when finished. Using the Triggers on Message Tab. The Triggers on message tab (Figure 9.20) allows you to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated when a message meets certain rules and is sent or received on the application ID associated with the parent offer. The Triggers on message tab allows you to define the rules to be used to activate the bundle. You can define several triggers or “sets of rules” for the same bundle. To initiate a delivery, a message must meet ALL of the rules contained in one of the triggers. In this case, the trigger is activated even if the message does not meet the rules of the other triggers.
Figure 9.20: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on message Tab
The Triggers on message tab displays the filter criteria defined for existing triggers.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
325
Delivery Management
Creating an “on message” Trigger To create a new trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click New trigger.
3 The Create trigger screen displays, allowing you to define the filter criteria for the trigger. For information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Click Create trigger when finished. Editing an “on message” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Edit trigger next to the trigger to edit. 3 The Edit trigger on message screen displays, allowing you to modify the filter criteria for the trigger. For more information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Make changes as necessary. To delete an existing trigger filter, click the filter to remove.
next to the
3. Click Submit to save any changes. Deleting an “on message” Trigger To delete a trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Remove trigger next to the trigger to delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected trigger?” displays. 2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab. The Triggers on schedule tab (Figure 9.21 on page 327) allows you to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle template. These triggers are activated at predefined times, according to a certain schedule.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
326
Delivery Management
Figure 9.21: Edit bundle template Screen — Triggers on schedule Tab
Creating an “on schedule” Trigger To create an “on schedule” trigger: 1. Enter the following information on the Triggers on schedule tab:
• Trigger name — The name of the new trigger. • Repetitive — Check this option to repeat the schedule. Otherwise, the trigger is activated only once. Select the times when the trigger should be activated. For example, to trigger a delivery each day at 8:00 AM: from the Hours list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked. To trigger a delivery on the first Monday of each month: from the Day of week list, select “Monday”, from the Day of the month list, select “1”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
327
Delivery Management
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include: • Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value) • Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously
• Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule target sequences only).
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 2. Click Create trigger when finished.
3 The new trigger is listed on the right side of the tab. Editing an “on schedule” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the list of existing triggers, click the name of the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on schedule screen displays (Figure 9.22 on page 329).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
328
Delivery Management
Figure 9.22: Edit trigger on schedule Screen
The Edit trigger on schedule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete trigger on schedule to remove the edited trigger. • Make changes to the trigger as necessary, and click Submit when finished. Deleting an “on schedule” Trigger To delete an existing trigger: 1. From the Edit trigger on schedule screen, click Delete trigger on schedule.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
329
Delivery Management
Deleting a Bundle Template To delete a bundle template: 1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.12 on page 316), check the boxes next to the bundle templates to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all templates. 2. Click Delete bundle templates.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected bundle templates?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited bundle template by clicking Delete template on the
Edit bundle template screen.
Viewing Offer Compatibilities The Offer compatibilities tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to search for and list all devices that are compatible with the offer. A device is marked as compatible if at least one associated bundle is compatible.
Figure 9.23: Edit offer Screen — Offer compatibilities Tab
1. From the Feature list, select the feature for which to search. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for which to search. 3. From the Brands list, select one or more device brands for which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
330
Delivery Management
4. Specify whether or not to display inherited profiles. 5. Click Show filter.
3 Results of the search display at the bottom of the Offer compatibilities tab. This information is view-only.
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to review any metadata that may be associated with the offer, and create or delete metadata. You can search for metadata by language and type. Metadata types include the following:
• Billing default — default billing information (short code and price by country and operator)
• Billing MO — billing information used on sent MO (short code and price by country and operator)
• Billing MT — not currently used • Billing IVR — billing information used with IVR (short code and price by country and operator) Creating Metadata. To create metadata for an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen, click New meta data from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen.
3 The Create metadata screen displays. Select a metadata type and language, then click Submit. Editing Metadata. To edit existing metadata for an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Deleting Metadata. To delete metadata from an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected offer meta data?” displays. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
331
Delivery Management
Using the End-Users Rights Tab The End-users rights tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to define which front-office groups can receive the selected offer contents. For information about granting offer rights affecting all offers, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333. NOTE: Only those front-office groups attached to services on which you have rights are
listed.
Figure 9.24: Edit offer Screen — End-users rights Tab
Adding End-User Offer Rights The “buy offer” right is the only right available on the End-users rights tab. This right allows groups to access and download the offer’s contents through any of the bundle triggers defined for the offer. To add the “buy offer” right to front-office groups: 1. Check the box next to the “buy offer” right. 2. From the Groups list, select one or more groups to which to grant the “buy offer” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3 The groups granted the “buy-offer” right are listed on the right side of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
332
Delivery Management
Revoking End-User Offer Rights To remove the “buy offer” right from end-user groups: 1. From the End-users rights tab on the Edit offer screen, click the from which to revoke the “buy offer” right.
next to each group
Using the Administration Rights Tab The Administration rights tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to define the groups to receive the edited offer. The “Read catalog item” right is the only right available on the Administration rights tab. This right allows back-office groups to access and download the offer’s contents using any of the bundle triggers defined for the offer.
Figure 9.25: Edit offer Screen — Administration rights Tab
Adding Back-Office Offer Rights To define the groups receiving the edited offer: 1. Check the box next to the “Read catalog item” right. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the “Read catalog item” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3 The groups granted the “Read catalog item” right are listed on the right side of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
333
Delivery Management
Revoking Back-Office Offer Rights To remove rights to the offer: 1. From the Administration rights tab on the Edit offer screen, click the group from which to revoke the “Read catalog item” right.
next to each
Managing Global Offer Rights The End-users rights screen allows you to define which groups receive all offers. For information about granting access to a single offer, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332. The “Buy offer” right is the only right available on the End-users rights screen. This right allows back-office groups to access any offer and any associated content.
Adding Global Offer Rights To grant groups access to all offers: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click Global end-users rights.
3 The End-users rights screen displays. NOTE: Only those front-office groups on which you have rights are listed.
Figure 9.26: End-users rights Screen
2. Check the box next to the “buy offer” right. 3. Select the groups to which to grant the “buy offer” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
334
Delivery Management
4. Click Add right.
3 The groups granted the “buy-offer” right are listed on the right side of the tab. Revoking Global Offer Rights To remove group access to all offers: 1. From the End-users rights screen, click the the “buy offer” right.
next to each group from which to revoke
Managing Download Codes To export default (automatically generated) SMS download codes associated to one or several offers: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), check the boxes next to the offers for which to download SMS codes. 2. Click Manage download codes.
3 The Manage download codes screen displays. NOTE: You can also manage download codes related to an edited offer by clicking Manage
download codes on the Edit offer screen. For more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
The Manage download codes screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Refresh to update the list of export files. • Click Launch new export to initiate a new export. Content Manager generates SMS codes for the selected offers and their child bundles and stores them in a .csv file for download.
• To delete existing export files, check the boxes next to the files to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all files. Click Delete files.
• Click Download next to the export file to download.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
335
Delivery Management
Export File Formats The format for each export file is as follows: one line per device and per bundle, with columns separated by commas “,”. The following table defines the export file columns: Field
Type
Offer ID
String
ID (internal object key) of the parent offer of 0000010810FD309E-00325 the bundle
Description
Example
Offer name
String
Name of the parent offer
Bundle ID
String
ID (internal object key) of the bundle
0000010810FDD700-00340
Bundle name
String
Name of the bundle
GlobalBundle
Free offer
Device brand
String
Brand of the device
Motorola
Device model
String
Model of the device
C650
Terminal ID
Integer
Internal terminal ID of the device
570004
Simple SMS code
String
Simple SMS code, followed by “|”
0a4m57|
Bundle SMS code
Integer
Offer SMS code
String
Bundle/Brand (or alias)/Model (or alias) GlobalBundle m c650| Globalcodes. Each possible code is separated by “|”. Bundle motorola c650| Offer/Brand (or alias)/Model (or alias) codes. free offer m c650|free offer Each possible code is separated by “|”. motorola c650|
Deleting an Offer Deleting an offer results in the deletion of all attached bundle templates. NOTE: If you delete an active offer, its status is switched to Deprecated. If the offer is not
active, it is removed immediately.
To delete an offer: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), check the box next to one or more offers to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all offers. 2. Click Delete offer.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected offers?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited offer by clicking Delete offer on the Edit offer
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
336
Delivery Management
Managing Bundles From the Delivery menu, you can view, edit, create, and delete delivery bundles.
Viewing Bundles To view a list of bundles: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Bundles.
3 The Bundles > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all bundles. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Bundles” on page 339.
3 The Bundles screen displays.
Figure 9.27: Bundles Screen
The Bundles screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the bundle. Click a bundle name to view or modify the bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• Numeric alias — A digital identification number associated with the bundle. • Session sequence — The session sequence associated with the bundle. Possible sequences include:
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
337
Delivery Management
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously • Status — The status of the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the bundle was Published, but has since been deleted).
• Technical — A technical bundle is, for example, linked to a session sequence whose type is Workflow-based. A trigger is defined in the bundle, and when a SMS-MO is received and triggers this bundle, a delivery session is created and follows the Workflow-based sequence. This sequence can then create a new session and send contents by sending another bundle to the user. In effect, the technical bundle is not used to send contents directly to a user, it is used as a SMS-MO dispatcher.
Using the Bundles Screen The Bundles screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bundles screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• On the right side of the table, click Download to download the corresponding bundle. For more information, see “Using the Popularity Tab” on page 353.
• On the right side of the table, click Bulk process to create a bulk process for the corresponding bundle. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle Bulk Process” on page 357.
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle. For more information, see“Creating a Bundle” on page 339.
• Click Delete bundle to remove all selected bundles. For more information, see “Deleting a Bundle” on page 355.
• Click Publish to enable download of all selected bundles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
338
Delivery Management
Searching Bundles The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of bundles specific to that criteria. To manage bundle filters: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Edit filters.
3 The Bundles > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.28: Bundles > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Bundle To create a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle screen displays (Figure 9.29 on page 340).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
339
Delivery Management
Figure 9.29: Create Bundle Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the bundle. 3. From the Session sequence list, select a sequence method that defines how the contents in the bundle are delivered. For more about session sequences, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337. 4. From the Status list, select a status for the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded). 5. From the Categories list, select one or more categories to associate with the bundle. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. 6. Check the Technical box to indicate whether the bundle is technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337. 7. If necessary, modify the date in the Reference date field. The reference date is the date criteria by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. For more information about dynamic categories, see “Editing a Category” on page 304. 8. Click Submit when finished.
3 The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays allowing you to modify the new bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
340
Delivery Management
Editing a Bundle To edit a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen, click the name of a bundle to edit from the Name column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays. NOTE: The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen also displays immediately after creating
a new bundle.
Figure 9.30: Edit bundle Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit bundle screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle” on page 339.
• Click Delete bundle to delete the edited bundle. For more information, see “Deleting a Bundle” on page 355.
• Click Download to download the edited bundle. • Click the Details tab to modify general information about the bundle. For more information, see “Using the General Tab” on page 319.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
341
Delivery Management
• Click the Topics tab to modify topics associated with the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Topic Details Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Bundle capabilities tab to manage device capabilities for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Bundle Details Tab” on page 321.
• Click the Triggers on message tab to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers on Message Tab” on page 348.
• Click the Triggers on schedule tab to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab” on page 348.
• Click the Triggers on content tab to manage “on content” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Content Tab” on page 352.
• Click the Popularity tab to calculate the download totals for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Popularity Tab” on page 353.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the bundle. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 354.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab (Figure 9.30 on page 341) allows you to modify the following details of the bundle:
• Id — The internal identification number assigned to the bundle (cannot be modified). • Name — The name of the bundle. • Numeric alias — The numeric alias automatically generated for the bundle by Content Manager and used for the default MO interface (cannot be modified).
• Session sequence — The session sequence associated with the bundle. Possible sequences include:
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Failsafe: This sequence is used to process WAP content and resend it as long as a download has not started.
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously • Categories — Categories associated with the bundle. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• Status — The status of the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the offer was Published, but has since been deleted).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
342
Delivery Management
• Technical — Indicates whether the bundle is technical (cannot be modified). For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
• Reference date — The date by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. • Enable trigger on demand — Check this box to activate “on demand” triggers for the bundle. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Topics Tab The Topics tab allows you to manage topics associated with the bundle. Topics act as “content selectors” to retrieve contents from the “content” repository or from other content systems. When the bundle delivery is triggered, Content Manager initiates the delivery of all topics associated to the bundle and compatible with the recipient device. Topics are ordered within a bundle to indicate which topic is delivered first. The delivery sequence of different topics is defined by the session sequence associated with the bundle. Each topic is associated with one or several patterns that define how bundle contents are converted to deliverable contents.
Figure 9.31: Edit bundle Screen — Topics Tab
If there are topics currently associated with the bundle, the Topics tab displays the following information:
• Index — When a bundle is activated by a trigger, the first topic is activated, followed by the second, and third, and so on. The index is the number order on which a topic is activated. To reorder associated topics, select a topic from the list, then click Move up or Move down to change the order.
• Topic Name — The name of the topic. Click a topic name to edit topic pattern options. For more information, see “Managing Topic Patterns” on page 344.
• Topic patterns — The pattern used by a topic to generate a message from the content that the topic has selected.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
343
Delivery Management
Adding a Topic to a Bundle To add a topic: 1. From the Topics tab on the Edit bundle screen, click Add topic.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays. 2. Enter the criteria on which to search topics. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 3. From the list of topics, click Add topic next to each topic to add to the bundle.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays, allowing you to manage the selected topic’s patterns. For more information, see “Managing Topic Patterns” on page 344. Managing Topic Patterns Topic patterns are used by topics to generate a message from the content selected by the topic. Several patterns may be selected and placed in order for the same topic. When content is to be sent to a device, Content Manager automatically selects the first pattern compatible with the device. NOTE: Only those patterns compatible with the content templates associated with the
current topic are used.
To manage topic patterns: 1. From the Topics tab on the Edit bundle screen (Figure 9.15 on page 320), click the name of a currently associated topic.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays (Figure 9.32 on page 345). NOTE: The Topic and message patterns screen also displays immediately after adding a
topic to a bundle.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
344
Delivery Management
Figure 9.32: Topic and message patterns Screen
The Topic and message patterns screen displays the following view-only information about the topic:
• Name — The name of the topic. • Content system — The associated content system. • Type — The type of topic. Either of the following types may display: • By content id — The topic is associated to a specific content on selected content system. If the topic is linked to a content, the following information displays: • Content — The name of the content associated with the topic.
• Validity start — The date on which the content becomes valid. • Validity end — The date on which the content becomes invalid. • Content template — The content type. • By category — The topic automatically selects the last published content in selected categories. If the topic is linked to categories, the following information displays: • Content categories — Names of categories linked to the topic.
• Content template — The content type. • Number of fetched content — The number of contents retrieved by the topic simultaneously.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
345
Delivery Management
Currently associated message patterns display the following information at the bottom of the screen:
• Index — The index number relates to pattern order. When the topic is activated by a trigger, the first pattern is used to format the content retrieved by the topic. If the pattern is not compatible with the target device, the next pattern is used, and so on.
• Pattern name — The name of the pattern. Click a pattern name to view or modify the pattern. For more information, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399. In addtion, the Topic and message patterns screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit topic to edit the selected topic. For more information, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372.
• Click View topic capabilities to list all devices compatible with the edited topic. For more information, see “Using the Topic Capabilities Tab” on page 374.
• From the Pattern name list, select a pattern and click Add to add the pattern to the topic. To remove a pattern from the topic, click Remove next to the pattern to remove.
• Select an index number from the list of associated patterns and click Move up or Move down to change the order of authorized patterns.
Using the Bundle Compatibilities Tab The Bundle compatibilities tab (Figure 9.33 on page 347) allows you to manage devices compatible with the bundle. Devices are marked as compatible if at least one of the patterns and associated topics is compatible. This tab displays a list of compatible device features, models, and brands.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
346
Delivery Management
Figure 9.33: Edit bundle Screen — Bundle compatibilities Tab (With Results)
1. From the Feature list, select a feature on which to conduct a search for compatible devices. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for compatible devices. 3. From the Brands list, select one or more brands on which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 4. Select whether to display inherited profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
347
Delivery Management
5. Click Show filter when finished.
3 Results of the search display at the bottom of the tab. Using the Triggers on Message Tab The Triggers on message tab allows you to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated when a message meets certain rules and is sent or received on the application ID associated with the parent offer. The Triggers on message tab allows you to define triggers, or sets of rules, to be used to activate the bundle. You can define several triggers for the same bundle. To initiate a delivery, a message must meet all of the rules contained in one of the triggers. In this case, the trigger is activated even if the message does not meet the rules of the other triggers. The Triggers on message tab displays the filter criteria defined for existing triggers. For information about using filters in Content Manager, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. Creating an “on message” Trigger NOTE: In order to activate the trigger, all rules defined in the trigger must be met.
To create a new trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click New trigger.
3 The Create trigger screen displays, allowing you to define the filter criteria for the trigger. For information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Click Create trigger. Editing an “on message” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Edit trigger next to the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on message screen displays, allowing you to modify the filter criteria for the trigger. For more information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Make changes as necessary. To delete an existing trigger filter, click the filter to remove.
next to the
Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab The Triggers on schedule tab (Figure 9.34 on page 349) allows you to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated at predefined times, according to a certain schedule.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
348
Delivery Management
Figure 9.34: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on schedule Tab
Creating an “on schedule” Trigger To create a trigger: 1. Enter the following information on the Triggers on schedule tab:
• Trigger name — The name of the new trigger. • Schedule — Select the Repetitive option to repeat the schedule. Otherwise, the trigger is activated only once. Select the times when the trigger should be activated. For example, to trigger a delivery each day at 8:00 AM: from the Hours list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and select Repetitive. To trigger a delivery on the first Monday of each month: from the Day of week list, select “Monday”, from the Day of the month list, select “1”, and select Repetitive.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
349
Delivery Management
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include: • Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value) • Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously
• Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule target sequences only)
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 2. Click Create trigger.
3 The new trigger is listed on the right side of the tab. Editing an “on schedule” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the list of existing triggers, click the name of the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on schedule screen displays (Figure 9.22 on page 329).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
350
Delivery Management
Figure 9.35: Edit trigger on schedule Screen
The Edit trigger on schedule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete trigger to remove the edited trigger. • Click Subscribe end-user to associate an end-user with the selected bundle and trigger.
3The Subscribe end-user screen displays. For more information, see “Editing or Deleting a Subscription” on page 366.
• Make changes to the trigger schedule as necessary, then click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
351
Delivery Management
Deleting an “on schedule” Trigger To delete a trigger: 1. From the Edit trigger on schedule screen, click Delete trigger on schedule.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected trigger?” displays. 2. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Using the Triggers On Content Tab The Triggers on content tab allows you to manage an “on content” trigger for the bundle. This trigger is activated when new content is detected by one of the topics associated with the bundle. Only one “on content” trigger can be configured per bundle.
Figure 9.36: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on content Tab
Enabling an “on content” Trigger To enable an “on content” trigger: 1. Check the Enabled box to activate the trigger. 2. Select the following information for the trigger:
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include: • Waiting session completion — X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
352
Delivery Management
• Limit target workflow — No more than X number of operations are •
•
processed simultaneously (X = Target count value). If selected, the Target count field displays. Specify the number of operations to process here. Schedule — X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value). If selected, the Waiting time field displays. Specify the time from between each processing operation here. Simple — All operations are processed simultaneously.
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 3. Click Submit.
Using the Popularity Tab The Popularity tab allows you to determine how to calculate the number of times the edited bundle has been downloaded over a certain period of time. Downloaded bundles are based on the number of completed delivery sessions linked to this bundle.
Figure 9.37: Edit bundle Screen — Popularity Tab
To determine how the popularity of the bundle is calculated: 1. From the Type list, select how to calculate the number of delivery sessions for the bundle: Monthly, Daily, Hourly, Weekly, Yearly, or Absolute. 2. Click Submit. To adjust the number of downloads to date, in the Count field, enter the number of downloads for the bundle, then click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
353
Delivery Management
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen allows you to review any metadata that may be associated with the offer. You can search for metadata by language and type.
Figure 9.38: Edit bundle Screen — MetaData Tab
Creating Metadata To create metadata for the bundle: From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create metadata screen displays. 1. From the Type list, select a metadata type. Additional fields available on the Create metadata screen depend on the type selected here. Metadata types include:
• Name — Displays the name of the bundle. • Text description — Displays an additional description. • Highlight — Displays the bundle as highlighted. • CM1 contentId — References the last identification for the last content system. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for the metadata. 3. Provide other information as required by the metadata type selected. Click Submit when finished. Editing Metadata To edit existing metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
354
Delivery Management
Deleting Metadata To delete metadata from a bundle: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata. 2. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected bundle meta data?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.
Deleting a Bundle To delete a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), check one or more boxes next to the bundles to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all bundles. NOTE: You can also delete edited bundles by clicking Delete bundle on the Edit bundle
screen.
2. Click Delete bundle.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected bundle(s)?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Downloading a Bundle To download a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Download to the right of the bundle to download. NOTE: The Download function is also available when editing a bundle. For more
information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
3 The Download Bundle screen displays (Figure 9.39 on page 356).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
355
Delivery Management
Figure 9.39: Download Bundle Screen NOTE: All information entered is optional, unless otherwise noted.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred bundle language type. 3. Check the Determine account and device from specified address for the option to restrict the download according to the timeslots set for the end user account. If checked, the screen refreshes and the Enable using user’s timeslot preferences box displays. To restrict the download to the user’s specified timeslots, check the Enable using user’s timeslot preferences box. For more information about managing end user timeslots, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84. 4. From the Address type list, select the type of receiving device address: Mobile or Mail (email). This field is required. 5. In the Address field, type the address for the receiving device. This address must be of the type selected from the Address type list, or you can specify an IMEI address when the Select device by imei box is checked. This field is required. 6. From the Brand list, select the brand of receiving device.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
356
Delivery Management
7. From the Model list, select the model of the receiving device. 8. In the Time to start field, specify when the download begins. Time format is YYYY-MMDD HH:MM:SS. 9. In the Time to live field, specify when to initiate delivery. Time format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS. 10. In the Call back URL field, specify the URL to be called once the download is successfully complete. This is useful for clients that need to perform specific tasks following a download (for example, downloading the event to their client computer). 11. From the Interface type list, select from the following types of SMS interface used to view associated codes:
• Simple interface: A SMS interface. The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is 0aXbY (where a = content type, X = delivery bundle numeric alias, b = device brand alias, and Y = the digital portion of the device model terminal ID).
• Bundle name, brand alias, model alias interface: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is UBM (where U = delivery bundle name, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Offer name, brand alias, model alias interface: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is OBM (where O = parent delivery offer name, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Bundle id, brand alias, model alias: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is UBM (where U = delivery bundle ID, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Bundle id: Used if end-user devices are not necessary (SMS text messages or MMS messages or content types compatible with a large number of devices). This simplifies the interface for end-users.
• Simple interface (short): Similar to the Simple interface, except that the content type information is not specified. 12. Click Submit when finished.
Creating a Bundle Bulk Process To create a bulk process for a bundle: 1. From right side of the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Bulk Process next to the bundle for which to create the process.
3 The Process details tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.40 on page 358).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
357
Delivery Management
Figure 9.40: Create bulk process Screen — Process details Tab
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the process. 3. From the Status list, select the status of the process. 4. From the Priority list, select the priority level of the process. 5. In the Time to start field, enter the date and time at which the process begins (format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS). 6. In the Timeout for target reporting (in milliseconds) field, enter a timeout period. 7. Click Next.
3 The Bulk action tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.41: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk action Tab
8. From the Action type list, select the method by which to deliver the bundle contents. 9. Check the Allow delaying sessions box to have the ability to delay delivery sessions.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
358
Delivery Management
10. Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.42: Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
11. From the Target type list, select the method by which to target bundle recipients. If you select By CSV file:
• From the Language list, select the preferred language of the bundle. • In the CSV File field, enter the full path and filename to the CSV file containing recipient information. Click Browse to search for the file.
• In the CSV separator field, enter the type of field separator used in the CSV file. • Check the Use meta data box if the first line of the CSV file is to be used as metadata.
• From the Encoding list, select the type of encoding. • Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.43 on page 360). If you select By group:
• From the End-user group list, select the target group. • Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.43 on page 360).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
359
Delivery Management
Figure 9.43: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk flow control strategy Tab
12. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed according to the workflow strategy defined here. 13. Click Next.
3
The Timeslots tab displays.
Figure 9.44: The Create bulk process Screen — Timeslots Tab
14. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
360
Delivery Management
15. Click Add timeslot.
3
A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen. NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the
next
to each timeslot to remove. 16. Click Next.
3
The Confirmation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.45: Create bulk process Screen — Confirmation Tab
17. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
361
Delivery Management
Viewing Popular Downloads From the Delivery menu, you can view statistics regarding the most/least downloaded delivery bundles for all services over a certain period of time. NOTE: Bundle popularity is calculated based on the number of successfully completed
delivery sessions.
To view downloads by popularity: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Popularity.
3 The Popularity screen displays.
Figure 9.46: Popularity Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of popularity ratings to view: Daily, Monthly, Weekly, Yearly, Absolute, or Hourly. Ratings listed are current, for instance, current day or current month. NOTE: The Popularity screen refreshes the list of downloads each time a selection is
made.
3. From the End-user service list, select a service from which to view downloads. 4. Select whether to display more popular or less popular bundle downloads first. 5. From the Top list, select the number of results to display: 5, 10, 15, or 20. 6. If you choose, you can specify the number of successful delivery sessions from which to calculate popularity ratings by clicking a bundle name from the list of results.
3 The Edit popularity screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
362
Delivery Management
7. Enter the number of successful delivery sessions, then click Submit.
3 A message displays confirming your saved changes. The new number is used in the next calculation of popularity ratings.
Managing Triggers From the Delivery menu, you can directly manage all triggers on all offers simultaneously. To manage global triggers: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Triggers.
3 The Triggers screen displays.
Figure 9.47: Triggers Screen
2. Click the type of triggers to manage:
• Triggers on message — control all defined SMS keywords NOTE: Only manually defined keywords are listed; codes that are automatically
generated are not displayed.
• Triggers on schedule — control all programmed schedules • Triggers on content — control all defined alerts • Triggers on demand — control all message (manual) triggers
3 The Filters screen for the selected trigger type displays, allowing you to view all triggers, or specify criteria for searching triggers. To view all triggers without the use of a filter, click Show table. To modify filters after displaying the table, click Edit filters. NOTE: When managing Triggers on message, you can also manage triggers by
application ID by clicking the Triggers by appId tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
363
Delivery Management
Searching Triggers The Filters screen for a selected trigger type allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of triggers specific to that criteria. To apply filters for a search, enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. The following table describes the search criteria available: Criteria Id Offer
Description Trigger ID Parent offer of the trigger
Application Id
ID used to deliver contents from the offer
Bundle
Bundle associated to the trigger
Filters
Filters associated to the trigger
Authenticated mode
Indicates whether the authenticated mode is enabled (True) or not (False).
Schedule time
Trigger schedule
Repetition Sequence type
Triggers on message
Triggers on Triggers on schedule content
Triggers on demand
3 3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3 3
3
3
3
Indicates whether the trigger is repetitive (True) or not (False).
3 3
Indicates the type of sequence used for the trigger
3
To view all triggers without the use of a filter, click Show table. Once a list of results displays, you can perform the following tasks:
• Use the pull-down menu to show a specific number of items per page — 5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100, or 500 items per page.
• Click Refresh to update the list. • Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page. • Click Edit filters to modify filter settings for triggers. For more information, see “Searching Triggers” on page 364.
• Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters. • Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria. • Click the column headings to sort column items alphabetically (default is descending; click again to sort ascending).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
364
Delivery Management
Managing Subscriptions The Delivery menu allows you to manage front-office subscriptions to push services, for instance, subscriptions to bundles that contain triggers on content or triggers on schedule. For information about subscribing an end-user to a bundle, see “Editing an “on schedule” Trigger” on page 328 or “Enabling an “on content” Trigger” on page 324. To manage subscriptions, from the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Subscriptions.
3 The Subscriptions screen displays.
Figure 9.48: Subscriptions Screen
The Subscriptions screen allows you to search accounts to subscribe based on an enduser’s MSISDN or account alias name.
Searching Accounts by MSISDN To search by MSISDN: 1. From the Search by address tab, enter the MSISDN of the user account for which to search. 2. Click List subscriptions by end-user address.
3 If subscriptions are found, the following subscription information displays: • • • • •
Alias — The alias name for the account. Type — The address type: Mobile, Email, or Phone. Status — The account status: Active or Inactive. First name — The account holder’s first name. Last name — The account holder’s last name.
To subscribe an end-user account, click Subscribe next to the desired account.
3 A confirmation window displays. Review the information and modify if necessary, then click Ok to create the subscription, or Cancel to void the subscription.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
365
Delivery Management
Searching Accounts by Alias To search by alias: 1. From the Search by alias tab, enter the alias name of the user account for which to search. 2. Click List subscriptions by end-user alias.
3 If subscriptions are found, the following subscription information displays: • • • •
End-user alias — The alias name for the account. Status — The account status: Active or Inactive. First name — The account holder’s first name. Last name — The account holder’s last name.
To subscribe an end-user account, click Subscribe next to the desired account.
3 A confirmation window displays. Review the information and modify if necessary, then click Ok to create the subscription, or Cancel to void the subscription.
Editing or Deleting a Subscription Once an account is subscribed to one or more bundles, you can manage all active subscriptions for a specified account. To edit a subscription, you must first locate the account for which to edit subscriptions. For information about searching accounts, see “Searching Accounts by MSISDN” on page 365 and “Searching Accounts by Alias” on page 366. Once an account with subscriptions is located, you can perform the following tasks from the Subscriptions screen:
• Select one or more subscriptions from the list and click Delete subscriptions to remove the subscriptions from the account.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected subscriptions?” displays. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
• Click an Id to view the subscription options for this account, bundle, and trigger. Options available are described in “Editing or Deleting a Subscription” on page 366.
• Click a Bundle name to edit the associated bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Click the Trigger type to edit the associated trigger. For more information, see “Managing Triggers” on page 363.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
366
Delivery Management
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights The Delivery menu allows you to manage all rights on offers, bundles, and triggers associated with back-office (administrator) groups. NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups on which you have rights are
listed. You may grant only those rights you already have on offers.
To grant offer access to front-office (end-user) groups, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333. To grant rights associated with topics, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377. Granting Catalog Rights To grant catalog rights to back-office groups: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Administration rights.
3 The Administration rights screen displays.
Figure 9.49: Administration rights Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select a service from which to display associated rights. Only services on which you have rights are listed. 3. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Catalog Rights” on page 18. 4. From the Groups list, select the groups to associate with the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
367
Delivery Management
5. Click Add right.
3 The newly granted rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the screen. Revoking Catalog Rights To revoke a right from a group, click the
next to each right to remove.
Managing Content Topics Topics are content selectors that indicate where the contents can be found for each bundle. There are two types of topics:
• By content id — The topic is associated to one published content stored on a content system. It inherits the compatibilities and validity from the content.
• By category — The topic is associated to one or several categories on a content system. It automatically selects one or several published content in these categories. When a new content is published in any category, it activates all associated “on content” triggers.
Viewing Topics To view topics: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Topics.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of topics. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Topics” on page 370.
3 The Topics screen displays a list of all topics (Figure 9.50 on page 369).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
368
Delivery Management
Figure 9.50: Topics Screen
Using the Topics Screen The Topics screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Topics screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a topic name to modify the selected topic. For more information, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372.
• Click New topic to create a new topic. For more information, see “Creating a New Topic” on page 370.
• Click Delete topics to remove all selected topics. For more information, see “Deleting a Topic” on page 377.
• Click Administration rights to manage topic rights. For more information, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377.
• Click Publish to publish selected topics, create bundles, and offers. For more information, see “Publishing Topics” on page 379.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
369
Delivery Management
Searching Topics The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of topics specific to that criteria. To manage topic filters: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click Edit filters.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.51: Topics > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Topic To create a new topic: 1. From the Topics screen, click New topic.
3 The Create topic screen displays (Figure 9.52 on page 371).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
370
Delivery Management
Figure 9.52: Create topic Screen
2. From the Content system list, select a system from where the contents is fetched for this topic. For more information about content systems, see “Managing Content Systems” on page 381. 3. From the Type list, select a topic type: by category or by content id. 4. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the topic. No two topics should have the same name. 5. If the topic type is by category:
• Select a template for the selected content. Only contents in the selected template are selected.
• Select one or more Categories available from the selected content system. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. If you select multiple categories, all contents fetched must be associated to all selected categories.
• Enter the number of contents the topic is to retrieve. • Click Create.
3The Topic compatibilities tab on the Edit topic screen displays. For information about editing a topic, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372. 6. If the topic type is by content id:
• Select a template for the content. • Click Next.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
371
Delivery Management
• A Filters screen displays allowing you to set search criteria for the content in the topic. For information about using the Filters screen, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
3The Content selection (Step 2/3) screen displays a list of all resulting content. • Click the Create topic in the table that corresponds to the desired content. Editing a Topic To edit a topic: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click the name of a topic to edit.
3 The Edit topic screen displays. NOTE: Depending on the topic type selected, one of two screens displays:
Figure 9.53: Edit topic Screen (By Content ID)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
372
Delivery Management
Figure 9.54: Edit topic Screen (By Category)
The Edit topic screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New topic to create a new topic. For more information, see “Creating a New Topic” on page 370.
• Click Delete topic to delete the edited topic. • Click the Details tab to modify general information about the topic. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 373.
• Click the Topic capabilities tab to manage device capabilities associated with the edited topic. For more information, see “Using the Topic Capabilities Tab” on page 374.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the topic. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 376.
Using the Details Tab From the Details tab on the Edit topic screen, you can make the following changes to the edited topic:
• If the topic type is by category: • Name — The unique name of the topic. No two topics should have the same name. • Content template — The template used by the content in the topic. • Content categories — Categories of content associated with the topic. • Number of fetched contents — The number of contents that the topic should retrieve.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
373
Delivery Management
• If the topic type is by content id: • Name — The unique name of the topic. No two topics should have the same name. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Topic Capabilities Tab From the Topic capabilities tab on the Edit topic screen, you can view the devices and features compatible with the edited topic. NOTE: The information listed on the Topic capabilities tab for by content id topics is
view-only.
In the case of by category topics, compatible devices are defined manually based on their compatibility with the content type selected. By default, only devices with a feature compatible with the selected content type are listed. For by category topics, the Topic capabilities tab displays as in Figure 9.55 on page 375.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
374
Delivery Management
Figure 9.55: Edit topic Screen — Topic capabilities Tab (By Category)
1. From the Language list, select the preferred language for devices associated with the topic. 2. To search for devices by feature, check the Feature box, and select a feature from the Feature list. 3. To search for devices by brand, check the Brands box, then select one or more brands for which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 4. Specify whether to display or hide inherited profiles. 5. Click Show filter to view search results.
3 Results display at the bottom of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
375
Delivery Management
6. Check the boxes next to each device to associate with the topic. Check the Assign all available compatibilities box to assign all listed devices.
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen allows you to review any metadata that may be associated with the topic. Metadata is used to attach additional data to a category. You can search for metadata by language and type. Creating Metadata To create metadata for the topic: From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create metadata screen displays. 1. From the Type list, select a metadata type. Additional fields available on the Create metadata screen depend on the type selected here. Metadata types include:
• Preview — A preview of the content. • Preview URL — An external URL leading to a content preview. • Text description — An additional description of the topic. • Author — author information • Copyright — copyright information • Content Id — The content identifier for the last content system. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for the metadata. 3. Provide other information as required by the metadata type selected. Click Submit when finished. Editing Metadata To edit existing metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
376
Delivery Management
Deleting Metadata To delete metadata from a topic: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata. 2. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected topic meta data?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.
Deleting a Topic To delete a topic: 1. From the Topics screen, check the boxes next to the topics to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all topics. 2. Click Delete topic.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected topics?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited topic by clicking Delete topic on the Edit topic
screen.
Managing Topic Rights NOTE: Rights on topics are granted per content system. Only those back-office children
groups of groups on which you have rights are listed. You may grant only those rights you already have on topics.
Adding Topic Rights To grant topic access to a back-office group: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click Administration rights.
3 The Administration rights screen displays (Figure 9.56 on page 378).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
377
Delivery Management
Figure 9.56: Administration rights Screen
2. From the Content system list, select a content system from which to display associated rights. Only services on which you have rights are listed. 3. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content Topic Rights” on page 18. 4. From the Groups list, select the groups to associate with selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 5. Click Add right.
3 The newly granted rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the screen. Revoking Topic Rights To remove topic access from a group, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
378
Delivery Management
Publishing Topics To publish a topic is to associate them to bundles and offers in order for associated content to be downloaded by end-users. Two publishing options are available:
• Publish topics in an existing offer — The publications wizard creates a bundle for each selected topic and associates it to a compatible pattern. All created bundles are associated to a single offer.
• Publish topics in new offers — The publications wizard creates a bundle and offer for each selected topic. To publish topics: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), select the topics to publish, then click Publish.
3 The Publish Topics screen displays.
Figure 9.57: Publish Topics Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
379
Delivery Management
2. From the Type list, select the type of publication: New offer (topics will be associated with a new offer and a new bundle) or Existing offer (topics will be associated with a new bundle in an existing offer). 3. If you selected New offer:
• In the Offer name field, enter the name of the new offer. By default, offers are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• In the Description field, enter a description for the offer (optional). • From the End-user service list, select an end-user service in which the topic will be published.
• To create bundles for topics that are not yet associated with a bundle, select Yes next to Skip associated topics.
• From the Application ID list, select the application ID for the new offer. • From the Status list, select the status of the new offer. • From the Categories list, select one or several categories to be associated with the new offer. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• In the Bundle name field, enter the name of the new bundle(s). By default, bundles are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• From the Session sequence list, select the session sequence for the new bundle(s). • From the Status list, select the status of the new bundle(s). 4. If you selected Existing offer:
• To create bundles for topics that are not yet associated with a bundle, select Yes next to Skip associated topics.
• From the End-user service list, select an end-user service in which the topic will be published.
• From the Select offer list, select a parent offer in the selected service. A new bundle is created for each selected topic and is associated to the selected offer.
• In the Bundle name field, enter the name of the new bundle(s). By default, bundles are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• From the Session sequence list, select the session sequence for the new bundle(s). • From the Status list, select the status of the new bundle(s).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
380
Delivery Management
5. Click Submit when finished.
3 The topic is published, and the Published topics screen displays a list of all published topics. Click any offer or bundle name in the list to edit. For information about editing offers or bundles, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314 or “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318. NOTE: If errors occurred during the publication process, they are reported on the
Published topics screen. If no errors occurred, this line item is equal to None.
Managing Content Systems Content systems are repositories from which Content Manager retrieves content and metadata, using them to generate deliverable content. By default, two content systems are automatically created:
• Local ContentSystem By Bundle — the default content system for all “by content id” topics
• Local ContentSystem By Category — the default content system for all “by category” topics
Viewing Content Systems To view content systems: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Content systems.
3 The Content systems screen displays a list of content systems.
Figure 9.58: Content systems Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
381
Delivery Management
Using the Content Systems Screen The Content systems screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Content systems screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a content system to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Content System” on page 384.
• Click New content system to create a new content system. For more information, see “Creating a New Content System” on page 382.
• Click Delete content systems to remove all selected content systems. For more information, see “Deleting a Content System” on page 385.
Searching Content Systems The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content systems specific to that criteria. To manage category filters: 1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click Edit filters.
3 The Content systems > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.59: Content systems > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Content System To create a new content system: 1. From the Content system screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click New content system.
3 The New content system screen displays (Figure 9.60 on page 383). Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
382
Delivery Management NOTE: The New content system function is also available when searching for or editing a
content system. For more information, see “Searching Content Systems” on page 382 and “Editing a Content System” on page 384.
Figure 9.60: New content system Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of content system. Custom content systems can be added. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the content system. 4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the content system (optional). 5. From the “Content” backoffice service name list, select the back-office service to be associated with the system. This service must be registered with the Content Manager platform. 6. If the Enable topic synchronization option is checked, items on the content system and “by bundleid” topics are synchronized. NOTE: If a content system is deleted during synchronization, the associated topic is
deleted as well.
7. If the Enable capabilities synchronization for topics “by content id” option is checked, content capabilities (a list of compatible devices for each content) is synchronized with “by bundleid” topic capabilities. NOTE: If a device is deactivated within content during synchronization, it is automatically
deactivated for the associated topic as well.
8. Click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
383
Delivery Management
3 The content system is created and the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381) displays.
Editing a Content System To edit a content system: 1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click the name of a content system to modify.
3 The Edit content system screen displays.
Figure 9.61: Edit content system Screen
2. Make changes to the content system as necessary. For information about content system details, see “Creating a New Content System” on page 382. 3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
384
Delivery Management
Deleting a Content System CAUTION: If you delete content systems, contents may become undeliverable by Content Manager. To delete a content system: 1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), select the content systems to remove, and click Delete content system.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected content systems?” displays. 2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited content system by clicking Delete content system
on the Edit content system screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
385
10
System Configuration
This chapter contains the following information: Cache Management ............................................................................................... Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details ..................................................... Managing Messaging Credentials ............................................................................. Viewing Credentials ............................................................................................... Searching Credentials ............................................................................................ Creating New Credentials ....................................................................................... Editing Credentials ................................................................................................ Deleting Credentials............................................................................................... Managing Message Patterns .................................................................................... Viewing Message Patterns....................................................................................... Searching Message Patterns.................................................................................... Creating a New Message Pattern ............................................................................. Editing a Message Pattern....................................................................................... Deleting a Message Pattern..................................................................................... Managing Session Sequences .................................................................................. Viewing Session Sequences .................................................................................... Searching Session Sequences ................................................................................. Creating a New Session Sequence ........................................................................... Editing a Session Sequence .................................................................................... Deleting a Session Sequence .................................................................................. Managing Workflows .............................................................................................. Viewing Workflows................................................................................................. Searching Workflows.............................................................................................. Creating a New Workflow........................................................................................ Editing a Workflow................................................................................................. Deleting a Workflow............................................................................................... Managing System Administration Rights ................................................................... Viewing Bulk Content Processes .............................................................................. Searching Bulk Content Processes ........................................................................... Accessing a Bulk Content Process ............................................................................ Managing Sessions ................................................................................................ Viewing Session Reports......................................................................................... Editing Session Details ........................................................................................... Purging Sessions ................................................................................................... Managing Retry Sessions ........................................................................................ Viewing Retry Sessions .......................................................................................... Searching Retry Sessions ....................................................................................... Viewing Session Details.......................................................................................... Viewing Session Details.......................................................................................... Managing Purges ................................................................................................... Viewing Purges ..................................................................................................... Searching Purged Sessions ..................................................................................... Viewing Purge Details ............................................................................................ Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports ..................................................................... Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
387 387 391 391 392 393 394 394 395 395 396 396 399 403 403 403 404 404 406 406 408 408 409 409 410 423 424 425 426 426 428 428 430 432 432 432 433 433 433 435 436 437 437 439 439
386
System Configuration
This chapter describes the Device, System management and Tracking portions of the Delivery menu, which allow you to manage all elements necessary for configuring the delivery system. For additional information about the Catalog and Content portions of the Delivery menu, see “Delivery Management” on page 299.
Cache Management The Device portion of the Delivery menu allows you to manage authorized devices and their profiles by service.
Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details To view and modify cache management details: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Device > Cache management.
3
The Brand tab on the Cache management screen displays.
Figure 10.1: Cache management Screen — Brand Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
387
System Configuration
Using the Brand Tab The Brand tab allows you to specify the device brands for which to manage cache. To view device brands: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view brands. 2. Click Show filter.
3
A list of brands associated with the selected service displays.
3. Check the boxes next to each brand to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each brand to exclude. Click Select all to select all brands, or Unselect all to deselect all brands. 4. Click Submit when finished.
Using the Model Tab The Model tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device model cache.
Figure 10.2: Cache management Screen — Model Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
388
System Configuration
To view device models: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view device models. 2. To narrow your search further, from the Select brands list, select one or more brands from which to view device models. 3. Click Show filter.
3
A list of models associated with the selected service and brands displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each model to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each model to exclude. Click Select all to select all models, or Unselect all to deselect all models. 5. Click Submit when finished.
Using the Device Profile Tab The Device profile tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device profile cache.
Figure 10.3: Cache management Screen — Device profile Tab
To view device profiles: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view device profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
389
System Configuration
2. To narrow your search further:
• From the Select brands list, select a brand from which to view device profiles. • From the Select model list, select one or more device models from which to view device profiles. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple models.
• Select whether or not to display and select profiles that are inherited. 3. Click Show filter.
3
A list of device profiles associated with the selected criteria displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each profile to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each profile to exclude. Click Select all to select all profiles, or Unselect all to deselect all profiles. 5. Click Submit when finished.
Using the Device Profile Capability Tab The Device profile capability tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device profile capabilities cache.
Figure 10.4: Cache management Screen — Device profile capability Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
390
System Configuration
To view device profile capabilities: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view profile capabilities. 2. To narrow your search further:
• From the Select brands list, select a brand from which to view capabilities. • From the Select model list, select one or more device models from which to view capabilities. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple models.
• Select whether to select a profile or feature for which to search. Select one or more items from the list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items.
• Select whether or not to display and select profiles that are inherited. 3. Click Show filter.
3
A list of capabilities associated with the selected criteria displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each capability to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each capability to exclude. Click Select all to select all capabilities, or Unselect all to deselect all capabilities. 5. Click Submit when finished.
Managing Messaging Credentials Messaging credentials are login and password information used by Content Manager to submit messages on a messaging system. Messaging credentials are associated to different account services. For more information about account services, see “Managing Services” on page 61.
Viewing Credentials To view all previously defined messaging credentials: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Messaging.
3
The Messaging screen displays a list of end-user services with defined messaging credentials (Figure 10.5 on page 392).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
391
System Configuration
Figure 10.5: Messaging Screen
Using the Messaging Screen The Messaging screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Messaging screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the End-user service column, click a service for which to edit credentials. For more information, see “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
• Click New credentials to create new credentials for a service. For more information, see “Creating New Credentials” on page 393.
• Click Delete credentials to remove all selected credentials. For more information, see “Deleting Credentials” on page 394.
Searching Credentials The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of services with credentials specific to that criteria. To manage messaging credential filters: 1. From the Messaging screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), click Edit filters.
3
The Messaging > Filters screen displays (Figure 10.6 on page 393).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
392
System Configuration
Figure 10.6: Messaging > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating New Credentials To create new messaging credentials: 1. From the Messaging screen, click New credentials.
3
The Create credentials screen displays.
NOTE: The New credentials function is also available when searching for and editing
credentials. For more information, see “Searching Credentials” on page 392 and “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
Figure 10.7: Create credentials Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select the service for which to create credentials. 3. In the Login field, enter the login name used to access the external messaging system. 4. In the Password field, enter the password for the login used to access the external messaging system.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
393
System Configuration
5. In the Confirm password field, enter the password again to confirm. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Edit credentials screen displays, allowing you to modify the new credentials. For more information about editing credentials, see “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
Editing Credentials To edit credentials: 1. From the Messaging credentials screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), click the name of a service for which to modify credentials.
3
The Edit credentials screen displays.
Figure 10.8: Edit credentials Screen
2. Modify the login and password as necessary. 3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting Credentials CAUTION: If you delete credentials, Content Manager may no longer be able to send or deliver messages. To delete messaging credentials: 1. From the Messaging credentials screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), check the box next to one or more services that have the credentials to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all credentials.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
394
System Configuration
2. Click Delete credentials.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected credentials?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited credentials by clicking Delete credentials on the Edit
credentials screen.
Managing Message Patterns Message patterns are modules that enable the generation of downloadable elements from contents.
Viewing Message Patterns To view all available message patterns: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Message patterns.
3
The Message patterns screen displays.
Figure 10.9: Message patterns Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
395
System Configuration
Using the Message Patterns Screen The Message patterns screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Message Patterns screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a message pattern to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399.
• Click New message pattern to create a new pattern. For more information, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
• Click Delete message patterns to remove all selected patterns. For more information, see “Deleting a Message Pattern” on page 403.
Searching Message Patterns The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of message patterns specific to that criteria. To manage message pattern filters: 1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), click Edit filters.
3
The Message patterns > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.10: Message patterns > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Message Pattern To create a new message pattern: 1. From the Message pattern screen, click New message pattern.
3
The Create message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.11 on page 397).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
396
System Configuration
Figure 10.11: Create message pattern Screen
2. From the Message pattern type list, select a type of message pattern to create. The following table describes the types of message patterns available: NOTE: Most patterns allow you to modify only the name of the pattern. Those patterns
marked with an asterisk (*) allow for total customization. Message Pattern
Description
WAP Video pattern
formats video extracts for delivery by WAP
SMS Animation pattern
formats animations for delivery by SMS
SMS Logo Screensaver pattern
formats screensaver logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Java pattern
formats Java Applications for delivery by WAP
WAP Picture pattern SMS System pattern WAP File pattern
formats pictures for delivery by WAP formats SMS messages formats any file for delivery by WAP
SMS Logo Group pattern
formats black and white group logos for delivery by SMS
Rich text EMAIL pattern
formats emails from “RICH TEXT” content
SMS Ringtone Monophonic pattern formats monophonic ringtones for delivery by SMS SMS Logo Operator pattern
formats operator logos for delivery by SMS
*Rich text SMS pattern
formats SMS from “RICH TEXT” content (fully customizable)
SMS Logo Color pattern
formats color logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Ringtone Polyphonic pattern
formats polyphonic ringtones for delivery by WAP
MMS Postcard pattern
formats multimedia postcards for delivery by MMS
WAP Application pattern
formats SMS messages (fully customizable)
*MMS pattern
formats MMS messages (fully customizable)
Rich text MMS pattern *EMAIL pattern
formats MMS from “RICH TEXT” content formats email messages (fully customizable)
WAP Realtone pattern SMS Logo Message pattern WAP Animation pattern
Copyright 2006
formats smartphone applications for delivery by WAP
*SMS Message pattern
formats realtones for delivery by WAP formats message logos for delivery by SMS formats animated pictures for delivery by WAP
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
397
System Configuration
3. In the Name field, change the pattern name as necessary. The following table describes the additional information available to customize on the Rich text SMS, SMS Message, MMS, and EMAIL patterns: Field
Description
Rich Text SMS
SMS Message
MMS
EMAIL
Header
Enter the text message to be placed before the content retrieved by the topic.
3
3
3
3
Footer
Enter the text message to be placed after the content retrieved by the topic.
3
3
3
3
Receipt
Select True to request a deliver receipt for all sent messages.
3
3
Select True to automatically truncate messages at 160 characters.
3
3
Select Binary mode to enable transparent message concatenation: messages longer than 160 characters are split over several SMS and tagged so that the device automatically concatenate the different parts upon reception.
3
3
3
3
Truncate messages Concatenate message
NOTE: Not all devices support this feature. Select Text mode to enable automatic splitting of long messages into several numbered text SMS. Concatenate message
Select True to concatenate messages (if several content are to be delivered simultaneously) or False to deliver the different content in different messages.
SMS template
Enter the script used to format the message. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/ velocity/user-guide.html.
Return receipt
Select True to request a deliver receipt for all sent messages.
3
3
Ignore image
Select False to attach pictures retrieved from the content to the formatted MMS or email.
3
3
Ignore sound
Select False to attach sounds retrieved from the content to the formatted MMS or email.
3
3
Ignore video
Select False to attach video retrieved from the content to the formatted MMS.
3
Originator
The default email address or MMS subject to be used in the From field.
3
3
Default subject
The default subject of the email or MMS.
3
callbackMMSPushPath
Select the path to be used for MMS push (only if MMS Push = True).
3 3
callbackMMSPushURL
Select the URL to be used to retrieve the MMS (only if MMS Push = True).
3
callbackMMSPushParam Enter parameters to be used to generate the push notification (only if MMS Push = True).
3
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
3
3
398
System Configuration Field
Description
Rich Text SMS
SMS Message
MMS
EMAIL
MMSPush
Select True to bypass MMS-C and send only MMS notification by SMS to endusers. User devices will then directly download MMS content from Content Manager. Select False to push MMS messages to an external MMS-C.
3
MMS template
Enter the script used to format the message. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/ velocity/user-guide.html.
3
Text template
Enter the script used to format the message in text mode. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http:// jakarta.apache.org/velocity/userguide.html.
3
HTML template
Enter the script used to format the message in HTML mode. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http:// jakarta.apache.org/velocity/userguide.html.
3
NOTE: If you enter a script, it is applied to ALL content generated by the pattern. If you
want a script to apply only to one content, specify the script when editing content. For more information, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
4. Click Submit.
3
The pattern is created, and the Edit message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.12 on page 400). For more information about editing a message pattern, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399.
Editing a Message Pattern To edit a message pattern: 1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), click the name of a message pattern to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.12 on page 400). NOTE: The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen also displays
immediately after a new pattern is created. For information about creating a message pattern, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
399
System Configuration
Figure 10.12: Edit message pattern Screen > Details Tab
The Edit message pattern screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New message pattern to create a new pattern. For more information, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
• Click Delete message pattern to delete the edited pattern. For more information, see “Deleting a Message Pattern” on page 403.
• Click the Details tab to modify general information about the pattern. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 400.
• Click the Data patterns tab to modify data patterns associated with the edited message pattern. For more information, see “Using the Data Patterns Tab” on page 400.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.12) allows you to modify the general information determined when the pattern was created. NOTE: With a few exceptions, most message patterns allow you to customize only the
pattern name. For detailed information about the information available for each message pattern, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
Using the Data Patterns Tab The Data patterns tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.13 on page 401) allows you manage a message’s data patterns. Data patterns define how the different elements of a content are combined to form a downloadable content.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
400
System Configuration
Figure 10.13: Edit message pattern Screen — Data patterns Tab
Adding Data Patterns to a Message Pattern To add a data pattern to a message pattern: 1. From the Content system list, select a content system for the data pattern. 2. From the Content template list, select a content template for the data pattern. 3. From the Data pattern type list, select a data pattern type for the data pattern. 4. Click Add new data pattern.
3
The Edit data pattern screen displays (Figure 10.14 on page 402), allowing you to verify or delete the data pattern information.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
401
System Configuration
Figure 10.14: Edit data pattern Screen
Validating a Data Pattern To validate a data pattern: 1. If there are data patterns associated with the message pattern, they are listed on the right side of the Data patterns tab (Figure 10.13). Click the name of the content template used in the existing data pattern to modify.
3
The Edit data pattern screen displays.
NOTE: The Edit data pattern screen also displays immediately after a data pattern is
created. The information on the Edit data pattern screen is view-only.
2. To continue using the selected data pattern, click Submit. Deleting a Data Pattern To delete a data pattern: 1. From the Data patterns tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.13 on page 401), check the box next to one or more data patterns to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all data patterns. 2. Click Delete data patterns.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected data patterns?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited data pattern by clicking Delete data pattern on the
Edit data pattern screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
402
System Configuration
Deleting a Message Pattern CAUTION: If a message pattern is deleted, Content Manager may no longer be able to generate download messages. To delete a message pattern: 1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), check the box next to one or more message patterns to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all message patterns. 2. Click Delete message patterns. NOTE: You can also delete an edited message pattern by clicking Delete message
pattern on the Edit message pattern screen.
Managing Session Sequences A session sequence determines the order in which a delivery is processed.
Viewing Session Sequences To view a list of available session sequences: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Session sequences.
3
The Session sequences screen displays.
Figure 10.15: Session sequences Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
403
System Configuration
Using the Session Sequences Screen The Session sequences screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Session sequences screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a session sequence to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Session Sequence” on page 406.
• Click New session sequence to create a new sequence. For more information, see “Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
• Click Delete session sequences to remove all selected sequences. For more information, see “Deleting a Session Sequence” on page 406.
Searching Session Sequences The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of session sequences specific to that criteria. To manage session sequence filters: 1. From the Session sequences screen (Figure 10.15 on page 403), click Edit filters.
3
The Session sequences > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.16: Session sequences > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Session Sequence To create a new session sequence: 1. From the Session sequence screen, click New session sequence.
3
The Create session sequence screen displays (Figure 10.17 on page 405).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
404
System Configuration
Figure 10.17: Create session sequence Screen
2. From the Type list, select a session sequence type. Sequence types available include:
• Workflow based — topics are processed as defined in the selected workflow. • Schedule topics — the system processes the first X number of topics inside the bundle, then waits for a specified period of time before processing the next X number of topics.
• Simple — all topics associated to the bundle are processed simultaneously. 3. In the Name field, enter a session sequence name for reference. 4. If the session sequence type is Workflow based, select a workflow from the Workflow drop-down list. Workflow types available include:
• Workflow Simple Interface MO: A workflow defined automatically to enable direct content download using a single MO message.
• SubscriptionWorkflow: A workflow that automatically subscribes a user to a certain bundle.
• UnsubscriptionWorkflow: A workflow that automatically unsubscribes a user from a certain bundle. 5. If the session sequence type is Schedule topics, specify the following information:
• how long (in milliseconds) the system should wait between processes • the number of topics to be processed simultaneously 6. If the session sequence type is Simple, check or uncheck the Requires acknowledge box to indicate whether or not the system should wait for a receipt from the previous topic before moving on to the next topic. 7. Enter a description of the workflow (optional).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
405
System Configuration
8. Click Submit.
3
The Session sequences screen displays (Figure 10.15 on page 403).
Editing a Session Sequence To edit a session sequence: 1. From the Session sequences screen, click the name of the sequence to modify.
3
The Edit session sequence screen displays.
NOTE: The information available for modifying depends on the sequence type selected
when the sequence was created. For information about sequence types, see “Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
Deleting a Session Sequence CAUTION: If a session sequence is deleted, Content Manager may no longer be able to trigger certain delivery operations. To delete a session sequence: 1. From the Session sequences screen (Figure 10.15 on page 403), check the box next to one or more sequences to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all sequences. 2. Click Delete session sequences.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected session sequences?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited session sequence by clicking Delete sequence on
the Edit session sequence screen. For more information about editing a session sequence, see “Editing a Session Sequence” on page 406.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
406
System Configuration
Understanding Session Sequences There are four types of session sequences:
• Simple — This session sequence is standard. The following parameters are required for Simple session sequences: • Requires acknowledge: If enabled, the sequence waits for an acknowledgement before processing the next topic. The sequence is ended only if messages are received by the handset. • Requires content: If enabled, an error occurs in the session if there is no content found. This parameter must be checked if receiving content is required.
• Workflow — This session sequence is standard. The following parameters are required for Workflow session sequences: • Requires acknowledge: If enabled, the sequence waits for an acknowledgement before processing the next topic. The sequence is ended only if messages are received by the handset.
• Schedule topics — The system processes the first X number of topics inside the bundle, then waits for a specified period of time before processing the next X number of topics. The following parameters are required for Schedule topics session sequences: • Waiting time (in milliseconds): Specify the amount of time the system should wait between each process. • Topics counts: Specify how many topics should be processed at the same time.
• Failsafe — This sequence is used to process WAP content and resend it as long as a download has not started. After a while, a bookmark leading to the content is sent, and in the end, an SMS message containing the URL of the content is sent. The following parameters are required for Failsafe session sequences: • WAP Push topics: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message only) used to create the WAP Push. The content and topic must be created before the sequence. • WAP Push pattern: Reference to the WAP Push message pattern used to send the WAP content. • Time between first and second WAP Push: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before the next WAP Push is sent. • Time between WAP Push and WAP bookmark: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before the bookmark is sent. • Enable bookmark: If disabled, the bookmark phase is skipped and the SMS message is sent directly. • Bookmark topic: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message only) used to create the WAP Bookmark. The content and topic must be created before the sequence. • Time between WAP bookmark and SMS: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before the SMS message is sent. This is used only if bookmark is enabled in the sequence.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
407
System Configuration
• SMS topic: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message only) used to create the SMS message. The content and topic must be created before the sequence. NOTE: The SMS System Message must contain “$url” in order for the URL of
the content to be sent in the SMS message.
• SMS pattern: Reference to the SMS message pattern used to send the WAP • • •
content. Time after SMS: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before a time out error occurs. Max number of retries: The maximum number of allowed download retries. For example, the download may be available three times, but the fourth time it’s downloaded, the content is not sent. Require content: If enabled, an error occurs if no content is found. This parameter must be checked if receiving content is required.
Managing Workflows Workflows are modules that describe how the system should behave when certain events are triggered. Each workflow is made up of states and actions, which in turn are linked by conditions and rules for both incoming and outgoing processes. For more information about states and actions, see “Using the State/Actions Tab” on page 411.
Viewing Workflows To view a list of available workflows: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Workflows.
3
The Workflows screen displays.
Figure 10.18: Workflows Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
408
System Configuration
Using the Workflows Screen The Workflows screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Workflows screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a workflow to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Workflow” on page 410.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflows to remove all selected workflows. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
Searching Workflows The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of workflows specific to that criteria. To manage workflow filters: 1. From the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408), click Edit filters.
3
The Workflows > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.19: Workflows > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Workflow To create a new workflow: 1. From the Workflows screen, click New workflow.
3
The Create workflow screen displays (Figure 10.20 on page 410).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
409
System Configuration
Figure 10.20: Create workflow Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the workflow. 3. In the Description field, enter a short description of the workflow (optional). 4. Click Submit.
3
The workflow is created, and the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408) displays.
Editing a Workflow To edit a workflow: 1. From the Workflows screen, click the name of the workflow to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit workflow screen displays.
Figure 10.21: Edit workflow Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
410
System Configuration
The Edit workflow screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
• Click the Details tab to modify the name and description of the workflow. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 411.
• Click the States/Actions tab to modify states and actions associated with the edited workflow. For more information, see “Using the State/Actions Tab” on page 411.
• Click the Conditions tab to modify the conditions associated to the edited workflow. For more information, see “Using the Conditions Tab” on page 419.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit workflow screen allows you to change the name and description of the selected workflow. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the State/Actions Tab The State/Actions tab on the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.22 on page 412) allows you to manage the states and actions associated with the selected workflow. If there are no states or actions for the workflow, you can create them by clicking New state or New action. For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413 and “Creating an Action” on page 416. If there are states and actions currently associated with the workflow, the States/Actions tab displays them in a table.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
411
System Configuration
Figure 10.22: Edit workflow Screen — States/Actions Tab
The table of existing states and actions allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Select an item or items using the check box located in the first column on the left. Click the box at the top of the column to quickly select all items in the list.
• From the Name column, click the name of a state to modify the state. For more information, see “Editing a State” on page 414.
• From the Incoming conditions and rules column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the State outputs and outgoing conditions column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the Action outputs and outgoing conditions column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
• Click New state to create a new state for the workflow, For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413.
• Click Delete states to remove all selected states from the workflow. For more information, see “Deleting States” on page 415.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
412
System Configuration
• Click New action to create a new action for the workflow. For more information, see “Creating an Action” on page 416.
• Click Delete actions to remove all selected actions. For more information, see “Deleting Actions” on page 418. Creating a State A state defines the beginning, in-process, and end point in a workflow. To create a state for the selected workflow: 1. From the States/Actions tab, click New state.
3
The Create state screen displays.
Figure 10.23: Create state Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the state. 3. From the State status list, select a status for the state. Status options include:
• Initial — the beginning point in the workflow • Intermediary — the in-process point in the workflow • Final — the end point in the workflow 4. From the Session status list, select a status for the session. Status options include:
• Pending — the session has not yet started • Processing wait — the session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation NOTE: If you select Processing wait as the session status, enter the amount of
time in seconds to wait between operations.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
413
System Configuration
5. Click Submit.
3
The States/Actions tab displays the list of created states for the workflow.
Editing a State To modify a state: 1. From the States/Actions tab (Figure 10.22 on page 412), click the name of the state to edit.
3
The Edit state screen displays.
Figure 10.24: Edit state Screen
2. From the Edit state screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change the name of the state, click Submit, and return to the States/Actions tab. • Modify the output associated with the state (if present). To modify selected output for the state, click the output name.
3 The Edit output screen displays (Figure 10.25 on page 415).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
414
System Configuration
Figure 10.25: Edit output Screen
a. From the Edit output screen, you can: • Change the name of the output, click Submit, and return to the Edit state screen. • Modify the condition associated with the output (if present). To modify the condition, click the condition name.
3 The Edit condition screen displays. For information about editing a condition, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421. To return to the Edit state screen, click the state name or > Edit state. 2. Click Submit. 3. Click > Edit workflow to return to the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.21 on page 410). Deleting States To delete a state: 1. From the States/Actions tab, check the box next to one or more states to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all states. 2. Click Delete states.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected states?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited state by clicking Delete state on the Edit state
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
415
System Configuration
Creating an Action To create an action in the selected workflow: 1. From the States/Actions tab, click New action.
3
The Create action screen displays.
Figure 10.26: Create action Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the action. 3. From the Type list, select an action type. Action types include:
• Multishot Parsing Model MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should contain the Model keyword)
• Subscription Parsing MO: subscribe or unsubscribe a user • Send topic: deliver a topic • Get account subscription: retrieve an end-user account and its subscription • Send bundle: deliver a bundle • Multishot Parsing Bundle MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should contain the Bundle keyword)
• Get account: retrieve an end-user account • Child session creation: create a new child delivery session • Subscribe user: subscribe an end-user to a bundle • Unsubscribe user: unsubscribe an end-user from a bundle • Parsing MO: parse an SMS MO to retrieve specific keywords
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
416
System Configuration
• Get account unsubscription: retrieve an end-user account and its unsubscription • Multishot Parsing Brand MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should contain the Brand keyword) NOTE: Additional information required depends on the type of action created.
4. Click Submit.
3
The States/Actions tab displays the list of created actions for the workflow.
Editing an Action To modify an action: 1. From the States/Actions tab (Figure 10.22 on page 412), click the name of the action to edit.
3
The Edit action screen displays.
Figure 10.27: Edit action Screen
2. From the Edit action screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change the name of the action and the other information required for the selected action type, then click Submit to save any changes.
• Modify the output associated with the action (if present). To modify selected output for the action, click the output name.
3 The Edit output screen displays (Figure 10.28 on page 418).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
417
System Configuration
Figure 10.28: Edit action > Edit output Screen
From the Edit output screen, you can: • Change the name of the output, click Submit, and return to the Edit action screen. • Modify the condition associated with the output (if present). To modify the condition, click the condition name.
3 The Edit condition screen displays. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• To return to the Edit action screen, click the action name or > Edit action. 3. Click Submit. 4. Click > Edit workflow to return to the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.21 on page 410). Deleting Actions CAUTION: Deleting an action may cause the parent workflow to become inactive. To delete actions: 1. From the States/Actions tab, check the box next to one or more existing actions to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all actions. 2. Click Delete actions.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected actions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited action by clicking Delete action on the Edit action
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
418
System Configuration
Using the Conditions Tab The Conditions tab on the Edit workflow screen allows you to manage the conditions associated with the selected workflow. If there are no conditions for the workflow, you can create them by clicking New condition. For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413. If there are conditions currently associated with the workflow, the Conditions tab displays them in a table.
Figure 10.29: Edit workflow Screen — Conditions Tab
The table of existing conditions allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Select an item or items using the check boxes located in the first column on the left. Click the box at the top of the column to quickly select all items in the list.
• From the Name column, click the name of a condition to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the Origins (states or actions/outputs) column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a State” on page 414 and “Editing an Action” on page 417.
• From the Rules and destinations column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
• Click New condition to create a new condition for the workflow, For more information, see “Creating a Condition” on page 420.
• Click Delete condition to remove all selected conditions from the workflow. For more information, see “Deleting Conditions” on page 423. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
419
System Configuration
Creating a Condition To create a condition in the selected workflow: 1. From the Conditions tab, click New condition.
3
The Create condition screen displays.
Figure 10.30: Create condition Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the condition. 3. From the Type list, select a condition type. Condition type options include:
• Code OK — indicates that user input is correct and valid • Always true — indicates a pass-through condition where no validation is required. 4. From the Origins list, select one or more condition origins. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple origins. 5. Click Submit.
3
The Conditions tab displays the newly created condition in a list of conditions for the workflow.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
420
System Configuration
Editing a Condition To modify a condition: 1. From the Conditions tab (Figure 10.29 on page 419), click the name of the condition to edit.
3
The Edit condition screen displays.
Figure 10.31: Edit condition Screen
2. Make changes to the condition name and origins as necessary. 3. Click Submit to save any changes. Creating Condition Rules. To create a new rule for the condition, from the Edit condition screen, click New condition rule.
3 The Create condition rule screen displays (Figure 10.32 on page 422).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
421
System Configuration
Figure 10.32: Create condition rule Screen
1. In the Name field, enter a name for the rule. 2. From the Type list, select the type of condition (true). 3. From the Destination list, select the destination of the condition rule. 4. Click Submit. Editing Condition Rules. To edit an existing condition rule, from the Edit condition screen (Figure 10.31 on page 421), click the name of the rule in the list to modify.
3
The Edit condition rule screen displays.
Figure 10.33: Edit condition rule Screen
Make changes to the condition rule as necessary, then click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
422
System Configuration
Deleting Condition Rules. From the Edit condition rule screen, click Remove next to each rule to delete. CAUTION: Deleting condition rules may cause the parent workflow to become inactive.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected condition rules?” displays. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
Deleting Conditions To delete a condition: 1. From the Conditions tab on the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.29 on page 419), check the box next to one or more conditions to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all conditions. 2. Click Delete conditions.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected conditions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited condition by clicking Delete condition on the Edit
condition screen. For more information about editing conditions, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
Deleting a Workflow NOTE: When a workflow is deleted, any states, actions, and conditions associated with the
workflow are also deleted.
To delete a workflow: 1. From the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408), check the box next to one or more workflows to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all workflows. 2. Click Delete workflows.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected workflows?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited workflow by clicking Delete workflow on the Edit
workflow screen. For more information about editing a workflow, see “Editing a Workflow” on page 410.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
423
System Configuration
Managing System Administration Rights System administration rights allow back-office group access to system items (credentials, message patterns, session sequences, and so on). To define system configuration rights for a back-office group: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System Management > Administration rights.
3
The Administration rights screen displays.
Figure 10.34: Administration rights Screen
Adding System Administration Rights 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “System Administration Rights” on page 19. 2. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights
are listed. You may grant only rights that are already assigned to you for sessions and processes.
3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Revoking System Administration Rights To revoke group rights, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
424
System Configuration
Managing Bulk Content Processes A bulk process is a content delivery process that is directed toward several recipients. The Tracking portion of the Delivery menu allows you to manage elements of a bulk process.
Viewing Bulk Content Processes To view all bulk process operations launched on the platform: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Bulk processes.
3
The Bulk processes > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Bulk processes screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Bulk Content Processes” on page 426.
Figure 10.35: Bulk processes Screen
Using the Bulk Processes Screen The Bulk processes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bulk processes screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a bulk process ID for which to view details. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past bulk process reports. For more information, see “Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports” on page 439.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
425
System Configuration
Searching Bulk Content Processes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of processes specific to that criteria. To manage bulk process filters: 1. From the Bulk processes screen (Figure 10.35 on page 425), click Edit filters.
3
The Bulk processes > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.36: Bulk processes > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Accessing a Bulk Content Process To access a process: 1. From Id column on the Bulk process screen, click the process ID to access.
3
The Display bulk information screen displays (Figure 10.37 on page 427).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
426
System Configuration
Figure 10.37: Display bulk information Screen
The Display bulk information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Restart process to run the open process. • Click Pause process to temporarily pause the process. • Click Stop process to halt the process operations. • Click the Timeslots tab to view the process timeslots.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
427
System Configuration
Managing Sessions Sessions are unique delivery operations between one bundle and one user. Sessions are executed when a trigger is activated in a bundle. A process is made up of several sessions. The Delivery menu allows you to directly manage all authorized session reports.
Viewing Session Reports To view a report listing all authorized session reports: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Sessions.
3
The Search by address tab on the Sessions screen displays.
Figure 10.38: Sessions Screen > Search by address Tab
The Sessions screen includes two tabs that allow you several ways to search sessions:
• Search by address — Lists sessions by addresses or IDs you provide. • Done sessions with error — List completed sessions in which errors occurred. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of sessions specific to that criteria. From the Done sessions with error tab, click Edit filters.
3 The Done sessions with error tab displays filter criteria (Figure 10.39 on page 429).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
428
System Configuration
Figure 10.39: Done sessions with error > Filters Tab
• Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. If sessions matching your criteria are found for any type of search, the Sessions screen displays the following information:
• Id — The ID of the bulk operation. Click an item in the Id column to edit. For more information, see “Editing Session Details” on page 430.
• Delivery bundle — The bundle used for the bulk operation. • Bulk process (Done sessions with error tab only)— The name of the bulk process. • Status (Search by address tab only) — The session status: Pending, Processing, Processing Wait, Sleep, Done, Processing child session.
• Error — The following errors may display: • None — No error occurred during processing. • Unexpected — An unexpected and unclassifiable error has occurred during processing.
• • • • • •
Timeout — Session processing has failed because the time to live expired. Interrupted — Session processing has been interrupted by an external actor. Formatting — Session processing has failed because of a content formatting error. Protocol — An error occurred during protocol session processing. Session sequence — An error occured during session sequence processing. Billing sequence — An error occurred during billing sequence processing.
• Time created — The time the session was started. • Time finished — The time the session ended. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
429
System Configuration
In addition, the Sessions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Sessions screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a session for which to access details. For more information, see “Editing Session Details” on page 430.
• Click New session to create a new session. For more information, see “Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
• Click Purge sessions to remove all past sessions. For more information, see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
• Click Retry session(s) to retry sessions selected from the list. Editing Session Details To edit session details: 1. From the Sessions screen (Figure 10.38 on page 428), click the session ID for the session to modify.
3
The Display session information screen displays.
Figure 10.40: Display session information Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
430
System Configuration
The Display session information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Restart session to re-deliver the associated bundles. • Click Stop session to stop bundle delivery. • Click Refresh session to update viewed details. • From the Bundle id session item, click the bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318. The Display session information screen displays the following information:
• Id — The internal session ID. • Delivery bundle: The associated bundle that triggered the session. Click a bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Status: The session status. The following table describes each status option: Status
Description
Pending
The session has not yet started.
Processing
The session is currently being processed.
Processing wait
The session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation.
Sleep
The session is currently paused and will restart at the time specified (time next continue date).
Done
The session is finished.
Processing child session
The main session is finished, and a related session is being processed.
• Error — The type of error that may have occurred during the session. The following table describes each possible error message: Error
Description
None
no session error
Unexpected Timeout
an unknown error occurred the session encountered a time out
Interrupted Formatting Protocol
the session was interrupted during processing an error occurred during a formatting operation a communication error was detected
Session sequence Billing Sequence
an error occurred related to the session sequence an error occurred related to the billing sequence
• Time created — The time at which the session was created. • Time to live — The time at which the session begins. • Time next continue — The time at which the session is restarted in the case of an interruption.
• Time finished — The time at which the session ended. • Target account — The account ID and alias of the user receiving the session.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
431
System Configuration
• Target address type — The type of device associated with the session (Mobile, Email, or Phone).
• Target address — The address and associated ID of the recipient’s device. Purging Sessions To purge all finished session processes: 1. From the Sessions screen (Figure 10.38 on page 428), click Purge sessions.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the sessions purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void purging sessions.
Managing Retry Sessions You can view a list of retry session reports directly through the Delivery menu.
Viewing Retry Sessions To view all retry session reports: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Retry Sessions.
3
The Retry sessions > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Retry sessions screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Retry Sessions” on page 433.
Using the Retry Sessions Screen The Retry sessions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Retry sessions screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a session for details. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Bulk Process on the right side of the screen to create a bulk process to retry sessions. For more information, see “Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process” on page 434.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
432
System Configuration
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past session reports. For more information, see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
Searching Retry Sessions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of retry session reports specific to that criteria. To manage retry session filters: 1. From the Retry sessions screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Edit filters.
3
The Retry sessions > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.41: Retry sessions > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Session Details To view session detail information: 1. From the Retry sessions screen, click the ID of a session to view.
3
The Details tab on the Display session information screen displays.
In addition to viewing session details, the Display session information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Stop process to stop the current process. • Click the Timeslots tab to view authorized timeslots for the process. From the Timeslots tab, you can also restart, pause, and stop the process.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
433
System Configuration
Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process To create a bulk process for a retry session: 1. From right side of the Retry sessions screen, click Bulk Process next to the session for which to create the process.
3 The Process details tab on the Create bulk process screen displays 2. In the Name field, enter a name for the process. 3. From the Status list, select the status of the process. 4. From the Priority list, select the priority level of the process. 5. In the Time to start field, enter the date and time at which the process begins (format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS). 6. In the Timeout for target reporting (in milliseconds) field, 7. Click Next.
3 The Bulk action tab on the Create bulk process screen displays. 8. From the Action type list, select the method by which to gather session error information. If you select By CSV file:
• From the Sessions retry mode list, select the retry mode. • In the CSV filename field, enter the full path and filename of the CSV file. • In the CSV separator field, enter the type of field separator used in the CSV file. • From the Encoding list, select the type of encoding. • Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays. 9. From the Target type list, select the method by which to save error information. 10. Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays. 11. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed according to the workflow strategy defined here. 12. Click Next.
3
The Timeslots tab displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
434
System Configuration
13. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 14. Click Add timeslot.
3
A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen. NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the
next
to each timeslot to remove. 15. Click Next.
3
The Confirmation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
16. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit.
Purging Retry Sessions To purge all retry session processes: 1. From the Retry sessions screen (Figure 10.40 on page 430), select one or more retry sessions to purge, then click Purge bulk processes.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void purging sessions.
Managing Purges You can view a list of purged reports directly through the Delivery menu.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
435
System Configuration
Viewing Purges To view all purged session reports: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Purges.
3
The Purges > Filters screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Purged Sessions” on page 437.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Purges screen displays.
Figure 10.42: Purges Screen
Using the Purges Screen The Purges screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Purges screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a process for details. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past session reports. For more information, see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
436
System Configuration
Searching Purged Sessions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of purged session reports specific to that criteria. To manage purged session filters: 1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Edit filters.
3
The Purges > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.43: Purges > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Purge Details To view purge detail information: 1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click the ID of a process to view.
3
The Details tab on the Display purge process information screen displays (Figure 10.44 on page 438).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
437
System Configuration
Figure 10.44: Display purge process information Screen — Details Tab
Click the Timeslots tab to view authorized timeslots for the process. The Display purge process information screen displays the following information:
• Id — The internal purge operation ID. • Status — The status of the purge operation. The following table describes each status option: Status Pending Processing Processing wait Done Processing child session
Description The session has not yet started. The session is currently being processed. The session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation. The session is finished. The main session is finished, and a related session is being processed.
• Time created — The time at which the purge was created. • Time next continue — The time at which the purge is restarted in the case of an interruption.
• Time finished — The time at which the purge ended.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
438
System Configuration
• Action type — The type of operation: session purge. • Target type — The target of the operation: done sessions. • Processed targets — The number of sessions that were purges. • Processing position in file — The percentage of completion. • Purge will delete all sessions that have been done for — The sessions that have been purged; sessions in “done” status that are at least 1 day old.
• Workflow strategy — The workflow used to purge sessions. Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports To purge all finished bulk process reports: 1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Purge bulk processes.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void deletion.
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights To manage group global session and bulk process rights: NOTE: Individual session and process rights are granted per end-user service, and are
applied to bulk operations.
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Administration rights.
3
The Administration rights screen displays (Figure 10.45 on page 440).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
439
System Configuration
Figure 10.45: Administration rights Screen
Adding Tracking Administration Rights 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Tracking Rights” on page 19. 2. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights are
listed. You may only grant rights that are already granted to you for sessions and processes.
3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Tracking Administration Rights To revoke group rights, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
440
11
Statistics
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Statistics Processes ................................................................................. Searching Statistic Processes .................................................................................. Viewing Process Details .......................................................................................... Statistics Tracking ................................................................................................. Viewing Statistic Compilation Details ........................................................................ Device Statistics.................................................................................................... Downloads Per Brand ............................................................................................. Downloads Per Model ............................................................................................. Content Statistics .................................................................................................. Downloads Per Provider.......................................................................................... Downloads Per Content .......................................................................................... Content Per Provider .............................................................................................. Other Statistics ..................................................................................................... Downloads Per Offer .............................................................................................. Downloads Per Service ...........................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
442 442 443 447 448 451 451 452 453 453 454 454 455 455 456
441
Statistics
The Statistics menu provides access to statistics produced by the Content Manager platform.
Managing Statistics Processes To display a list of running processes: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Statistics definitions > Statistics processes.
3 The Statistics processes > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all running processes. For more information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Statistic Processes” on page 442.
3 The Statistics processes screen displays.
Figure 11.1: Statistics processes Screen
Using the Statistics Processes Screen The Statistics processes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. You can also view further details about a process by clicking on a process ID from the Id column. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443.
Searching Statistic Processes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of statistics processes specific to that criteria. To manage statistics process filters: 1. From the Statistics processes screen (Figure 11.1 on page 442), click Edit filters.
3 The Statistics processes > Filters screen displays (Figure 11.2 on page 443).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
442
Statistics
Figure 11.2: Statistics processes > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Process Details To view detailed information about a process: 1. From the Statistics processes screen (Figure 11.1), click a process ID from the Id column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics process screen displays.
Figure 11.3: Edit statistics process Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
443
Statistics
From the Edit statistics process screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab (Figure 11.3) to view general process information, such as process name, creation and execution times, and any applied process schedule.
• Click the Statistics tables tab to view statistics information. For more information, see “Using the Statistics Tables Tab” on page 444.
• Click the Pre tasks tab to view tasks required prior to running the process. For more information, see “Using the Pre Tasks Tab” on page 446.
• Click the Post tasks tab to view tasks required after the process is finished. For more information, see “Using the Post Tasks Tab” on page 446.
Using the Statistics Tables Tab The Statistics table tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to view statistics regarding the selected process.
Figure 11.4: Edit statistics process Screen — Statistics tables Tab
From the Name column, click a statistics table to view.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables screen displays.
Figure 11.5: Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
444
Statistics
To view further details about the specified Statistics target handler, click the target handler name. Using the Statistics Table Tab The Statistics table tab on the Edit statistics table screen allows you to view detailed information about specific sets of statistics.
Figure 11.6: Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables Screen — Statistics table Tab
To view a statistics table, click the name of a statistics table to view.
3 The Statistic results tab on the Edit statistics table screen displays.
Figure 11.7: Edit statistics table Screen — Statistics results Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
445
Statistics
Using the Edit Statistics Table Screen. There are four tabs available on the Edit statistics table screen:
• Details — Click to view general information about the about the selected statistics table.
• Statistics results — Click to view a list of result reports. To view further details about a result report, click an ID number from the Id column.
3
The Edit statistic result screen displays.
• Group by • Operation Using the Pre Tasks Tab The Pre tasks tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to review any tasks scheduled to complete prior to running the process. To review a task: 1. From the Name column, click the name of a process to view.
3 The Edit pre-task screen displays further information about the selected task. Using the Post Tasks Tab The Post tasks tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to review any tasks scheduled to complete after a process has run.
Figure 11.8: Edit statistics process Screen — Post tasks Tab
To review a task: 1. From the Name column, click the name of a process to view.
3 The Edit post-task screen displays further information about the selected task.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
446
Statistics
Statistics Tracking From the Statistics menu, you can track statistics compilation information, such as the current status or execution date on currently running processes. To track currently running processes: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Statistics tracking > Statistics compilation.
3 The Statistics compilation > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of processes with a status of Processing. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Statistic Processes” on page 442.
3 The Statistics compilation screen displays.
Figure 11.9: Statistics compilation Screen
Using the Statistics Compilation Screen The Statistics compilation screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Statistics compilation screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a compilation to view. For more information, see “Viewing Statistic Compilation Details” on page 448.
• From the Statistics process column, click a process to review. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
447
Statistics
Searching Statistics Compilations The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of statistics compilations specific to that criteria. To manage statistics compilation filters: 1. From the Statistics compilation screen (Figure 11.9 on page 447), click Edit filters.
3 The Statistics compilation > Filters screen displays.
Figure 11.10: Statistics compilation > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Statistic Compilation Details To view compilation details: 1. From the Statistics compilation screen (Figure 11.9 on page 447), click a compilation from the Id column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays (Figure 11.11 on page 449).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
448
Statistics
Figure 11.11: Edit statistics compilation Screen — Details Tab
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays general information about the compilation. Click the Statistics process name to view the statistics process. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443.
Using the Bulk Processes Tab The Bulk processes tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays a list of bulk processes in the compilation. Click a process ID from the Id column to view the bulk process.
3 The Edit bulk process screen displays (Figure 11.12 on page 450).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
449
Statistics
Figure 11.12: Edit statistics compilation > Edit bulk process Screen — Details Tab NOTE: Information displayed on the Details tab is view-only.
Using the Timeslots Tab Click the Timeslot tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen to view scheduled times that the process is authorized to run. NOTE: Information displayed on the Timeslot tab is view-only.
Using the Generated Results Tab Click the Generated results tab to review statistic information about the process. Click a result ID from the Id column to view statistics results. Click a table name from the Statistics table column to edit the table. For more information about editing the statistics table, see “Using the Edit Statistics Table Screen” on page 446.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
450
Statistics
Device Statistics There are two types of device statistics available for display through the Statistics menu: Downloads per brand, and Downloads per model.
Downloads Per Brand To select and display statistics on device brands used by end-users to download content: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Device Statistics > Downloads per brand.
3 The Downloads per brand screen displays.
Figure 11.13: Downloads per brand Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • Content type (for example, WAP logos, SMS, and so on) • The number and percentage of content downloaded for each content type during the period on a device attached to the device brand
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content type 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
451
Statistics
Downloads Per Model To select and display statistics on device models used by end-users to download content: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Device Statistics > Downloads per model.
3 The Downloads per model screen displays.
Figure 11.14: Downloads per model Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The device model • The number and percentage of content types downloaded during the period on each device model
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each device model 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
452
Statistics
Content Statistics There are three types of content statistics available for display through the Statistics menu: Downloads per provider, Downloads per content, and Content per provider.
Downloads Per Provider To select and display statistics on the amount of content downloaded per provider: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Downloads per provider.
3 The Downloads per provider screen displays.
Figure 11.15: Downloads per provider Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The content name and type • The number and percentage of content types downloaded for each content provider
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content provider 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
453
Statistics
Downloads Per Content To select and display statistics on the amount of content downloaded by content type: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Downloads per content.
3 The Downloads per content screen displays.
Figure 11.16: Downloads per content Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The content name • The number and percentage of content types downloaded for each device brand • The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content type 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Content Per Provider To select and display statistics on the amount of content created, updated, and deleted per provider: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Content Per Provider.
3 The Content per provider screen displays (Figure 11.17 on page 455).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
454
Statistics
Figure 11.17: Content per provider Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information in three categories: Content created by content provider, Content modified by content provider, and Content deleted by content provider:
• The name of the content provider • The number and percentage of content created, modified, and deleted by each provider
• The number and percentage of total content created, modified, and deleted 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Other Statistics There are two types of other statistics available for display through the Statistics menu: Downloads per offer, and Downloads per service.
Downloads Per Offer To select and display statistics on the number of downloads per offer: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Other Statistics > Downloads per offer.
3 The Downloads per offer screen displays (Figure 11.18 on page 456).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
455
Statistics
Figure 11.18: Downloads per offer Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The type of offer • The number and percentage of content requests per offer • The number and percentage of total content requests 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Downloads Per Service To select and display statistics on the number of downloads per service: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Other Statistics > Downloads per service.
3 The Downloads per service screen displays.
Figure 11.19: Downloads per service Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
456
Statistics
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The service name • The number and percentage of content requests per service • The number and percentage of total content requests 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
457
12
System Information
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Countries ............................................................................................... Viewing Countries.................................................................................................. Searching Countries............................................................................................... Adding a Country .................................................................................................. Editing a Country .................................................................................................. Deleting a Country ................................................................................................ Managing Mobile Network Operators ........................................................................ Viewing Mobile Network Operators ........................................................................... Searching Operators .............................................................................................. Creating a New Operator ........................................................................................ Editing an Operator ............................................................................................... Deleting an Operator ............................................................................................. Managing Phone Prefixes ........................................................................................ Viewing Prefixes .................................................................................................... Searching Prefixes ................................................................................................. Creating New Prefixes ............................................................................................ Editing a Prefix...................................................................................................... Deleting a Prefix.................................................................................................... History File Configuration ....................................................................................... Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration .................................................................... Managing History Rights.........................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
459 459 460 461 461 462 463 463 464 465 465 466 467 467 468 469 469 470 471 471 473
458
System Information
The System menu allows you to manage basic system options, such as countries, operators, phone prefixes, history file configuration, and global system rights.
Managing Countries The Countries manager section of the System menu allows you to manage country codes previously defined in Content Manager.
Viewing Countries To view a list of previously defined countries: 1. From the System menu, select Countries manager > Countries.
3 The Countries > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of countries. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Countries” on page 460.
3 The Countries screen displays.
Figure 12.1: Countries Screen
The Countries screen displays the following information:
• Name — the name of the operator • Mcc — the country’s Mobile Country Code • Date created — the date on which the country was added to the system
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
459
System Information
Using the Countries Screen The Countries screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Countries screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a country to edit. For more information about editing countries, see “Editing a Country” on page 461.
• Click New country to add a new country. For more information, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
• Click Delete to remove all selected countries. For more information, see “Deleting a Country” on page 462.
Searching Countries The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of countries specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Countries screen (Figure 12.1 on page 459), click Edit filters.
3 The Countries > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.2: List operators > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
460
System Information
Adding a Country To add a country to the system: 1. From the Countries screen (Figure 12.1 on page 459), click New country.
3 The New country screen displays. NOTE: The New country function is also available when searching for or editing a
country. For more information, see “Editing a Country” on page 461.
Figure 12.3: New country Screen
2. In the Mcc field, enter the country’s Mobile Country Code. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the country. This name displays for end-users. 4. In the Prefix field, enter the country’s phone prefix. 5. In the Locale field, enter the locale to be used with the country. 6. Click Submit.
Editing a Country The Edit country screen allows you to modify operator details. To edit a country: 1. From the Name column on the Countries screen, click a country to edit.
3 The Edit country screen displays (Figure 12.8 on page 466).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
461
System Information
Figure 12.4: Edit country Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit country screen:
• Name — the country name • Mcc — the country’s Mobile Country Code • Prefix — the country’s phone prefix • Date created — the date on which the country was added to the system (cannot be modified).
• Date modified — The date on which the country was last edited (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting a Country To delete a country: 1. From the Countries screen, check the box next to one or more countries to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all countries. 2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected countries?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited country by clicking Delete on the Edit country
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
462
System Information
Managing Mobile Network Operators The Operators manager section of the System menu allows you to manage mobile network operators on the CM system.
Viewing Mobile Network Operators To view mobile network operators: 1. From the System menu, select Operators manager > operators.
3 The Operators > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all available operators. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Operators” on page 464.
3 The Operators screen displays.
Figure 12.5: Operators Screen
The Operators screen displays the following information:
• Name — the name of the operator • Mnc — the Mobile Network Code associated with the operator • Country — the operator’s country • Date created — the date on which the operator was created
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
463
System Information
Using the Operators Screen The Operators screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Operators screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click an operator to edit. For more information about editing operators, see “Editing an Operator” on page 465.
• Click New operator to create a new operator. For more information, see “Creating a New Operator” on page 465.
• Click Delete to remove all selected operators. For more information, see “Deleting an Operator” on page 466.
Searching Operators The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of operators specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Operators screen (Figure 12.5 on page 463), click Edit filters.
3 The Operators > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.6: Operators > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
464
System Information
Creating a New Operator NOTE: Countries must be defined prior to creating an operator. For information about
adding countries, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
To create a new mobile network operator: 1. From the Operators screen, click New operator.
3 The New operator screen displays. NOTE: The New operator function is also available when searching for or editing an
operator. For more information, see “Searching Operators” on page 464 and “Editing an Operator” on page 465.
Figure 12.7: New operator Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the operator. 3. From the Mcc list, select an existing Mobile Country Code for the operator. 4. In the Mnc field, enter the Mobile Network Code for the operator. This information is required. 5. Click Submit.
Editing an Operator The Edit operator screen allows you to modify operator details. To edit an operator: 1. From the Name column on the Operators screen (Figure 12.5 on page 463), click an operator to edit.
3 The Edit operator screen displays (Figure 12.8 on page 466).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
465
System Information
Figure 12.8: Edit operator Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit operator screen:
• Name — the operator name • Mcc — the Mobile Country Code for the operator • Mnc — the Mobile Network Code for the operator • Date created — the date on which the operator was created (cannot be modified) • Date modified — the date on which the operator was last edited (updated automatically) Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting an Operator To delete an operator: 1. From the Operators screen, check the box next to one or more operators to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all operators. 2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected operators?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited operator by clicking Delete on the Edit operator
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
466
System Information
Managing Phone Prefixes The Phone prefix manager portion of the System menu allows you to manage phone prefixes. Before you can create a service, you must define all possible Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN) formats, including: prefixes, minimum and maximum lengths, and conversions to the standard phone format (international format). For example, French mobile phone numbers start with “06” and are 10 digits long. Before they can be used, these numbers must be converted to the international format, for example, starting with “336”.
Viewing Prefixes To view a list of previously defined phone prefixes: 1. From the System menu, select Phone prefix manager > Prefixes.
3 The Prefixes > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show prefixes to view the list of prefixes. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Prefixes” on page 468.
3 The Prefixes screen displays.
Figure 12.9: Prefixes Screen
The Prefixes screen displays the following information:
• Prefix — the original prefix entered • Replace — the prefix used in place of the original prefix • Length min — the minimum length of the MSISDN allowed for the associated prefix • Length max — the maximum length of the MSISDN allowed for the associated prefix
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
467
System Information
Using the Prefixes Screen The Prefixes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Prefixes screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Prefix column, click a prefix to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Prefix” on page 469.
• Click Create prefix to create a new prefix. For more information, see “Creating New Prefixes” on page 469.
• Click Delete Prefix to remove all selected prefixes. For more information, see “Deleting a Prefix” on page 470.
Searching Prefixes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of prefixes specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Prefixes screen (Figure 12.9 on page 467), click Edit filters.
3 The Prefixes > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.10: Prefixes > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
468
System Information
Creating New Prefixes To create a new prefix: 1. From the Prefixes screen, click Create prefix.
3 The New prefix screen displays. NOTE: The Create prefix function is also available when searching for or editing a prefix.
For more information, see “Searching Prefixes” on page 468 and “Editing a Prefix” on page 469.
Figure 12.11: New prefix Screen
2. In the Prefix field, enter the original, authorized prefix. 3. In the Replace field, enter the prefix used to replace the authorized prefix. 4. In the Length min field, enter the minimum length of the MSISDN that can be entered. 5. In the Length max field, enter the maximum length of the MSISDN that can be entered. 6. Click Submit.
Editing a Prefix To access the Edit prefix screen: 1. From the Prefix column on the Prefixes screen, click a prefix to edit.
3 The Edit prefix screen displays (Figure 12.12 on page 470).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
469
System Information
Figure 12.12: Edit prefix Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit prefix screen:
• Prefix — the original, authorized prefix (cannot be modified) • Replace — the prefix used to replace the authorized prefix • Length min — the minimum length of the MSISDN that can be entered • Length max — the maximum length of the MSISDN that can be entered Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting a Prefix To delete a prefix: 1. From the Prefixes screen, check the box next to one or more prefixes to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all prefixes. 2. Click Delete prefix.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected phone prefixes?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited prefix by clicking Delete on the Edit prefix screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
470
System Information
History File Configuration All tracking features (user history tracking, event tracking, and so on) are managed by a single component. You can edit the configuration for this component through the System menu.
Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration The dispatch file is where history logs and information on how they are generated are stored on the server. To access the History Configuration Edit screen: 1. From the System menu, select History Configuration > Edit.
3 The History Configuration > Edit screen displays.
Figure 12.13: History Configuration > Edit Screen
The History Configuration >Edit screen displays the following information: NOTE: The information displayed on the History Configuration > Edit screen is view-
only. Contact your system administrator to make changes to the history file configuration.
• History folder — The relative directory where history files are stored. • Absolute History path — The directory path to where history files are stored (calculated from the relative directory path).
• History root filename — The root filename for all history files. • Dispatch options — Indicates whether history files are to be dispatched by owner, and whether to close history files each day or every hour.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
471
System Information
Purging History Files To view purging options: 1. From the History Configuration > Edit screen, click the Purge configuration tab.
3 The Purge configuration tab displays.
Figure 12.14: History Configuration > Edit Screen — Purge configuration Tab
The Purge configuration tab displays the following information: NOTE: The information displayed on the Purge configuration tab is view-only.
• Purge activated — Indicates whether the purge function is active. • Purge files older than (days) — Indicates how long history files are stored (in days).
• Purge scheduling — Indicates how often history files are purged. Purging History Files To manually purge history files: 1. From the Purge configuration tab on the History Configuration > Edit screen, click Purge now.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to launch the purge process? During the purge, X files will be removed from the persistence system.” displays. 2. Click Ok to purge, or Cancel to void the purge process.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
472
System Information
Managing History Rights To establish history rights: 1. From the System menu, select History rights > Define global rights.
3 The Define global rights screen displays.
Figure 12.15: Define global rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “System History Rights” on page 15. NOTE: You may only grant history rights that are already granted to you.
3. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to assign rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3 The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen. Revoking Global Rights To revoke group rights, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
473
Glossary
Account A record of information about a Content Manager user. It includes credentials (login, password, IP address), name, and other Content Manager-specific information, for example, group membership. There are two types of accounts: End-user and Administrator. Administrator accounts can be used by physical persons or by external systems. End-user accounts are associated to mobile subscribers, identified by their IMSI, MSISDN or any other unique ID.
Administrator An Administrator has rights on the back-office and uses an Administrator account. In most cases, this account is used by a physical person to access the Content Manager web backoffice to administrate Content Manager. An administrator account is attached to one or several back-office groups.
Back-Office See Administrator.
Bulk process A bulk delivery of one or several bundles to several users. To decrease the load on the platform, the bulk process follows a certain session sequence.
Bundle A bundle (formerly called a package option) enables association between topics, patterns and triggers. It is always associated with a parent offer.
Bundle Template A bundle template contains all useful bundle information, delivery triggers, and topic filters. A bundle template’s format is used to automatically format new bundles.
Capability group A list of devices that share one common capability — they are compatible with a certain Handset Manager feature, have access to a certain online help, and so on. Capability groups are associated to compatible content templates.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
474
Glossary
Capability group handler Capability group handlers are used to automatically define capability groups.
Category A classification of information that can be used to tag a content or an offer.
Content A series of binary and/or text data identified by a unique ID and uses a content template. It is made up of one or several content versions and content metadata.
Content metadata An element of a content that is not used directly for delivery to a device, but adds other information to the content.
Content provider An entity that publishes contents. It can be a remote system, a group of administrator accounts, or an application, for example. Contents can be published by the entity itself or by those accounts which have rights to publish contents on behalf of this entity.
Content template A template describing the different elements required to generate a content that can be delivered to a device.
Content version A content version is an element of a content that can be delivered to a device. A content version is compatible with one or several devices.
Content version template A template describing the different elements of a content version that can be delivered to a device.
Device A device is a terminal used by an end-user that can be addressed by Content Manager. Each device is associated to a type (mobile phone, for example), an address (a phone number, for example), a model (Nokia 3330, for example), an IMEI.
End-user An account that allows a user to purchase and receive contents from Content Manager and access the front-office interface. It is associated to one or several devices.
Feature A type of content that can be delivered to a device.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
475
Glossary
Formatting Token Formatting tokens are used to balance the load between two formatting applications sending content to any given handset.
Front-Office See End-user.
Group A set of end-user or administrator accounts with similar rights. A group inherits rights from parent groups and passes on its rights to child groups.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) The most popular standard for mobile phones in the world. GSM service is used by over 1.5 billion people across more than 210 countries and territories. The ubiquity of the GSM standard makes international roaming very common between mobile phone operators, enabling subscribers to use their phones in many parts of the world. GSM differs significantly from its predecessors in that both signaling and speech channels are digital, which means that it is considered a second generation mobile phone system.
Handset Manager A handset device management application that communicates with Content Manager to allow for administrative tasks such as adding, updating, or deleting handsets. Handset Manager is not intended for use by clients, but rather intended for use by internal system administrators or developers.
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) A unique number given to every single mobile phone, typically found behind the battery. IMEI numbers of cellular phones connected to a GSM network are stored in a database (EIR Equipment Identity Register) containing all valid mobile phone equipment. When a phone is reported stolen or is not type approved, the number is marked invalid.
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) The ability to send messages using a combination of text, sounds, images and video to MMS capable handsets. Similar to SMS, MMS is a store and forward method of transmitting graphics, video clips, sound files and short text messages over wireless networks using the WAP protocol. Carriers deploy special servers, dubbed MMS Centers (MMSCs) to implement the offerings on their systems. MMS also supports e-mail addressing, so the device can send e-mails directly to an e-mail address. The most common use of MMS is for communication between mobile phones.
Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN) Number The dialable number that callers use to reach a mobile subscriber. Some phones can support multiple MSISDNs, for example, a US-based MSISDN and a Canadian-based MSISDN. Callers dialing either number will reach the subscriber.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
476
Glossary
Offer An offer (formerly called a package) is a set of bundles. It is associated to a certain frontoffice service and can be downloaded by end-user members of certain groups.
Pattern A pattern can format contents (following a certain template) into messages for delivery over a certain media. A pattern also includes information on content adaptation to different devices.
Right An entitlement attributed to members of a group to perform certain actions (view, create, use, delete) on a certain resource (another group, a category, a billing model) in Content Manager.
Service An instance of Content Manager that uses its own accounts, content, and services. Several Content Manager services can share common resources, for example and end-user account database, a content database, and so on.
Session The process where several bundles are delivered to a device after a trigger is activated. This process follows a certain kinematics, described by the session sequence.
Short Messaging Service (SMS) A general name for the technology that allows users to send and receive text messages using mobile phones.Messages can be up to 160 characters of text in length. Many new mobile phones let you send bigger messages, and automatically split your message up into 160character chunks. Messages can comprise of words or numbers or an alphanumeric combination (binary format is even supported). SMS is a store and forward service, which means messages are not sent directly from sender to recipient, but always through an SMS Center instead.
Template A predefined format used to create items and store contents in Content Manager. See also Bundle template, Content template, and Content version template.
Terminal ID A unique number assigned by a system administrator that identifies the handset device for administrative purposes (for example, adding, updating, or deleting handsets). The Terminal ID is required for communications between the Content Manager application and Handset Manager.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
477
Glossary
Topic An association between one or several categories where contents and one or several events is retrieved. Contents must be associated to all selected categories to be fetched by the topic.
Trigger An event that activates the delivery of a certain bundle. The triggering event may be the reception of a message, a request from an end-user, the publication of a new content, and such.
User agent User agent information is included in the http headers of a WAP page or the Multimedia Messaging Services Center (MMS-C). This information is detected when a device accesses a WAP page or the MMS-C. The correct device can be identified based on the user agent profile.
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) The leading standard for information services on wireless terminals like digital mobile phones. Wireless Markup Language (WML) is the language used to create pages to be displayed in a WAP browser. The wireless industry came up with the idea of WAP. The point of this standard was to show internet contents on wireless clients, like mobile phones.
Wireless Markup Language (WML) The language used to create pages to be displayed in a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) browser.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
478
Index
A about Content Manager 2 filters 8–10 rights management 12–20 session sequences 407 access granting to a resource 48–49 removing from a resource 49 accessing bulk content processes 426 bulk import process 164 account imports, bulk creating 102–104 managing 101–104 searching 102 viewing 101–102 accounts quick start, importing 25–27 searching by alias 366 searching by MSISDN 365 accounts, back-office adding 53 adding parent groups 57 creating 53 deleting 59 deleting parent groups 57 editing 54–59 managing 51–59 managing IP restrictions 58 parent groups 56 rights 12 searching 52 viewing 51–52 accounts, front-office creating 83–84 deleting 97 Copyright 2006
accounts, front-office, continued editing 84–98 editing services 87 managing 81–97 managing addresses 91–93 managing credit information 95 managing devices 89–90 managing SIM cards 93–94 managing timeslots 94 parent groups 87 rights 12 searching 81–82 actions workflows 411–418 workflows, creating 416 workflows, deleting 418 workflows, editing 417–418 activating device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 238 device features 200 device IMEI ranges 186, 251 device profile capabilities 281 device profiles 276 device user agents 190, 255 devices 177, 194 adding actions, workflow 416 back-office accounts 53 back-office groups 43 back-office parent groups 57 bulk account imports 102–104 bundles 339 capability groups 204 condition rules, workflow 421 conditions, workflow 420 content 139–140 content categories 116
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
479
Index adding, continued content metadata 151 content providers 109 content systems 382–384 content topics 370 content versions 144–146 countries 461 delivery categories 302 device application types 230 device application versions 243 device applications 236 device profile capabilities 262 devices 180 formatting tokens 216 front-office accounts 83–84 front-office groups 73 IMEI ranges 185 message patterns 396–399 messaging credentials 393–394 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 316 offers 312 phone prefixes 469 services 62 session sequences 404–406 states, workflow 413 subscriptions 365–366 synchronizations, trust source 296 trust sources 286 user agents 189 versions to trust sources 285 workflows 409 addresses front-office account 91–93 searching front-office accounts by 82 administrator group. See back-office group
application types, device, continued managing 226–231 searching 228 viewing 226–228 application versions, device activating 244 associated device applications 235 creating 243 deactivating 244 deleting 244 details 241 editing 240–242 managing 238–244 searching 240 user agents 242 viewing 238–240 applications, device activating 238 application versions 235 creating 236 deactivating 238 deleting 237 details 235 editing 233–236 managing 232–238 searching 233 user agents 235 viewing 232 applying filters 8–10 archives, DKB generating 291 managing 290 association type, user 73–75 automatic user association 73–75
Administrators menu 41 aliases devices by brand 176 devices by model 182–183 searching accounts by 366 searching front-office accounts by 82 application types, device activating 231 creating 230 deactivating 231 deleting 231 editing 228
Copyright 2006
B back-office account adding 53 adding parent groups 57 creating 53 deleting 59 deleting parent groups 57 editing 54–59 managing 51–59 managing IP restrictions 58 managing parent groups 56
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
480
Index bulk process, continued rights 19 viewing statistics compilation 449
back-office account, continued rights 12 searching 52 viewing 51–52
bundle templates capabilities 321 content templates 323 creating 316 deleting 330 details 319 editing 318–329 managing on offers 315–330 on content triggers 324–325 on message triggers 325–326 on schedule triggers 326–329 searching topics 320 topics 320
back-office group adding 43 creating 43 defining rights 47–48 deleting 49 editing 44–45 managing 41–50 rights 12–13 searching 42 viewing 41–42 brands, device aliases 176 cache management 388 deactivating 177 details 175 editing 174–176 managing 172–176 searching 173 browser, device profiles 266 bulk account imports creating 102–104 managing 101–104 searching 102 viewing 101–102 bulk campaign, quick start guide 22–39 bulk content accessing a process 426 deleting process reports 439 importing 158–163 managing processes 425–427 process rights 439 searching processes 426 viewing processes 425–426 bulk import accessing a process 164 creating a process 160–163 deleting a process 164 process timeslots 163, 361 searching 159 bulk process bundle, creating 357–361 quick start creation 37–39 retry sessions, creating 434–435
Copyright 2006
bundles bulk processes 357–361 compatibilities 346 creating 339 deleting 355 details 342 downloading 355–357 editing 341–354 managing 337–357 metadata 354 on content triggers 352 on message triggers 348 on schedule triggers 348–352 popularity 353 searching 339 topic patterns 344 topics 343–346 viewing 337–339
C cache editing management 387–391 managing 387–391 cache management brands 388 device profile capabilities 390 device profiles 389 models 388 capabilities content topic devices 374 offer bundle templates 321
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
481
Index capabilities, device profile activating 281 deactivating 281 deleting 280 editing 279 managing 260–263, 278–281 searching 277 capability group handlers creating 207 deleting 211 editing 208–211 managing 206–211 searching 207 viewing 206–207
categories, content creating 116 deleting 121 details 119 editing 117–121 managing 114–123 managing providers 119–120 rights 16–17, 120, 121–123 searching 116 viewing 115–116 categories, delivery creating 302 deleting 309 editing 304–309 managing 300–309 searching 302 viewing 300–302 changing login password 3 cloning content 157 compatibilities bundles 346 offer 330
Copyright 2006
condition rules workflows, creating 421 workflows, deleting 423 workflows, editing 422 conditions workflows 419–423 workflows, creating 420 workflows, deleting 423 workflows, editing 421
capability groups creating 204 deleting 205 editing 203–204 managing 201–205 resetting 204 searching 202 searching handler created 210 viewing 201–202 viewing handler created 209 catalog rights 18, 367–368
compilations searching statistics 448 viewing bulk processes 449 viewing statistics details 448
configuring bulk campaign 22–39 content repository, quick start 23–25 delivery options, quick start 33–36 end-user database structure, quick start 22–23 history files 471–472 MO interface, quick start 36–37 content adding 139–140 adding metadata 151 bulk imports 158–163 cloning 157 copying 157 creating 139–140 creating versions 144–146 deleting 157 deleting metadata 153 deleting versions 149 details 142 download statistics 454 editing 140–156 editing metadata 152 editing versions 147–148 files 160 managing 137–158 managing metadata 150–153 quick start, creating 28–33 searching 138 statistics 453 statistics per provider 454 using xml files 165–169 using zip files 164 viewing 137–138 viewing categories 115–116 viewing versions 143
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
482
Index content topics, continued editing 372–376 managing 368–381 metadata 376 publishing 379 rights 18, 377 searching 370 viewing 368–370
content categories creating 116 deleting 121 details 119 editing 117–121 global rights 121–123 managing 114–123 managing providers 119–120 rights 16–17, 120 searching 116
content triggers 324–325, 352
Content Manager about 2 interface overview 5 logging in 3 logging out 4 menu bar 5 rights definitions 11–19 version information 6 Welcome screen, Content Manager 5 Content menu 107 content providers creating 109 deleting 113 details 111 editing 110–113 managing 107–114 managing templates 111–112 rights 15–16, 112–113 viewing 107–108 content repository configuration, quick start 23– 25 content systems creating 382–384 deleting 385 editing 384 managing 381–385 searching 382 viewing 381–382 content templates editing 124–136 managing 123–136 offer bundle templates 323 viewing 123 content topics creating 370 deleting 377 details 373 device capabilities 374
Copyright 2006
content versions, managing devices 148, 153–156 content, bulk accessing a process 426 managing processes 425–427 searching processes 426 viewing processes 425–426 copying content 157 countries creating 461 deleting 462 editing 461 managing 459–462 searching 460 viewing 459 creating actions, workflow 416 back-office accounts 53 back-office groups 43 bulk account imports 102–104 bulk import process 160–163 bulk process, quick start 37–39 bundle bulk process 357–361 bundles 339 capability group handlers 207 capability groups 204 condition rules, workflow 421 conditions, workflow 420 content 139–140 content categories 116 content metadata 151 content providers 109 content systems 382–384 content topics 370 content versions 144–146 content, quick start 28–33 countries 461 delivery categories 302 device application types 230 device application versions 243
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
483
Index creating, continued device applications 236 device detection rules 222–223 device features 197 device profile capabilities 262 device profiles on devices 191 devices 180 formatting tokens 216 front-office accounts 83–84 front-office groups 73 IMEI ranges 185 message patterns 396–399 messaging credentials 393–394 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 316 offers 312 phone prefixes 469 retry session bulk process 434–435 services 62 session sequences 404–406 states, workflow 413 subscriptions 365–366 synchronizations, trust source 296 trust sources 286 user agents 189 versions for trust sources 285 workflows 409 credentials, messaging creating 393–394 deleting 394 editing 394 managing 391–395 searching 392 viewing 391–393 credit information, front-office account 95 criteria, filter 8–10 csv files 160
D data patterns, managing 400–402 deactivating brands 177 device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 238 device features 200 device IMEI ranges 186, 252
Copyright 2006
deactivating, continued device profile capabilities 281 device profiles 276 device user agents 190, 255 devices 194 defining back-office global group rights 49–50 back-office group rights 47–48 back-office offer rights 333 bulk process rights 439 catalog rights 367–368 content category rights 120 Content Manager rights 11–19 content provider rights 112–113 content topic rights 377 front-office group rights 76–77 front-office group rules 78–80 front-office offer rights 332, 334 global content category rights 121–123 global service rights 69–71 history rights 473 navigation rights 48–49 service rights 66–67 session rights 439 system administration rights 424 deleting access to a resource 49 actions, workflow 418 back-office accounts 59 back-office groups 49 back-office parent groups 57 bulk import process 164 bulk process reports 439 bundles 355 capability group handlers 211 capability groups 205 condition rules, workflow 423 conditions, workflow 423 content 157 content categories 121 content metadata 153 content providers 113 content systems 385 content topic 377 content versions 149 countries 462 delivery categories 309 device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 237 device detection rules 223
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
484
Index deleting, continued device features 200 device IMEI ranges 186, 251 device profile capabilities 262, 280 device profiles 276 device profiles from devices 193 device user agents 190, 254 devices 194 DKB versions 290 formatting tokens 218 front-office accounts 97 front-office groups 80 message patterns 403 messaging credentials 394 mobile network operators 466 offer bundle templates 330 offers 336 phone prefixes 470 services 69 session sequences 406 states, workflow 415 trust sources 287 versions from trust sources 285 workflows 423
details, continued offer bundle templates 319 purge 437–439 session 433 statistics processes 443 workflows 411 detection rules, detection tool 225 detection rules, device creating 222–223 deleting 223 editing 220–221 managing 218–224 searching 219 viewing 218–219 detection sets, device managing 224 viewing 224 detection tool 225 device brands aliases 176 details 175 device features activating 200 deactivating 200 deleting 200 details 198 device profile compatibility 198 editing 197–199
delivery categories creating 302 deleting 309 dynamic data 305 editing 304–309 managing 300–309 metadata 307 searching 302 viewing 300–302
Device Knowledge Base See DKB.
delivery options, quick start configuration 33–36
Device menu 170–298
details bundles 342 content 142 content category 119 content providers 111 content topic 373 device application versions 241 device applications 235 device feature 198 device profiles 259 devices by brand 175 devices by model 182 editing session 430–432 formatting tokens 214 message patterns 400 offer 315
device models aliases 182–183 editing 180–193
Copyright 2006
device profile capabilities cache management 390 formatting tokens 215 device profiles activating 276 browser 266 cache management 389 capabilities 260–263 creating capabilties 262 creating on devices 191 deactivating 276 deleting 276
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
485
Index device profiles, continued deleting capabilties 262 deleting from devices 193 details 259 device feature compatibility 198 editing 258–275 editing capabilties 261 hardware 263 hardware extensions 264 importing to devices 192 managing 256–277 managing on devices 191–193 MMS 271 network 268 OMA DM CP 275 Push 270 searching 255 settings 272 SMS 273 software 265 WAP 268 devices activating 177, 194 activating application types 231 activating application versions 244 activating applications 238 activating IMEI ranges 186, 251 activating user agents 190, 255 creating 180 creating application versions 243 creating applications 236 creating detection rules 222–223 creating device profiles 191 creating features 197 creating IMEI ranges 185 creating user agents 189 deactivating 194 deactivating application types 231 deactivating application versions 244 deactivating applications 238 deactivating IMEI ranges 186, 252 deactivating user agents 190, 255 deleting 194 deleting application types 231 deleting application versions 244 deleting applications 237 deleting detection rules 223 deleting device profiles 193 deleting IMEI ranges 186, 251 deleting user agents 190, 254 download statistics by brand 451
Copyright 2006
devices, continued download statistics by model 452 editing application types 228, 230 editing application versions 240–242 editing applications 233–236 editing by brand 174–176 editing detection rules 220–221 editing features 197–199 editing IMEI ranges 184 editing user agents 187 front-office account 89–90 importing device profiles 192 managing application types 226–231 managing application versions 238–244 managing applications 232–238 managing by brand 172–176 managing by IMEI range 249–252 managing by model 178–194 managing by user agent 253–255 managing detection rules 218–224 managing detection sets 224 managing device profiles 191–193 managing features 195–200 managing for content versions 148, 153–156 managing IMEI ranges 183–186 managing rights 297 managing user agents 187–191 rights 17 searching application types 228 searching application versions 240 searching applications 233 searching by brand 173 searching by IMEI 249 searching by unresolved IMEI 100–101 searching by user agent 252 searching detection rules 219 searching features 196 statistics 451 using Quick Search 248 viewing application types 226–228 viewing application versions 238–240 viewing applications 232 viewing detection rules 218–219 viewing detection sets 224 devices, mobile managing 99–101 searching by IMEI 99–101 DKB deleting versions 290 editing versions 289 generating archives 291
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
486
Index DKB, continued managing archives 290 managing versions 287–290 rights 17 searching versions 288 synchronizations 291–297 viewing versions 287 download codes, managing 335 download statistics per brand 451 per content 454 per model 452 per offer 455 per provider 453 per service 456 downloading bundles 355–357 downloads, viewing popular 362–363 dynamic data, delivery categories 305
E editing actions, workflow 417–418 back-office accounts 54–59 back-office groups 44–45 bundles 341–354 cache management 387–391 capability group handlers 208–211 capability groups 203–204 condition rules, workflow 422 conditions, workflow 421 content 140–156 content categories 117–121 content metadata 152 content providers 110–113 content systems 384 content templates 124–136 content topics 372–376 content versions 147–148 countries 461 delivery categories 304–309 device application types 228 device application versions 240–242 device applications 233–236 device detection rules 220–221 device features 197–199 device profile capabilities 261, 279 device profiles 258–275
Copyright 2006
editing, continued device user agents 187 devices by brand 174–176 devices by model 180–193 DKB versions 289 formatting tokens 213–216 front-office account services 87 front-office accounts 84–98 front-office groups 74–80 IMEI ranges on devices 184 message patterns 399–402 messaging credentials 394 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 318–329 offers 314–336 phone prefixes 469 services 64–67 session details 430–432 session sequences 406 states, workflow 414–415 subscriptions 366 trust sources 283–285 workflows 410–423 end-user database structure configuration, quick start 22–23 end-user. See front-office End-users menu 61 errors, session 431 export file formats 336
F features, device activating 200 creating 197 deactivating 200 deleting 200 details 198 device profile capability 198 editing 197–199 managing 195–200 searching 196 file formats, export 336 files content 160 csv 160 history, configuring 471–472
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
487
Index files, continued history, purging 472 history, viewing configurations 471
G
filters applying 8–10 criteria and operators 8–10 text operators 9–10
glossary 474–478 granting access to a resource 48–49
formatting systems managing 245–246 searching 245 viewing 245 formatting tokens creating 216 deleting 218 details 214 device profile capabilities 215 editing 213–216 managing 212–218 searching 213 viewing 212–213 front-office accounts creating 83–84 deleting 97 editing 84–98 editing services 87 managing 81–97 managing addresses 91–93 managing credit information 95 managing devices 89–90 managing parent groups 87 managing SIM cards 93–94 managing timeslots 94 rights 12 searching 81–82 front-office groups creating 73 defining rights 76–77 defining rules 78–80 deleting 80 editing 74–80 rights 12–13 searching 72 viewing 71–72
Copyright 2006
generating DKB archives 291
groups, back-office adding 43 creating 43 deleting 49 editing 44–45 managing 41–50 rights 12–13 searching 42 viewing 41–42 groups, capability creating 204 deleting 205 editing 203–204 managing 201–205 resetting 204 searching 202 viewing 201–202 groups, front-office adding 73 creating 73 deleting 80 editing 74–80 rights 12–13 searching 72 viewing 71–72 groups, parent adding to back-office accounts 57 managing 46–47 removing from back-office accounts 57
H handlers, capability group creating 207 deleting 211 editing 208–211 managing 206–211 searching 207 searching created groups 210 viewing 206–207 viewing created groups 209
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
488
Index history rights, managing 473 system rights 15 viewing user 96–98
logging into Content Manager 3 logging out of Content Manager 4 login password, changing 3
history files configuring 471–472 purging 472 viewing configurations 471
M
I IMEI searching devices by 99–101 unresolved, searching devices by 100–101 IMEI ranges activating from devices 251 activating on devices 186 creating 185 deactivating from devices 252 deactivating on devices 186 deleting from devices 251 editing 184 managing devices by 249–252 managing on devices 183–186 removing from devices 186 searching devices by 249 import, bulk process accessing 164 contents 158–163 creating 160–163 deleting 164 timeslots 163, 361 importing accounts, quick start 25–27 device profiles to devices 192 imports, bulk account creating 102–104 managing 101–104 searching 102 viewing 101–102 interface, Content Manager 5 IP restrictions, managing 58
L lists, viewing and working with 6–7
Copyright 2006
managing back-office accounts 51–59 back-office groups 41–50 back-office parent groups 56 bulk account imports 101–104 bulk content processes 425–427 bundles 337–357 cache 387–391 capability group handlers 206–211 capability groups 201–205 content 137–158 content categories 114–123 content metadata 150–153 content provider templates 111–112 content providers 107–114 content providers by category 119–120 content systems 381–385 content templates 123–136 content topics 368–381 content version devices 148, 153–156 countries 459–462 data patterns 400–402 delivery categories 300–309 device application types 226–231 device application versions 238–244 device applications 232–238 device detection rules 218–224 device detection sets 224 device features 195–200 device IMEI ranges 183–186 device profile capabilities 278–281 device profiles 256–277 device profiles on devices 191–193 device rights 297 device user agents 187–191 devices by brand 172–176 devices by IMEI range 249–252 devices by model 178–194 devices by user agent 253–255 DKB archives 290 DKB versions 287–290 formatting systems 245–246 formatting tokens 212–218 front-office account addresses 91–93
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
489
Index managing, continued front-office account credit information 95 front-office account devices 89–90 front-office account SIM cards 93–94 front-office account timeslots 94 front-office accounts 81–97 front-office parent groups 87 history rights 473 IP restrictions, back-office account 58 message patterns 395–403 messaging credentials 391–395 mobile devices 99–101 mobile network operators 463–466 offer bundle templates 315–330 offer download codes 335 offers 310–336 parent groups 46–47 phone prefixes 467–470 purges 435–439 retry sessions 432 rights 12–20 services 61–71 session sequences 403–406 sessions 428–432 statistics processes 442–446 subscriptions 365–366 synchronizations, DKB 291–297 triggers 363–364 trust sources 282–287 versions for trust sources 283–285 workflows 408–423 manual user association 73–75 menu bar, Content Manager 5 menus Administrators 41 Content 107 Device 170–298 End-users 61 Statistics 442 System 459 message patterns creating 396–399 deleting 403 details 400 editing 399–402 managing 395–403 searching 396 types 397–399 viewing 395–396
Copyright 2006
message triggers 325–326, 348 messaging credentials creating 393–394 deleting 394 editing 394 managing 391–395 searching 392 viewing 391–393 metadata bundles 354 content topic 376 offers 331 metadata, content adding 151 deleting 153 editing 152 managing 150–153 metadata, delivery categories 307 MMS, device profiles 271 MO interface, quick start configuration 36–37 mobile devices managing 99–101 searching by IMEI 99–101 mobile network operators adding 465 creating 465 deleting 466 editing 465 managing 463–466 modifying 465 searching 464 viewing 463–464 models, cache management 388 models, device aliases 182–183 details 182 editing 180–193 managing 178–194 searching 179 modifying actions, workflow 417–418 back-office accounts 54–59 back-office groups 44–45 bundles 341–354 cache management 387–391 condition rules, workflow 422
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
490
Index modifying, continued conditions, workflow 421 content 140–156 content categories 117–121 content providers 110–113 content systems 384 content templates 124–136 content topics 372–376 content versions 147–148 countries 461 delivery categories 304–309 device application types 228 device application versions 240–242 device features 197–199 device profile capabilities 279 device profiles 258–275 devices by brand 174–176 devices by model 180–193 DKB versions 289 formatting tokens 213–216 front-office account services 87 front-office accounts 84–98 front-office groups 74–80 IMEI ranges 184 message patterns 399–402 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 318–329 offers 314–336 preferences 6 services 64–67 session sequences 406 states, workflow 414–415 workflows 410–423 monitoring a synchronization process 293 MSISDN quick start, searching 27–28 searching accounts by 365 See also phone prefixes.
N navigation defining rights 48–49 rights overview 14 network, device profiles 268
Copyright 2006
O offers back-office rights 333 bundle template capabilities 321 bundle template details 319 bundle template topics 320 bundle template triggers, on content 324–325 bundle template triggers, on message 325–326 bundle template triggers, on schedule 326–329 compatibilities 330 creating 312 creating bundle templates 316 deleting 336 deleting bundle templates 330 details 315 download statistics 455 editing 314–336 editing bundle templates 318–329 front-office rights 332, 334 managing 310–336 managing bundle templates 315–330 managing download codes 335 metadata 331 rights 19 searching 312 searching bundle template topics 320 viewing 310–312 OMA DM CP, device profiles 275 operators, filter 8–10 operators, mobile network adding 465 creating 465 deleting 466 editing 465 managing 463–466 modifying 465 searching 464 viewing 463–464 overview, Content Manager interface 5
P parent groups, back-office adding to accounts 57 managing 46–47, 56 removing from accounts 57
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
491
Index parent groups, managing front-office 87 password, changing 3 patterns, managing data 400–402 patterns, message creating 396–399 deleting 403 details 400 editing 399–402 managing 395–403 searching 396 types 397–399 viewing 395–396 patterns, topic 344 phone prefixes creating 469 deleting 470 editing 469 managing 467–470 searching 468 viewing 467–468 popular downloads, viewing 362–363 popularity, bundles 353 post tasks, statistics processes 446 pre tasks, statistics processes 446 preferences, modifying 6 prefixes, phone creating 469 deleting 470 editing 469 managing 467–470 searching 468 viewing 467–468 processes, bulk rights 19 viewing statistics compilation 449 processes, bulk content accessing 426 deleting reports 439 managing 425–427 rights 439 searching 426 viewing 425–426 processes, bulk import accessing 164 creating 160–163
Copyright 2006
processes, bulk import, continued deleting 164 timeslots 163, 361 processes, statistics details 443 managing 442–446 post tasks 446 pre tasks 446 searching 442 statistics tables 444–446 profiles, device activating 276 activating capabilities 281 browser 266 capabilities 260–263 creating capabilities 262 deactivating 276 deactivating capabilities 281 deleting 276 deleting capabilities 262, 280 details 259 editing 258–275 editing capabilities 261, 279 hardware 263 hardware extensions 264 managing 256–277 managing capabilities 278–281 MMS 271 network 268 OMA DM CP 275 Push 270 searching 255 searching capabilities 277 settings 272 SMS 273 software 265 WAP 268 providers, content content statistics 454 creating 109 deleting 113 details 111 download statistics 453 editing 110–113 managing 107–114 managing by category 119–120 managing templates 111–112 rights 15–16, 112–113 searching 108 viewing 107–108
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
492
Index publishing content topics 379
repository, quick configuration of content 23–25
purges managing 435–439 searching 437 viewing 436–437 viewing details 437–439
resetting capability groups 204 resource granting access to 48–49 removing access from 49 restrictions, managing IP 58
purging bulk process reports 439 history files 472 sessions 432, 435
retry sessions bulk processes 434–435 managing 432 searching 433 viewing 432
Push, device profiles 270
Q Quick Search 248 quick start configuring a bulk campaign 22–39 configuring content repository 23–25 configuring delivery options 33–36 configuring end-user database 22–23 configuring MO interface 36–37 creating a bulk process 37–39 creating content 28–33 import accounts 25–27 searching for MSISDN 27–28
R removing bundle templates 330 bundles 355 capability group handlers 211 capability groups 205 countries 462 device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 237 device features 200 device profile capabilities 262, 280 device profiles 276 device profiles from devices 193 device user agents 190 devices 194 DKB versions 290 formatting tokens 218 trust sources 287 versions to trust sources 285
Copyright 2006
rights account 12 back-office group 47–48 back-office offers 333 bulk process 19, 439 catalog 18, 367–368 content categories 16–17, 120 Content Manager 11–19 content provider 15–16, 112–113 content topic 18, 377 device 17, 297 DKB 17 front-office group 76–77 front-office offers 332, 334 global back-office group 49–50 global content categories 121–123 global service 69–71 group 12–13 history 15, 473 management 12–20 navigation 14, 48–49 offers 19 service 14–15, 66–67 session 19, 439 session and bulk process 439 system 424 system administration 19 tracking 19 rules, condition creating 421 deleting 423 editing 422 rules, device detection creating 222–223 deleting 223 detection tool 225 editing 220–221
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
493
Index rules, device detection, continued managing 218–224 searching 219 viewing 218–219 rules, front-office group 78–80
S scheduled triggers 326–329, 348–352 searching accounts by alias 366 accounts by MSISDN 365 applying filters 8–10 back-office accounts 52 back-office groups 42 bulk account imports 102 bulk content processes 426 bundles 339 capability group handlers 207 capability groups 202 content 138 content categories 116 content providers 108 content systems 382 content topics 370 countries 460 delivery categories 302 device application types 228 device application versions 240 device applications 233 device detection rules 219 device features 196 device profile capabilities 277 device profiles 255 devices by brand 173 devices by IMEI range 249 devices by model 179 devices by unresolved IMEI 100–101 devices by user agent 252 DKB versions 288 formatting systems 245 formatting tokens 213 front-office accounts 81–82 front-office accounts by address 82 front-office accounts by alias 82 front-office groups 72 handler created capability groups 210 import processes 159 message patterns 396 messaging credentials 392
Copyright 2006
searching, continued mobile devices by IMEI 99–101 mobile network operators 464 MSISDN, quick start 27–28 offers 312 operators 464 phone prefixes 468 purges 437 retry sessions 433 services 62 session sequences 404 statistics compilations 448 statistics processes 442 synchronizations, trust source 293 triggers 364 using Quick Search 248 workflows 409 sequences, session about 407 creating 404–406 deleting 406 editing 406 managing 403–406 searching 404 viewing 403–404 services adding 62 creating 62 defining rights 66–67 deleting 69 download statistics 456 editing 64–67 managing 61–71 rights 14–15 searching 62 viewing 61–62 session sequences about 407 creating 404–406 deleting 406 editing 406 managing 403–406 searching 404 viewing 403–404 workflows 405 sessions editing details 430–432 errors 431 managing 428–432 purging 432, 435
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
494
Index statuses, session 431
sessions, continued rights 19, 439 statuses 431 viewing 428–429 viewing details 433
subscriptions creating 365–366 editing 366 managing 365–366
sessions, retry bulk process 434–435 managing 432 searching 433 viewing 432
synchronizations, DKB creating 296 managing 291–297 monitoring 293 searching 293 viewing 292
sets, device detection managing 224 viewing 224 settings, device profiles 272
system administration rights 19, 424 history rights 15
SIM cards, front-office account 93–94
System menu 459
SMS, device profiles 273
systems, content creating 382–384 deleting 385 editing 384 managing 381–385 searching 382 viewing 381–382
software, device profiles 265 states workflows 411–418 workflows, creating 413 workflows, deleting 415 workflows, editing 414–415
systems, formatting managing 245–246 searching 245 viewing 245
statistics contents 453 contents per provider 454 device 451 downloads per brand 451 downloads per content 454 downloads per model 452 downloads per offer 455 downloads per provider 453 downloads per service 456 Statistics menu 442 tracking 447–450
T templates, bundle adding to offers 316 capabilities 321 content templates 323 deleting 330 details 319 editing from offers 318–329 managing on offers 315–330 searching topics 320 topics 320
statistics compilations searching 448 viewing bulk processes 449 viewing details 448 statistics processes details 443 managing 442–446 post tasks 446 pre tasks 446 searching 442 statistics tables 444–446
templates, content bundle templates 323 editing 124–136 managing 123–136 managing for providers 111–112 viewing 123
statistics tables, statistics processes 444–446
Copyright 2006
text operators, filter 9–10
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
495
Index timeslots bulk import process 163, 361 front-office account 94 tokens, formatting creating 216 deleting 218 details 214 device profile capabilities 215 editing 213–216 managing 212–218 searching 213 viewing 212–213 tool, detection 225 topic patterns, bundles 344 topics, bundle templates managing 320 searching 320 topics, bundles 343–346 topics, content creating 370 deleting 377 details 373 device capabilities 374 editing 372–376 managing 368–381 metadata 376 publishing 379 rights 18, 377 searching 370 viewing 368–370
user agents activating from devices 255 activating on devices 190 associated device application versions 242 associated device applications 235 creating 189 deactivating from devices 255 deactivating on devices 190 deleting from devices 190, 254 editing on devices 187 managing devices by 253–255 managing on devices 187–191 searching devices by 252
user, viewing history 96–98 using xml files 165–169 zip files 164
V version information, Content Manager 6
triggers managing 363–364 on content offer bundle templates 324–325 on content, bundles 352 on message offer bundle templates 325–326 on message, bundles 348 on schedule offer bundle templates 326–329 on schedule, bundles 348–352 searching 364
Copyright 2006
U
user association types 73–75
tracking rights 19, 439 statisitics 447–450
trust sources creating 286 creating versions 285 deleting 287 deleting versions 285
trust sources, continued editing 283–285 managing 282–287 managing versions 283–285 viewing 282
versions creating for trust sources 285 deleting from trust sources 285 managing for trust sources 283–285 versions, application device application associated 235 versions, content creating 144–146 deleting 149 editing 147–148 viewing 143 viewing back-office accounts 51–52 back-office groups 41–42 bulk account imports 101–102 bulk content processes 425–426
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
496
Index viewing, continued bundles 337–339 capability group handlers 206–207 capability groups 201–202 content 137–138 content categories 115–116 content providers 107–108 content statistics 453 content systems 381–382 content templates 123 content topics 368–370 content versions 143 countries 459 delivery categories 300–302 device application types 226–228 device application versions 238–240 device applications 232 device detection rules 218–219 device detection sets 224 device statistics 451 DKB versions 287 formatting systems 245 formatting tokens 212–213 front-office groups 71–72 handler created capability groups 209 history file configuration 471 lists 6–7 message patterns 395–396 messaging credentials 391–393 mobile network operators 463–464 offers 310–312 phone prefixes 467–468 popular downloads 362–363 purge details 437–439 purges 436–437 retry sessions 432 services 61–62 session details 433 session sequences 403–404 sessions 428–429 statistics compilation bulk processes 449 statistics compilation details 448 synchronizations, trust source 292 trust sources 282 user history 96–98
Copyright 2006
viewing, continued version information, Content Manager 6 workflows 408–409
W WAP, device profiles 268 Welcome screen 5 workflows actions 411–418 conditions 419–423 creating 409 creating actions 416 creating condition rules 421 creating conditions 420 creating states 413 deleting 423 deleting actions 418 deleting condition rules 423 deleting conditions 423 deleting states 415 details 411 editing 410–423 editing actions 417–418 editing condition rules 422 editing conditions 421 editing states 414–415 managing 408–423 searching 409 states 411–418 viewing 408–409 workflows, session sequence 405 working with lists 6–7
X xml files, using 165–169
Z zip files, using 164
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
497
September 2006
PM-2006-1213 v2
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction About Content Manager ............................................................2 About This Guide .....................................................................2 Logging In to Content Manager ..................................................3 Changing Your Login and Password Information ...........................3 Logging Out .......................................................................4
The Content Manager Interface ..................................................5 The Welcome Screen ............................................................5 Viewing and Working With Lists ...............................................6 Using the Filters Screen ........................................................8
Chapter 2 Understanding Rights Content Manager and Rights Management ................................. 12 Account Rights ...................................................................... 12 Group Rights ......................................................................... 12 Navigation Rights................................................................... 14 Service Rights ....................................................................... 14 System History Rights ............................................................ 15 Content Provider Rights .......................................................... 15 Content Category Rights ......................................................... 16 Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights ................................ 17 Catalog Rights ....................................................................... 18 Content Topic Rights............................................................... 18 System Administration Rights .................................................. 19 Tracking Rights ...................................................................... 19 Offer Rights .......................................................................... 19
Chapter 3 Getting Started Configuring a Bulk Campaign................................................... 22 Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure.................. 22 Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository .............................. 23
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
i
Step 3: Import Accounts ..................................................... 25 Step 4: Creating Content ..................................................... 28 Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options ...................................... 33 Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface ...................................... 36 Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process ................................... 37
Chapter 4 Back-Office Management Managing Back-Office Groups .................................................. 41 Viewing Back-Office Groups .................................................. 41 Searching Back-Office Groups ............................................... 42 Creating a New Back-Office Group.......................................... 43 Editing a Back-Office Group .................................................. 44 Deleting Back-Office Groups ................................................. 49 Defining Back-Office Global Rights ......................................... 49
Managing Back-Office Accounts................................................ 51 Viewing Back-Office Accounts ............................................... 51 Searching Back-Office Accounts ............................................. 52 Creating a New Back-Office Account ....................................... 53 Editing a Back-Office Account ............................................... 54 Deleting Back-Office Accounts ............................................... 59
Chapter 5 Front-Office Management Managing Services ................................................................. 61 Viewing Services ............................................................... 61 Searching Services ............................................................ 62 Creating a New Service ....................................................... 62 Editing a Service ............................................................... 64 Deleting a Service ............................................................. 69 Managing Global Service Rights ............................................. 69
Managing Front-Office Groups.................................................. 71 Viewing Front-Office Groups ................................................. 71 Searching Front-Office Groups .............................................. 72 Creating a New Front-Office Group ......................................... 73 Editing a Front-Office Group ................................................. 74 Deleting a Front-Office Group ............................................... 80
Managing Front-Office Accounts ............................................... 81 Searching for a Front-Office Account ....................................... 81 Creating a New Front-Office Account ....................................... 83 Editing a Front-Office Account ............................................... 84 Deleting a Front-Office Account ............................................. 97
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
ii
Searching Front-Office Account History Logs .............................. 98 Managing Mobile Devices ........................................................ 99 Searching for a Device by IMEI ............................................. 99 Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI .............................. 100 Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs ................................. 100
Uploading Accounts .............................................................. 101 Viewing Account Imports ................................................... 101 Searching Bulk Account Imports .......................................... 102 Creating a Bulk Account Import File ...................................... 102
Chapter 6 Content Management Managing Content Providers .................................................. 107 Viewing Content Providers ................................................. 107 Searching Content Providers ............................................... 108 Creating a New Content Provider ......................................... 109 Editing a Content Provider ................................................. 110 Deleting a Content Provider ................................................ 113 Defining Global Content Provider Rights ................................. 113
Managing Content Categories ................................................ 114 Viewing Categories .......................................................... 115 Searching Categories ........................................................ 116 Creating a New Category ................................................... 116 Editing a Category ........................................................... 117 Deleting a Category ......................................................... 121 Managing Global Category Rights ......................................... 121
Using Content Templates....................................................... 123 Viewing Content Templates ................................................ 123 Editing Content Templates ................................................. 124 Editing a Content Template Version ...................................... 124
Managing Content ................................................................ 137 Viewing Content .............................................................. 137 Searching Content ........................................................... 138 Creating New Content ....................................................... 139 Editing Content ............................................................... 140 Cloning Content .............................................................. 157 Deleting Content ............................................................. 157
Importing Bulk Contents ....................................................... 158 Searching Import Processes ............................................... 159 Starting a Bulk Import Process ............................................ 160 Creating a Process ........................................................... 160
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
iii
Accessing a Bulk Process ................................................... 164 Deleting a Bulk Process ..................................................... 164
Using Zip Files ..................................................................... 164 Algorithms of Zip File Processing.......................................... 164 Zip File Structure and XML Files ........................................... 165
Chapter 7 Device Management Managing Devices by Brand................................................... 172 Searching Devices by Brand ............................................... 173 Creating a Brand ............................................................. 174 Editing a Brand ............................................................... 174 Deleting a Brand ............................................................. 177 Activating a Brand ........................................................... 177 Deactivating a Brand ........................................................ 177
Managing Devices by Model................................................... 178 Searching Devices by Model ............................................... 179 Creating a Device ............................................................ 180 Editing a Device .............................................................. 180 Deleting a Device ............................................................ 194 Activating Devices ........................................................... 194 Deactivating Devices ........................................................ 194
Managing Features ............................................................... 195 Searching Features .......................................................... 196 Creating a Feature ........................................................... 197 Editing a Feature ............................................................. 197 Deleting a Feature ........................................................... 200 Activating Features .......................................................... 200 Deactivating Features ....................................................... 200
Managing Capability Groups .................................................. 201 Viewing Capability Groups.................................................. 201 Searching Capability Groups ............................................... 202 Editing a Capability Group .................................................. 203 Creating a Capability Group ................................................ 204 Deleting a Capability Group ................................................ 205
Managing Capability Group Handlers....................................... 206 Viewing Capability Group Handlers ....................................... 206 Searching Capability Group Handlers .................................... 207 Creating a Capability Group Handler ..................................... 207 Editing a Capability Group Handler ....................................... 208 Deleting a Capability Group Handler ..................................... 211 Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
iv
Managing Formatting Tokens ................................................. 212 Viewing Formatting Tokens ................................................ 212 Searching Formatting Tokens.............................................. 213 Editing a Formatting Token ................................................ 213 Creating a Formatting Token .............................................. 216 Deleting a Formatting Token ............................................... 218
Managing Device Detection Rules ........................................... 218 Viewing Detection Rules .................................................... 218 Searching Detection Rules ................................................. 219 Editing a Detection Rule .................................................... 220 Creating a Detection Rule .................................................. 222 Deleting a Detection Rule .................................................. 223
Managing Device Detection Sets ............................................ 224 Viewing Detection Sets ..................................................... 224
Using the Detection Tool ....................................................... 225 Managing Device Application Types......................................... 226 Viewing Device Application Types ......................................... 226 Searching Device Application Types ...................................... 228 Editing a Device Application Type ......................................... 228 Creating a Device Application Type ....................................... 230 Deleting a Device Application Type ....................................... 231 Activating Device Application Types ...................................... 231 Deactivating Device Application Types ................................... 231
Managing Device Applications ................................................ 232 Viewing Device Applications................................................ 232 Searching Device Applications ............................................. 233 Editing a Device Application................................................ 233 Creating a Device Application .............................................. 236 Deleting a Device Application .............................................. 237 Activating Device Applications ............................................. 238 Deactivating Device Applications .......................................... 238
Managing Device Application Versions ..................................... 238 Viewing Device Application Versions ..................................... 238 Searching Device Application Versions ................................... 240 Editing a Device Application Version ..................................... 240 Creating a Device Application Version ................................... 243 Deleting a Device Application Version .................................... 244 Activating Device Application Versions ................................... 244 Deactivating Device Application Versions................................ 244
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
v
Managing Formatting Systems ............................................... 245 Viewing Formatting Systems............................................... 245 Searching Formatting Systems ............................................ 245
Chapter 8 DKB Management Managing Devices Through a Search....................................... 248 Searching Devices Using Quick Search .................................. 248 Searching Devices by IMEI Range ........................................ 249 Managing Devices By IMEI Range ........................................ 249 Searching Devices by User Agent ......................................... 252 Managing Devices by User Agent ......................................... 253
Searching Device Profiles ...................................................... 255 Managing Device Profiles ................................................... 256 Creating a Device Profile ................................................... 258 Editing a Device Profile ..................................................... 258
Searching Device Profile Capabilities....................................... 277 Managing Device Profile Capabilities ..................................... 278
Managing Trust Sources ........................................................ 282 Viewing Trust Sources ...................................................... 282 Editing a Trust Source ...................................................... 283 Creating a Trust Source .................................................... 286 Deleting a Trust Source ..................................................... 287
Managing DKB Versions ........................................................ 287 Viewing DKB Versions ....................................................... 287 Searching DKB Versions .................................................... 288 Editing a DKB Version ....................................................... 289 Deleting a Version ........................................................... 290
Managing DKB Archives ........................................................ 290 Managing DKB Synchronizations ............................................ 291 Viewing Synchronization Processes ....................................... 292 Searching Synchronization Processes .................................... 293 Monitoring a Synchronization Process.................................... 293 Creating a Synchronization Process ...................................... 296
Managing Device and DKB Rights ........................................... 297 Granting Device and DKB Rights .......................................... 297 Revoking Device and DKB Rights ......................................... 298
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
vi
Chapter 9 Delivery Management Managing Categories ............................................................ 300 Viewing Categories .......................................................... 300 Searching Categories ........................................................ 302 Creating a New Category ................................................... 302 Editing a Category ........................................................... 304 Deleting a Category ......................................................... 309
Managing Offers .................................................................. 310 Viewing Offers ................................................................ 310 Searching Offers ............................................................. 312 Creating a New Offer ........................................................ 312 Editing an Offer............................................................... 314 Managing Global Offer Rights .............................................. 334 Managing Download Codes ................................................. 335 Deleting an Offer ............................................................. 336
Managing Bundles ................................................................ 337 Viewing Bundles .............................................................. 337 Searching Bundles ........................................................... 339 Creating a Bundle ............................................................ 339 Editing a Bundle .............................................................. 341 Deleting a Bundle ............................................................ 355 Downloading a Bundle ...................................................... 355 Creating a Bundle Bulk Process ........................................... 357
Viewing Popular Downloads ................................................... 362 Managing Triggers................................................................ 363 Searching Triggers ........................................................... 364
Managing Subscriptions ........................................................ 365 Editing or Deleting a Subscription ........................................ 366
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights ...................................... 367 Managing Content Topics....................................................... 368 Viewing Topics ................................................................ 368 Searching Topics ............................................................. 370 Creating a New Topic ........................................................ 370 Editing a Topic ................................................................ 372 Deleting a Topic .............................................................. 377 Managing Topic Rights ...................................................... 377 Publishing Topics ............................................................. 379
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
vii
Managing Content Systems ................................................... 381 Viewing Content Systems .................................................. 381 Searching Content Systems ................................................ 382 Creating a New Content System .......................................... 382 Editing a Content System .................................................. 384 Deleting a Content System ................................................. 385
Chapter 10 System Configuration Cache Management .............................................................. 387 Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details.................... 387
Managing Messaging Credentials ............................................ 391 Viewing Credentials .......................................................... 391 Searching Credentials ....................................................... 392 Creating New Credentials ................................................... 393 Editing Credentials ........................................................... 394 Deleting Credentials ......................................................... 394
Managing Message Patterns................................................... 395 Viewing Message Patterns .................................................. 395 Searching Message Patterns ............................................... 396 Creating a New Message Pattern .......................................... 396 Editing a Message Pattern .................................................. 399 Deleting a Message Pattern ................................................ 403
Managing Session Sequences ................................................ 403 Viewing Session Sequences ................................................ 403 Searching Session Sequences ............................................. 404 Creating a New Session Sequence ........................................ 404 Editing a Session Sequence ................................................ 406 Deleting a Session Sequence .............................................. 406 Understanding Session Sequences ....................................... 407
Managing Workflows............................................................. 408 Viewing Workflows ........................................................... 408 Searching Workflows ........................................................ 409 Creating a New Workflow ................................................... 409 Editing a Workflow ........................................................... 410 Deleting a Workflow ......................................................... 423
Managing System Administration Rights .................................. 424 Managing Bulk Content Processes .......................................... 425 Viewing Bulk Content Processes........................................... 425 Searching Bulk Content Processes ........................................ 426 Accessing a Bulk Content Process ........................................ 426
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
viii
Managing Sessions............................................................... 428 Viewing Session Reports .................................................... 428 Editing Session Details ...................................................... 430 Purging Sessions ............................................................. 432
Managing Retry Sessions ...................................................... 432 Viewing Retry Sessions ..................................................... 432 Searching Retry Sessions................................................... 433 Viewing Session Details ..................................................... 433 Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process.................................. 434 Purging Retry Sessions ..................................................... 435
Managing Purges ................................................................. 435 Viewing Purges ............................................................... 436 Searching Purged Sessions................................................. 437 Viewing Purge Details ....................................................... 437 Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports .................................. 439
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights .............................. 439
Chapter 11 Statistics Managing Statistics Processes................................................ 442 Searching Statistic Processes .............................................. 442 Viewing Process Details ..................................................... 443
Statistics Tracking ................................................................ 447 Searching Statistics Compilations ......................................... 448 Viewing Statistic Compilation Details ..................................... 448
Device Statistics .................................................................. 451 Downloads Per Brand ....................................................... 451 Downloads Per Model........................................................ 452
Content Statistics................................................................. 453 Downloads Per Provider..................................................... 453 Downloads Per Content ..................................................... 454 Content Per Provider ........................................................ 454
Other Statistics.................................................................... 455 Downloads Per Offer ......................................................... 455 Downloads Per Service ...................................................... 456
Chapter 12 System Information Managing Countries.............................................................. 459 Viewing Countries ............................................................ 459 Searching Countries ......................................................... 460 Adding a Country ............................................................ 461
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
ix
Editing a Country ............................................................ 461 Deleting a Country ........................................................... 462
Managing Mobile Network Operators ....................................... 463 Viewing Mobile Network Operators ....................................... 463 Searching Operators......................................................... 464 Creating a New Operator ................................................... 465 Editing an Operator .......................................................... 465 Deleting an Operator ........................................................ 466
Managing Phone Prefixes ...................................................... 467 Viewing Prefixes .............................................................. 467 Searching Prefixes ........................................................... 468 Creating New Prefixes ....................................................... 469 Editing a Prefix ............................................................... 469 Deleting a Prefix.............................................................. 470
History File Configuration ...................................................... 471 Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration ................................. 471
Managing History Rights ....................................................... 473
Glossary ................................................................................. 474 Index ..................................................................................... 479
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
x
1
Introduction
This chapter includes the following information: About Content Manager.............................................................................................. About This Guide ....................................................................................................... Logging In to Content Manager ................................................................................... Changing Your Login and Password Information ............................................................. Logging Out.............................................................................................................. The Content Manager Interface ................................................................................... The Welcome Screen.................................................................................................. Viewing and Working With Lists ................................................................................... Using the Filters Screen .............................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 8
1
Introduction
About Content Manager Content Manager 2.1 is a powerful new content management solution that integrates a comprehensive device database, intelligent content adaptation, powerful storefront publishing, flexible APIs, subscription services, Application Manager, and WAP billing capabilities into a single, powerful platform. Content Manager brings together the key elements of mobile content management—from content creation to billing and settlement on a global basis—enabling you to consolidate mobile content offerings and reach the largest possible number of operators, handsets, and mobile subscribers. Content Manager provides:
• Support for the broadest range of mobile devices and content formats • An intelligent workflow that streamlines the process of creating, adapting, organizing, rating, and publishing mobile content
• Content aggregation tools, enabling you to centralize content from a variety of sources into a single global hosting environment
• Web tools and APIs that enable you to automatically publish both Web and WAP storefronts
• A workflow engine, enabling you to implement creative campaigns and complex subscriber interactions
• A direct link into Mobile 365’s robust and reliable APEX Network, enabling reach into mobile markets worldwide
• Distribution to more than 500 global operators • Detailed statistical and transactional reporting
About This Guide This guide describes all back-office (administrative level) and front-office (end-user level) tasks performed and functionality available in Content Manager 2.1. NOTE: You may not have access to all functions listed in this document, depending on the
rights attributed to your account. For more information, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
2
Introduction
Logging In to Content Manager 1. To access the Mobile 365 Content Manager 2.1 interface, type the Web URL of the Content Manager 2.1 server into your browser’s address field and press the Enter key.
3 The Content Manager 2.1 Login screen displays.
Figure 1.1: Login Screen
2. Enter your Login and Password. 3. Click Enter.
3 The Welcome screen displays (Figure 1.3 on page 5). NOTE: It is recommended that you change your login and password as soon as possible
during your first Content Manager session.
Changing Your Login and Password Information 1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts. 2. Click Show table.
3 The List accounts screen displays. 3. From the Name list, click the appropriate account.
3 The Edit account screen for the selected account displays (Figure 1.2 on page 4).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
3
Introduction
Figure 1.2: The Edit account Screen
4. In the New password field, enter a new password. 5. In the Confirm new password field, enter the new password again. 6. Click Submit.
3 Your changes will take effect the next time you log into Content Manager. Logging Out To log out of Content Manager, click Logout in the upper right corner of the application (see Figure 1.3 or Figure 1.5 on page 6, for more detail).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
4
Introduction
The Content Manager Interface This section provides an overview to using the Content Manager interface. CAUTION: While using the Content Manager application, it is recommended that you do
not use your browser’s Back and Next buttons to navigate the program. Instead, use the menus, buttons, and links provided by Content Manager.
The Welcome Screen The Content Manager Welcome screen is the first screen you see when you log in to the application. From here, you can access all Content Manager functions using the menu bar.
Figure 1.3: The Welcome Screen
The Menu Bar
Figure 1.4: The Menu Bar
The menu bar consists of the following menus: NOTE: Depending on the implementation of Content Manager and rights granted, you may
only have access to certain menus and functions. For more information, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
• Administrators — Manage back-office (or administrator/client) groups, accounts, and rights. For more information, see “Back-Office Management” on page 40.
• End-users — Manage front-office (or end-user) services, groups, accounts, and rights. For more information, see “Front-Office Management” on page 60.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
5
Introduction
• Content — Manage content categories, providers, and templates. For more information, see “Content Management” on page 106.
• Device — Manage devices as well as the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). For more information, see “Device Management” on page 170 and “DKB Management” on page 247.
• Delivery — Manage the content delivery service logic and delivery system configuration. For more information, see “Delivery Management” on page 299 and “System Configuration” on page 386.
• Statistics — Access statistics tables on the platform. For more information, see “Statistics” on page 441.
• System — Manage system configuration. For more information, see “System Information” on page 458.
Additional Options Additional menu options are located in the far upper right corner of the Welcome screen:
• You are — Your login information • Preferences — Click to modify interface (skin, language, and Welcome screen) preferences
• Logout — Click to end the current session
Figure 1.5: Additional Menu Options
Content Manager Version Information To access information about the Content Manager application, click the Mobile 365 logo located in the far upper left corner of the Welcome screen.
3 The Version Information screen displays, listing information about both the Content Manager application and the platform on which it operates.
Viewing and Working With Lists Elements of Content Manager include entities such as back-office (administrator-level) and front-office (end-user) groups, services, content, devices, and more. Each time you view a list of groups, for example, Content Manager displays a screen similar to Figure 1.6 on page 7. NOTE: The List groups screen is used in this generic example. Functions available at the
top of the screen may differ depending on the element you are viewing. Elementspecific functionality is described in its appropriate section of this guide.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
6
Introduction
Figure 1.6: The List groups Screen
1. This area displays the current location of the application. Click available links to jump to that location in Content Manager. 2. Click Edit filters to modify filter settings for searches within an element. For more information, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 3. Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters. 4. Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria. 5. Use the pull-down menu to show a specific number of items per page — 5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100, or 500 items per page. 6. Click Refresh to update the list of elements. 7. Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page. 8. If present, click the
next to each filter to delete.
9. Select an item using the check box located in the first column on the left. Click the top check box to select all items in the list. 10. Click available column headings to sort column items alphabetically (default is descending; click again to sort ascending). NOTE: Some columns may not be available for sorting.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
7
Introduction
Using the Filters Screen Whenever you perform a search using Content Manager, you can create a filter using various search criteria in order to sift records and return a specific set of search results. Although the filter criteria may differ between the type of information you are searching, the process of creating and applying filters is the same.
Figure 1.7: List groups > Filters Screen
From the Filters screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Show table to view a list of elements matching criteria set in the current filter. If no filter is currently selected, the Show table link returns you to the full list of elements.
• Enter filter criteria and click the corresponding
to add a new filter.
• Check the not box to reverse the operator. For example, “contains” becomes “does not contain”.
• Click Reset filters to delete active filters for the related element. When a filter is applied, the following information is provided in the Current filters area of the Filters screen:
• The criteria on which the filter is applied. • The operator used for the filter (for example, “contains”). • The variable value entered for the filter. • Click the
next to the filter to delete.
Filter Criteria and Operators A search is defined using both text and numeric filter criteria. Filter criteria is considered the information by which to perform your search. For example, searching by a Name. Filter operators narrow the search by defining the criteria further. For example, searching for an account containing a specific Name. NOTE: Depending on the search you are conducting, filter criteria and operators available
may differ.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
8
Introduction
Text Operators Text criteria is information used in a search that is textual in value — a search by a name or description, for example. The following table describes the textual filter operators available: NOTE: The following operators may or may not be available depending on the type of filter
you are creating or viewing.
Operator contains
Description Returns records containing a specific case-sensitive search string.
contains (insensitive)
Returns records containing a specific search string (not case-sensitive).
equal to
Returns records exactly equal to a specific case-sensitive search string.
equal to (insensitive)
Returns records exactly equal to a specific search string (not case-sensitive).
is like
Returns records containing a certain case sensitive search string with specified parameters. For more information, see the table below.
like (insensitive)
Returns records containing a certain search string with specified parameters (not case-sensitive). For more information, see the table below.
greater than
Returns records larger than a specific search string.
less than
Returns records smaller than a specific search string.
less than or equal to
Returns records smaller than or equal to a specific search string.
greater than or equal to
Returns records larger than or equal to a specific search string.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
9
Introduction
The following values are also available for more precise filtering the text operator “is like”: Operator
Values
is like
%
Effect
Examples
Replace any character string. Name | is like | %pont Displays only groups with name ending in “pont” Description | is not like | 336%6 Displays only groups for which description does not start with “336” and end with “6”
–
[]
Replace any character
Name | is like | d_pont Displays only groups with name equal to “d...pont” (for example, “dupont,” “depont,” etc.)
Replace a predefined list of Name | is not like | d[a-d]pont characters in a range: [a-z] Displays only groups for which name is not equal to “d...pont” where “...” is comprised between or in a list: [abc] “a” and “d”: “dapont,” “dbpont,” “dcpont,” “ddpont” Name | is like | d[aeiou]pont Displays only groups for which name is equal to “d...pont” where “...” is equal to a, e, i, o, or u: “dapont,” “depont,” “dipont,” “dopont,” “dupont”
[^]
Replace all characters except a predefined list of characters in a range: [a-z] or in a list: [abc]
Name | is not like | d[^r-u]pont Displays only groups for which name is not equal to “d...pont” where “...” is not comprised between “r” and “u”: “drpont,” “dspont,” “dtpont,” “dupont” Name | is like \ d[^kzj]pont Displays only groups for which name is equal to “d...pont” where “...” is not equal to k, z, or j: “dkpont,” “dzpont,” “djpont”
Additional Operators Other criteria includes information used in a search that is numeric in value — a search by a phone number or IMEI, for example. The following table describes additional filter operators available: NOTE: The following operators may or may not be available depending on the type of filter
you are creating or viewing. Operator equal to greater than
greater than or equal to less than or equal to less than
Description Returns records equal to a specific search string. Returns records greater than a specific search string. Returns records greater than or equal to a specific search string. Returns records less than or equal to a specific search string. Returns records less than a specific search string.
NOTE: Date and time criteria formats are YYYY-MM-DD and HH:MM:SS.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
10
2
Understanding Rights
This chapter includes the following information: Content Manager and Rights Management .................................................................. Account Rights ........................................................................................................ Group Rights .......................................................................................................... Navigation Rights .................................................................................................... Service Rights......................................................................................................... System History Rights.............................................................................................. Content Provider Rights............................................................................................ Content Category Rights .......................................................................................... Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights .................................................................. Catalog Rights ........................................................................................................ System Administration Rights.................................................................................... Tracking Rights ....................................................................................................... Offer Rights ............................................................................................................ Content Topic Rights ................................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
12 12 12 14 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 19 19 18
11
Understanding Rights
This chapter defines the rights granted to various elements within Content Manager.
Content Manager and Rights Management Content Manager uses a user type and rights hierarchy structure that allows for customized group, account, and individual user levels of access and functionality within the application. Every user of the system uses an account to access specific Content Manager functions. Users may include content providers, brand marketers, or portal owners, for example. Depending on the rights assigned to each user type, functionality available may include access to all or several elements of the Content Manager application.
Account Rights Back-office (administrator) account rights are associated to only those user accounts with access to the functions available in the Administrator menu. Back-office accounts inherit the same rights as their associated parent groups. NOTE: If the back-office account is not associated with a parent group, then the account
will have no rights. If you log in using an account that does not have rights, the only screen available is the Welcome screen (Figure 1.3 on page 5).
Front-office (end-user) account rights are inherited from their associated parent groups. If there is no parent group associated with an account, the account assumes the rights granted to its associated end-user group determined by the service(s) to which it is subscribed.
Group Rights Groups are designed to organize and give user accounts a structure. For instance, a portal owner may have back-office groups such as “Backend administrators”, “Storefront administrators”, and “Content validators”. Front-office groups are used to collectively manage a client's target end-users. Front-office groups may include groups such as “News subscribers” and “Content download service users”. There are three types of group rights:
• global back-office — Rights are granted to groups affecting all groups simultaneously. For information about managing back-office global rights, see “Defining Back-Office Global Rights” on page 49.
• back-office group — Administrator groups inherit rights from associated parent groups. If there is no parent group associated with the administrator group, rights must be assigned to the administrator group itself. For information about managing individual back-office group rights, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
12
Understanding Rights
• front-office group — End-user groups are designed to collectively manage a client’s target end-users. When a group subscribes to a service, the group assumes the rights granted to the service. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 76. The following table describes the rights available for association with Content Manager groups: Right all rights read any account
Description Assigns all rights for all resource to a selected group
3
View all back-office accounts
3 3
create accounts anywhere Create an account member for any backoffice group update any account
Modify any back-office account
manage any account
Change the parent groups of any account
delete any account read any group create groups anywhere
Delete any account View all groups Create a group no matter what its parent group may be
update any group
Edit any back-office group
manage any group
Assign rights to any back-office group
delete any group read children accounts
Global Back-Office Back-Office Group
Delete any back-office group
Front-Office Group
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
View account members associated with the edited group.
3
create children accounts
Create an account member for the edited group.
3
update children accounts
Modify accounts associated with the edited group.
3
3
3
3
Delete accounts associated with the edited group.
3
3
read children groups
View the edited group and its associated child groups.
3
create children groups
Create a child group associated with the edited group.
3
update children groups
Modify child groups associated with the edited group.
3
manage children groups
Assign rights to child groups associated with the edited group.
3
delete children groups
Delete child groups associated with the edited group.
3
manage children accounts Change the parent groups of the accounts currently associated with the edited group. delete children accounts
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
3
13
Understanding Rights
Navigation Rights The Navigation rights tab allows you to define resource access to the Web administration pages. You cannot use the Navigation rights tab to define rights directly to managed objects. For example, you may give access to a back-office group to the End-users menu, but you will also need to grant rights for end-user services and groups to enable this back-office group to completely manage end-users. The “view navigation node” right allows resources to access a Content Manager menu or menu option. For information about managing navigation rights, see “Using the Navigation Rights Tab” on page 48.
Service Rights There are two types of service rights available for association with Content Manager services: global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all available services. For information about managing global service rights, see “Managing Global Service Rights” on page 69. service — Rights are granted to groups individually affecting a selected service. For information about managing individual service rights, see “Editing a Service” on page 64. The following table describes the service rights available: Right read services
Description Allows the group to view services.
create services
Allows groups to create new services.
update services
Allows groups to update services.
delete services
Allows groups to delete services.
subscribe services read children groups
Allows the group to subscribe users to a service. Allows the group to view children groups of a service.
Global
Service
3 3 3 3 3 3
3
3 3
create children groups
Allows the group to create children groups for the service.
3
3
update children groups
Allows the group to update children groups associated with the service.
3
3
manage children groups
Allows the group to manage children groups associated with the service.
3
3
Allows the group to delete children groups associated with the service.
3
3
delete children groups
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
14
Understanding Rights Right
Description
Global
Service
read children accounts
Allows the group to view end-user accounts subscribed to the service. NOTE: You must have the “read services right granted in order to list accounts on which you have rights.
3
3
create children accounts
Allows groups to create new end-user accounts. NOTE: This right can be assigned only from the Rights on all services screen.
3
update children accounts
Allows the group to modify accounts in the service.
3 3
3 3
3
3
manage children accounts Allows a group to change the parent groups of accounts associated with the service. delete children accounts
Allows a group to delete accounts subscribed to the service
System History Rights History rights are granted to allow groups to view and/or store history logs. History logs track user activity within Content Manager. For more information about defining history rights, see “Managing History Rights” on page 473. The following table describes the system history rights used by Content Manager: Right
Description
read history traces
allows the group to view history logs
store history traces
allows the group to store history logs
Content Provider Rights Content provider rights are granted to allow groups to manage content and content versions. There are two types of content provider rights:
• global — Rights are granted to groups affecting all existing content providers simultaneously. For information about managing global content provider rights, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
• new provider — While creating a new provider, rights are granted to groups affecting only the new provider. For more information about creating a new provider, see “Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109. NOTE: You can grant only those rights that you already have on content providers.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
15
Understanding Rights
The following table describes the content provider rights available: Right
Global
New Provider
Allows groups to view a content provider and its published content.
3
3
update content provider
Allows groups to modify content provider information.
3
create content provider
Allows groups to create new content providers.
delete content provider
Allows groups to delete content providers.
3 3 3
read content provider
Description
publish as content provider Allows groups to add contents using the content provider identity. NOTE: You must also have rights granted to each category associated to the content provider in order for administrators to create contents for that provider.
3
Content Category Rights Category rights are granted to allow groups to manage content and content categories. There are two types of content category rights:
• global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all content categories simultaneously. For more information, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121.
• new category — When creating a category, rights are granted to groups affecting the only the new category. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117. The following table describes the content category rights used by Content Manager: Right read content category
Description Allows groups to view categories.
update content category
Allows groups to modify category descriptions, content providers, and rights.
delete content category
Allows groups to delete categories.
create content category
Allows groups to create new categories.
read content
Allows groups to view content in a category.
Global
New Category
3 3
3 3
3 3 3 3
3 3 3
update content
Allows groups to modify content in a category. Administrators must also have the rights that the content provider associates with the edited content.
add content
Allows groups to add content to a category. NOTE: You must also have the “publish contents” right on at least one content provider in order to add content.
3
3
Allows groups to delete content from a category.
3
3
delete content
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
16
Understanding Rights Right
Description
Global
New Category
validate content
Allows groups to change the status of contents in a category to “validated”. Administrators must also have the rights that the content provider associates with the edited content.
3
3
update content version
Allows groups to modify content versions associated with contents published in a category.
3
3
Allows groups to add content versions to contents published in a category.
3
3
Allows groups to delete content versions associated with contents published in a category.
3
3
Allows groups to change the status of content versions associated with contents published in a category.
3
3
add content version delete content version validate content version
In order to view or modify content, you must have the following rights:
• “Read content” granted to the content parent category • “Read published contents” granted to the content provider NOTE: When viewing or modifying content, the following rules apply:
• If you have only the “update content” right on parent categories of the content, you can modify all elements of the content except the content status.
• If you have only the “validate content” right on all parent categories of the content, you can modify only the content status.
• If you have both rights, you can modify all elements of the content, even if the content status is “validation pending”. NOTE: When viewing or editing a content version, the following rules apply:
• If you have only the “edit content version” right, you can modify all elements of • •
the content version except the status. If you have only the “validate content version” right, you can modify only the content version status. If you have both rights, you can modify all elements of the content, even if the content status is “validation pending”, or the content version is stored as “validated”.
Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights Device rights are granted to groups to manage devices and information in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). For more information, see “Managing Device and DKB Rights” on page 297. The following table describes the device rights used by Content Manager: Right Global read Manage structure
Copyright 2006
Description Allows groups total read access to the DKB. Allows groups to manage system structure and the DKB.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
17
Understanding Rights Right
Description
Sign structure
Allows groups to sign (certify) data in the knowledge database that can be exported to a DKB archive.
Delete structure
Allows groups to delete data from the DKB.
Import archive
Allows groups to manage DKB archive import (synchronization) processes.
Export archive
Allows groups to manage DKB archive export (generation) processes.
Manage applications
Allows groups to manage applications types, applications, application versions, associated user agents, and detection rules.
Delete applications
Allows groups to delete applications types, applications, application versions, associated user agents, and detection rules.
Manage profiles
Allows groups to manage device profiles and profile capabilities, as well as data related to a device model (aliases, IMEI, and so on).
Delete profiles
Allows groups to delete device profiles and profile capabilities, as well as data related to a device model (aliases, IMEI, and so on). All
Catalog Rights Catalog rights are granted to allow groups to manage catalog items for a specific service. For more information, see “Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights” on page 367. The following table describes the administrator-level catalog rights used by Content Manager: Right
Description
create catalog item
Allows groups to create offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
update catalog item
Allows groups to modify offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
delete catalog item
Allows groups to delete offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
read catalog item
Allows groups to view offers, bundles, and triggers associated to the selected service.
Content Topic Rights Content topic rights are granted to allow groups to manage content topics. For more information, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377. The following table describes the administrator-level content topic rights used by Content Manager: Right
Copyright 2006
Description
create topics
Allows groups to create topics.
update topics
Allows groups to modify topics.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
18
Understanding Rights Right delete topics read topics
Description Allows groups to delete topics. Allows groups to view topics associated with the selected content system.
System Administration Rights System administration rights are granted to allow groups to manage system elements. For more information, see “Managing System Administration Rights” on page 424. The following table describes the administrator-level system configuration rights used by Content Manager: Right
Description
create system item
Allows back-office groups to create system elements.
update system item
Allows back-office groups to modify system elements.
delete system item
Allows back-office groups to delete system elements.
read system item
Allows back-office groups to view system elements.
Tracking Rights Tracking rights (session and bulk process rights) are granted to allow groups to manage delivery operations for a selected service. For more information, see “Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights” on page 439. The following table describes the administrator-level tracking rights available for all sessions and bulk-processes used by Content Manager: Right
Description
create sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to start new sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service. update sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to modify sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service. delete sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to delete sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service. read sessions and bulk processes
Allows back-office groups to view sessions or bulk processes associated with the selected service.
Offer Rights There are two offer rights:
• The “buy offer” right is the only offer right available to front-office groups. • The “Read catalog item” right is the only right available to back-office groups. There are two ways to grant the “buy offer” right:
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
19
Understanding Rights
• global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all offers. For more information, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
• new offers — While creating a new offer, rights are assigned to groups affecting only the new offer. For more information, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
20
3
Getting Started
This chapter contains the following information: Configuring a Bulk Campaign .................................................................................... Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure .................................................. Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository ................................................................ Step 3: Import Accounts .......................................................................................... Step 4: Creating Content.......................................................................................... Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options.......................................................................... Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface ......................................................................... Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process ......................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
22 22 23 25 28 33 36 37
21
Getting Started
This chapter is intended as a quick start guide to configuring a bulk campaign.
Configuring a Bulk Campaign This section provides instruction on how to configure Content Manager to quickly start a Short Message Service (SMS) bulk campaign.
Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure 1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Services.
3 The Services screen displays. 2. Click New service.
3 The New service screen displays.
Figure 3.1: New service Screen
3. Provide the following information:
• Name: type a name for the new service (for example “CM2”) • Check Subscribe anonymous account. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
22
Getting Started
4. Click Submit.
3 The new service is created, and the Edit service screen displays. 5. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Groups.
3 The Groups screen displays. 6. Click New group.
3 The New group screen displays.
Figure 3.2: New group Screen
7. Provide the following information:
• Name: type a name for the new group • Description: type a brief description of the new group • User association: choose Automatic 8. Click Submit.
3 The new group is created, and the Edit group screen displays. For information about editing a group, see “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Providers.
3 The Providers screen displays. 2. Click New provider.
3 The New provider screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
23
Getting Started
Figure 3.3: New provider Screen
3. In the Name field, type a name for the new provider. 4. From the Templates list box, select all available templates. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. 5. Click Submit.
3 The new provider is created. 6. From the Content menu, select Structure > Categories.
3 The Categories screen displays. 7. Click New category.
3 The New category screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
24
Getting Started
Figure 3.4: New category Screen
8. In the Name field, type a name for the new category. 9. From the Content providers list box, select the provider you created. 10. Click Submit.
3 The new category is created. Step 3: Import Accounts 1. From the End-users menu, select Bulk Operations > List imports.
3 The List imports screen displays. 2. Click Create import.
3 The Import accounts screen (1 of 2) displays (Figure 3.5 on page 26).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
25
Getting Started
Figure 3.5: Import accounts Screen (1 of 2)
3. Select the following options:
• Select file: select the file you have previously imported to the CM server • New accounts: choose Create • Existing accounts: choose Update, and check ALL options (Account details, Billing, Device, Activate last device, and Services) 4. Click Next.
3 The Import accounts screen (2 of 2) displays (Figure 3.6 on page 27).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
26
Getting Started
Figure 3.6: Import accounts Screen (2 of 2)
5. Review the options you selected, and click Start to start the bulk operation. 6. To refresh your view of the operation status until the Progression (fourth from the bottom) has reached 100%, repeatedly click Refresh. NOTE: To check that accounts were successfully imported, search for one of the MSISDNs
you imported to ensure that it is attached to the created service.
Searching for an MSISDN 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > Search account.
3 The Search account screen displays (Figure 3.7 on page 28).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
27
Getting Started
Figure 3.7: Search account Screen
2. On the Search by address tab, type the MSISDN you imported in the Address field. 3. Click List accounts by address.
3 Search results display on the right. Step 4: Creating Content 1. From the Content menu, select Data > New content.
3 The New content screen displays.
Figure 3.8: New content Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
28
Getting Started
2. Provide the following information:
• • • •
Content provider: select the provider you created Template: select SMS Message system Content categories: select the category you created Name: type a name for the new content (for example, “Alert Message”)
3. Click Submit.
3 The new content is created, and the Details tab on the Edit content screen displays. 4. Click the Versions tab. 5. Click New content version.
3 The Add content version screen displays.
Figure 3.9: Add content version Screen
6. Provide the following information:
• • • • •
Content version template: select SHORT Name: type a name for the new version (for example, “Default”) Status: select Published Language: select none Short content: type the text that will be sent by default (if no language was selected for the campaign) NOTE: You can utilize variables in the message: “$firstname” or “$lastname” for
the first and last names of the user. You may change the text later. For more information about content variables, see “Adding Content Versions” on page 144.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
29
Getting Started
7. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab on the Edit content version screen for the new content version displays (Figure 3.10 on page 31). 8. Check the Selected brands box.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a list of available devices by brand. 9. Select the brands to associate with the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 10. To list the specific features for the selected brands, check the Selected features box.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a drop-down list of features. 11. To list available device profiles, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a list of available device profiles. Figure 3.10 on page 31 shows the Compatibilities tab expanded to display features, brands, and device profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
30
Getting Started
Figure 3.10: Edit content version Screen — Compatibilities Tab
12. Select the device profiles to use with the content version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
31
Getting Started
13. Click Submit.
3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the Edit content screen. 14. Click New content version. 15. Provide the following information:
• • • • •
Content version template: select SHORT Name: type a name for the new version (for example, “English”) Status: select Published Language: select English Short content: type the text that will be sent in English
16. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab for the new content version displays. 17. Check the Selected brands box. In the list of brands that displays, select all brand devices for the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 18. To list the device profiles available for the selected brands, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab expands to show device profiles. 19. Check the boxes next to all compatible devices. 20. Click Submit.
3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the screen. 21. Click New content version. 22. Provide the following information:
• • • • •
Content version template — select SHORT Name — type a name for the new version (for example, “French”) Status — select Published Language — select French Short content — type the text that will be sent in French
23. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab for the new content version displays. 24. Check the Selected brands box. From the list of brands that displays, select the brand devices for the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brand devices.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
32
Getting Started
25. To list the specific device profiles for the selected brands, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab expands to show device profiles. 26. Select all compatible devices. 27. Click Submit.
3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the screen.
Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options 1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Topics. 2. Click Show table to view a list of created topics. 3. Ensure that a topic was created following the new content creation. It should have the same name. 4. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Offers. 5. Click New offer.
3 The Create offer screen displays.
Figure 3.11: Create offer Screen
6. Provide the following information for the new offer:
• • • •
Name — type a name (for example, “Offer 1”) End-user service — select the service you previously created Application ID — select the ID that applies to your account Status — select Draft
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
33
Getting Started
• Technical — check this box to indicate that this is a technical offer NOTE: Technical offers are used for passwords, activation codes, credit notifications, or
any kind of “dynamic content” depending on end-users profiles. These offers are not reachable from storefronts.
7. Click Submit.
3 The Edit offer screen displays. 8. Click the Bundles tab. 9. Click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle screen displays.
Figure 3.12: Create bundle Screen
10. Provide the following information for the new bundle:
• Offer — select an offer for the bundle • Name — type a name for the bundle (for example, “Bundle 1”) • Session sequence — select Simple session 11. Click Submit.
3 The bundle is created, and the Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays. 12. To manage topics associated with the bundle, click the Topics tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
34
Getting Started
Figure 3.13: Edit bundle Screen — Topics Tab
13. Click a topic from the Topic name column corresponding to the previously created content (it should have the same name). 14. Click Add topic.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays.
Figure 3.14: Topic and message patterns Screen
15. Select the previously created Message pattern. 16. Click Add.
3 The pattern is added to the list of authorized patterns for this topic. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
35
Getting Started
17. To return to the Edit bundle screen, which now lists the selected topic and its associated topic patterns, click Edit bundle.
Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface NOTE: This step is optional. You need to perform the following actions only if you want to
configure an MO keyword enabling users to request the content you defined above.
1. On the Edit bundle screen, click the Triggers on message tab. 2. Click New trigger.
3 The Create trigger on message screen displays. NOTE: This screen enables you to create a new trigger by defining several rules. This
trigger will enable the user to download content. To be activated, all conditions defined in the trigger must be met.
3. Select filter(s) for the trigger. Upon reception of a message respecting these filters on the Application ID associated with the parent offer, the content delivery will automatically be triggered. For example, for text criteria Content:
• Select the operator “contains” (default) • Type “SMS” as the value to be checked NOTE: These two criteria together stipulate that the search for content will find all
records that contain the text string “SMS.”
• Click the corresponding
to add the filter
3 The new filter displays in the Current filters list on the right. 4. In the Type area:
• Select the operator “equal to” (default) • Select the value “SMS” NOTE: These two criteria together stipulate that the trigger will only be activated
by SMS messages.
• Click the corresponding
to add the filter
3 The new filter displays in the Current filters list on the right. 5. After you have specified all filters, click Create trigger.
3 The Triggers on message tab displays again, listing the new trigger and its Current filters. All SMS-MO received on the Application ID containing the keyword “SMS” will trigger a content delivery. NOTE: Notice that you can edit or remove the new trigger using the links at the far
right.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
36
Getting Started
6. To return to the Edit offer screen, click Edit offer. 7. To define front-office (end-user) groups’ rights for the offer, click the End-users rights tab.
Figure 3.15: Edit offer Screen — End-users rights Tab
8. Check the Buy offer box. 9. Select the group (previously created) from the Groups list. 10. Click Add right.
3 The end-user “Buy offer” right is assigned to the selected group, and displays on the right. NOTE: To delete a listed group and its associated right, click the
next to the
corresponding group.
Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process 1. From the Content menu, select Import contents > Bulk process.
3 The Bulk process screen displays. 2. Click Create process.
3 The Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 3.16 on page 38).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
37
Getting Started
Figure 3.16: Create bulk process Screen
3. Check Publish content to publish the contents created. 4. Check Publish content version to publish the content version created. 5. Select Skip to skip content bundles that already exist. 6. From the Content provider list, select a provider for the content. 7. Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 3.17: Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
8. Select a Target type:
• Select ZIP file on file server allows you to select a .zip file that exists on the server. • Upload zip allows you to upload a zip file containing the content to import. Enter the complete file path in the field.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
38
Getting Started
9. Click Next.
3 The Bulk flow control strategy tab displays. 10. Click Next.
3 The Timeslots tab displays. 11. Specify the days of the week and running time on which the process runs. Click Add timeslot when finished. EXAMPLE: Select every day of the week, select “08:00” as the Authorized start time,
select “20:00” as the Authorized end time, and click Add timeslot.
12. Click Next.
3 The Confirmation tab displays 13. Review the information and click Submit to launch the process.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
39
4
Back-Office Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Back-Office Groups.................................................................................... Viewing Back-Office Groups ...................................................................................... Searching Back-Office Groups ................................................................................... Creating a New Back-Office Group ............................................................................. Editing a Back-Office Group ...................................................................................... Deleting Back-Office Groups...................................................................................... Defining Back-Office Global Rights ............................................................................. Managing Back-Office Accounts ................................................................................. Viewing Back-Office Accounts.................................................................................... Searching Back-Office Accounts................................................................................. Creating a New Back-Office Account........................................................................... Editing a Back-Office Account.................................................................................... Deleting Back-Office Accounts ...................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
41 41 42 43 44 49 49 51 51 52 53 54 59
40
Back-Office Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the Administrators menu. The options in the Administrators menu are intended only for those users who have administrative rights on the applications: administrators and back-office accounts. In addition, the Administrators menu is accessible only if you are a member of an authorized group. Authorized groups are groups with at least one right over a back-office group. For a complete listing of rights used by Content Manager, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
Managing Back-Office Groups The Administrators menu enables management of administrator groups. They are groups of administrators to which you can attribute rights for specific resources: contents, frontoffice groups, other back-office groups, and more.
Viewing Back-Office Groups The List Groups option found under the Administrators menu lists all authorized administrator groups. NOTE: Only groups to which you have rights are listed.
To view a list of all back-office groups: 1. From the Administrators menu, select Groups > List groups.
3
The List groups > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The List groups screen displays. For information about the List groups > Filters screen, see “Searching Back-Office Groups” on page 42.
Figure 4.1: List groups Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
41
Back-Office Management
The List groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group name to edit. For more information about editing a group, see “Editing a Back-Office Group” on page 44.
• Click New Group to create a new back-office group. For more information, see “Creating a New Back-Office Group” on page 43.
• Click Delete to remove all selected groups. For more information, see “Deleting BackOffice Groups” on page 49. NOTE: You must have the “delete children groups” right for all parent groups from
which to remove child groups. The Parent groups column displays the parent groups to which a child group is assigned.
• Click Global Rights to modify permissions on all back-office groups. For more information, see “Defining Back-Office Global Rights” on page 49.
Searching Back-Office Groups The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of groups specific to that criteria. To manage back-office group filters: 1. From the List groups screen (Figure 4.1 on page 41), click Edit filters.
3
The List groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 4.2: List groups > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
42
Back-Office Management
Creating a New Back-Office Group NOTE: To create a new back-office group associated with an existing group, you must have
the “create children groups” right for the existing group or the “create groups anywhere” right.
To create a back-office group: 1. From the Administrators menu, select Groups > List groups.
3
The List groups screen displays (Figure 4.1 on page 41).
2. Click New group.
3
The New group screen displays. NOTE: The New group function is also available when searching for or editing a
group. For more information, see “Searching Back-Office Groups” on page 42 and “Editing a Back-Office Group” on page 44.
Figure 4.3: New group Screen
3. In the Name field, type a name for the group. 4. In the Description field, type a short description of the group (optional). 5. From the Parent groups list, select the parent groups with which to associate the group. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple parent groups. NOTE: Only groups for which you have the “create children groups” right display in
the Parent groups list.
6. Click Submit to create the new group.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
43
Back-Office Management
Editing a Back-Office Group NOTE: To edit a group, you must have the appropriate rights. For more about these rights,
see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To edit a group: 1. From the Name column on the List groups screen (Figure 4.1 on page 41), click a group to edit.
3
The Edit group screen displays.
Figure 4.4: Edit group Screen — Details Tab
The Edit group screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the group. The group name can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group. The name should be unique (two groups cannot have the same name).
• Description (optional) — A description of the group. The group description can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group.
• Pass on rights — Select Yes to automatically transmit rights to each child group associated to the group you are modifying. If you select no, then rights will not be automatically transmitted and will have to be changed manually for each child of the edited group. This setting can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right for a parent group. All groups that have rights for the edited group automatically inherit rights for its child groups.
• Creation date — The date on which the group was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the group was last modified (updated automatically).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
44
Back-Office Management
Using the Edit Group Screen From the Edit group screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information about creating a group, see “Creating a New Back-Office Group” on page 43.
• If you have the appropriate rights, click Delete to remove the edited group. For more information about deleting a group, see “Deleting Back-Office Groups” on page 49.
• Click Associated accounts to list accounts using a filter to display only accounts attached to this group.
• Click List groups to return to the List groups screen. For more information about viewing groups, see “Viewing Back-Office Groups” on page 41.
• Click Submit to apply any changes to the group. • Click the Parent groups tab to manage associated parent groups. For more information about parent groups, see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 56.
• Click the Rights on group tab to grant rights to the edited group to other back-office groups. For more information about granting rights, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47.
• Click the Navigation rights tab to display all navigation rights granted to this group. For more information about navigation rights, see “Using the Navigation Rights Tab” on page 48.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
45
Back-Office Management
Using the Parent Groups Tab The Parent groups tab on the Edit group screen allows you to add or remove parent groups from the edited group.
Figure 4.5: Edit group Screen — Parent groups Tab
The Parent groups tab displays the following information:
• Available groups — A list of the authorized groups that are not already a parent of the edited group.
• Parent groups — A list of the groups that are currently parents of the edited group. Adding a Parent Group To add a parent group: 1. From the Available groups list, select a group or set of groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click Add to selected groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list. Deleting a Parent Group To remove a parent group: 1. From the Parent groups list, select a group or set of groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
46
Back-Office Management
2. Click < Remove from selected groups to remove the selected group or groups from the Parent groups list and add them to the Available groups list. NOTE: If you de-select all groups from the list, you will no longer be able to see the edited
group unless you have all rights granted on all back-office groups.
Using the Rights On Group Tab The Rights on group tab allows you to define rights granted to other back-office groups associated with the edited group. For information about granting rights to all back-office groups simultaneously, see “Group Rights” on page 12. NOTE: You may only grant rights that you already have on the target group(s).
Figure 4.6: Edit group Screen — Rights on group Tab
Adding Rights to Groups 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of back-office group rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted to each group selected is displayed on the right side of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
47
Back-Office Management
Revoking Group Rights To remove rights, click the
next to each right to revoke.
Using the Navigation Rights Tab The Navigation rights tab on the Edit group screen allows you to define access to the Web administration pages. You cannot use the Navigation rights tab to define rights directly to managed objects. For example, you may give access to a back-office group to the End-users menu, but you will also need to grant rights for end-user services and groups to enable this back-office group to completely manage end-users. Granting Access to a Resource To grant access to a resource: 1. From the Edit group screen, click the Navigation rights tab.
3
The Navigation rights tab displays.
Figure 4.7: Edit group Screen — Navigation rights Tab
2. From the Resources list, select the resources (navigation nodes on the back-office interface). Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple resources. You can also select All navigation nodes to grant rights on all menus. All menus are listed in the Resources list, from the most generic level down to the most detailed level.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
48
Back-Office Management
• For example, in the Administrators menu, you can grant rights on the whole Administrators menu by selecting it, or select a more specific item to which to grant rights, such as the List Groups function. NOTE: These rights apply only to navigation resources (menus on the Web
administration interfaces). External systems using the platform APIs are not affected by these rights.
3. Click Add right.
3
The right and resource display in the two-column list on the right.
Revoking Resource Access To revoke access by a resource, click the access.
next to each resource from which to remove
Deleting Back-Office Groups NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to delete a group. For more
information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To delete a back-office group: 1. From the List groups screen, check the box next to the groups to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all groups. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited group by clicking Delete on the Edit group screen.
Defining Back-Office Global Rights The Global rights screen allows you to manage rights affecting all back-office groups and accounts. For information about granting rights to a specific group, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47. NOTE: You may manage only those rights already granted to you.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
49
Back-Office Management
Granting Global Rights To grant global rights: 1. From the List Groups screen, click Global rights.
3
The Global rights screen displays.
Figure 4.8: Global rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of group rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12. 3. From the Groups list, select the groups that will benefit from the rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights and their associated groups are displayed on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Global Rights To remove global rights: 1. Click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to revoke.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
50
Back-Office Management
Managing Back-Office Accounts The Administrators menu also enables management of administrator accounts. An account can be used by a physical user (an administrator) or a virtual user (an external system), and can be attached to one or several parent groups from which it inherits rights.
Viewing Back-Office Accounts The List accounts screen lists all authorized back-office accounts. NOTE: Only accounts members of groups for which you have rights are listed. A default
filter is active to hide all “system” accounts and show only “user” accounts.
1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts.
3
The List accounts > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The List accounts screen displays a list of all back-office accounts. For information about List accounts > Filters screen, see “Searching Back-Office Accounts” on page 52.
Figure 4.9: List accounts Screen
The List accounts screen displays the following information:
• Name — The account login name. Click a name to edit the account. For more information about editing an account, see “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
• Description — A short description of the account. • Status — The account status: Active (can login) or Inactive (cannot login). • Type — The account type: External system (an application or system accessing the system using the API) or User (physical user accessing the Web interfaces).
• First name — The first name of the administrator. • Last name — The last name of the administrator.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
51
Back-Office Management
• Parent Groups — Parent group(s) associated with each account. Accounts automatically inherit rights from all associated parent groups.
• Allowed IPs — IP limitations for the account. Using the List Accounts Screen The List accounts screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List accounts screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click an item in the Name column to edit an account. For more information about editing accounts, see “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information about creating accounts, see “Creating a New Back-Office Account” on page 53. NOTE: New account is available only if the “create children accounts” right is
granted for a back-office group, or the “create account anywhere” right is granted.
• Click Delete to remove selected account(s). You must have the right to “delete any account”, or the right to “delete children accounts” by a parent group.
Searching Back-Office Accounts The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of groups specific to that criteria. To edit account filters: 1. From the List accounts screen, click Edit filters.
3
The List accounts > Filters screen displays (Figure 4.10 on page 53).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
52
Back-Office Management
Figure 4.10: List accounts > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Back-Office Account NOTE: To create a new group associated with an existing group, you must have the
“create children groups” right for the existing group, or the “create groups anywhere” right.
To create an account: 1. From the List accounts screen (Figure 4.9 on page 51), click New account.
3
The New account screen displays (Figure 4.11 on page 54).
NOTE: The New account function is also available when searching for or editing an
account. For more information, see “Searching Back-Office Accounts” on page 52 and “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
53
Back-Office Management
Figure 4.11: New account Screen
2. In the Login field, enter a login name for the account. The login name must be unique. 3. In the Password field, enter a login password for the account. 4. In the Password confirmation field, enter the login password a second time for confirmation. 5. Select the status of the account: Active or Inactive. If Inactive is selected, the administrator will not be able to access Content Manager. 6. From the Parent groups list, select one or several parent groups for the new account. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple parent groups. NOTE: Only groups for which you have the “create children accounts” right are listed in the
Parent groups list.
7. Click Submit.
Editing a Back-Office Account To edit an account, you must have at least one of the following rights for one of its parent groups (or for all groups):
• “update children accounts” (or “update any account”) — to modify its properties • “manage children accounts” (or “manage any account”) — to change its parent groups
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
54
Back-Office Management
To edit an account: 1. From the Name column on the List accounts screen, click an account to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit account screen displays.
Figure 4.12: Edit account Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit account screen, you can also perform the following tasks:
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information, see “Creating a New Back-Office Account” on page 53.
• Click Delete to remove the edited account. This is available only if you have the appropriate rights. For more information, see “Deleting Back-Office Accounts” on page 59.
• Click List accounts to return to the List accounts screen. For more information, see “Viewing Back-Office Accounts” on page 51.
• Click the Details tab to view and modify general information about the account. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 56.
• Click the Parent groups tab to access parent group information for the edited account. Groups displayed are groups to which you have the “manage child groups” right. For more information, see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 56.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
55
Back-Office Management
• Click the IP restrictions tab to access IP verification rules for the edited account. For more information, see “Using the IP Restrictions Tab” on page 58.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit account screen displays the following account information:
• Login — The login name for the account. This name can be modified, but it must be unique (two accounts cannot have the same login).
• New password — Type a new password for the account. • Confirm new password — Type the new password for a second time for confirmation.
• Description (optional) — Type a description of the account. • Type — The type of account. Select User (a physical user accessing the web interface), or External system (an application or system accessing the system using the API).
• Status — Select Active to allow login to back-office accounts, or select Inactive to disable the login.
• Last name — Last name of the administrator who will use the account. • First name — First name of the administrator who will use the account. • E-mail address — E-mail address of the administrator who will use the account. • Phone number — Phone number of the administrator who will use the account. • Creation date — Creation date of the account. Cannot be modified. • Last modification date — Date of last modification; automatically updated. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Parent Groups Tab The Parent groups tab on the Edit account screen allows you to add or remove parent groups from the edited account. NOTE: To associate an account to a parent group, you must have the “manage children
accounts” right for one of its current parent groups AND for the target groups (or have the “manage any account” right for all groups).
To manage parent groups for the selected account, from the Edit account screen, click the Parent groups tab.
3
The Parent groups tab displays (Figure 4.13 on page 57).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
56
Back-Office Management
Figure 4.13: Edit account Screen — Parent groups Tab
Adding Parent Groups to an Account To add parent groups: 1. From the Available groups list, select a group or set of groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click Add to selected groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list. Removing Parent Groups From an Account To remove parent groups: 1. From the Parent groups list, select a group or set of groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click < Remove from selected groups to remove the selected group or groups from the Parent groups list and add them to the Available groups list. NOTE: If you remove all groups from the list, you will no longer be able to see the edited
group unless you have all rights granted on all back-office groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
57
Back-Office Management
Using the IP Restrictions Tab When an administrator or external system tries to connect to Content Manager, the system checks the coherence of its login, password, and IP address. Adding Authorized IP Addresses To add authorized IP addresses to the selected account: 1. From the Edit account screen, click the IP restrictions tab.
3
The IP restrictions tab displays.
Figure 4.14: Edit accounts Screen — IP restrictions Tab
2. Specify a range of IP addresses that are authorized to access Content Manager using the edited account.
• IP range: Enter a minimum IP and a maximum IP, then click Add to add them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
• IP subnet: Enter the IP address and NetMask to define the IP addresses authorized to access Content Manager using the edited account. Click Add to add them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
• IP address: Specify individual IP addresses that are authorized to access Content Manager using the edited account. Enter one IP address at a time. Click Add to add them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses. 3. Local VM — This option only applies to external systems that are executed in the same java virtual machine as Content Manager and, consequently, are located on the same server. Click Add to add the option.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
58
Back-Office Management
Removing Authorized IP Addresses To remove authorized IP addresses: 1. From the Authorized IP addresses list, select the addresses to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple addresses. 2. Click Remove selected IPs.
Deleting Back-Office Accounts NOTE: You must have the “delete any account” right in order to delete an account.
To delete an account: 1. From the List accounts screen (Figure 4.9 on page 51), check the box next to one or several accounts to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all accounts. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected accounts?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited account by clicking Delete on the Edit account
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
59
5
Front-Office Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Services................................................................................................... 61 Viewing Services ..................................................................................................... 61 Searching Services .................................................................................................. 62 Creating a New Service ............................................................................................ 62 Editing a Service ..................................................................................................... 64 Deleting a Service ................................................................................................... 69 Managing Global Service Rights ................................................................................. 69 Managing Front-Office Groups ................................................................................... 71 Viewing Front-Office Groups...................................................................................... 71 Searching Front-Office Groups................................................................................... 72 Creating a New Front-Office Group ............................................................................ 73 Editing a Front-Office Group...................................................................................... 74 Deleting a Front-Office Group.................................................................................... 80 Managing Front-Office Accounts ................................................................................ 81 Searching for a Front-Office Account .......................................................................... 81 Creating a New Front-Office Account .......................................................................... 83 Editing a Front-Office Account ................................................................................... 84 Deleting a Front-Office Account ................................................................................. 97 Searching Front-Office Account History Logs ............................................................... 98 Managing Mobile Devices.......................................................................................... 99 Searching for a Device by IMEI ................................................................................. 99 Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI ................................................................ 100 Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs.................................................................... 100 Uploading Accounts ............................................................................................... 101 Viewing Account Imports ........................................................................................ 101 Searching Bulk Account Imports .............................................................................. 102 Creating a Bulk Account Import File ......................................................................... 102
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
60
Front-Office Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the End-users menu. The options in the End-users menu are available for managing users without administration rights on front-office applications. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
Managing Services Services correspond to different branded sites that distribute content stored in Content Manager. A service may be associated with several groups.
Viewing Services NOTE: You must have the right to “read service” in order to view services.
To view a list of authorized services: 1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > List services.
3
The Services > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of services on the Services screen. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Services” on page 62.
3
The Services screen displays a list of all available services.
Figure 5.1: Services Screen
Using the Services Screen The Services screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Services screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a service name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Service” on page 64.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
61
Front-Office Management
• Click New service to create a new service. For more information, see “Creating a New Service” on page 62.
• Click Delete to remove all selected services. For more information, see “Deleting a Service” on page 69.
• Click Rights on all services to modify permissions on all services. For more information, see “Managing Global Service Rights” on page 69.
Searching Services The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of services specific to that criteria. To manage service filters: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click Edit filters.
3
The Services > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.2: Services > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Service NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to create a new service. For
more information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To create a new service: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click New service. NOTE: The New service function is also available when searching for or editing a service.
For more information, see “Searching Services” on page 62 and “Editing a Service” on page 64.
3
The New service screen displays (Figure 5.3 on page 63).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
62
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.3: New service Screen
2. From the Service type list, select a type for the new service. 3. In the Name field, type a name for the service. The service name must be unique (two services cannot have the same name). 4. Check the Subscribe anonymous account box to automatically subscribe the “anonymous_login” account to the service. 5. In the Description field, enter a short description of the service (optional). 6. From the Languages list, select the languages to use with the service. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages. 7. From the Countries & Operators list, select the available country and operator codes to use with the service. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple codes. 8. Click Submit.
3
The Edit service screen displays allowing you to modify details about the service and rights associated to it. For more information, see “Editing a Service” on page 64.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
63
Front-Office Management
Editing a Service NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to edit services. For more
information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To modify a service: 1. From the Name column on the Services screen, click a service to edit. NOTE: The Edit service screen also displays immediately after you create a new service.
3
The Details tab on the Edit service screen displays.
Figure 5.4: Edit service Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit services screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New service to create a new service. For more information, see “Creating a New Service” on page 62.
• Click Delete to delete the selected service. For more information, see “Deleting a Service” on page 69.
• Click Associated groups to access the front-office groups list using a filter to show only those groups that are associated with this service.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general information about the service. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 65.
• Click the Languages tab to view or modify the languages used with the service. For more information, see “Using the Languages Tab” on page 65.
• Click the Rights tab to view or modify rights affecting the edited service. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 66.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
64
Front-Office Management
• Click the Countries & Operators tab to view or modify the country and operator codes used with the service. For more information, see “Using the Countries & Operators Tab” on page 67.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit services screen (Figure 5.4 on page 64) displays the following information about the service:
• Service type —the type of service defined during service setup; cannot be modified • Name — the name of the service; can be modified • Description — an optional description of the service; can be modified • Creation date — the date on which the service was created; cannot be modified • Last modification date — the date on which the service was last modified; updated automatically Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Languages Tab The Languages tab on the Edit service screen allows you to add or remove language support from the service.
Figure 5.5: Edit service Screen — Languages Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
65
Front-Office Management
Adding Language Support To add language support to the service: 1. From the Available languages list, select the languages for which to add support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages. 2. Click Add to selected languages >.
3
The selected languages display in the Languages list.
Removing Language Support To remove language support from the service: 1. From the Languages list, select the languages from which to remove support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages. 2. Click < Remove from selected languages.
3
The selected languages display in the Available languages list.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit service screen allows you to add or remove rights to groups associated with the service. Adding Service Rights To grant service rights to associated groups: 1. From the Edit service screen, click the Rights tab.
3
The Rights tab displays (Figure 5.6 on page 67).
NOTE: Only back-office groups to which you have rights are listed. You can grant or revoke
only those rights you already have on services.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
66
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.6: Edit service Screen — Rights Tab
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of each right available, see “Service Rights” on page 14. 3. From the Groups list, select the back office groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted and their associated groups display on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Service Rights To remove service rights from groups, click the
next to each right to revoke.
Using the Countries & Operators Tab The Countries & Operators tab on the Edit service screen allows you to select specific country and operators to use with the service. NOTE: Countries and operators must be added to the database before they can be used
with a service. For more information, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
67
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.7: Edit service Screen > Countries & Operators Tab
Adding Country and Operator Support To add country and operator support to the service: 1. From the Available countries & operators list, select the countries and operators for which to add support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items. 2. Click Add to selected countries & operators >.
3
The selected countries and operators display in the Associated countries & operators list.
Removing Country and Operator Support To remove country and operator support from the service: 1. From the Associated countries & operators list, select the items from which to remove support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items. 2. Click < Remove from selected countries & operators.
3
The selected languages display in the Available countries & operators list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
68
Front-Office Management
Deleting a Service NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to delete services. For more
information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To delete a service: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), check the box next to the services to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all services. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected services?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited service by clicking Delete on the Edit service
screen.
Managing Global Service Rights The Rights on services screen (Figure 5.8 on page 70) allows you to manage rights on groups affecting all services. To manage rights on groups for a selected service, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 66. NOTE: Only back-office children groups to which you have rights are listed. You can grant
or revoke only those rights already granted on services.
To view or modify rights granted to all services: 1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click Rights on services.
3
The Rights on services screen displays (Figure 5.8 on page 70).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
69
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.8: Rights on services Screen
Granting Service Rights To add service rights: 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of each service right available, see “Service Rights” on page 14. NOTE: You may only grant rights that you already have on services, and you must
have the “Read service” right granted in order to list accounts on which you have rights.
NOTE: The “create children accounts” right can be granted from the Rights on
services screen only. In order to enable an administrator group to create new accounts for only a certain service, you must grant the right “subscribe service” to that specific service.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted and their associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
70
Front-Office Management
Revoking Service Rights To delete a service right, click the
next to each right you to revoke.
Managing Front-Office Groups Front-office groups are sets of consumer accounts within a specific service. The Groups option found under the End-users menu lists all authorized front-office groups.
Viewing Front-Office Groups To view a list of front-office groups: 1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Groups.
3
The Groups > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to display the list of front-office groups. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Front-Office Groups” on page 72. NOTE: Only groups associated with services to which you have rights are listed.
Figure 5.9: Groups Screen
The Groups screen displays the following information:
• Name — group name • Description — group description (if available) • User association — indicates whether end-users are associated to the group automatically or manually
• Service — name of the parent service for each group NOTE: Each group is associated to one service to which rights are granted.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
71
Front-Office Management
Using the Groups Screen The Groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
• Click New Group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to remove all selected groups. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
Searching Front-Office Groups The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of front-office groups specific to that criteria. To edit filters, from the List groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), click Edit filters.
3
The Groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.10: Groups > Filters Screen
3. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
72
Front-Office Management
Creating a New Front-Office Group NOTE: You must have the “create children groups” right granted to the parent service in
order to create a group.
To create a new group: 1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), click New group.
3
The New group screen displays.
NOTE: The New group function is also available when searching for or editing a group.
For more information, see “Searching Front-Office Groups” on page 72 and “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
Figure 5.11: New group Screen
2. From the Service list, select a parent service for the new group. NOTE: Only those services to which you have rights are available.
3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the group. No two groups can have the same name. 4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the group (optional). 5. Select the type of user association for the group. Choose Automatic to associate endusers to the group automatically, or Manual to associate end-users manually. NOTE: You must associate at least one active rule in order to use automatic association.
For information about group rules, see “Adding and Editing Rules” on page 79.
6. Click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
73
Front-Office Management
Editing a Front-Office Group NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to edit a front-office group.
For information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To access the Edit Group screen: 1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), select a group by clicking the group Name in the list.
3
Depending on the User association setting of the selected group, one of two screens displays:
• If the group selected is set with a Manual user association, the Edit group screen displays two tabs: Details and Rights.
Figure 5.12: Edit group Screen, (Manual user association) — Details Tab
• If the group selected is set with an Automatic user association, the Edit group screen displays four tabs: Details, Rights, Active rules, and Draft rules tabs (Figure 5.13 on page 75).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
74
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.13: Edit group Screen, (Automatic user association) — Details Tab
Using the Edit Group Screen From the Edit group screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information about creating a group, see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to delete the edited group. For more information about deleting a group, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify group details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 76.
• Click the Rights tab to grant rights to the selected group. For more information about granting rights, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 76. The following tasks are available only if the selected group uses Automatic user association:
• Click the Active rules tab to view rules currently used to associate users to the group. For more information, see “Using the Active Rules Tab” on page 78.
• Click the Draft rules tab to define new association rules used to automatically associate or disassociate users with the group. For more information, see “Using the Draft Rules Tab” on page 78.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
75
Front-Office Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit group screen is available to groups with either Automatic or Manual user associations. The Details tab (Figure 5.13 on page 75) displays the following information about the selected group:
• Name — The name of the group. The group name can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group. The name should be unique (two groups cannot have the same name).
• Description — A description of the group. The group description can be modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group (optional).
• User association — Indicates how end-users are associated with the group. Automatic associates end-users to the group automatically, while Manual associates end-users manually.
• Parent service — The name of the parent service associated with the group (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — Creation date of the group (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — Date of last modification (automatically updated). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit group screen (Figure 5.14 on page 77) allows you to manage the edited group’s rights to manage accounts associated with select parent groups. NOTE: Only those parent groups to which you have rights are listed. You may only assign
rights to parent groups that are already granted to you.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
76
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.14: Edit group Screen — Rights Tab EXAMPLE: Figure 5.14 shows that the edited group, Group 41, has been granted all rights
to children accounts of both the Super administrators and System accounts groups.
Granting Rights To grant group account rights: 1. Check the box each right to grant. For a description of each front-office group rights available, see “Group Rights” on page 12. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights granted to each group display in the list on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Rights To remove group account rights: Click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to revoke.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
77
Front-Office Management
Using the Active Rules Tab NOTE: The Active rules tab is available only when editing a group using automatic user
association. The information displayed is view-only.
To add or edit rules, click the Draft rules tab. For more information, see “Using the Draft Rules Tab” on page 78. NOTE: The User association status at the top of the screen displays whether a current
association process is running.
Using the Draft Rules Tab The Draft rules tab allows you to define new association rules to be used to automatically associate users to the selected group. NOTE: The Draft rules tab is available only when editing a group using Automatic user
association.
If rules are currently active for the group, the Draft rules tab displays information regarding each rule. Click Edit to modify the corresponding rule, or click Remove to delete the corresponding rule. In addition to viewing, editing, and removing currently active rules from the Draft rules tab, you can also perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to delete the selected group. You must have the proper rights to perform this task. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
• Click Add new rule to define a rule for the association process. For more information, see “Adding and Editing Rules” on page 79.
• Click Set as “All Users group” to remove all rules and automatically associate ALL users to the group. You must then click Activate draft rules to perform this operation.
• Click Activate draft rules to activate all rules. This function is available only after a rule or set of rules has been defined for the group. A background process is launched to check all existing accounts to see if they can be associated with the group or not. It make take some time for large user bases. You can follow the progress of the process through the Dynamic group process counter.
• Click Reset draft rules to delete all draft rules. This function is available only if draft rules are active. Only rules already active are displayed.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
78
Front-Office Management
Adding and Editing Rules Rules apply to all information stored in the user account: account details, associated devices, and addresses. To add or modify rules: 1. From the Draft rules tab, click Add new rule.
3
The Edit rule > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.15: Edit rule > Filters Screen
2. Enter the filter criteria as necessary, then click the corresponding to add the rule. For more information about applying filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. NOTE: Check the not box to reverse the operator. For example, “contains” becomes “does
not contain”.
The following filter criteria is available:
• • • •
Last modification date — date account was last modified Status — active/inactive Billing type — prepaid/postpaid Device address — MSISDN number
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
79
Front-Office Management
• • • • • • • • •
3
Address type — mobile, email, fax, or phone Address index — a range of addresses associated with the account IMSI — SIM card ID Device type — mobile, email, or phone Unresolved device model — true/false Device brand — brand of the device Device model — model of the device Device software version — software version used by the device Accounts in group — the group associated with the accounts to include in the rule
Defined rules are then displayed in the Current filters portion of the screen. Filter criteria includes the following:
• Account id — original name of the account • Account alias — replacement name of the account • Creation date — date account was created 3. Click Submit when finished to validate the defined rules, or click Cancel to return to the Draft rules tab. 4. Before your rules can be applied, you must activate them. Click Activate draft rules to start the activation process.
3
A confirmation message “Are you are sure you want to activate all draft rules?” displays.
5. Click Ok to continue, or Cancel to void the activation.
Deleting a Front-Office Group NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted to parent services in order to delete
an associated group. For more information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
NOTE: Deleting a group will not delete its associated accounts.
To delete a front-office group: 1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), check the box next to each group to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all groups. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited group by clicking Delete on the Edit group screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
80
Front-Office Management
Managing Front-Office Accounts The End-users menu enables management of end-user accounts. An account can be used by a physical user (an administrator) or a virtual user (an external system), and can be attached to one or several services.
Searching for a Front-Office Account You can search for an end-user account based on its address (MSISDN, email, or fixed-line phone) or alias. To search for an account: 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > Search account.
3
The Search by address tab on the Search account screen displays. NOTE: Only accounts associated with services on which you have the “view children
groups” and “view children accounts” rights are available on the Search account screen.
Figure 5.16: Search account Screen — Search by address Tab
The Search account screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit anonymous account to directly edit the “anonymous” account. • Click the Search by address tab to search by address. For more information, see “Performing a Search by Address” on page 82.
• Click the Search by alias tab to search by account alias. For more information, see “Performing a Search by Alias” on page 82.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
81
Front-Office Management
Performing a Search by Address To perform a search by address: 1. Click the Search by address tab on the Search account screen.
3
The Search by address tab displays (Figure 5.16 on page 81).
2. In the Address field on the Search account screen, enter a mobile phone number or email address associated with the desired accounts. 3. Click List accounts by address to perform the search.
3
If at least one account is found with a matching address, corresponding account details are listed on the right side of the screen.
4. To edit a listed account, click Edit account next to the account to edit.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85). For information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Performing a Search by Alias To search for accounts based on an alias name: 1. From the Search account screen, click the Search by alias tab.
3
The Search by alias tab displays.
Figure 5.17: Search account Screen — Search by alias Tab
2. In the Alias field, enter an alias name by which to search accounts. 3. Click List accounts by alias to perform the search.
3
If at least one account is found with a matching alias, corresponding account details are listed on the right side of the screen.
4. To edit a listed account, click Edit account next to the account to edit.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85). For information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
82
Front-Office Management
Creating a New Front-Office Account NOTE: You must have the “create children accounts” right on all services in order to create
an end-user account. In order to subscribe the account to a service, you must have the “subscribe services” right on the desired service. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
To create a new end-user account: 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > New account.
3
The New account screen displays.
Figure 5.18: New account Screen
2. From the Available services list, select one or several parent services for the account. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple services. 3. In the Alias field, enter an alias name for the account. NOTE: The alias does not have to be unique. You can group accounts into search groups by
using the same alias for multiple accounts.
4. In the Password field, enter a password for the account. The account will not be created without a password. 5. In the Password confirmation field, enter your password again to confirm. The password entered here match the password entered in the Password field. 6. In the First name field, enter the first name of the end-user of this account.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
83
Front-Office Management
7. In the Last name field, enter the last name of the end-user of this account. 8. Select whether the account status is Active or Inactive. If the account status is Inactive, the end-user on this account cannot access the front-office interface. 9. Click Submit.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.20 on page 87) allowing you to modify the account further. For information about editing an account, see “Editing a FrontOffice Account”.
Editing a Front-Office Account NOTE: The Edit account screen is available only after a new end-user account is created,
or after an existing account has been found through a search. For information about creating an account, see “Creating a New Front-Office Account” on page 83. For information about searching for an account, see “Searching for a Front-Office Account” on page 81.
To edit an end-user account: NOTE: The parent service or group on this account must have the “update children
accounts” right granted in order to modify end-user account properties. The parent service or group must also have the “manage children accounts” right granted in order to change the account’s parent groups. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11
1. From the Edit account screen, select a group by clicking the account Name in the list.
3
The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
84
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.19: Edit account Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify as necessary the account attributes on each of the following tabs:
• Details (see “Using the Details Tab” on page 86) • Services (see “Using the Services Tab” on page 87) • Parent groups (see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 87) • Devices (see “Using the Devices Tab” on page 89) • Addresses (see “Using the Addresses Tab” on page 91) • Sim cards (see “Using the SIM Cards Tab” on page 93) • Manage timeslots (see “Using the Manage Timeslots Tab” on page 94) • Credit information (see “Using the Credit Information Tab” on page 95) • History (see “Using the History Tab” on page 96)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
85
Front-Office Management
In addition to modifying account information, you can also perform the following tasks from the Edit account screen:
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information, see “Creating a New Front-Office Account” on page 83.
• Click Delete account to remove the edited account. This is available only if you have the appropriate rights granted. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Account” on page 97.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit account screen (Figure 5.19 on page 85) displays the following following account information:
• Alias — The alias name for the account (can be modified). NOTE: The alias does not have to be unique. You can group accounts into
searchable groups by using the same alias for multiple accounts.
• New password — Enter a new password for the account. • Confirm password — Enter the password again to confirm. The password entered here match the password entered in the Password field.
• Status — Select whether the account is Active or Inactive. If the account status is Inactive, the end-user on this account cannot access the front-office interface.
• Billing type — Select whether the account is Prepaid or Postpaid. • Devices — If any devices are associated with this account, a list is displayed here. Click the Devices tab to manage devices associated with this account. For more information, see “Using the Devices Tab” on page 89.
• Addresses — If any mobile phone numbers (MSISDNs) or email addresses are associated with this account a list is displayed here. Click Addresses to manage addresses associated with this account. For more information, see “Using the Addresses Tab” on page 91.
• First name (optional) — Type the first name of the end-user of this account. • Last name (optional) — Type the last name of the end-user of this account. • Address (optional) — Type the end-user’s residential street address. • City (optional) — Type the end-user’s city of residence. • Country (optional) — Type the end-user’s country of residence. • Language (optional) — Using one of the following 2-character combinations, type the primary language for the end-user account:
• “en” = English • “ar” = Arabic
“fr” = French “es” = Spanish
Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
86
Front-Office Management
Using the Services Tab The Services tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the services to which the edited account is subscribed.
Figure 5.20: Edit account Screen — Services Tab
Subscribing to a Service To subscribe to a service: NOTE: You must have the “subscribe services” right on the target service in order to
associate an account with a service.
1. From the Service list, select the service to which to subscribe to the account. 2. Click Subscribe to service.
3
The new service subscription is listed on the right side of the Services tab.
Removing a Service Subscription To remove a service subscription: 1. Click Unsubscribe next to the service subscription to remove from the account.
Using the Parent Groups Tab The Parent groups tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage parent groups associated to the account. NOTE: To associate an account to a parent group, you must have the “manage children
accounts” right granted to a parent service or group associated with the account.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
87
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.21: Edit account Screen — Parent groups Tab
From the Service drop-down list, select the service from which to view Available groups and Parent groups. NOTE: Only those services to which the end-user is subscribed and on which you have
rights are listed.
Adding Parent Groups To add a parent group: 1. From the Available groups list, select the groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click Add groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list. Removing Parent Groups To remove a parent group: 1. From the Parent groups list, select the groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 2. Click < Remove groups to remove the selection from the Parent groups list.
3
The groups redisplay in the Available groups list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
88
Front-Office Management
Using the Devices Tab The Devices tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the devices associated with the selected account.
Figure 5.22: Edit account Screen — Devices Tab
Adding a Device To add a new device: 1. From the Device type list, select the type of device (Mobile, email, or phone) for this account. 2. In the Name field, enter a personal name for the device (optional). 3. Select the method by which the device is created: IMEI or Terminal.
3
If you select IMEI, the Devices tab refreshes. Enter the IMEI number in the new IMEI field. Content Manager will attempt to identify the device model based on the IMEI. If Content Manager cannot identify the device model, the device will be added as “unknown”.
3
If you select Terminal, the Device tab refreshes. Select the brand of device from the Brand list, then select a device model from the Terminal list.
4. Click Create new device.
3
The newly created device details are listed on the right side of the tab.
Deleting a Device To remove a device from the account, click Remove next to each active device to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
89
Front-Office Management
Editing Device Details To edit a device’s details: 1. From the Device column in the list of added devices, click a device to view or modify device details.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device details screen displays.
Figure 5.23: Edit device details Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify the necessary device details. Details include the following:
• Type — the device type (mobile phone, email, or fixed-line phone); cannot be modified
• Brand — the device brand • Terminal — the device model • IMEI — the International Mobile Equipment Identity (if available) NOTE: If you modify the IMEI, the device brand and model may be updated.
• Name — the personal name assigned to the device 3. Click Submit to save any changes. Viewing or Removing Referencing Devices To view or remove an existing device already associated to the account: 1. From the Edit device details screen, click the referencing device tab.
3
The referencing device tab displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
90
Front-Office Management
The referencing device tab displays the following information:
• Type — the type of device: Mobile, Email, or Phone • Name — the personal name of the device • Device — the device brand and model Click Remove next to the device to remove from the account.
Using the Addresses Tab The Addresses tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the addresses and associated devices defined for the selected account. An address can be a mobile phone number (MSISDN), an email address, or a fixed-line phone number.
Figure 5.24: Edit account Screen — Addresses Tab
1. From the Address type list, select a type of address (Mobile, Email, or Phone).
3
Depending on the address type selected, the Addresses tab refreshes and displays one of the following fields just below the Name field:
• MSISDN — type the MSISDN address for the Mobile address type • Email — type the email address for the Email address type • Land phone — type the fixed-line phone number for the Phone address type 2. In the Name field, enter a name for the address (optional). 3. From the Device list, select an currently associated device. 4. From the Mcc list, select a Mobile Country Code (if available). 5. From the Mnc list, select a Mobile Network Code (if available). Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
91
Front-Office Management
6. Click Create new address to add the address to the account.
3
The newly created address displays in detail on the right side of the Addresses tab.
• To delete an address from the account, click Remove next to the address to delete from the list.
• To modify a device in the list, click an item under the Device column to modify.
3The Edit device details screen displays (Figure 5.23 on page 90). • To modify an address in the list, click an item under the Address column to modify.
3The Edit address details screen displays.
Figure 5.25: Edit address details Screen
Editing Address Details To edit address details: 1. Make changes as necessary on the Edit address details screen. The following information is provided:
• Type —the type of device: Mobile, Email, or Phone (cannot be modified) • MSISDN, Email, or Phone — the address for a Mobile type, the email address for an Email type, or fixed-line phone number for a Phone type (cannot be modified)
• Name (optional) — the name for the address • Device — the type of device 2. From the Mcc list, select a Mobile Country Code (if available).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
92
Front-Office Management
3. From the Mnc list, select a Mobile Network Code (if available). 4. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the SIM Cards Tab The SIM Cards tab on the Edit account screen allows you to modify the SIM cards associated to the account. CM uses the IMSI number to identify SIM cards used by mobile subscribers. An IMSI can be attached to only one end-user. However, several IMSI can be active at the same time if the end-user has several SIM cards active at the same time.
Figure 5.26: Edit account Screen — SIM cards Tab
Adding SIM Cards to an Account To add a SIM card: 1. In the IMSI field, enter the IMSI number located on the back of the SIM card to add to the account. 2. From the Associated address list, select the address of the device. 3. Click Create.
3
The newly added SIM card information displays on the right side of the SIM cards tab.
Deleting SIM Cards From an Account To delete a SIM card, click Remove next to the active SIM card to remove from the account. NOTE: SIM cards associated with an address cannot be removed.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
93
Front-Office Management
Editing a SIM Card To edit a SIM card: 1. From the list of associated SIM cards, click Edit next to the SIM card to edit.
• To edit an address: from the list of associated SIM cards, click the address to edit.
3The Edit address details screen displays. For more information about editing an address, see the “Edit address details Screen” on page 92.
• To edit a device: from the list of associated SIM cards, click the device to edit.
3The Edit device details screen displays. For more information about editing a device, see the “Editing Device Details” on page 90.
Using the Manage Timeslots Tab The Manage timeslots tab on the Edit account screen allows you to define the time frame in which message reception for the account is authorized. NOTE: If no timeslots are defined, reception on the device is always active. If one or
several timeslots are defined, then reception is active only during those timeslots.
Figure 5.27: Edit account Screen — Manage timeslots Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
94
Front-Office Management
Adding a Timeslot To add a timeslot: 1. Check the box next to each day of the week the account is authorized for reception. 2. Select the time of day at which to start reception authorization. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 3. Select the time of day at which to end reception authorization. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 4. From the On drop-down list, select the device on which the timeslot will apply. 5. Click Add time slot.
3
All applied timeslots display on the right side of the Manage timeslots tab, and are noted on the graph at the bottom of the tab. Green cells on the graph represent active reception during those hours, while blue cells represent inactive reception.
Removing a Timeslot To remove a timeslot, click Remove next to the timeslot to remove.
Using the Credit Information Tab Users that use their accounts to make purchases sometimes receive discount “points” from the storefronts from which they buy. Points are awarded for loyalty purchases, for example: recurring purchases or purchases over a designated cost. Points can then be deducted from an account to offset purchase prices. The Credit information tab on the Edit account screen keeps track of the number of points available to the account. Points displayed may be updated automatically by Content Manager, or updated manually by an administrator. To manage credit information: 1. Click the Credit information tab on the Edit account screen.
3
The Credit information tab displays (Figure 5.28 on page 96).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
95
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.28: Edit account Screen — Credit information Tab
2. In the Credit field, enter a credit value on the account. 3. Click Submit.
Using the History Tab The History tab on the Edit account screen allows you to view a list of any and all operations performed by a Content Manager end-user. To view a list of user operations: 1. From the Edit account screen, click the History tab.
3
The History tab displays.
Figure 5.29: Edit account Screen — History Tab
2. From the Search past days list, select the past number of days to search.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
96
Front-Office Management
3. Select one of the following types of operations to display:
• Content — displays only configuration downloads completed by this user • Device modifications — displays only device creations, activations, and deletions performed by this user
• All operations — displays all operations related to this user 4. Click Search.
3
A list of operations performed by this user displays in the table at the bottom of the History tab. The following table describes the information provided: NOTE: The information displayed on the History tab is view-only. Information Mobile Operation
Address Date created Date finished Status
Offer Content Description
Description The model of device used for the operation. The type of operation. Operation types include the following: • configuration • creation (device) • activation (device; associated with an address) • deactivation (device; disassociated with an address) The mobile phone number (MSISDN) associated with the operation. The date on which the operation began. The date on which the operation ended. The operation status. Status types include the following: • Pending — operation has not yet started (it is not yet “time to live”) • Processing — operation is currently processing • Processing wait — operation is currently processing but waiting for another operation • Sleep — operation has been paused and will restart at the “time next continue” date • Done — main operation is finished • Processing child session — main operation is finished, and a related operation is currently processing • Error — an error has occurred The parent offer of the downloaded content. The downloaded content. The type of downloaded content or source of the operation.
Deleting a Front-Office Account NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to delete an account. For
information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To delete an account: 1. Click Delete from anywhere within the Edit account screen.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to this current account?” displays.
2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
97
Front-Office Management
Searching Front-Office Account History Logs To view a list of end-user history logs: 1. From the End-users menu, select Users > History.
3
The History screen displays.
Figure 5.30: History Screen
2. In the Address field, enter the address (MSISDN, email address, or fixed-line phone number) for the logs to view. 3. From the Search past days list, select the past number of days to search. 4. Click Search.
3
The following table describes the information provided about each history log found: Information Session Date created Date finished
The date on which the operation began. The date on which the operation ended.
Status
The operation status. Status types include the following: • Pending — operation has not yet started (it is not yet “time to live”) • Processing — operation is currently processing • Processing wait — operation is currently processing but waiting for another operation • Sleep — operation has been paused and will restart at the “time next continue” date • Done — main operation is finished • Processing child session — main operation is finished, and a related operation is currently processing • Error — an error has occurred
Mobile
The device model used for the operation.
Offer Content Description
Copyright 2006
Description The ID number of the associated configuration session.
The parent offer of the downloaded content. The downloaded content. The type of downloaded content or source of the operation.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
98
Front-Office Management
Managing Mobile Devices The Device inventory portion of the End-users menu allows you to search for a device by an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) or by an unresolved IMEI. You can then view account information based on the device.
Searching for a Device by IMEI To search for a device based on its IMEI: 1. From the End-users menu, select Device inventory > Search a device.
3
The Search a device screen displays.
Figure 5.31: Search a device Screen
2. In the IMEI field, enter the IMEI associated with the accounts to locate. 3. Click List accounts by IMEI.
3
If at least one account is found related to this IMEI, the following account details display on the right side of the screen:
• • • • • •
IMEI — the IMEI used in the search Alias — the alias name belonging to the account Status — indicates whether the account status is Active or Inactive First name — the first name of the end-user Last name — the last name of the end-user Addresses — addresses associated with the account (mobile phone (MSISDN), email, or fixed-line phone)
4. To edit an end-user account, click the Edit account next to the account to modify.
3
The Edit account screen displays, allowing you to make changes to the account. For more information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
99
Front-Office Management
Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI An unresolved IMEI is an IMEI detected by or created by end-users that could not be associated to any device. NOTE: Only IMEI-associated accounts on which you have rights are listed. To resolve an
IMEI manually, see “Creating an IMEI Range” on page 185.
To locate devices with an unresolved IMEI: 1. From the End-users menu, select Device inventory > Unresolved IMEIs.
3
The Unresolved IMEIs > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all unresolved IMEIs. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs” on page 100.
Using the Unresolved IMEIs Screen The Unresolved IMEIs screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Unresolved IMEIs screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the IMEI column, click a device to edit. For more information, see “Edit address details Screen” on page 92.
• Click Download file to download or open the unresolvedIMEIs.csv file. Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of unresolved IMEIs specific to that criteria. To manage service filters: 1. From the Unresolved IMEIs screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Unresolved IMEIs > Filters screen displays (Figure 5.32 on page 101).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
100
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.32: Unresolved IMEIs > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Uploading Accounts A bulk account import operation is a process in which multiple account content is uploaded at the same time. The Bulk operations portion of the End-users menu allows you to manage all account upload operations.
Viewing Account Imports To view a complete list of account imports: 1. From the End-users menu, select Bulk operations > List imports.
3
The List imports > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all account imports. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Bulk Account Imports” on page 102.
3
The List imports screen displays.
Figure 5.33: List imports Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
101
Front-Office Management
Using the List Imports Screen The List imports screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List imports screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Current import to automatically create a report for the current import file. The report displays as shown in Figure 5.36 on page 104.
Searching Bulk Account Imports The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of import files specific to that criteria. To manage import filters: 1. From the List imports screen (Figure 5.33 on page 101), click Edit filters.
3
The List imports > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.34: List imports > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Bulk Account Import File NOTE: Files to be used for the import operation must be imported to the directory on the
platform defined during implementation.
1. From the Filters screen, click Create import.
3
The Import accounts screen (1 of 2) displays (Figure 5.35 on page 103).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
102
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.35: Import accounts Screen
2. Select the file to import. 3. Select Create to create a new account for the imported file, or select Skip if you choose not to create a new account. 4. Select Update to update existing accounts using one or more of the following options: NOTE: If you choose not to update existing accounts, select Skip.
• Account details — the alias and passwords will be replaced • Billing — the billing type will be modified • Device — the device information will be modified • Activate last device — the device imported in the bulk file will be activated • Services — the service information will be modified 5. Click Next.
3
The Import accounts screen (2 of 2) displays (Figure 5.36 on page 104).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
103
Front-Office Management
Figure 5.36: Import accounts (Step 2/2) Screen
6. Review the options you selected, and click Start to start the bulk operation. 7. To refresh your view of the operation status until the Progression (fourth from the bottom) has reached 100%, repeatedly click Refresh. NOTE: To ensure that accounts were successfully imported, search for one of the MSISDNs
you imported to ensure that it is attached to the created service. For more information about searching by MSISDN, see “Performing a Search by Address” on page 82.
8. To stop the operation, click Stop.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
104
Front-Office Management
Import File Formats Imported files should be in .csv file format. The file should be formatted to be one line per end-user account separated by a semicolon (;), and should include the information described in the following table: Elements Login
Type String
Description AccountFO login (the key of the object) Example: 00000103446BB74F-00002
Required? No
Alias
String
AccountFO alias
No
Password
String
AccountFO password
Yes
Language
String
Language code Examples: en = English; fr = French
No
Integer
0 = postpaid 1 = prepaid
Yes
String
MSISDN in international format (without +)
Yes
Integer
A device flag should always be followed by a Device data field. A line can contain multiple pairs [Device flag; Device data]
No
Billing type Address Device flag
0 = create a device of an unknown type 1 = create a device from IMEI 2 = create a device from ModelID Device data
String
Device flag 0 = empty Device flag 1 = IMEI Device flag 2 = ModelID
No
For example: DO;; D1;35014412345678 D2;150001 Service flag
Integer
A service flag should always be followed by a Service data field. A line can contain multiple pairs [Service flag;Service data]
No
0 = Subscribe to service 1 = Unsubscribe from service Service name
Copyright 2006
String
The service name is required in order to subscribe a user.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
No
105
6
Content Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Content Providers.................................................................................... Viewing Content Providers ...................................................................................... Searching Content Providers ................................................................................... Creating a New Content Provider ............................................................................. Editing a Content Provider ...................................................................................... Deleting a Content Provider .................................................................................... Defining Global Content Provider Rights.................................................................... Managing Content Categories.................................................................................. Viewing Categories ................................................................................................ Searching Categories ............................................................................................. Creating a New Category........................................................................................ Editing a Category ................................................................................................. Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... Managing Global Category Rights ............................................................................ Using Content Templates ........................................................................................ Managing Content ................................................................................................. Viewing Content .................................................................................................... Searching Content ................................................................................................. Creating New Content ............................................................................................ Editing Content ..................................................................................................... Cloning Content .................................................................................................... Deleting Content ................................................................................................... Importing Bulk Contents ........................................................................................ Searching Import Processes .................................................................................... Starting a Bulk Import Process ................................................................................ Creating a Process................................................................................................. Accessing a Bulk Process ........................................................................................ Deleting a Bulk Process .......................................................................................... Using Zip Files ...................................................................................................... Algorithms of Zip File Processing ............................................................................. Zip File Structure and XML Files...............................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
107 107 108 109 110 113 113 114 115 116 116 117 121 121 123 137 137 138 139 140 157 157 158 159 160 160 164 164 164 164 165
106
Content Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the Content menu. The options in the Content menu allow you to manage components of the content database. NOTE: The Content menu is available only if you are a member of an authorized group.
Managing Content Providers Content providers are entities with rights to publish contents. Each content provider is associated with one or more back-office groups. Members of these groups can publish or view contents on behalf of content providers.
Viewing Content Providers To view a list of content providers: 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Providers.
3
The Providers > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view all existing providers. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Content Providers” on page 108.
3
The Providers screen displays a list of all available content providers.
Figure 6.1: Providers Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
107
Content Management
Using the Providers Screen The Providers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Providers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a provider name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
• Click New provider to create a new content provider. For more information, see “Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109.
• Click Delete to remove all selected providers. For more information, see “Deleting a Content Provider” on page 113.
• Click Rights to manage rights for all content providers. For more information, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
Searching Content Providers The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content providers specific to that criteria. To edit content provider filters: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click Edit filters.
3
The Providers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.2: Providers > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
108
Content Management
Creating a New Content Provider To create a new content provider: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click New provider. NOTE: The New provider function is also available when searching for or editing a provider.
For more information, see “Searching Content Providers” on page 108 and “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
3
The New provider screen displays.
Figure 6.3: New provider Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the new provider. Two content providers cannot have the same name. 3. From the Templates list, select one or more templates that can be used by the content provider to create contents. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. For a list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123. 4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the provider (optional). 5. Click Submit.
3
The Edit provider screen displays, allowing you to modify details about the provider, as well as the templates and rights associated with it. For more information, see “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
109
Content Management
Editing a Content Provider NOTE: Only back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights are listed. You
can only grant rights you already have on content providers. For more information about these rights, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15.
To make changes to a content provider: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click the name of the provider to modify. NOTE: The Edit provider screen also displays immediately after you create a new
provider.
3
The Details tab on the Edit provider screen displays.
Figure 6.4: Edit provider Screen — Details Tab
The Edit provider screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New provider to create a new content provider. For more information, see “Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109.
• Click Delete to delete the edited provider. For more information, see “Deleting a Content Provider” on page 113.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify provider details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 111.
• Click the Templates tab to view or modify content templates associated with the provider. For more information, see “Using the Templates Tab” on page 111.
• Click the Rights tabs to manage rights on the selected content provider. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 112.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
110
Content Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit provider screen (Figure 6.4 on page 110) allows you to modify the following details of the selected provider:
• Name: The unique name for the provider. Two providers cannot have the same name. • Description: A short description of the provider. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Templates Tab The Templates tab on the Edit providers screen allows you to add or remove authorized templates for the selected content provider.
Figure 6.5: Edit providers Screen — Templates Tab
Adding Templates to a Provider To authorize templates for use by the selected provider: 1. Select one or more templates from the Available templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Add.
3
The selected providers display in the Associated templates list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
111
Content Management
Removing Templates From a Provider To remove templates for use by the selected provider: 1. Select one or more templates from the Associated templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Remove.
3
The selected templates redisplay in the Available templates list.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit provider screen allows you to define back-office group rights for the selected provider. For information about granting rights to groups affecting all content providers simultaneously, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights that you already have on providers.
Figure 6.6: Edit provider Screen — Rights Tab
Adding Content Provider Rights to Groups To add rights to groups for this content provider: 1. Select one or more rights from the Rights list in which to grant. For a description of each right available, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15. 2. Select one or several groups from the Groups list to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
112
Content Management
3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights tab.
Revoking Content Provider Rights From Groups To remove rights from groups for this content provider, click the right to remove.
next to each granted
Deleting a Content Provider To delete a provider: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), check the box next each provider to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all providers. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected providers?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited provider by clicking Delete on the Edit provider
screen.
Defining Global Content Provider Rights The Rights on providers screen (Figure 6.7) allows you to grant rights to groups affecting all categories. To grant rights to groups for a single category, see “Editing a Content Provider” on page 110. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights that you already have on content providers.
Granting Provider Rights To rights to groups affecting all categories: 1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click Rights.
3
The Rights on providers screen displays (Figure 6.7 on page 114).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
113
Content Management
Figure 6.7: Rights on providers Screen
2. Check the box next to one or more rights in which to grant. For a description of each right available, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15. 3. From the Groups list, select one or more groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights on categories screen.
Revoking Provider Rights To remove content provider rights from groups, click the
next to each right to remove.
Managing Content Categories The Categories selection on the Content menu allows you to categorize all contents entered into Content Manager. NOTE: This menu selection is available only if you have rights associated to categories. For
more information, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
114
Content Management
Viewing Categories To view a list of categories: 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Categories.
3
The Categories > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view all existing categories. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Categories” on page 116.
3
The Categories screen displays a list of existing categories.
Figure 6.8: Categories Screen
Using the Categories Screen The Categories screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Categories screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a category name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117.
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 116.
• Click Delete to remove all selected categories. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 121.
• Click Rights to manage all category rights for groups. For more information, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
115
Content Management
Searching Categories The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of categories specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click Edit filters.
3
The Categories > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.9: Categories > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Category To create a new category and attach it to existing content providers: 1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click New category. NOTE: The New category function is also available when searching for or editing a
category. For more information, see “Searching Categories” on page 116 and “Editing a Category” on page 117.
3
The New category screen displays (Figure 6.10 on page 117).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
116
Content Management
Figure 6.10: New category Screen
2. From the Parent category list, select a category. 3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the new category. Two categories may have the same name only if they have different parent categories. 4. From the Content providers list, select the content providers able to add contents to this category. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 5. In the Description field, enter a short description of the category (optional). 6. Click Submit.
3
The Edit category screen displays, allowing you to modify details about the category, as well as the content providers and rights associated with it. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117.
Editing a Category To modify a category: 1. From the Name column on the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click a category to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit category screen displays (Figure 6.11 on page 118).
NOTE: The Edit category screen also displays immediately after a new category is
created.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
117
Content Management
Figure 6.11: Edit category Screen — Details Tab
The Edit category screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 116.
• Click Delete to delete the edited category. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 121.
• Click Associated content to view a list of contents published only in the edited category.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify category details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 119.
• Click the Content providers tab to view or modify content providers associated with the category. For more information, see “Using the Content Providers Tab” on page 119.
• Click the Rights tab to manage rights for the edited category. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 120.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
118
Content Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 6.11) allows you to modify the following details of the selected category:
• From the Parent category list, select a new parent category from the list of existing categories.
• In the Name field, change the unique name for the new category. Two categories may have the same name only if they have different parent categories.
• In the Description field, change the category description (optional). • For the Pass on rights option: Choose Yes to automatically transmit rights associated with this category to its child categories. Choose No to associate rights to child categories manually. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Content Providers Tab The Content providers tab on the Edit category screen allows you to assign or add or remove authorized content providers in the edited category.
Figure 6.12: Edit category Screen — Content providers Tab
Adding Providers to a Category To add providers to the category: 1. From the Available providers list, select one or more content providers to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Add.
3
The selected providers redisplay in the Associated providers list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
119
Content Management
Removing Providers From a Category To remove providers from the category: 1. From the Associated providers list, select one or more content providers to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers. 2. Click Remove.
3
The selected providers redisplay in the Available providers list.
Using the Rights Tab The Rights tab on the Edit category screen allows you to define back-office group rights for the edited category. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available.
Figure 6.13: Edit category Screen — Rights Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
120
Content Management
Adding Group Rights From the Rights tab, you can grant or revoke rights to groups for the selected category. For information about managing rights for all categories, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121. To add rights to groups for this category: 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16. 2. From the Groups list, select one or several groups affected by the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights tab.
Revoking Group Rights To remove rights from groups for this category, click the
next to the rights to remove.
Deleting a Category To delete a category: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), check the box next to one or more categories to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all categories. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected categories?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited category by clicking Delete on the Edit category
screen.
Managing Global Category Rights The Rights on categories screen (Figure 6.14) allows you to grant rights to groups affecting ALL categories. To grant rights to groups for a selected category, see “Editing a Category” on page 117. NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights you already have on categories.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
121
Content Management
To manage rights to groups on all categories: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click Rights.
3
The Rights on categories screen displays.
Figure 6.14: Rights on categories Screen
Adding Global Category Rights To add global content category rights to groups: 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected category rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights on categories screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
122
Content Management
Revoking Global Category Rights To remove global category rights from groups: 1. Click the
next to each right to remove.
Using Content Templates Content templates define the type of content managed by Content Manager. Each template includes content version templates which define the different parts of content that can be added. Each version template is associated to handlers that define actions to be applied when content is entered. NOTE: Depending on your software license, you may or may not have access to all of the
templates defined in this section.
Viewing Content Templates To view a list of available templates: 1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Content templates.
3
The Content templates screen displays content templates available.
Figure 6.15: Content templates Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
123
Content Management
The Content templates screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Content template screen, you can perform the following task:
• From the Name column, click a content template name to edit. For more information, see “Editing Content Templates”.
Editing Content Templates To view details about and make changes to a template: 1. From the Content templates screen, click the name of a template to view.
3
The Edit Content template screen displays.
Figure 6.16: Edit content template Screen
Editing a Content Template Version To view details about and make changes to a content version template: 1. From the Edit content template screen, click the name of a content version template.
3
The Edit content version template screen displays (Figure 6.17 on page 125).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
124
Content Management
Figure 6.17: Edit content version template Screen
The Edit content version template screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click the name of a content handler to view. The Edit content handler screen displays details about the content handler. The details displayed here are view-only.
• Click the name of a content validator to edit. The Edit content validator screen displays.
Figure 6.18: Edit content validator Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
125
Content Management NOTE: Constraints provided are different according to the content template and the
content handler. For example, for a content validator of the FILE_SIZE type, the constraints represent the maximum size of the file (in bytes) that can be imported by the content provider. This can be modified.
The following list describes each content type and their associated templates and version templates. MMS_MESSAGE Content template:
• MMS_MESSAGE: A multimedia message delivered without formatting (as is). Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • MMS_POSTCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID MMS_POSTCARD Content template:
• MMS_POSTCARD: A multimedia message downloaded by MMS. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • MMS_POSTCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS Content template:
• Text (SMS): A short text (160 characters) sent using SMS. Content version templates:
• SHORT_TEXT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION (metadata) • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
126
Content Management
SMS_ANIMATION Content template:
• SMS_ANIMATION: An animated logo downloaded by SMS. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_ANIMATION_8_8 • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_BINARY Content template:
• SMS_BINARY: a binary SMS message delivered without formatting (as is). Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_BINARY • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_LOGO_GROUP Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_GROUP: A black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be associated to a contact of the address book. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_GROUP_72_14 • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
127
Content Management
SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE: A black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be forwarded between users. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_16_16 • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_32_32 • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_72_14 • SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR: A black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be used as the default screen background. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_16_16 • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_32_32 • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_72_14 • SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
128
Content Management
SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER: a black and white logo downloaded by SMS that can be used as the phone screensaver. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_16_16 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_32_32 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_72_14 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_72_28 • SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS Message System Content template:
• Text (SMS): A short text (160 characters) that can be sent using SMS. Content version templates:
• SHORT_TEXT: A short text message • TEXT_DESCRIPTION: A short description (metadata)
• CONTENT ID SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC Content template:
• SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC: a monophonic ringtone downloaded by SMS. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
129
Content Management
SMS_VCALENDAR Content template:
• SMS_VCALENDAR: A calendar item formatted on the fly according to recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. It can be stored in the device agenda. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_VCALENDAR • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID SMS_VCARD Content template:
• SMS_VCARD: A contact item formatted on the fly according to recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. It can be stored in the device address book. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • SMS_VCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
130
Content Management
WAP_ANIMATION Content template:
• WAP_ANIMATION: An animated picture downloaded by WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_ANIMATION_101_080 • WAP_ANIMATION_120_160 • WAP_ANIMATION_128_128 • WAP_ANIMATION_128_160 • WAP_ANIMATION_130_130 • WAP_ANIMATION_132_176 • WAP_ANIMATION_176_220 • WAP_ANIMATION_208_320 • WAP_ANIMATION_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_APPLICATION Content template:
• WAP_APPLICATION: A smartphone application downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_APPLICATION_SIS • WAP_APPLICATION_CAB • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
131
Content Management
WAP_BOOKMARK Content template:
• WAP_BOOKMARK: A URL formatted on the fly according to recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. It can be stored in the device WAP favorites list. Content version templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_BOOKMARK • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_FILE Content template:
• WAP_FILE: A file downloaded through WAP, associated to the WAP Push feature. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_FILE • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_JAVA Content template:
• WAP_JAVA: A java application downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_JAVA_JAR • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
132
Content Management
WAP_PICTURE Content template:
• WAP_PICTURE: a full color picture downloaded by WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_PICTURE_101_080 • WAP_PICTURE_120_160 • WAP_PICTURE_128_128 • WAP_PICTURE_128_160 • WAP_PICTURE_130_130 • WAP_PICTURE_132_176 • WAP_PICTURE_176_220 • WAP_PICTURE_208_320 • WAP_PICTURE_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_PUSH Content template:
• WAP_PUSH: A URL formatted on the fly according to the recipient device capabilities before being delivered by SMS. Upon reception, the user is invited to connect directly to the WAP site. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_PUSH • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
133
Content Management
WAP_REALTONE Content template:
• WAP_REALTONE: A sound extract downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_REALTONE_AMR • WAP_REALTONE_AMR-WB • WAP_REALTONE_WAV • WAP_REALTONE_RMF • WAP_REALTONE_MP3 • WAP_REALTONE_AAC • WAP_REALTONE_MPEG • WAP_REALTONE_SMAF • WAP_REALTONE_SP-MIDI • WAP_REALTONE_MIDI • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC Content template:
• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC: A polyphonic ringtone downloaded by WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC_OTHER • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
134
Content Management
WAP_RINGTONE_PREFORMATTED Content template:
• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC: a polyphonic ringtone delivered without formatting (“as is”) by WAP Download. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_REALTONE_RMF • WAP_REALTONE_SMAF • WAP_REALTONE_SP-MIDI • WAP_REALTONE_MIDI • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
135
Content Management
WAP_VIDEO Content template:
• WAP_VIDEO: A video extract downloaded through WAP. Content versions templates:
• PREVIEW • WAP_VIDEO_ MPEG • WAP_ VIDEO_ QUICKTIME • WAP_ VIDEO_ REALMEDIA • WAP_ VIDEO_ AVI • WAP_ VIDEO_ 3GPP • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID Rich Text Content template:
• Rich Text: Multimedia elements that can be sent by SMS or MMS. Content versions templates
• PREVIEW • MMS_POSTCARD • AUTHOR • COPYRIGHT • TEXT_DESCRIPTION • CONTENT ID
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
136
Content Management
Managing Content Contents are downloadable files that can be delivered to handsets. Several versions are available within each content file to match different handset compatibilities. Contents may also have several templates, depending on the type of content. For a complete list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
Viewing Content Only contents meeting one of the following criteria are listed:
• contents were published in at least one parent category on which you have rights • contents were published by a content provider on which you have rights NOTE: A default filter is activated to hide all Deprecated contents.
To view a list of content files: 1. From the Contents menu, select Data > Contents.
3
The Contents > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all contents. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Content” on page 138.
Figure 6.19: Contents Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
137
Content Management
Using the Contents Screen The Contents screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Contents screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a content name to edit. For more information, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
• Click New content to create a new content file. For more information, see “Creating New Content” on page 139.
• Click Delete content to remove all selected content files. This is available only if you have the “Delete” right on the parent category for selected content files. For more information, see “Deleting Content” on page 157.
• Click Clone content to make a copy of the selected content file. For more information, see “Cloning Content” on page 157.
Searching Content The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content specific to that criteria. To manage content filters: 1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click Edit filters.
3
The Contents > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.20: Contents > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
138
Content Management
Creating New Content NOTE: You must have the “publish contents” right on a content provider, and the “add
contents” right on at least one of the categories associated with the content provider.
To create new content: 1. From the Content menu, select Data > New content, or click New content from anywhere on the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137).
3
The New content screen displays.
Figure 6.21: New content Screen
2. From the Content provider list, select a content provider. Only those providers on which you have rights are available. For more information, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15. 3. From the Template list, select a template for the content. Only those templates authorized for the selected provider are available. 4. From the Content categories list, select one or more categories. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. Only categories associated with the content provider are available. NOTE: You must have the “add contents” right on those categories you want to select.
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the content.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
139
Content Management
6. In the Validity start field, enter the date on which to start content validity. By default, the date is equal to the current day’s date. The date format required is YYYY-MM-DD HHMM-SS. For example, 2006-1-31 23:59:59 equals January 31, 2006, 11:59:59 PM. 7. In the Validity end field, enter the date to end content validity. The date format required is YYYY-MM-DD HH-MM-SS. For example, 2006-1-31 23:59:59 equals January 31, 2006, 11:59:59 PM. 8. Select one of the following options from the Status drop-down list:
• Draft — content not ready • Validation pending — content ready, requires validation 9. Enter a short description for the content. This is optional, and is stored as metadata. 10. Click Submit.
3
The Edit content screen displays, allowing you to modify the new content. For more information, see “Editing Content”.
Editing Content NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to view or modify content. For more
information about these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16.
To edit content: 1. From the Name column on the List contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click a content file to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit content screen displays (Figure 6.22 on page 141).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
140
Content Management
Figure 6.22: Edit content Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Content Screen From the Edit content screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New content to create a new content file. For more information about creating a content file, see “Creating New Content” on page 139.
• Click Delete to remove the edited content. For more information about deleting content, see “Deleting Content” on page 157.
• Click Clone content to duplicate a content file. For more information about cloning content, see “Cloning Content” on page 157.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify content details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 142.
• Click the Versions tab to list all versions registered for the content. For more information about viewing versions, see “Using the Versions Tab” on page 143.
• Click the MetaDatas tab to list all metadata registered for the content. For more information about viewing metadata, see “Using the MetaDatas Tab” on page 150.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
141
Content Management
• Click the Compatibilities tab to list all devices compatible with and authorized to use the content. For more information about viewing compatible devices, see “Using the Compatibilities Tab” on page 153.
• Click the Versions coverages tab to view all version compatibilities associated with the content. For more information about viewing version compatibilities, see “Using the Versions Coverages Tab” on page 156.
Using the Details Tab NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify content. For more information, see
“Content Category Rights” on page 16.
The Details tab on the Edit content screen displays the following details of an existing content file:
• Template — The content template information (cannot be modified). For a complete list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Content provider — The content provider information (cannot be modified). • Content categories — Select one or more parent categories associated with the content provider. NOTE: You can only select from categories on which you have the “update content”
and “add content” rights.
• Name — The content name (can be modified). • Validity start — The beginning date for content validity (can be modified). NOTE: You cannot modify content validity if the content status is “Published”.
• Validity end (optional) — The end date for content validity (can be modified). NOTE: You cannot modify content validity if the content status is “Published”.
• Status — The content status. Status options include: • Draft — Content is currently being edited; cannot be downloaded • Validation pending — Content is ready for validation; at least one content version is attached and listed as “validated”
• Published — Content and its validation versions can be downloaded NOTE: You can select this status only if you have the “validate contents” right on all
of the content’s parent categories and if at least one content version is published for the content.
• Deprecated — Content was cancelled and cannot be modified NOTE: You can select this status only if you have the “delete contents” right on all
selected categories.
Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
142
Content Management
3
The changes are validated. You may validate contents only if you have the “validate content” right on all content parent categories and if at least one content version is published.
Using the Versions Tab The Versions tab displays all content version associated to the edited content. Content versions are variations of the same content optimized for different devices. As such, there can be only one published version of the same content per device.
Figure 6.23: Edit contents Screen — Versions Tab
The Versions tab displays the following information:
• Name — the name of the content version. Click the name to edit the selected version. For more information about editing content versions, see “Editing a Content Version” on page 147.
• Content version template — the name of the content version template. For a complete list of content templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Preview — a preview of the content (if available). • Language — the language of the content version. • Status — the status of the content version. Possible values include the following: • Draft — content version is currently being edited • Not validated — content version is ready for validation • Published — content version is validated NOTE: This is selected automatically whenever the content is to be downloaded on
one of the compatible devices listed. These devices cannot be selected for another version.
• Deprecated — content version was cancelled • Creation date — the date on which the content version was created. • Last modification — the date on which the content version was last modified. • Author — the name of the back-office account that created this content version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
143
Content Management
In addition to the functions available on the Edit content screen, the Versions tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New content version to create a new version of the content. For more information, see “Adding Content Versions” on page 144.
• Click Delete content version to remove selected content version. For more information, see “Deleting Content Versions” on page 149. Adding Content Versions NOTE: You must have the “add content version” right granted to at least one of the
content’s parent categories in order to add a new content version.
To add a new content version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit content screen (Figure 6.23 on page 143), click New content version.
3
The Add content version screen displays.
Figure 6.24: Add content version Screen
2. From the Content version template list, select a content version template to use for the content version. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the content version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
144
Content Management
4. From the Status list, select a status for the content version. Status options include the following:
• Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled 5. From the Language list, select a language for the content version. 6. For the External content option, if the binary data is stored on an external system, select Yes. Select No to upload the data and store it on the Content Manager server. The following information is required for external content:
• External content data system — the content system used to store the content. • Fetch mode — the method by which content is retrieved. If On create is selected, the content is retrieved from the remote service and stored in Content Manager. If On delivery is selected, the content is retrieved only when it needs to be delivered.
• URL — the URL to the location of the content. If you are uploading a file, select the Mime type (format of the file) that you are uploading. NOTE: Content Manager verifies that the file extension matches the selected Mime type
before uploading the content. Content Manager then associates the uploaded file to the selected Mime type and transmits it to the receiving device. For a list of available Mime types and associated file extensions, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
For short SMS, Rich Text, and SMS Message System templates, enter some short or long text. NOTE: For short text, make sure the text to be sent is not more than 160 characters long
(70 characters in Arabic language).
The following table describes variables can be used in short and long text messages and will be replaced by information retrieved from the user account: User Information
Variable
First Name
$firstName
User’s first name
Last Name
$lastName
User’s last name
Language
$language
Address
$address
Alias
$alias
City
$city
Country
$country
State
$countryState
Password
$password
Zip Code
$zipCode
Copyright 2006
Description
User’s preferred language User’s address User’s alias User’s home city User’s home country User’s home state User’s password User’s zip code
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
145
Content Management User Information
Variable
Billing Type
$billingType
Description
Device Brand
$deviceBrand
Brand of device associated with the user’s address
Device Model
$deviceModel
Model of device associated with the user’s address
Subscribed service
$subservice
User’s billing type: prepaid/postpaid
Service the user tries to subscribe to or unsubscribe from (SMS Message System template only)
7. Click Submit when finished. NOTE: When defining your content version, you can also enter a script to generate the
message content. The script is compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/velocity/user-guide.html.
Script Sample #1. This example can be included in the short content form to personalize the content using the user’s first and last name. ##If the user first and last name are available #if($firstName && $lastName) Welcome $firstName $lastName. #end Script Sample #2. This example uses a rule to personalize the content according to the preferred language of the user. ##If the user’s preferred language is French #if(language==”fr”) ##If the user first and last name is available #if($firstName && $lastName) Bienvenue $firstName $lastName. #end ##Otherwise, if the user’s preferred language is not French #else ##If the user’s first and last name is available #if($firstName && $lastName) Welcome $firstName $lastName. #end #end Script Sample #3. This example uses a rule to add device information to the content. ##If the user’s device information is available #if($deviceBrand && $deviceModel) Your mobile: $deviceBrand $deviceModel. ##Otherwise, if the user device is not known #else Your mobile is unknown #end
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
146
Content Management
Editing a Content Version To edit a content version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit content screen (Figure 6.23 on page 143), click a content version name from the Name column.
3
The Edit content version screen displays.
Figure 6.25: Edit content version Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify the following content version information as needed: NOTE: The information displayed on the Edit content version screen may vary
depending on the content version template used.
• Content version template — The template used for the content version (cannot be modified). For a complete list of content version templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Content name — The name of the content version. • Status — The status of the content version. Status options include the following: • Draft — content version is currently being edited • Not validated — content version is ready for validation • Published — content version is validated • Deprecated — content version was cancelled
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
147
Content Management
• Language — The content version language (cannot be modified if a device is associated).
• External content — Indicates whether the content binary data is stored on an external system (Yes) or already uploaded to Content Manager (No). This cannot be modified). If the content is stored externally, the following information is displayed:
• External content data system — the content system used to store the content. • Fetch mode — the method by which content is retrieved. If On create is selected, the content is retrieved from the remote service and stored in Content Manager. If On delivery is selected, the content is retrieved only when it needs to be delivered.
• URL — the URL to the location of the content. • Mime type — The Mime type (format of the file). NOTE: Content Manager verifies that the file extension matches the selected Mime
type before uploading the content. Content Manager then associates the uploaded file to the selected Mime type and transmits it to the receiving device. For a list of available Mime types and associated file extensions, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
Managing Compatible Devices for a Content Version In previous versions of Content Manager, compatibility was managed at the device level. Content Manager 2.1 allows you to associate content versions with device profiles, enabling you to associate the same device with several different versions corresponding to different profiles. To manage devices compatible with the content version: 1. From the Edit content version screen (Figure 6.25 on page 147), click the Compatibilities tab.
3
The Compatibilities tab displays.
Figure 6.26: Edit content version Screen — Compatibilities Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
148
Content Management
2. Define the devices to list by selecting from the criteria described below. A list of device profiles matching the criteria selected displays on the right side of the tab. Device profiles are ranked by brand/manufacturer.
• Selected features — Select the device feature compatible with the content version template. You can associate each device to the content version for SMS features, MMS features, or both. NOTE: Currently, the RICH template is the only template compatible with multiple
features.
• Selected brands — Select one or more brands to include in the device list. Only those devices attached to selected brands that are compatible with selected features are listed.
• Inherited device profiles — Specify whether or not to associate and select device profiles from which the content version inherits information.
• Hide unavailable device profiles — If selected, only those devices not associated to any content version are listed.
• Click Show device profiles to view and select profiles available for the edited content version. NOTE: From the list of device profiles, Checked profiles are listed as compatible and
authorized with the content version by the provider. Unchecked profiles are compatible with the content version, but are not listed as “authorized” and cannot receive the content version. Device profiles marked with a are already listed as compatible with another validated version for the same content, and cannot be selected as authorized with the current version. Click the icon to edit the content version already associated with the device profile.
• Set version as default for selected device feature — If checked, all new device profiles compatible with the content version template will be associated to this version. Deleting Content Versions NOTE: You must have the “delete content version” right in order to delete a content
version. If the version status is “published”, all associated devices can then be associated to other content versions and the status will be set as “deprecated”. If the version was not validated, it is directly deleted. The content version cannot be deleted if it is the last published version available for the parent content.
To delete a content version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit contents screen, check the box next to the each version to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions. 2. Click Delete content version.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected content versions?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
149
Content Management
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited content versions by clicking Delete on the Edit content
version screen.
Using the MetaDatas Tab The MetaDatas tab allows you to view all metadata associated with the content. Metadata represents information that can be added to the content, but will not be used for download. To view metadata related to the selected content: 1. From the Edit content screen, click the MetaDatas tab.
3
The MetaDatas tab displays.
Figure 6.27: Edit content Screen — MetaDatas Tab
The MetaDatas tab on the Edit content screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the metadata. Click a name to edit the metadata. For more information, see “Editing Metadata” on page 152.
• Preview — A preview of the metadata (if available). • Content version template — The name of the content version template. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Language — The language of the metadata. • Status — The status of the metadata. Possible values include the following: • Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled • Creation date — The date on which the metadata was created. • Last modification date— The date on which the metadata was last modified. • Author — The name of the back-office account that created this metadata. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
150
Content Management
In addition to the functions available on the Edit content screen, the MetaDatas tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New meta data to create new metadata for the content. For more information, see “Adding Metadata” on page 151.
• Click Delete meta data to remove the selected metadata. For more information, see “Deleting Metadata” on page 153. Adding Metadata To add metadata to content: 1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit content screen, click New meta data.
3
The Add Meta data screen displays.
Figure 6.28: Add meta data Screen
2. From the Content version template list, select a template for the content version. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the metadata. 4. From the Status list, select one of the following status options:
• Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled 5. From the Language list, select a language for the metadata. 6. In the Description field, enter a short description of the metadata (optional).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
151
Content Management NOTE: Other details available depend upon the type of content metadata created.
7. Click Submit.
3
The Edit meta data screen displays. For more information about editing meta data, see “Editing Metadata” on page 152.
Editing Metadata To edit existing metadata: 1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit contents screen, click the name of the metadata to modify.
3
The Edit meta data screen displays.
Figure 6.29: Edit meta data Screen
2. Make changes to the following as necessary:
• Content version template — cannot be modified • Content name — the name of the metadata • Status — the status of the metadata; status options include the following: • Draft — metadata is currently being edited • Not validated — metadata is ready for validation • Published — metadata is validated • Deprecated — metadata was cancelled • Language — the language of the metadata Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
152
Content Management
• Description — a short description of the metadata NOTE: If a preview file was uploaded, you can browse, locate, and upload a new preview
file for the metadata.
3. Click Submit to save any changes. Deleting Metadata To delete metadata: 1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit contents screen, select the metadata to remove and click Delete meta data.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected meta datas?” displays.
2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete on the Edit meta data
screen.
Using the Compatibilities Tab The Compatibilities tab allows you to view all devices compatible with the edited content. Both devices that are associated to a version and those that are not associated to a version are listed here.
Figure 6.30: Edit content Screen — Compatibilities Tab
1. Select the criteria by which to display devices. Criteria available includes the following:
• Language — Select the language assigned to the device profile.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
153
Content Management
• Device feature — Select the feature compatible with the content template. Only those devices compatible with the template and this feature are displayed.
• Selected brands — Select one or more device brands. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. Only those devices that are attached to these brands and are compatible with the selected feature are displayed. 2. Select the method of display. Methods include the following:
• Show all device profiles (compatible or not): Show all devices available in the device repository
• Show all compatible device profiles: Show only devices compatible with the content template and selected feature
• Show only assigned device profiles: Show only the devices currently associated to a content version
• Show only unassigned compatible device profiles: Show only devices compatible with the content template and selected feature. and not associated to a content version
• Show not compatible device profiles: Show only devices not compatible with the content template and selected feature 3. Click Show device profiles when finished.
3
A list of device profiles organized by brand/model displays at the bottom of the Compatibilities tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
154
Content Management
Figure 6.31: Edit content Screen — Compatibilities Tab (With Results) NOTE: Devices marked with an arrow are already listed as compatible with a content
version for this content.
Devices marked with a checkbox are compatible with the content template and selected feature, but are not associated to any content version. Devices in grey are not compatible with the content template and selected feature. If a default version is available, click the default version to edit. For more information about editing versions, see “Editing a Content Version” on page 147.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
155
Content Management
Using the Versions Coverages Tab The Versions coverages tab on the Edit content screen allows you to list all versions and their compatible devices.
Figure 6.32: Edit content Screen — Versions coverages Tab
1. From the Versions coverages tab, define the following criteria for your version coverage search:
• Device brand • Device model • Device profile (inherited or not) • The method by which to display search results. Options include: • Show all versions coverage — show all missing content versions, associated • • •
content versions, and incompatible content versions Show missing coverages — show only missing content versions for the device Show existing coverages — show only content versions associated with the device Show incompatible features — show only features that are not available for the device
2. Click Show versions.
3
A list of related versions displays at the bottom of the Versions coverages tab (Figure 6.33 on page 157).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
156
Content Management
Figure 6.33: Edit content Screen — Versions coverages Tab (With Results)
Cloning Content To duplicate a content file or group of files: 1. From the Content screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), check the box next to each content file to duplicate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all content files. 2. Click Clone content.
3
The newly copied content files are listed in the list of content files.
NOTE: You can also clone an edited content file by clicking Clone content on the Edit
content screen. For more information about editing content, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
Deleting Content To delete content: NOTE: You must have the “delete content” right in order to delete content. If the version
status is “published”, the content status is set as “deprecated”. If the content was not validated, it is directly deleted.
1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), check the box next to each content file to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all content files. 2. Click Delete content. 3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete this content?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
157
Content Management
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited content by clicking Delete on the Edit content screen.
Importing Bulk Contents A bulk import operation is a process in which several content bundles are imported at one time. To view a list of all bulk import processes on the content database: 1. From the Content menu, select Import contents > Bulk process.
3
The Bulk process screen displays listing all previously established bulk import processes.
Figure 6.34: Bulk process Screen
If there are existing processes on the system, the Bulk process screen displays the following information:
• ID — The identifier of the bulk operation. • Sequence type — The sequence type associated with the process. • Status — The status of the process: pending (not yet started), processing, processing wait, done, or paused.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
158
Content Management
• Time created — The time at which the process was started. • Time finished — The time at which the process was completed. Using the Bulk Process Screen The Bulk process screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bulk process screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a process to access. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Process” on page 164.
• Click Create process to create a new process. For more information, see “Creating a Process” on page 160.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove ALL past bulk process reports. For more information, see “Deleting a Bulk Process” on page 164.
Searching Import Processes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of import processes specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Bulk process screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Bulk process > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.35: Bulk process > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
159
Content Management
Starting a Bulk Import Process Before you can start a new process, you must first upload the content. Content files used for bulk import processes must be imported on the platform in the directory defined during system setup.
Understanding Content.csv Files The report.csv file is a report that is generated after a process is run. The file is formatted as follows: one line per imported file using a column structure separated by semicolons (;). Criteria
Type
Description
Example Logo1_12.gif
Required?
Filename
String
Exact name of the file to be imported. This file must be in the same directory as the CSV file.
Mimetype
String
The Mime type of the imported file, for WAP and image/gif MMS content. If empty, Content Manager uses the default Mime type associated with the imported file.
Content Name
String
Name of the content and content version. If empty, the filename (without the extension) is used.
Content Provider Name
String
Name of the content provider. If the content pro- cp vider does not exist, a name is automatically created.
Yes
Categories
String
Categories to which the content should be asso- Favorites|New ciated, separated by “|”. If categories do not exist, they are created automatically.
Yes
Content bundle type
String
Content template
Yes
Content type
String
Content version template. If empty, the template WAP Picture is deduced from the content template. 101x80px
No
Status
String
OK — File was imported. KO — An error occurred.
KO
N/A
Reason
String
A description of the error that occurred if the process status is KO.
Invalid file type
N/A
Logo
WAP_PICTURE
Yes No
No
Creating a Process NOTE: You must have rights over bulk processes in order to create a bulk import process.
For more information, see “Tracking Rights” on page 19.
To create a new process: 1. Click Create process from the Bulk process screen.
3
The Bulk operation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 6.36 on page 161).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
160
Content Management
Figure 6.36: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk operation Tab
2. From the Action type list, select the action to be performed during the process. 3. Check the Publish content box to indicate whether to automatically set the status of the imported content to “published”. 4. Check the Publish content version box to indicate whether you want the status of the imported content versions automatically set to “published”. 5. Select one or more of the following options to apply to existing content:
• Skip — existing content will not be modified • Update — existing content will be updated in whole or part, depending on the following options:
• Binary file — content binary files will be updated • Compatible devices — the list of compatible devices will be updated 6. From the Content provider list, select the content provider to automatically associate to the new content. 7. Click Next.
3
The Targets tab displays (Figure 6.37 on page 162).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
161
Content Management
Figure 6.37: The Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
8. From the Target type list, select the method by which targets should be selected:
• Select ZIP on server folder — uploads content stored in a ZIP file on the Content Manager server. The file must be stored on the import directory defined during implementation. NOTE: If you select this option, you will have the option to select a ZIP file from a
list of files stored in the Content Manager database.
• Upload ZIP — uploads a ZIP file stored locally using the web browser. NOTE: If you select this option, you must enter the full file path to the file to
upload. Click Browse to locate the file on a local drive.
9. Click Next.
3
The Bulk flow control strategy tab displays.
Figure 6.38: The Create bulk process Screen — Bulk flow control strategy Tab
10. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed according to the workflow strategy defined here. 11. Click Next.
3
The Timeslots tab displays (Figure 6.39 on page 163).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
162
Content Management
Figure 6.39: The Create bulk process Screen — Timeslots Tab
12. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 13. Click Add timeslot.
3
A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen. NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the
next
to each timeslot to remove. 14. Click Next.
3
The Confirmation tab displays.
15. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit.
3
When the process is complete, all imported contents are moved to a new folder containing a file called “report.csv”. This file is generated containing a list of all contents that were imported successfully. For information regarding .csv file formats, see “Understanding Content.csv Files” on page 160.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
163
Content Management
Accessing a Bulk Process To view, start, or stop a process: 1. From the Id column on the Bulk process screen (Figure 6.34 on page 158), click the process ID to access.
3
The Details tab on the Edit bulk process screen displays. NOTE: The information displayed both the Details and Timeslots tabs on the Edit
bulk process screen is view-only.
2. To start, pause, or stop the selected process, click Start process, Pause process, or Stop process at the top of the Edit bulk process screen.
Deleting a Bulk Process To delete a bulk process: 1. From the Bulk process screen (Figure 6.34 on page 158), check the box next to one or several processes to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all processes. 2. Click Purge bulk processes.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes purge.” displays.
3. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void the purge.
Using Zip Files This section provides information regarding the use of .zip files and .xml files with Content Manager.
Algorithms of Zip File Processing There are two cases in which Content Manager manages ZIP file processing:
• Selecting a .zip file on the server: the .zip file is hosted by the server, and the bulk process retrieves and processes it to import the file’s content to Content Manager.
• Uploading a .zip file on the server using a web browser from a client computer: the .zip file is uploaded to the server, and the bulk process retrieves and processes it to import the file’s content to Content Manager.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
164
Content Management
Selecting a Zip File The .zip file must be transferred by an external system, using FTP for example, and stored in the following directory: ..\web\WEB-INF\scc\domains\bulkcontentcreation\contentProviderBaseDirectory\{content provider name}\
Uploading a Zip File Content Manager can manage transfer and storage of .zip files. The selected .zip file is uploaded to the directory corresponding to the selected content provider, and stored with the current date in the file name.
Zip File Structure and XML Files A .zip file contains one .xml file for each content bundle. If content data is not included, and the external content system is not defined in the .xml file, the archive can contain data files as well. NOTE: You can find sample .zip files in the Content Manager pack in the
..\sample\bulkcreation\ directory.
Understanding XML Files There are several ways XML files are used in .zip files containing content:
• XML files with included content data • XML files with external file content • XML files using an external content system XML Files Containing Content Data
Each .xml file corresponds to a content bundle. The .xml file defines the name, author, start date of validity, and type of content bundle (the content bundle’s type ID is defined within the content). For example:
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
165
Content Management
A content bundle corresponds to at least one category. The full name of the associated category is listed. For example:
If the content bundle is to be referenced by keywords, the keywords must be listed. For example:
The file must define all content versions associated to the content bundle. For example:
Each content version is defined by a name, a content type (the content type ID is defined within the content), and a status (Draft, Published, or Deprecated).
A content version can also be a content bundle metadata. For example: <metadata>false
The data can be defined directly in an .xml file, with a file included in a .zip file, or using an URL with external content. In this example, a content data is defined in an .xml file using 64bit encoding. A content data is defined by the corresponding java class. NOTE: These java class names are defined in a separate .xml file: ..\web\WEB-INF\scc\domains\bulkcontentcreation\conf\XSTREAM_ClassToName.xml
The contentData is defined by a PictureContentData class which contains a MimeData class. A MimeData class is defined by a file name, a mimetype and data.
Because there is not any external content, the externalmode value is NONE. <externalmode>NONE
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
166
Content Management
Each content is compatible with device models which are defined by an ID defined in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB) archive. <devicecompatibilities>
XML Files and External File Content
In this example, the data is not included in .xml file, but the data is created by a data file contained in the same .zip file. The file name of this data file is present in the .xml file.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
167
Content Management
Because the data is stored on the server, the externalmode value is NONE. <externalmode>NONE <devicecompatibilities>
XML Files and an External Content System
Because external content data is used, the external mode is now set to either CREATE or DELIVERY. The CREATE mode uploads data files when the content is created, while the DELIVERY mode uploads data files when the content is sent. <externalmode>CREATE
The external content system manages the upload mode according to specific parameters. There is one external content system plug-in which uses a URL to upload data. In this example, the type of external content system is URL. <externalsystemtype>URL
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
168
Content Management
Parameters used by this external content system are referenced in the URLExternalContentDataSystemParam class file which contains a URL. <externalsystemparam class="URLEXTERNALCONTENTDATASYSTEMPARAM">
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
169
7
Device Management
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Devices by Brand .................................................................................... Searching Devices by Brand.................................................................................... Creating a Brand ................................................................................................... Editing a Brand ..................................................................................................... Deleting a Brand ................................................................................................... Activating a Brand ................................................................................................. Deactivating a Brand.............................................................................................. Managing Devices by Model .................................................................................... Searching Devices by Model.................................................................................... Creating a Device .................................................................................................. Editing a Device .................................................................................................... Deleting a Device .................................................................................................. Activating Devices ................................................................................................. Deactivating Devices.............................................................................................. Managing Features ................................................................................................ Searching Features ................................................................................................ Creating a Feature................................................................................................. Editing a Feature ................................................................................................... Deleting a Feature ................................................................................................. Activating Features ................................................................................................ Deactivating Features ............................................................................................ Managing Capability Groups.................................................................................... Viewing Capability Groups ...................................................................................... Searching Capability Groups ................................................................................... Editing a Capability Group ...................................................................................... Creating a Capability Group .................................................................................... Deleting a Capability Group .................................................................................... Managing Capability Group Handlers ........................................................................ Viewing Capability Group Handlers........................................................................... Searching Capability Group Handlers........................................................................ Creating a Capability Group Handler ........................................................................ Editing a Capability Group Handler........................................................................... Deleting a Capability Group Handler......................................................................... Managing Formatting Tokens................................................................................... Viewing Formatting Tokens ..................................................................................... Searching Formatting Tokens .................................................................................. Editing a Formatting Token ..................................................................................... Creating a Formatting Token ................................................................................... Deleting a Formatting Token ................................................................................... Managing Device Detection Rules ............................................................................ Viewing Detection Rules ......................................................................................... Searching Detection Rules ...................................................................................... Editing a Detection Rule ......................................................................................... Creating a Detection Rule ....................................................................................... Deleting a Detection Rule ....................................................................................... Managing Device Detection Sets ..............................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
172 173 174 174 177 177 177 178 179 180 180 194 194 194 195 196 197 197 200 200 200 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 206 207 207 208 211 212 212 213 213 216 218 218 218 219 220 222 223 224
170
Device Management Viewing Detection Sets........................................................................................... Using the Detection Tool......................................................................................... Managing Device Application Types .......................................................................... Viewing Device Application Types............................................................................. Searching Device Application Types.......................................................................... Editing a Device Application Type............................................................................. Creating a Device Application Type .......................................................................... Deleting a Device Application Type........................................................................... Activating Device Application Types.......................................................................... Deactivating Device Application Types ...................................................................... Managing Device Applications ................................................................................. Viewing Device Applications .................................................................................... Searching Device Applications ................................................................................. Editing a Device Application .................................................................................... Creating a Device Application .................................................................................. Deleting a Device Application .................................................................................. Activating Device Applications ................................................................................. Deactivating Device Applications.............................................................................. Managing Device Application Versions ...................................................................... Viewing Device Application Versions ......................................................................... Searching Device Application Versions ...................................................................... Editing a Device Application Version ......................................................................... Creating a Device Application Version....................................................................... Deleting a Device Application Version ....................................................................... Activating Device Application Versions ...................................................................... Deactivating Device Application Versions .................................................................. Managing Formatting Systems ................................................................................ Viewing Formatting Systems ................................................................................... Searching Formatting Systems ................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
224 225 226 226 228 228 230 231 231 231 232 232 233 233 236 237 238 238 238 238 240 240 243 244 244 244 245 245 245
171
Device Management
The Device menu allows you to manage devices and features, as well as information stored in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). This chapter describes the device management portions of the Device menu. For information about using the Device menu to manage device repository and DKB information, see Chapter 8, “DKB Management” on page 247. NOTE: The menu is available only if you are a member of an authorized group.
Managing Devices by Brand To manage devices by brand: 1. From the Device menu, select Models > Brands.
3
The Brands > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Brands screen displays a list of all device brands. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Brand” on page 173.
Figure 7.1: Brands Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
172
Device Management
The Brands screen displays the following information:
• Name — Click on a brand name to modify the selected brand. For more information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Brand Id — The brand’s identification number. • Status — The brand status: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Creation Date — The date on which the brand was added to the database. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device brand. • Associated Devices — The number of devices associated with the brand. Using the Brands Screen The Brands screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the brands screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a brand to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Click New Brand to create a new brand. For more information, see “Creating a Brand” on page 174.
• Click Delete to delete selected brands. For more information, see “Deleting a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive brands. For more information, see “Activating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active brands. For more information, see “Deactivating a Brand” on page 177.
Searching Devices by Brand The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of devices specific to that criteria. To manage device filters: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), click Edit filters.
3
The Brands > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.2 on page 174).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
173
Device Management
Figure 7.2: Brands > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Brand NOTE: The New brand function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a brand, you
must have the appropriate rights, and a master trust source must be available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Brand NOTE: To modify brand information, you must have the appropriate rights. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a brand: 1. From the Brands screen, click the brand name of a device to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit brand screen displays (Figure 7.3 on page 175).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
174
Device Management
Figure 7.3: Edit brand Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit device screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New Brand to create a new brand. For more information, see “Creating a Brand” on page 174.
• Click Delete to delete the edited brand. For more information, see “Deleting a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Activate to activate the edited brand. For more information, see “Activating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited brand. For more information, see “Deactivating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Associated devices to view a list of devices associated to the edited brand only. Fore more information, see “Using the Devices Screen” on page 179.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify brand details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 175.
• Click the Aliases tab to add or remove aliases associated with the brand. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit brand screen (Figure 7.3 on page 175) allows you to view or modify the following details of an existing brand:
• Status — The status of the brand: Active (contracted) or Inactive (not contracted). This cannot be modified.
• Brand Id — The brand’s identification number. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
175
Device Management
• Name — The name of the brand. This is used on both front and back-office interfaces. • Picture — This picture is used to help both front-office and back-office users identify their device. Click Browse to locate a different picture file to represent the device. To restore the default picture, click Restore default picture.
• DKB version — An identifier that helps identify when the brand was added to the database.
• Creation date — The date on which the brand was added to the database (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the brand was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Aliases Tab The Aliases tab on the Edit brand screen allows you to add or remove aliases associated with the edited brand. NOTE: By default, a one-letter alias is automatically generated by Content Manager. DO
NOT REMOVE THE DEFAULT ALIAS.
Figure 7.4: Edit brand Screen — Aliases Tab
Adding an Alias to a Device To add an alias: 1. In the Alias field, enter a new unique alias (a name or short description). No two device brands can have the same alias. 2. Click Add.
3
The newly added alias displays in a list of aliases on the Aliases tab.
Removing an Alias from a Device To remove an alias, click Remove next to the alias to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
176
Device Management
Deleting a Brand NOTE: If a selected brand comes from a trust source archive, it is not deleted, but rather
passed in a deprecated state.
To delete a brand: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. NOTE: You can also delete an edited brand by clicking Delete on the Edit brand screen.
2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Activating a Brand To activate a brand: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. Only those brands that are currently inactive are modified. NOTE: The Activate function is also available for edited brands on the Edit brand screen.
2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation.
Deactivating a Brand To deactivate a brand: 1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. Only those brands that are currently active are modified. NOTE: The Deactivate function is also available for edited brands on the Edit brand
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
177
Device Management
2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Managing Devices by Model To view a list of available devices by model: 1. From the Device menu, select Models > Devices.
3
The Devices > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of devices. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Model” on page 179.
3
The Devices screen displays.
Figure 7.5: Devices Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
178
Device Management
Using the Devices Screen The Devices screen displays the following information:
• Model — The model name of the device. Click on a model name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Brand — The brand name of the device. • Terminal Id — The terminal ID associated with the device. • Status — The status of the device: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Added By — The first DKB version to include the device. The Devices screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Devices screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Model column, click a device to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Click New device to create a new device. For more information, see “Creating a Device” on page 180.
• Click Delete to delete selected devices. For more information, see “Deleting a Device” on page 194.
• Click Activate to activate selected devices. For more information, see “Activating Devices” on page 194. Only those devices not currently active are modified.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate all selected devices. For more information, see “Deactivating Devices” on page 194. Only those devices currently active are modified.
• Click Rights to manage rights associated with the device. For more information, see “Managing Device and DKB Rights” on page 297.
Searching Devices by Model The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of devices specific to that criteria. To manage device filters: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), click Edit filters.
3
The Devices > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.6 on page 180).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
179
Device Management
Figure 7.6: Devices > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Device NOTE: The New device function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a device, you
must have the appropriate rights, and a master trust source must be available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Device NOTE: To modify device information, you must have the appropriate rights. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), click the model name of a device to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.7 on page 181).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
180
Device Management
Figure 7.7: Edit device Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Screen From the Edit device screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab to view or modify device details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 182.
• Click the Aliases tab to add or remove aliases associated with the device. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182.
• Click the IMEI Ranges tab to define IMEI ranges for the device. For more information about defining IMEI ranges, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183.
• Click the User Agents tab to view all user agent profiles associated to the device. For more information about viewing user agents, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 187.
• Click the Device profiles tab to view all device profiles associated to the device. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Tab” on page 191.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
181
Device Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.7 on page 181) allows you to view or modify the following details of an existing content file:
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated (deleted and waiting to be purged). This cannot be modified.
• Terminal ID — A unique number assigned by a system administrator that identifies the handset device for administrative purposes (for example, adding, editing, or deleting handsets). This cannot be modified.
• Name — The device name used for both front-office and back-office users. This field can be modified. To restore the default name, click Restore default name.
• Brand — The brand of device. To edit the brand, click the brand name. For more information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Picture — This picture is used to help both front-office and back-office users identify their device. Click Browse to locate a different picture file to represent the device. To restore the default picture, click Restore default picture.
• DKB version — An identifier that helps identify when the device was added to Content Manager. If the device was added manually, the identifier reads Manually added.
• Comment — A short comment regarding the device (optional). • Created Date — The date on which the device was added to Content Manager. • Last modification date — The date on which the device was last modified. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Aliases Tab In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the Aliases tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage the aliases associated to the edited device. These aliases help users identify their device.
Figure 7.8: Edit device Screen — Aliases Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
182
Device Management
Adding an Alias to a Device To add an alias: 1. In the Alias field, enter a new unique alias (a name or short description). No two devices can have the same alias. 2. Click Add.
3
The newly added alias displays in a list of aliases on the Aliases tab.
Removing an Alias From a Device To remove an alias, click Remove next to the alias to remove.
Using the IMEI Ranges Tab The IMEI Ranges tab on the Edit device screen allows you to define IMEI ranges for the edited device. The IMEI Ranges tab displays the following information:
• TAC — The Type Approval Code. This consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI that identifies the device. Click a TAC to edit the associated IMEI range. For more information, see “Editing an IMEI Range” on page 184.
• Serial Begin — The beginning of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Serial End — The end of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Status — The IMEI range status: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range. In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the IMEI ranges tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New IMEI range to create an IMEI range for the device. For more information, see “Creating an IMEI Range” on page 185.
• Click Delete IMEI range to delete selected ranges. For more information, see “Deleting an IMEI Range” on page 186.
• Click Activate IMEI range to activate selected ranges. For more information, see “Activating an IMEI Range” on page 186.
• Click Deactivate IMEI range to deactivate selected ranges. For more information, see “Deactivating an IMEI Range” on page 186.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
183
Device Management
Editing an IMEI Range To edit an IMEI range: 1. Click an item from the TAC column to edit.
3
The Edit device > Edit IMEI Range screen displays.
Figure 7.9: Edit device > Edit IMEI Range Screen
2. Make changes to the following information as necessary:
• Tac — Type Approval Code. The TAC consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI number and is used to identify the device.
• Serial Begin — The beginning number of the serial number range. • Serial End — The end number of the serial number range. • Brand — The brand name of the device. • Model — The model name of the device. • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range (cannot be modified). • Creation date — The date on which the IMEI range was created. • Last modification date — The date on which the IMEI range was last modified (updated automatically). 3. Click Submit when finished.
3
The IMEI ranges screen displays, allowing you to view a complete list or set up a filter to search for existing IMEI ranges. For more information about viewing IMEI ranges, see “Managing Devices By IMEI Range” on page 249.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
184
Device Management
Creating an IMEI Range To create a new IMEI range for the edited device: 1. From the IMEI Ranges screen, click New IMEI range.
3
The New IMEI range screen displays.
Figure 7.10: New IMEI range Screen
2. From the Brand list, select the device brand for the IMEI range. 3. From the Model list, select the device model for the IMEI range. 4. In the Tac field, enter the Type Approval Code. The TAC consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI number and is used to identify the device. 5. In the Serial Begin field, enter the beginning number of the serial number range. 6. In the Serial End field, enter the end number of the serial number range. 7. Select whether to keep the existing TAC (if detected) or replace it with the new TAC. 8. From the Trust source list, select the certified source of the IMEI range. 9. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the IMEI range. 10. Click Submit.
3
The IMEI ranges screen displays, allowing you to view a complete list or set up a filter to search for existing IMEI ranges. For more information about viewing IMEI ranges, see “Managing Devices By IMEI Range” on page 249.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
185
Device Management
Deleting an IMEI Range To delete an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each IMEI range to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all ranges. 2. Click Delete IMEI range.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. Activating an IMEI Range To activate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI range tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each inactive IMEI range to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive ranges. 2. Click Activate IMEI range.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. Deactivating an IMEI Range To deactivate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI range tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each active IMEI range to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active ranges. 2. Click Deactivate IMEI range.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
186
Device Management
Using the User Agents Tab The User agents tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage user agents associated with the selected device.
Figure 7.11: Edit device Screen — User agents Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the User agents tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click an agent from the User agent column to view or modify. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
• Click New User Agent to create a new user agent. For more information, see “Creating a New User Agent” on page 189.
• Click Delete User Agent to delete selected agents. For more information, see “Deleting a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Activate User Agent to activate selected user agents. For more information, see “Activating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Deactivate User Agent to deactivate selected user agents. For more information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 190. Editing a User Agent To view or modify an existing user agent on a device: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187), click on the name of a user agent from the User agent column to edit.
3
The Edit user agent screen displays (Figure 7.12 on page 188).
NOTE: The Edit user agent screen also displays after searching for and editing a user
agent. For more information, see “Managing Devices by User Agent” on page 253.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
187
Device Management
Figure 7.12: Edit user agent Screen
The Edit user agent screen allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The user agent status (cannot be modified). • User agent — The name of the user agent. • Brand — The device brand with which the agent is associated. • Model — The device model with which the agent is associated. • Device profile — The device profile with which the agent is associated. • Resolved — Indicates whether the user agent is resolved. • Defined as default — Indicates whether the selected user agent is the default. • Application — The device application for the user agent. • Application version — The device application version for the user agent. • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the user agent (cannot be modified). • Creation date — The date on which the user agent was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the user agent was last modified (updated automatically).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
188
Device Management
The Edit user agent screen also allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete User Agent to delete the edited user agent. For more information, see “Deleting a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Activate User Agent to activate the edited user agent. For more information, see “Activating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Deactivate User Agent to deactivate the edited user agent. For more information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Edit associated model to return to the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187). Creating a New User Agent To create a new user agent for a device: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187), click New user agent.
3
The New user agent screen displays.
Figure 7.13: New user agent Screen
2. In the User agent field, enter a name for the user agent. 3. From the Device profile list, select the device profile for the user agent. 4. From the Application version list, select the device application version for the user agent. 5. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the user agent.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
189
Device Management
6. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the user agent. 7. Specify whether the user agent is Resolved (Yes/No). 8. Specify whether the user agent is Defined as default (Yes/No). 9. Click Submit.
3
The user agent is created, and the User agent tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.11 on page 187).
Deleting a User Agent To delete a user agent: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each user agent to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all agents. 2. Click Delete User Agent.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. Activating a User Agent To activate a user agent: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each inactive user agent to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive agents. 2. Click Activate User Agent.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. Deactivating a User Agent To deactivate a user agent: 1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each active user agent to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active agents.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
190
Device Management
2. Click Deactivate User Agent.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Using the Device Profiles Tab The Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage device profiles associated with the device.
Figure 7.14: Edit device Screen — Device profiles Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the Device profiles tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click a profile from the Name column to view or modify. The process for editing a device profile for a selected device is the same as editing a profile after a search. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258.
• Click New device profile to create a new device profile. For more information, see “Creating a New Device Profile” on page 191.
• Click Import device profile to import an existing device profile for the edited device. For more information, see “Importing a Device Profile” on page 192.
• Click Delete device profile to delete selected profiles. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile” on page 193. Creating a New Device Profile To create a new device profile for a device: 1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.14 on page 191), click New device profile.
3
The New device profile screen displays (Figure 7.15 on page 192).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
191
Device Management
Figure 7.15: New device profile Screen
2. In the Url field, enter the URL address for the profile. 3. From the Inherit list, select the device profile from which the new profile will inherit properties. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the profile. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the profile. 6. Click Submit.
3
The device profile is created, and the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.14 on page 191).
Importing a Device Profile To import an existing device profile for use with the edited device: 1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen, click Import device profile.
3
The Import device profile screen displays (Figure 7.16 on page 193).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
192
Device Management
Figure 7.16: Import device profile Screen
2. In the Url field, type the URL address for the device profile to import (required). 3. From the Inherit list, select the profile from which the imported profile inherits properties. 4. In the UAProf field, enter the full path and filename to the User Agent Profile for the device profile. Click Browse to search (required). 5. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the device profile. 6. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device profile. 7. Click Submit.
3
The device profile is imported, and the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.14 on page 191).
Deleting a Device Profile To delete a device profile: 1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each profile to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all profiles. 2. Click Delete device profile.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
193
Device Management
Deleting a Device To delete a device: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each device to remove. Check the box at the top of the screen to quickly select all devices. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected models?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device by clicking Delete from any tab on the Edit
device screen.
Activating Devices To activate devices: 1. From any tab on the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each inactive device to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive devices. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected models?” displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate an edited device by clicking Activate from any tab on the
Edit device screen.
Deactivating Devices To deactivate devices: 1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each active device to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active devices. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected models?” displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited device by clicking Deactivate from any tab on
the Edit device screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
194
Device Management
Managing Features The Features portion of the Device menu allows you to manage features available for all device models known to Content Manager, based on imported DKB archives. To view a list of features available: 1. From the Device menu, select Features > Features.
3
The Features > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Features screen displays a list of features. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Features” on page 196.
Figure 7.17: Features Screen
The Features screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the feature. Click a feature to edit. For more information about editing a feature, see “Editing a Feature” on page 197.
• Feature Id — The feature’s identification number. • Status — Indicates whether the feature is Active, Inactive, Supported (but not contracted), or Not used.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the feature.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
195
Device Management
Using the Features Screen The Features screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Features screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a feature to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Feature” on page 197.
• Click New feature to create a new feature. For more information, see “Creating a Feature” on page 197.
• Click Delete to delete selected features. For more information, see “Deleting a Feature” on page 200.
• Click Activate to activate all selected features for all devices. For more information, see “Activating Features” on page 200.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate all selected features for all devices. For more information, see “Deactivating Features” on page 200.
Searching Features The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of features specific to that criteria. To manage feature filters: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), click Edit filters.
3
The Features > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.18: Features > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
196
Device Management
Creating a Feature NOTE: The New feature function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a feature,
you must have the appropriate rights, and a master trusted source must be available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Feature NOTE: To modify a feature, you must have the appropriate rights. For more information
about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To modify a feature: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), click the name of a feature to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit feature screen displays.
Figure 7.19: Edit feature Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Feature Screen From the Edit feature screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab to view or modify feature details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 198.
• Click the Compatible device profiles tab to add or remove aliases associated with the device. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
197
Device Management
• Click the IMEI Ranges tab to define IMEI ranges for the device. For more information about defining IMEI ranges, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183.
• Click the User Agents tab to view all user agent profiles associated to the device. For more information about viewing user agents, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 187.
• Click the Device profile tab to view all device profiles associated to the device. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Tab” on page 191.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit feature screen (Figure 7.19 on page 197) allows you to view or modify the following details of an existing feature:
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Deactivated, Not contracted, or Not Supported (cannot be modified).
• Feature id — The feature’s identification number (cannot be modified). • Name — The name of the feature. • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the feature (cannot be modified). • Comment (optional) — A short comment regarding the feature. • Created Date — The date on which the feature was added to the database. • Last modification date — The date on which the feature was last modified. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Compatible Device Profiles Tab In addition to the functionality on the Edit feature screen, the Compatible device profiles tab on the Edit feature screen (Figure 7.20 on page 199) allows you to manage the device profiles compatible with the selected feature.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
198
Device Management
Figure 7.20: Edit feature Screen — Compatible device profiles Tab
To view a list of compatible device profiles: 1. From the Show brands list, select the brand names to view. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 2. Select whether to view brands with or without inherited profiles. 3. Click Show device profiles.
3
Device profiles matching the selected criteria display by brand on the Compatible device profiles tab.
From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the current feature, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another feature. Click the icon to edit the device profile. To associate specific profiles with the feature, check the box next to any candidate profiles. To quickly select all candidate profiles to associate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. To disassociate specific profiles from the feature, check the box next to any associated profiles. To quickly select all associated profiles to disassociate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
199
Device Management
Deleting a Feature To delete a feature: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each feature to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all features. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected features?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited feature by clicking Delete on the Edit feature
screen.
Activating Features To activate features: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each inactive feature to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive features. Only those features that are currently inactive are modified. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected features?” displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation.
Deactivating Features To deactivate features: 1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each active feature to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active features. Only those features that are currently active are modified. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected features?” displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
200
Device Management
Managing Capability Groups Capability groups are associated to features and are defined automatically by Content Manager. You can, however, manually add or remove devices in a capability group.
Viewing Capability Groups To view a list of capability groups: 1. From the Devices menu, select Features > Capability groups.
3
The Capability groups >Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Capability groups screen displays a list of all capability groups. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Capability Groups” on page 202.
Figure 7.21: Capability groups Screen
The Capability group screen displays the following information:
• Name —The name of the capability group. Click a group name to modify. For information about editing a capability group, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
201
Device Management
• Handled feature — The feature associated with the group. • Handler — The type of handler that manages the group. For more information, see “Managing Capability Group Handlers” on page 206.
Using the Capability Groups Screen The Capability groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Capability groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203.
• Click New capability group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a Capability Group” on page 204.
• Click Delete to delete selected capability groups. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group” on page 205.
Searching Capability Groups The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of capability groups specific to that criteria. To manage capability group filters: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click Edit filters.
3
The Capability groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.22: Capability groups > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
202
Device Management
Editing a Capability Group NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a capability group. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a capability group: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click a group from the Name column to modify.
3
The Associated devices tab on the Edit capability group screen displays.
Figure 7.23: Edit capability group Screen — Associated devices Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
203
Device Management
Using the Edit Capability Group Screen From the Edit Capability group screen, you can manage the device profiles associated with the capability group. To manage device profiles: 1. Define the devices to list by selecting device brands from the Show brands list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 2. Click Show device profiles to list device profiles by selected brands. From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the current capability group, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another capability group. Click the icon to edit the device profile. To associate specific profiles with the group, check the box next to any candidate profiles. To quickly select all candidate profiles to associate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. To disassociate specific profiles from the group, check the box next to any associated profiles. To quickly select all associated profiles to disassociate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. Resetting a Capability Group You can reassociate all disassociated device profiles with the edited capability group simultaneously. NOTE: You must have the “manage capability groups” right in order to reset groups.
To reassociate all device profiles with the edited capability group, click Reset capability group on the Edit capability group screen (Figure 7.23 on page 203).
Creating a Capability Group To create a new capability group: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click New capability group.
3
The New capability group screen displays (Figure 7.24 on page 205).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
204
Device Management
Figure 7.24: New capability group Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of capability group to create. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the capability group. 4. From the Feature list, select a feature for the capability group. 5. In the Description field, type a short description of the capability group (optional). 6. Click Submit.
3
The Edit capability group screen displays, allowing you to define device profiles for the capability group. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203.
Deleting a Capability Group To delete a capability group: 1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), check the box next to each group to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly delete all groups. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected capability groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited capability groups by clicking Delete on the Edit
capability group screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
205
Device Management
Managing Capability Group Handlers Capability group handlers are used to automatically define capability groups.
Viewing Capability Group Handlers To view a list of current capability group handlers: 1. From the Device menu, select Features > Capability group handlers.
3
The Capability group handlers > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Capability group handlers screen displays.
Figure 7.25: Capability group handlers Screen
The Capability group handlers screen displays the following information:
• Type — The type of group handler. Click the name of a handler to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
• Feature — The feature associated with the handler.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
206
Device Management
Using the Capability Group Handlers Screen The Capability group handlers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Capability group handlers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Type column, click a handler to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
• Click Create capability groups handler to create a new handler. For more information, see “Creating a Capability Group Handler” on page 207.
• Click Delete to delete selected capability group handlers. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group Handler” on page 211.
Searching Capability Group Handlers The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of capability group handlers specific to that criteria. To manage capability group handler filters: 1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click Edit filters.
3
The Capability group handlers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.26: Capability group handlers > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Capability Group Handler NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to create a capability group handler. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
207
Device Management
To create a capability group handler: 1. From the Capability group handler screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click Create capability group handler.
3
The Create capability group handler screen displays.
NOTE: The Create capability group handler function is also available when viewing,
searching, or editing a capability group handler.
Figure 7.27: Create capability group handler Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of capability group created by the handler. 3. From the Feature list, select the feature managed by the capability group created by the handler. 4. In the Description field, type a short description of the handler (optional). 5. Click Submit.
3
The capability group handler is created, and the BLAH screen displays.
Editing a Capability Group Handler NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a capability group handler. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a capability group handler: 1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click a handler from the Type column to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit capability group handler screen displays (Figure 7.28 on page 209).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
208
Device Management
Figure 7.28: Edit capability group handler Screen — Details Tab
The Edit capability group handler screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Reset to initialize the handler. • Click Create capability groups handler to create a new capability group handler. For more information, see “Creating a Capability Group Handler” on page 207.
• Click Delete capability groups handler to deleted the edited capability group handler. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group Handler” on page 211.
• Click the Details tab to view the following information about the capability group handler: • Id — the capability group handler identifier
• Type — the type of group created by the capability group handler • Feature — the feature managed by the groups created by the capability group •
handler Description — a short description of the capability group handler
• Click the Capability Groups tab to view groups created by the edited capability group handler. For more information, see “Using the Capability Groups Tab” on page 209.
Using the Capability Groups Tab The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen (Figure 7.29 on page 210) lists the capability groups created by the edited capability groups handler. NOTE: Capability groups created by capability group handlers are listed when editing a
specific handler. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
209
Device Management
Figure 7.29: Edit capability groups handler Screen — Capability Groups Tab
The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, the Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Search for capability groups by applying a set of search filters. For more information, see “Applying Search Filters” on page 210.
• Edit a listed capability group by clicking a capability group name from the Name column. For more information about editing a capability group, see “Editing a Capability Group” on page 203. Applying Search Filters The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen allows you filter through the list of capability groups by applying a set of search criteria (Figure 7.30 on page 211). Several filters can be created and applied simultaneously as a set. NOTE: Only those capability group records that meet all applied filter criteria will display.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
210
Device Management
Figure 7.30: Edit capability groups handler Screen — Capability Groups Tab > Filters Screen
Resetting Filters. To remove all existing filters for the search, click Reset filters. Viewing Applied Filters. To apply the filters and view a list of groups meeting the search criteria, click Show table.
3
The Capability Groups tab displays an updated list of capability groups.
Adding and Removing Filters. To modify the set of filters currently applied to the search, click Edit filters.
3
The Capability Groups tab displays a list of applied filters.
To add a new filter to the set, use the Filters fields to create the filter, then click the add the new filter to the set. To remove a filter from the set, click the
to
next to the applied filter to remove.
Deleting a Capability Group Handler To delete a capability group handler: 1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), check the box next to the handlers to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly delete all handlers. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected capability group handlers?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited capability group handlers by clicking Delete capability
groups handler on the Edit capability group handler screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
211
Device Management
Managing Formatting Tokens Formatting tokens are used to balance the load between two formatting applications sending content to any given handset. For example, say you have Application 1 and Application 2, each using its own DKB and formatting data for adapting content to a device. You can use formatting tokens to specify that Application 1 sends Content A to Handset A, but Application 2 sends Content A to Handset B. NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify formatting token
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Viewing Formatting Tokens To view a list of formatting tokens: 1. From the Devices menu, select Features > Formatting tokens.
3
The Formatting tokens >Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Formatting tokens screen displays a list of all formatting tokens. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Formatting Tokens” on page 213.
The Formatting tokens screen displays the following information:
• Description — The description of the formatting token. Click a token description to modify the token. For information about editing a formatting token, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
• Feature — The feature associated with the formatting token. • Type — The formatter type. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the formatting token. Using the Formatting Tokens Screen The Formatting tokens screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Formatting tokens screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Description column, click a formatting token to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
• Click New formatting token to create a new formatting token. For more information, see “Creating a Formatting Token” on page 216.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
212
Device Management
• Click Delete to delete selected formatting tokens. For more information, see “Deleting a Formatting Token” on page 218.
Searching Formatting Tokens The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of formatting tokens specific to that criteria. To manage formatting token filters: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Formatting tokens > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.31: Formatting tokens > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Formatting Token NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify a formatting token. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a formatting token: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click a token from the Description column to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen displays (Figure 7.32 on page 214).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
213
Device Management
Figure 7.32: Edit formatting token Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Formatting Token Screen The Edit formatting token screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New formatting token to create a new formatting token. For more information, see “Creating a Formatting Token” on page 216.
• Click Delete to delete the edited formatting token. For more information, see “Deleting a Formatting Token” on page 218.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify token details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 214.
• Click the Device profile capabilities tab to view or modify device profiles associated with the token. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Capabilities Tab” on page 215.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen (Figure 7.32) allows you to modify the following details of the selected token:
• Feature — The feature associated with the token. • Description — A short description of the token (optional). • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the formatting token (cannot be modified).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
214
Device Management
• Type — The formatter type (cannot be modified). • Brand — The brand name of the device. If the formatter type is HM formatter, the brand name is used to locate the correct formatting algorithm.
• Model — The model name of the device. If the formatter type is HM formatter, the model name is used to locate the correct formatting algorithm.
• Creation date — The date on which the token was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the token was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Device Profiles Capabilities Tab The Device profiles capabilities tab allows you to manage device profiles associated with the selected token.
Figure 7.33: Edit formatting token Screen — Device profiles capabilities Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
215
Device Management
Define the device profiles to list by selecting from the criteria described below. A list of device profiles matching the criteria selected displays on the right side of the tab. Device profiles are ranked by brand/manufacturer.
• Show brands — Select the brands to include in the device list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
• Inherited device profiles — Specify whether or not to view inherited device profiles. • Click Show device profiles to view and select profiles available for the edited token. From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the formatting token, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another formatting token with the same feature. Click the icon to edit the token already associated with the device profile. To select specific profiles, check the box next to any candidate profile. To quickly select all candidate profiles, click Select all. Click Submit when finished. To disassociate specific profiles, uncheck the box next to any associated profile. To quickly select all associated profiles, click Unselect all. Click Submit when finished.
Creating a Formatting Token NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to create a formatting token. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a formatting token: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click New formatting token.
3
The New formatting token screen displays (Figure 7.34 on page 217).
NOTE: The New formatting token function is also available when searching for or editing
a formatting token. For more information, see “Searching Formatting Tokens” on page 213 and “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
216
Device Management
Figure 7.34: New formatting token Screen
2. In the Description field, type a description for the formatting token. 3. From the Feature list, select a feature type for the token. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the token. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the token. This helps to identify when the token was added to Content Manager. 6. From the Formatting system list, select the formatting type for the token. 7. From the Brand list, select a brand name for the device. If the formatting type is HM formatter, the brand name is used to locate the right formatting algorithm. 8. From the Model list, select a model name for the device. If the formatting type is HM formatter, the model name is used to locate the right formatting algorithm. 9. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen displays. For more information about editing a formatting token, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
217
Device Management
Deleting a Formatting Token To delete a formatting token: 1. From the Formatting tokens screen, check the box next to each token to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all tokens. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected formatting tokens?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited formatting token by clicking Delete on the Edit
formatting token screen.
Managing Device Detection Rules Detection rules are used to automatically send content to a handset once it is detected on the network.
Viewing Detection Rules To view a list of detection rules: 1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection rules.
3
The Detection rules > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Detection rules screen displays a list of all existing detection rules. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Detection Rules” on page 219.
Figure 7.35: Detection rules Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
218
Device Management
The Detection rules screen displays the following information:
• Detection regular expression — The regular expression used to identify the rule. • Brand — The device brand associated with the rule. • Model — The device model associated with the rule. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the detection rule. Using the Detection Rules Screen The Detection rules screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Detection rules screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit to edit an existing detection rule. For more information, see “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
• Click New detection rule to create a new detection rule. For more information, see “Creating a Detection Rule” on page 222.
• Click Delete to delete selected detection rules. For more information, see “Deleting a Detection Rule” on page 223.
Searching Detection Rules The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of detection rules specific to that criteria. To manage detection rule filters: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click Edit filters.
3
The Detection rules > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.36: Detection rules > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
219
Device Management
Editing a Detection Rule NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify a detection rule. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a detection rule: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click Edit next to a detection rule to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen displays.
Figure 7.37: Edit detection rule Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Detection Rule Screen The Edit detection rule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New detection rule to create a new detection rule. For more information, see “Creating a Detection Rule” on page 222.
• Click Delete to delete the edited detection rule. For more information, see “Deleting a Detection Rule” on page 223.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
220
Device Management
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen (Figure 7.37 on page 220) allows you to modify the following details of the selected detection rule:
• Detection set — The handler used to extract corresponding headers and attempts to detect a device.
• DKB version — The first DKB package to include the rule (cannot be modified). • Detection regular expression — The regular expression, with its match groups, used by the selected handler to resolve rule headers.
• Match group model — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias.
• Match group device profile — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile.
• Match group application — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application.
• Match group application version — The index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application version.
• Brand — The device brand of the devices to be detected (can be either a device profile or a user agent).
• Model — The device model on which detected items are associated. If None is selected, the model information is extracted from the http header. NOTE: The following fields are relevant only when editing a user agent detection set.
• Device profile — The device profile on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device profile information is extracted from the http header. If the device profile cannot be extracted, the device profile is defined by default using the corresponding model.
• Device application — The device application on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application is extracted from the http header.
• Device application version — The device application version on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application version is extracted from the http header.
• Creation date — The date on which the detection rule was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the detection rule was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
221
Device Management
Creating a Detection Rule NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to create a detection rule. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a detection rule: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click New detection rule.
3
The New detection rule screen displays.
NOTE: The New detection rule function is also available when searching for or editing a
detection rule. For more information, see “Searching Detection Rules” on page 219 and “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
Figure 7.38: New detection rule Screen
2. From the Detection set list, select the handler used to extract corresponding headers and attempts to detect a device. This is required. 3. In the Detection regular expression field, enter the regular expression, with its match groups, used by the selected handler to resolve rule headers. This is required. 4. In the Match group model field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias. 5. In the Match group device profile field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
222
Device Management
6. In the Match group application field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application. 7. In the Match group application version field, enter the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application version. 8. From the Brand list, select the device brand of the devices to be detected (can be either a device profile or a user agent). This is required. 9. From the Model list, select the device model on which detected items are associated. If None is selected, the model information is extracted from the http header. This is required. NOTE: Steps 10-12 are relevant only when creating a user agent detection set. If you are
not creating a user agent detection set, go to step 13.
10. From the Device profile list, select a device profile on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device profile information is extracted from the http header. If the device profile cannot be extracted, a profile is defined by default using the corresponding model. 11. From the Device application list, select the device application on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application is extracted from the http header. 12. From the Device application version list, select the device application version on which detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application version is extracted from the http header. 13. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the new detection rule. 14. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB package to include the rule. This helps to identify when the rule was added to Content Manager. 15. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen displays. For more information about editing a detection rule, see “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
Deleting a Detection Rule To delete a detection rule: 1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), check the box next to each rule to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all rules. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected detection rules?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
223
Device Management
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited detection rules by clicking Delete on the Edit detection
rule screen.
Managing Device Detection Sets Detection sets are available handset identifiers that help to detect handsets.
Viewing Detection Sets To view a list of detection sets: 1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection set.
3
The Detection set screen displays.
Figure 7.39: Detection set Screen
The Detection set screen displays the following information:
• Order — The detection set location in the cycle order, where 0 = first. • Type — The handler than enables you to extract desired headers. Using the Detection Set Screen The Detection set screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
224
Device Management
Using the Detection Tool The Detection tool allows you to verify the behavior of a detection rule. For more information about detection rules, see “Managing Device Detection Rules” on page 218. To check the behavior of a detection rule: 1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection tool.
3
The Detection tool screen displays.
Figure 7.40: Detection tool Screen
1. In the Header field, type the http header on which the regular expression applies. This is required. 2. In the Detection regular expression field, type the regular expression, with its match groups, that extracts information from the handler. This is required. 3. In the Match group model field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias. 4. In the Match group device profile field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile. 5. In the Match group application field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application. 6. In the Match group application version field, type the index of a match group within the regular expression that corresponds the name of a device application version.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
225
Device Management
7. Click Submit when finished.
3
The regular expression is verified. Once the verification process is done, one of two results is possible:
• Regular expression does not match header and must be redefined — In this case, return to steps 1 and 2 to redefine the expression. OR
• The following information is extracted from the header: • Model — The name or alias of a device model. • Device profile — The URL of a device profile. • Device application — The name of a device application. • Device application version — The name of a device application version.
Managing Device Application Types The Structure portion of the Device menu allows you to define types of applications (for example: Firmware, Games, and MMS agents), names of applications (for example: Nokia MMS agent and Tetris), and versions of applications (for example: Tetris v1.0.0 and Tetris v1.0.23).
Viewing Device Application Types NOTE: Content Manager provides the Firmware application type.
To view a list of device application types: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device application types.
3
The Device application types > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Device application types screen displays a list of device application types (Figure 7.41 on page 227). For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Application Types” on page 228.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
226
Device Management
Figure 7.41: Device application types Screen
The Device application types screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device application type. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
• Type — The type of device application. • Status — The status of the device application type: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the application type. Using the Device Application Types Screen The Device application types screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device application rules screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application type. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
• Click New device application type to create a new device application type. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Type” on page 230.
• Click Delete to delete selected device application types. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Type” on page 231.
• Click Activate to activate selected device application types. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Types” on page 231.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device application rules. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Types” on page 231.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
227
Device Management
Searching Device Application Types The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device application types specific to that criteria. To manage device application type filters: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click Edit filters.
3
The Device application types > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.42: Device application types > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Device Application Type NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application type
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device application type: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click the name of a device application type to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application type screen displays (Figure 7.43 on page 229).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
228
Device Management
Figure 7.43: Edit device application type Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Type Screen The Edit device application type screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application type to create a new device application type. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Type” on page 230.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application type. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Type” on page 231.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application type. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Types” on page 231.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application type. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Types” on page 231. The Edit device application type screen allows you to modify the name and the type of the device application type. Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
229
Device Management
Creating a Device Application Type NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application type
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a device application type: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click New device application type.
3
The New device application type screen displays.
NOTE: The New device application type function is also available when searching for or
editing a device application type. For more information, see “Searching Device Application Types” on page 228 and “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
Figure 7.44: New device application type Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application type. 3. In the Type field, enter the device application type. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application type. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application type. This helps to identify when the device application type was added to Content Manager. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application type screen displays. For more information about editing a device application type, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
230
Device Management
Deleting a Device Application Type To delete a device application type: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box next to each application type to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all application types. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device application types?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited device application types by clicking Delete on the Edit
device application type screen.
Activating Device Application Types To activate device application types: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box next to each inactive device application type to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device application types. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device application types?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited device application types by clicking Activate on the
Edit device application type screen.
Deactivating Device Application Types To deactivate device application types: 1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box next to each active device application type to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device application types. 2. Click Deactivate. 3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device application types?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device application types by clicking Deactivate on the Edit device application type screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
231
Device Management
Managing Device Applications NOTE: Content Manager provides the Default firmware application.
Viewing Device Applications To view a list of device applications: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device applications.
3
The Device applications > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Device applications screen displays a list of device applications. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Applications” on page 233.
Figure 7.45: Device applications Screen
The Device applications screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device application. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
• Type — The type of device application type. • Status — The status of the device application type: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device application. Using the Device Applications Screen The Device applications screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device applications screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
232
Device Management
• Click New device application to create a new device application. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application” on page 236.
• Click Delete to delete selected device applications. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application” on page 237.
• Click Activate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Activating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Applications” on page 238.
Searching Device Applications The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device applications specific to that criteria. To manage device application type filters: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click Edit filters.
3
The Devie applications > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.46: Device applications > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Device Application NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
233
Device Management
To edit a device application: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click the name of a device application to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application screen displays.
Figure 7.47: Edit device application Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Screen The Edit device application screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application to create a new device application. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application” on page 236.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application” on page 237.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application. For more information, see “Activating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application type. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click the Details tab to modify general device application information. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 235.
• Click the User agents tab to modify the user agents associated with the device application. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 235.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
234
Device Management
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device application screen (Figure 7.47 on page 234) allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The status of the device application: Active or Inactive (cannot be modified).
• Name — The name of the device application. • Type — The device application type. • Description — A short description of the device application (optional). • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the device application (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device application was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device application was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Application Versions Tab The Application versions tab allows you to manage application versions associated with the device application.
Figure 7.48: Edit device application Screen — Application versions Tab
Click an application version name from the Name column to view or modify the application version. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
Using the User Agents Tab The User agents tab on the Edit device application screen (Figure 7.49 on page 236) allows you to view a list of user agents associated with the device application.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
235
Device Management
Figure 7.49: Edit device application Screen — User agents Tab
From the User agent column, click a user agent name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
Creating a Device Application NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a device application: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click New device application.
3
The New device application screen displays (Figure 7.50 on page 237).
NOTE: The New device application function is also available when searching for or
editing a device application. For more information, see “Searching Device Applications” on page 233 and “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
236
Device Management
Figure 7.50: New device application Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application. 3. In the Type field, enter the device application. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application. This helps to identify when the device application was added to Content Manager. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application screen displays. For more information about editing a device application, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
Deleting a Device Application To delete a device application: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to each application type to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all application types. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device applications?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device application by clicking Delete on the Edit
device application screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
237
Device Management
Activating Device Applications To activate device applications: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to each inactive device application to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device applications. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device applications?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited device applications by clicking Activate on the Edit
device application screen.
Deactivating Device Applications To deactivate device applications: 1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to each active device application to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device applications. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device applications?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device applications by clicking Deactivate on the
Edit device application screen.
Managing Device Application Versions NOTE: Content Manager provides the Default application version.
Viewing Device Application Versions To view a list of device application versions: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device application versions. 3 The Device application versions > Filters screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
238
Device Management
2. Click Show table.
3
The Device application versions screen displays a list of device application versions. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Application Versions” on page 240.
Figure 7.51: Device application versions Screen
The Device application versions screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device application version. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
• Application — The device application used in the application version. • Status — The status of the device application version: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device application version. Using the Device Application Versions Screen The Device application versions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device application versions screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application version. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
• Click New device application to create a new device application version. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Version” on page 243.
• Click Delete to delete selected device application versions. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Version” on page 244.
• Click Activate to activate selected device application versions. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device application versions. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
239
Device Management
Searching Device Application Versions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device application versions specific to that criteria. To manage device application version filters: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click Edit filters.
3
The Device application versions > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.52: Device application versions > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a Device Application Version NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application version
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device application version: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click the name of a device application version to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen displays (Figure 7.52 on page 240).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
240
Device Management
Figure 7.53: Edit device application version Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Version Screen The Edit device application version screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application version to create a new device application version. For more information, see “Creating a Device Application Version” on page 243.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application version. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Application Version” on page 244.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application version. For more information, see “Activating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application version. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click the Details tab to modify general device application version information. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 241.
• Click the User agents tab to modify the user agents associated with the device application. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 242.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen (Figure 7.53) allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The status of the device application version: Active or Inactive (cannot be modified).
• Name — The name of the device application version. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
241
Device Management
• Application — The device application used in the version. • Description — A short description of the device application version (optional). • DKB version — The first DKB version to include the device application version (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device application version was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device application version was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the User Agents Tab The User agents tab on the Edit device application version screen allows you to view a list of user agents associated with the device application.
Figure 7.54: Edit device application version Screen — User agents Tab
From the User agent column, click a user agent name to edit. The process for editing a user agent for a selected device application version is the same as editing a user agent for a selected device. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
242
Device Management
Creating a Device Application Version NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application version
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a device application version: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click New device application version.
3
The New device application version screen displays.
NOTE: The New device application version function is also available when searching for
or editing a device application version. For more information, see “Searching Device Application Versions” on page 240 and “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
Figure 7.55: New device application version Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application version. 3. From the Application list, select the device application version. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application version. 5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application version. This helps to identify when the device application version was added to Content Manager. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen displays. For more information about editing a device application version, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
243
Device Management
Deleting a Device Application Version To delete a device application version: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box next to each application version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all application versions. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device application versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device application version by clicking Delete on the
Edit device application version screen.
Activating Device Application Versions To activate device application versions: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box next to each inactive device application version to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device application versions. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device application versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited device application versions by clicking Activate on the
Edit device application version screen.
Deactivating Device Application Versions To deactivate device application versions: 1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box next to each active device application version to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device application versions. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device application versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device application versions by clicking Deactivate
on the Edit device application version screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
244
Device Management
Managing Formatting Systems Formatting systems are the applications that encode contents in order to adapt them to any given handset.
Viewing Formatting Systems To view a list of formatting systems: 1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Formatting systems.
3
The Formatting systems > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Formatting systems screen displays a list of formatting systems. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Formatting Systems” on page 245.
Figure 7.56: Formatting systems Screen
The Formatting systems screen displays the following information and is view-only:
• Name — The name of the formatting system. • Type — The type of formatting system. • Description — A description of the formatting system. Searching Formatting Systems To manage formatting system filters: 1. From the Formatting systems screen (Figure 7.56 on page 245), click Edit filters.
3
The Formatting systems > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.57 on page 246).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
245
Device Management
Figure 7.57: Formatting systems > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
246
8
DKB Management
This chapter contains the following information: Managing Devices Through a Search ........................................................................ Searching Devices Using Quick Search ..................................................................... Searching Devices by IMEI Range ............................................................................ Managing Devices By IMEI Range ............................................................................ Searching Devices by User Agent............................................................................. Managing Devices by User Agent ............................................................................. Searching Device Profiles........................................................................................ Managing Device Profiles ........................................................................................ Editing a Device Profile........................................................................................... Searching Device Profile Capabilities ........................................................................ Managing Device Profile Capabilities......................................................................... Managing Trust Sources ......................................................................................... Viewing Trust Sources ............................................................................................ Editing a Trust Source ............................................................................................ Creating a Trust Source .......................................................................................... Deleting a Trust Source .......................................................................................... Managing DKB Versions.......................................................................................... Viewing DKB Versions ............................................................................................ Searching DKB Versions ......................................................................................... Editing a DKB Version ............................................................................................ Deleting a Version ................................................................................................. Managing DKB Archives.......................................................................................... Managing DKB Synchronizations .............................................................................. Viewing Synchronization Processes .......................................................................... Searching Synchronization Processes ....................................................................... Monitoring a Synchronization Process....................................................................... Creating a Synchronization Process.......................................................................... Managing Device and DKB Rights ............................................................................ Granting Device and DKB Rights.............................................................................. Revoking Device and DKB Rights .............................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
248 248 249 249 252 253 255 256 258 277 278 282 282 283 286 287 287 287 288 289 290 290 291 292 293 293 296 297 297 298
247
DKB Management
The Device Knowledge Base (DKB) stores all device information (based on the license that defines available device brands and features) when working with Content Manager. Updates to the device repository are made by uploading files containing device information from the DKB. This chapter describes device repository and DKB management using the Device menu. For information about managing devices and features, see Chapter 7, “Device Management” on page 170.
Managing Devices Through a Search The Searches portion of the Devices menu allows you to conduct searches for devices by Quick Search, IMEI ranges, user agents, device profile, or device profile capabilities.
Searching Devices Using Quick Search Quick search allows you to search devices using several types of criteria. To search using Quick search: 1. From the Devices menu, select Searches > Quick Search.
3
The Quick search screen displays.
Figure 8.1: Quick search Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to base your search. 3. Click OK to search.
3
The Quick search screen displays a list of devices matching the search criteria.
4. From the list of displayed devices, click a device to modify.
3
The Edit device screen displays, allowing you to modify the device. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
248
DKB Management
Searching Devices by IMEI Range An International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) is a unique identification number typically found on the back of cellular phone batteries. An IMEI range allows you to manage devices within a defined range of serial numbers. You can directly manage IMEI ranges associated with devices through the Device menu. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of ranges specific to that criteria. To manage IMEI range filters: 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > IMEI Ranges screen.
3
The IMEI Ranges > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.2: IMEI Ranges > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Managing Devices By IMEI Range To manage devices by IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI Ranges > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The IMEI Ranges screen displays (Figure 8.3 on page 250).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
249
DKB Management
Figure 8.3: IMEI Ranges Screen
The IMEI Ranges screen displays the following information:
• TAC — The Type Approval Code. Consists of the first 6-8 digits of the IMEI number and is used to identify a device.
• Brand — The device brand. • Model — The commercial name of the device. • Serial Begin — The beginning of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Serial End — The end of the serial number range associated with the IMEI. • Status — The status of the device: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range. Using the IMEI Ranges Screen The IMEI Ranges screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the IMEI Ranges screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Tac column, click a type approval code to edit the associated IMEI range. The process for editing an IMEI range is the same as editing an IMEI range associated with a selected device. For more information, see “Editing an IMEI Range” on page 184.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
250
DKB Management
• Click Delete to delete selected IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Deleting an IMEI Range”.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Activating an IMEI Range”.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Deactivating an IMEI Range”. Creating an IMEI Range IMEI ranges are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183. Deleting an IMEI Range To delete an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each IMEI range to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all ranges. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited IMEI ranges by clicking Delete on the Edit IMEI screen
screen.
Activating an IMEI Range To activate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each inactive IMEI range to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive IMEI ranges. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited IMEI ranges by clicking Activate on the Edit IMEI
range screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
251
DKB Management
Deactivating an IMEI Range To deactivate an IMEI range: 1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each active IMEI range to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active IMEI ranges. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected IMEI ranges?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited IMEI ranges by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
IMEI range screen.
Searching Devices by User Agent User agent information is included in the http headers of a WAP page or the Multimedia Messaging Services Center (MMS-C). This information is detected when a device accesses a WAP page or the MMS-C. The correct device can be identified based on the user agent profile. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of user agents specific to that criteria. To manage user agent filters: 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > User agents.
3
The User agents > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.4: User Agents > Filters Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
252
DKB Management
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Managing Devices by User Agent 1. From the User agents > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The User agents screen displays.
Figure 8.5: User Agents Screen
The User agents screen displays the following information:
• User agent — The commercial name of the device. Click on a model name to modify the user agents for the selected device.
• Brand — The device brand associated with the user agent. • Device profile — The device profile associated with the user agent. • Status — The user agent status. Status can include: Active (agent profile capabilities are used) or Inactive (agent profile capabilities are not used).
• Resolved — Indicates whether the user agent is resolved: Yes or No. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the user agent.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
253
DKB Management
Using the User Agents Screen The User agents screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the User agents screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the User agent column, click a model to edit the user agents for the selected model. The editing process is the same as when editing a user agent on a selected device. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
• Click Delete to delete selected user agents. For more information, see “Deleting a User Agent” on page 254.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive user agents. For more information, see “Activating a User Agent” on page 255.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active user agents. For more information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 255.
• In order to create a user agent, you must add it to a selected device. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180. Creating a User Agent User agents are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 187. Deleting a User Agent To delete a user agent: 1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each user agent to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all user agents. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited user agent by clicking Delete on the Edit user agent
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
254
DKB Management
Activating a User Agent To activate a user agent: 1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each inactive user agent to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive user agents. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate an edited user agent by clicking Activate on the Edit user
agent screen.
Deactivating a User Agent To deactivate a user agent: 1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each active user agent to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active user agents. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected user agents?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited user agent by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
user agent screen.
Searching Device Profiles Device profiles can be inherited and passed down from profile to profile, allowing you to further manage devices by reusing common device details, features, or capabilities. 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > Device profiles.
3
The Device profiles > Filters screen displays (Figure 8.6 on page 256).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
255
DKB Management
Figure 8.6: Device profiles > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Managing Device Profiles To manage device profiles: From the Device profiles > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The Device profiles screen displays (Figure 8.7 on page 257).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
256
DKB Management
Figure 8.7: Device profiles Screen
The Device profiles screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the device profile. • Model — The device model associated with the device profile. • Resolved — Indicates whether the device profile is resolved: Yes or No. • Status — The device profile status: Active or Inactive. • Added by — The first DKB version to include the device profile. Using the Device Profiles Screen The Device profiles screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device profiles screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a device profile to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258.
• Click Delete to delete selected device profiles. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile” on page 276.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive device profiles. For more information, see “Activating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
257
DKB Management
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active device profiles. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Creating a Device Profile Device profiles are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Creating a New Device Profile” on page 191.
Editing a Device Profile To edit a device profile: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), click a device profile from the Name column to edit.
3
The Details tab on the Edit device profile screen displays.
Figure 8.8: Edit device profile Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit device profile screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited device profile. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile” on page 276.
• Click Edit associated model to view or modify the device model associated with the device profile. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device profile. For more information, see “Activating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
258
DKB Management
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device profile. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profiles” on page 276.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general device profile information. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 259.
• Click the Capabilities tab to view or modify capabilities of the device profile. For more information, see “Using the Capabilities Tab” on page 260.
• Click the Hardware tab to view or modify device profile hardware information. For more information, see “Using the Hardware Tab” on page 263.
• Click the Hardware ext tab to view or modify device profile hardware extension information. For more information, see “Using the Hardware Ext Tab” on page 264.
• Click the Software tab to view or modify device profile software information. For more information, see “Using the Software Tab” on page 265.
• Click the Browser tab to view or modify device profile browser information. For more information, see “Using the Browser Tab” on page 266.
• Click the Network tab to view or modify device profile network information. For more information, see “Using the Network Tab” on page 268.
• Click the Wap tab to view or modify device profile WAP information. For more information, see “Using the Wap Tab” on page 268.
• Click the Push tab to view or modify device profile Push information. For more information, see “Using the Push Tab” on page 270.
• Click the MMS tab to view or modify device profile MMS information. For more information, see “Using the MMS Tab” on page 271.
• Click the Settings tab to view or modify device profile settings. For more information, see “Using the Settings Tab” on page 272.
• Click the SMS tab to view or modify device profile SMS information. For more information, see “Using the SMS Tab” on page 273.
• Click the OMA DM CP tab to view or modify available OMA DM access lists of a device for each configurable feature. For more information, see “Using the OMA DM CP Tab” on page 275.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.8 on page 258) allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The device profile status: Active or Inactive. • Url — The URL address of the device profile. • Name — The name of the device profile. • Inherit — If the device profile inherits properties from another device profile, select the other device profile from this list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
259
DKB Management
• Resolved — Indicates whether a detection set is associated with the profile: Yes or No.
• Creation date — The date on which the device profile was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device profile was last modified (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Capabilities Tab The Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify device profile capabilities.
Figure 8.9: Edit device profile Screen — Capabilities Tab
The Capabilities tab displays the following information:
• Feature — The feature name. Click a feature name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability” on page 261.
• Status — The feature status: Active or Inactive. • Inherited — Indicates whether the device profile inherits properties from another device profile: Yes or No.
• Added By — The DKB version to first include the feature. • Creation Date — The date on which the device profile was created. In addition to the functions available on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.8 on page 258), from the Capabilities tab, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Feature column, click a feature to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Capability” on page 261.
• Click New device profile capability to create a new feature. For more information, see “Creating a Capability” on page 262.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
260
DKB Management
• Click Delete device profile capability to delete selected device features. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability” on page 262. Editing a Capability To edit a capability: 1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, click New device profile capability.
3
The Details tab on the Device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.10: Device profile capability Screen — Details Tab
From the Details tab on the Device profile capability screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited device profile capability. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability” on page 262.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device profile capability. For more information, see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device profile capability. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• From the Formatting token list, select a different formatting token for the capability. Click Submit to save changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
261
DKB Management
Creating a Capability To create a capability: 1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, click New device profile capability.
3
The New device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.11: New device profile capability Screen
2. From the Feature list, select a feature for the capability. 3. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the capability. 4. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the capability. 5. Click Submit.
3
The device profile capability is created, and the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen displays.
Deleting a Capability To delete a device profile capability: 1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, check the box next to each capability to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all capabilities. 2. Click Delete device profile capability.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
262
DKB Management
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device profile capability by clicking Delete on the
Edit device profile capability screen.
Using the Hardware Tab The Hardware tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify hardware information for the device profile. This information comes from the Hardware component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.12: Edit device profile Screen — Hardware Tab
The Hardware tab allows you to modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding hardware information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Bits per pixel • Keyboard • CPU • Vendor • Model • Number of soft keys Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
263
DKB Management
• Pointing resolution • Pixel aspect ratio • Screen size • Screen size char • Specify whether the hardware associated with the device profile includes the following (Yes/No):
• • • • • •
Color capable Image capable Sound output capable Standard font proportional Text input capable Voice input capable
Click Submit to save any changes. In addition, you can add a Bluetooth profile, input character set, or an output character set to the hardware settings for the device profile. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Hardware Ext Tab The Hardware ext tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.13 on page 264) allows you to view or modify the additional hardware information for the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 to further detail the hardware characteristics of the device.
Figure 8.13: The Edit device profile Screen — Hardware ext Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
264
DKB Management
The Hardware ext tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Polyphonic channels — The number of polyphonic channels for the hardware extension.
• Camera — Specify whether the hardware extension is a camera: Yes or No. • Countries — Lists countries wehere the device is deployed. • Radio stack — Lists radio protocols supported by the device. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Software Tab The Software tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.14 on page 265) allows you to view or modify software run on devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the Software component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.14: Edit device profile Screen — Software Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
265
DKB Management
The Software tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding software information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Mexe specification • OS name • OS vendor • OS version • Recipient application agent • Software number • Specify whether the software for the device profile includes the following (Yes/No): • Accept downloadable software • Java enabled • Mexe secure domains Click Submit to save any changes. In addition, you can the following to the software settings for the device profile: Audio inputEncoder Common language infrastructure platform CCPP accept CCPP accept encoding CCPP accept language Downloadable software support
Email URL schemes JVM version Java package Java platform Java protocol Mexe classmarks Video input encoder
To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Browser Tab The Browser tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.15 on page 267) allows you to view or modify the WEB/WAP browser used by devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the BrowserUA component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
266
DKB Management
Figure 8.15: Edit device profile Screen — Browser Tab
The Browser tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding browser information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Browser name • Browser version • Html version • JavaScript version • XHTML version • Specify whether the browser for the device profile includes the following (Yes/No): • Frames capable • Java applet enabled • JavaScript enabled • Preference for frames • Tables capable Click Submit to save any changes. In addition, you can add downloadable browser applications and XHTML modules to the browser settings for the device profile. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
267
DKB Management
Using the Network Tab The Network tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify bearer services (SMS, 3G, etc.) supported by devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the NetworkCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.16: Edit device profile Screen — Network Tab
The Network tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding network information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Current bearer service • Supported bluetooth version In addition, you can add security support or supported bearers information to the network settings for the device profile. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Wap Tab The Wap tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.17 on page 269) allows you to view or modify how the WAP protocol is supported in devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the WapCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
268
DKB Management
Figure 8.17: Edit device profile Screen — Wap Tab
The Wap tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding Wap information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Wap device class • WAP version • WML deck size • WTA version • Specify whether the WAP includes a Oma download (Yes/No). In addition, you can add the following information to the WAP settings for the device profile:
• Drm class • Drm constraints • Supported pictogramset • WML script libraries • WML script version • WTAI libraries To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
269
DKB Management
Using the Push Tab The Push tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify WAP protocol implementation details for the devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the PushCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.18: Edit device profile Screen — Push Tab
The Push tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding Push information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Max push request • Message size In addition, you can add the following information to the WAP settings for the device profile:
• Push accept • Push accept application Id • Push accept charset • Push accept encoding • Push accept language To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
270
DKB Management
Using the MMS Tab The MMS tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify MMS protocol for the devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the MMSCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.19: Edit device profile Screen — MMS Tab
The MMS tab allows you to view or modify the following information: NOTE: For further detail regarding MMS information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site: http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Max message size • Max image resolution • Specify whether the MMS includes the following (Yes/No): • CCPP streaming capable • Suppress content adaptation In addition, you can add the following information to the MMS settings for the device profile:
• CCPP accept • CCPP accept charset • CCPP accept language • CCPP accept encoding • MMS version
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
271
DKB Management
• Smil baseset • Content class To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Settings Tab The Settings tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify various settings for devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and describes a device’s behavior while receiving a setting.
Figure 8.20: Edit device profile Screen — Settings Tab
The Settings tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• PIN size — Number of digit of the PIN code of the device (used to accept installation of the setting in the device):
• • •
0 : The device uses no PIN Code 1 : PIN Code of the device contains 1 digit 4 : PIN Code of the device contains 4 digit
• OMA bootstrap connection included — Indicates whether the device accepts a OMA DM Bootstrap that contains connection information.
• OMA bootstrap notification included — Indicates if the device accepts a OMA DM Bootstrap which contains the notification (an event that signals the device to launch an OMA DM session).
• PIN enabled features — Define features that can be installed on the device after the correct PIN is entered.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
272
DKB Management
• IMSI enabled features — Define features that can be installed on the device after the correct IMSI code from the device‘s SIM card is validated.
• WAP 2.0 enabled features — Define features that can be used with the protocol WAP 2.0. All available features not contained in this list must automatically be used with old protocol WAP 1.2.
• Manual activation features — Define features that can be installed on the device without using any type of authentication process. To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the SMS Tab The SMS tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.21 on page 274) allows you to view or modify details about different SMS content types supported by devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and defines the logo size a device can accept.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
273
DKB Management
Figure 8.21: Edit device profile Screen — SMS Tab
The SMS tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Specify whether the device includes the following (Yes/No): • EMS R4 support • EMS R5 support
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
274
DKB Management
In addition, you can add the following information to the SMS settings for the device profile: Logo black and white 16x16 Logo black and white 72x14 Logo black and white 32x12 Logo black and white 32x40 Logo black and white 80x41 Logo black and white 88x41 Logo black and white 96x41 Logo black and white 96x65 Logo black and white less than 101x29 Logo black and white less than 101x46 Logo black and white less than 101x50 Logo black and white less than 101x64 Logo grey scale less than 96x65 Logo 64 colors less than 96x64 Logo black and white 8x24 Logo black and white 16x64 Logo black and white 24x42 Logo black and white 40x25
Logo black and white 48x21 Logo black and white 56x18 Logo black and white 64x16 Logo black and white 80x12 Logo black and white 88x11 Logo black and white 96x10 Logo black and white 104x9 Logo black and white 112x9 Logo black and white 120x8 Logo black and white 128x8 Animation black and white 16x16x4 Animation black and white 32x32x4 Logo black and white less than 96x65 Logo black and white less than 96x29 Logo black and white less than 96x46 Logo black and white less than 96x50 Logo black and white less than 96x64
To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the OMA DM CP Tab The OMA DM CP tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.21 on page 274) allows you to view or modify details about different SMS content types supported by devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and defines available OMA DM access lists (the rights around actions on OMA DM Tree Nodes) on a device for each configurable feature.
Figure 8.22: Edit Device profile Screen — OMA DM CP Tab
The OMA DM CP tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Read — Define features that can be read (those which have settings that exist on the OMA DM Tree Node for the device).
• Create — Define features on which a new setting can be created by OMA DM protocol. In this case, new nodes are created on the OMA DM Tree for the device.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
275
DKB Management
• Update — Define features that can be updated (those which have settings that exist on the OMA DM Tree Node for the device).
• Delete — Define features that can be deleted (those which have settings that exist on the OMA DM Tree Node of the device). In this case, existing nodes can be removed from the OMA DM Tree for the device.
Deleting a Device Profile To delete a device profile: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each device profile to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device profiles. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited device profile by clicking Delete on the Edit device
profile screen.
Activating Device Profiles To activate device profiles: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each inactive device profile to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all inactive device profiles. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate an edited device profile by clicking Activate on the Edit
device profile screen.
Deactivating Device Profiles To deactivate device profiles: 1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each active device profile to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active device profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
276
DKB Management
2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device profiles?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited device profile by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
device profile screen.
Searching Device Profile Capabilities Device profile capabilities define the features associated with a device profile. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device profile capabilities specific to that criteria. To manage device profile capability filters: 1. From the Device menu, select Searches > Device profile capabilities.
3
The Device profile capabilities > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.23: Device profile capability > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
277
DKB Management
Managing Device Profile Capabilities To view a list of device profile capabilities: 1. From the Device profile capabilities > Filters screen, click Show table.
3
The Device profile capabilities screen displays a list of device profile capabilities.
Figure 8.24: Device profile capabilities Screen
The Device profile capabilities screen displays the following information:
• Device profile — The name of the device profile. Click the corresponding Edit to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile Capability” on page 279.
• Feature — The feature associated with the device profile. • Status — The status of the device capability type: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated. • Added by — The first Handset Manager version from which the device profile was added.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
278
DKB Management
Using the Device Profile Capabilities Screen The Device profile capabilities screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device profile capabilities screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit next to a device profile capability to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile Capability” on page 279.
• Click Delete to delete selected device applications. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile Capability” on page 280.
• Click Activate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281. Editing a Device Profile Capability NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a device profile capability. For more
information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To edit a device profile capability: 1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), click Edit next to the name of a capability to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.25: Device profile capability Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
279
DKB Management
The Device profile capability screen displays the following information:
• Status — Indicates whether the device profile capability is active, inactive or deprecated (cannot be modified).
• Device profile — The name of the device profile (cannot be modified). • Feature — The name of the feature (cannot be modified). • Device profile capability handler — Indicates which (if any) handler created the capability. These handlers are responsible for automatically creating a capability according to specific information contained within device profile components (cannot be modified).
• Formatting token — Specifies the formatting token used by Handset Manager to find the right algorithm in order to format a content to the device destination.
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the capability (cannot be modified). • Creation date — The date on which the device profile capability was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device profile capability was last modified (updated automatically). 2. Click Submit to save changes. The Device profile capability screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited capability. For more information, see “Deleting a Device Profile Capability” on page 280.
• Click Activate to activate the edited capability. For more information, see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited capability. For more information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281. Creating a Device Profile Capability To create a device profile capability, you must first edit the device profile to which the capability corresponds. From there, you can create a device profile capability on the Capabilities tab of the Edit Device profile screen. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258. Deleting a Device Profile Capability To delete a device profile capability: 1. From the Device profile capability screen (Figure 8.23 on page 277), check the box next to each capability to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all capabilities.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
280
DKB Management
2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited capability by clicking Delete on the Device profile
capability screen.
Activating Device Profile Capabilities To activate device profile capabilities: 1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), check the box next to each inactive capability to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all capabilities. 2. Click Activate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation. NOTE: You can also activate edited capabilities by clicking Activate on the Device profile
capabilities screen.
Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities To deactivate device profile capabilities: 1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), check the box next to each active capability to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active capabilities. 2. Click Deactivate.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device profile capabilities?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation. NOTE: You can also deactivate edited capabilities by clicking Deactivate on the Device
profile capability screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
281
DKB Management
Managing Trust Sources A trust source is a certified source for all device information stored within a Device Knowledge Database (DKB).
Viewing Trust Sources To view a list of trust sources: 1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge database > Trust sources.
3
The Trust sources screen displays.
Figure 8.26: Trust sources Screen
The Trust sources screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the trust source. Click a name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Private key — Private keys are created in order to securely allow you to modify information.
• Creation date — The date on which the trust source was created. Using the Trust Sources Screen From the Trust sources screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit a trust source. For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Click New trust source to create a new trust source. For more information, see “Creating a Trust Source” on page 286.
• Click Delete to delete selected trust sources. For more information, see “Deleting a Trust Source” on page 287.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
282
DKB Management
Editing a Trust Source To edit a trust source: 1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), click the name of a trust source to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit trust source screen displays.
Figure 8.27: Edit trust source Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Trust Source Screen The Edit device application version screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New trust source to create a new trust source. For more information, see “Creating a Trust Source” on page 286.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application version. For more information, see “Deleting a Trust Source” on page 287.
• Click the Details tab to view general trust source information. Information on the Details tab is view-only.
• Click the Versions tab to modify the versions associated with the trust source. For more information, see “Using the Versions Tab”.
Using the Versions Tab The Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen (Figure 8.28 on page 284) allows you to view a list of versions associated with the trust source.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
283
DKB Management
Figure 8.28: Edit trust source Screen — Versions Tab
In addition to the functions available on the Edit trust source screen, the Versions tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• From the Version column, click a version name to edit. The editing process is the same as when editing a version after a search. For more information, see “Editing a DKB Version” on page 289.
• Click New version to create a new version for the trust source. For more information, see “Creating a Version” on page 285.
• Click Delete version to delete selected versions from the trust source. For more information, see “Deleting a Version” on page 285.
• Click the up or down arrows next to versions to prioritize. The topmost version takes priority.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
284
DKB Management
Creating a Version To create a version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen, click New version.
3
The New version screen displays.
Figure 8.29: New version Screen
2. In the Version field, enter the name of the new trust source version. 3. From the Status list, select the version status: Client, Draft, or Released. 4. In the Comment field, type a short comment about the version (optional). 5. Click Submit.
3
The version is created, and the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen displays (Figure 8.28 on page 284).
Deleting a Version To delete a version: 1. From the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen (Figure 8.28 on page 284), check the box next to each version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions. 2. Click Delete version.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected DKB versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited version by clicking Delete on the Edit version
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
285
DKB Management
Creating a Trust Source NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify trust source information.
For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To create a trust source: 1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), click New trust source.
3
The New trust source screen displays.
NOTE: The New trust source function is also available when editing a trust source. For
more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
Figure 8.30: New trust source Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the trust source. 3. In the Certification key field, enter the full path and filename to the keystore file for the trust source. Click Browse to search for the file. 4. In the File password field, enter the password required to open the keystore file. 5. In the Private key alias in keystore field, enter the private key alias for the keystore file. 6. In the Password field, enter a password for the trust source. 7. Click Submit.
3
The trust source is created, and the Trust sources screen displays (Figure 8.26 on page 282).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
286
DKB Management
Deleting a Trust Source To delete a trust source: 1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), check the box next to each trust source to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all trust sources. 2. Click Delete.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected trust sources?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited trust source by clicking Delete on the Edit trust
source screen.
Managing DKB Versions You can manage all DKB versions through Content Manager. NOTE: To create a version, you must edit the trust source for which the version is created.
For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
Viewing DKB Versions To view a list of DKB versions: 1. From the Devices menu, select Knowledge base > Versions.
3
The Versions > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Versions screen displays (Figure 8.31 on page 288). For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching DKB Versions” on page 288.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
287
DKB Management
Figure 8.31: Versions Screen
The Versions screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• From the Version column, click a version name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a DKB Version” on page 289.
• From the Trust source column, click a trust source name to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Click Delete version to delete selected versions. For more information, see “Deleting a Version” on page 285.
Searching DKB Versions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of versions specific to that criteria. To manage version filters: 1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), click Edit filters.
3
The Versions > Filters screen displays (Figure 8.32 on page 289).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
288
DKB Management
Figure 8.32: Versions > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Editing a DKB Version To edit a DKB version: 1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), click the name of a version from the Version column to edit.
3
The Edit version screen displays.
Figure 8.33: Edit version Screen
2. Modify the following version details as necessary:
• Version — The name of the version. • Status — The status of the version: Client, Draft, or Released.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
289
DKB Management
• Trust source — The name of the trust source with which the version is associated (cannot be modified).
• Comment — A short comment about the version (optional). • Creation date — The date on which the version was created (cannot be modified). • Last modification date — The date on which the version was last modified (updated automatically). 3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting a Version To delete a version: 1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), check the box next to each version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions. 2. Click Delete version.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected DKB versions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited version by clicking Delete on the Edit version
screen.
Managing DKB Archives Content Manager allows you to view, generate, and download DKB archives. DKB archive generation is possible only on platforms that have at least one master trust source. There are several types of archives:
•
Complete — The archive contains all data associated to a selected release-type version. This version is called “the referenced version”. Versions are numbered in order with all other previous release-type versions of the same trust source.
• Complete client — In addition to the complete archive data, the complete client archive contains data associated to specific client-type versions dedicated to a client.
• Partial — The archive contains data only associated to the specific release or clienttype version. These archives contain only new data added since the last previous archive.
• Mobile 365 token — Partial archive containing only new brands, new models or/and new features.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
290
DKB Management
To manage DKB archives: 1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge base > Archives.
3
The Archives screen displays.
2. If there are archive files present:
• Click Download to download the corresponding archive file. • Click Remove from repository to remove the corresponding archive file. Generating an Archive NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to generate a DKB archive. For more
information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To generate a DKB archive: 1. Click Generate archive.
3
The Archives > Export screen displays.
2. In the Archive name field, enter a name for the archive. 3. Select the type of archive to generate: Complete, Complete Client, or Partial. 4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the archive. 5. From the DKB Version list, select the first DKB version to include the archive. 6. Click Generate archive.
Managing DKB Synchronizations Synchronization processes allow you to automatically synchronize a DKB with the latest version. During a process, data is imported from a DKB archive into a platform database. This data then provides a historical record of the imported DKB archive. The synchronization process occurs in two steps: 1. Notification generation: All data coming from the archive is verified using data coming from the database. In turn, Create, Delete, or Update notifications are generated according to the state of the database and the imported archive. NOTE: While notifications are being generated, the process status displays as Building. NOTE: During the transition between steps 1 and 2, the process status displays as
Pending.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
291
DKB Management
2. Accept or refuse notifications: After all notifications are generated, there are two additional notifications possible:
• Accept notifications: All Create, Delete, or Update notifications that take place within the database are marked Accepted.
• Refuse notifications: All Create, Delete, or Update notifications that do not take place within the database are marked Refused. NOTE: When the process has finished, the process status displays as Done. If an error or a
stop action by an administrator has occurred, the process status displays as Aborted.
Viewing Synchronization Processes To view current processes: 1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge base > Synchronizations.
3
The Synchronizations > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Synchronizations screen displays a list of current processes.
NOTE: Content Manager displays a list of Pending processes by default. To change the
search criteria for synchronizations, see “Searching Synchronization Processes” on page 293.
Figure 8.34: Synchronizations Screen
The Synchronizations screen displays the following information:
• Status — The status of the process. For a description of each status, see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
• Type — The type of archive. For a description of each type, see “Managing DKB Archives” on page 290.
• Trust source — The trust source associated with the archive.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
292
DKB Management
• Archive — The DKB archive path and filename. • Creation date — The date on which the process was created. Using the Synchronizations Screen The Synchronizations screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Synchronizations screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit to monitor the corresponding process. For more information, see “Monitoring a Synchronization Process” on page 293.
• Click New process to create a new process. For more information, see “Creating a Synchronization Process” on page 296.
Searching Synchronization Processes To search processes: 1. From the Synchronizations screen, click Edit filters.
3
The Synchronizations > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.35: Synchronizations > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Monitoring a Synchronization Process To monitor a synchronization process: 1. From the Synchronizations screen, click Edit next to a process to monitor.
3
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen displays (Figure 8.36 on page 294).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
293
DKB Management
Figure 8.36: Synchronizations > Edit process Screen (1 of 2)
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen provides the following information:
• Type — The type of archive. For a description of each archive type, see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
• Status — The current status of the process. For a description of each process status, see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291. NOTE: If the process status is Pending and you have the appropriate rights, you may also
be able to perform the following tasks: • Click Refresh to view the most current process status.
• Click Stop process to stop the process. Once a pending process is stopped, you may be able to, with the appropriate rights, accept or refuse notifications manually. For more information, see “Managing Process Notifications” on page 295. NOTE: If the process status is Done, everything on the Synchronizations > Edit
process screen is view-only.
• Archive — The path to the DKB archive. • Synchronization process state — A detailed description of a process status. • Trust source — The name of the trust source used in the process. • Versions — Versions of the DKB to be synchronized. • Creation date — The date on which the synchronization process was created. • Last modification date — The date on which the synchronization was last modified.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
294
DKB Management
Managing Process Notifications All data coming from the archive is verified using data coming from the database. In turn, Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications are generated according to the state of the database and the imported archive. After all Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications are generated, two additional notifications are assigned, determining the actions taken to the database:
• Accept notifications: All Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications that take place within the database are marked Accepted.
• Refuse notifications: All Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications that do not take place within the database are marked Refused. NOTE: With the appropriate rights, you can elect to accept all or refuse all notifications
during a process. For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To accept or refuse all notifications for a process: 1. From the Synchonization process screen (Figure 8.34 on page 292), click Edit next to a process for which to manage process notifications.
3
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen displays (Figure 8.36 on page 294).
NOTE: In order to accept or refuse the notifications for a process, the process you edit
must have a Pending status.
2. From the Synchronizations > Edit process screen, click Stop process.
3
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen refreshes and displays a list of all process notifications (Figure 8.37 on page 296).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
295
DKB Management
Figure 8.37: Synchronizations > Edit process Screen (2 of 2)
3. To accept all notifications and make the listed changes to the database, click Accept all notifications. To refuse all notifications and leave the database unchanged, click Refuse all notifications.
Creating a Synchronization Process To create a synchronization process: 1. From the Synchronizations or Synchronizations > Edit process screens, click New process.
3
The Create process screen displays (Figure 8.38 on page 297).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
296
DKB Management
Figure 8.38: Create process Screen
2. In the Reference archive field, enter the path and filename to the archive file to access during the process. Click Browse to search for the archive file. 3. Click Submit.
Managing Device and DKB Rights The Global rights screen allows you to manage rights affecting all devices and data in the Device Knowledge Database. NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to manage these rights. You may also
manage only those rights already granted to you. For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Granting Device and DKB Rights To grant rights: 1. From the Device menu, Select Rights > Rights.
3
The Rights screen displays (Figure 8.39 on page 298).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
297
DKB Management
Figure 8.39: Rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of each right, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17. 3. From the Groups list, select the groups that will benefit from selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3
The rights and their associated groups are displayed on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Device and DKB Rights To remove device and DKB rights: 1. Click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to revoke.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
298
9
Delivery Management
This chapter contains the following information: Managing Categories ............................................................................................. Viewing Categories ................................................................................................ Searching Categories ............................................................................................. Creating a New Category........................................................................................ Editing a Category ................................................................................................. Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... Managing Offers .................................................................................................... Viewing Offers ...................................................................................................... Searching Offers ................................................................................................... Creating a New Offer ............................................................................................. Editing an Offer..................................................................................................... Managing Global Offer Rights .................................................................................. Managing Download Codes ..................................................................................... Deleting an Offer................................................................................................... Managing Bundles ................................................................................................. Viewing Bundles .................................................................................................... Searching Bundles ................................................................................................. Creating a Bundle.................................................................................................. Editing a Bundle .................................................................................................... Deleting a Bundle .................................................................................................. Downloading a Bundle............................................................................................ Creating a Bundle Bulk Process ............................................................................... Viewing Popular Downloads .................................................................................... Managing Triggers ................................................................................................. Searching Triggers................................................................................................. Managing Subscriptions.......................................................................................... Editing or Deleting a Subscription ............................................................................ Editing or Deleting a Subscription ............................................................................ Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights........................................................................ Managing Content Topics ........................................................................................ Viewing Topics ...................................................................................................... Searching Topics ................................................................................................... Creating a New Topic ............................................................................................. Editing a Topic ...................................................................................................... Deleting a Topic .................................................................................................... Managing Topic Rights............................................................................................ Publishing Topics ................................................................................................... Managing Content Systems..................................................................................... Viewing Content Systems ....................................................................................... Searching Content Systems .................................................................................... Creating a New Content System .............................................................................. Editing a Content System ....................................................................................... Deleting a Content System .....................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
300 300 302 302 304 309 310 310 312 312 314 334 335 336 337 337 339 339 341 355 355 357 362 363 364 365 366 366 367 368 368 370 370 372 377 377 379 381 381 382 382 384 385
299
Delivery Management
This chapter describes the Catalog and Content portions of the Delivery menu, which allow you to manage all elements used in the delivery service logic and delivery content. For additional information about the System management and Tracking portions of the Delivery menu, see “System Configuration” on page 386.
Managing Categories Categories allow you to organize downloaded items and present them on a user’s Content Manager interface, providing users with a method of navigation through which to browse offers. Categories are associated to offers and bundles, and can differ between services. NOTE: One category is always associated to a parent front-office service.
Dynamic categories are associated to bundles using dynamic information provided when creating or editing a category. When the scheduled association time is reached, all bundles that were previously associated to the category are disassociated, allowing new bundles to become associated with the category. For more information about dynamic category information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304. NOTE: To associate a category with a bundle, you must first edit the bundle to which the
category is to be associated. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
Viewing Categories To view categories: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Categories.
3 The Categories > Filters screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Categories” on page 302. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all categories.
• The Categories screen displays (Figure 9.1 on page 301). Categories are listed by each service on the end-user interface.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
300
Delivery Management
Figure 9.1: Categories Screen
The Categories screen displays the following information:
• Full name — The full name of the category. Click a category name to view or modify the category. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.
• Type — The category type. • Description — A short description of the category (if available). • End user service — The front-office service associated with the category. Using the Categories Screen The Categories screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Categories screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Full name column, click a category to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 302.
• Click Delete category to remove all selected categories. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 309.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
301
Delivery Management
Searching Categories The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of categories specific to that criteria. To manage category filters: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click Edit filters.
3 The Categories > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.2: Categories > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Category To create a new category: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click New category. NOTE: The New category function is also available when searching for or editing a
category. For more information, see “Searching Categories” on page 302 and “Editing a Category” on page 304.
3 The Create category screen displays (Figure 9.3 on page 303).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
302
Delivery Management
Figure 9.3: Create category Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select a front-office service with which to associate the category. The category is then accessible through only the service selected here. 3. From the Parent category list, select a parent category (if applicable). 4. In the Name field, enter a name for the category. Two categories can have the same name as long as they have two different parent categories. 5. From the Type list, select the type of category to create: keyword, default, or headline. 6. In the Description field, enter a short description for the category (optional). 7. Check the Dynamic box to apply dynamic-related data to the category. If checked, this category is to be scheduled for dynamic association with one or more bundles. If not checked, you must edit bundles individually in order to associate the category. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• If the category is dynamic, define the maximum number of delivery bundles and timeslots for the dynamic category in the Delivery bundles max count field.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
303
Delivery Management
• Set a schedule for the dynamic category. Check the “repetitive” option if you wish to repeat the schedule several times; otherwise, the category is associated only once. For example: To associate this category each day at 8 AM, from the Hour list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked. To associate this category on the first day of the month only when the first day is a Monday, from the Day of the month list, select “1” and from the Day of the week list, select “Monday”. 8. Click Submit.
3 The Edit category screen displays (Figure 9.4), allowing you to view or modify the new category.
Editing a Category To modify a category: 1. From the List categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click the name of a category to modify. NOTE: The Edit category screen also displays immediately after creating a new category.
3 The Details tab on the Edit category screen displays.
Figure 9.4: Edit category Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit category screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New category to create a category. For more information, see “Creating a New Category” on page 302.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
304
Delivery Management
• Click Delete to delete the edited category. For more information, see “Deleting a Category” on page 309.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general category details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 305.
• Click the Data for dynamic category tab to view or modify dynamic data applied to the category. For more information, see “Using the Data For Dynamic Category Tab” on page 305.
• Click the MetaData tab to view or modify metadata information associated with the category. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 307.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit category screen allows you to view or modify a category’s general information, such as the parent category, category name, or description as necessary. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Data For Dynamic Category Tab NOTE: The Data for dynamic category tab applies only when the Dynamic check box is
checked.
The Data for dynamic category tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 9.5 on page 306) allows you to view or modify any dynamic data specified for the category.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
305
Delivery Management
Figure 9.5: Edit category Screen — Data for dynamic category Tab
The Data for dynamic category tab allows you to modify the following information:
• Dynamic — Check the box to dynamically associate the category with one or more bundles. NOTE: The Data for dynamic category tab does not apply to non-dynamic
categories. If the category is to be non-dynamic, skip this section. For information about associating non-dynamic categories with bundles, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• Delivery bundle max count — Specify the maximum number of delivery bundles for the dynamic category.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
306
Delivery Management
• Repetitive — Check the box to repeat the dynamic association schedule. If the box is unchecked, the assocation will occur only once.
• Specify the times and dates on which the dynamic association is to occur. For example: To associate this category each day at 8 AM, from the Hour list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked. To associate this category on the first day of the month only when the first day is a Monday, from the Day of the month list, select “1” and from the Day of the week list, select “Monday”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
• Bundle offer — The category is dynamically associated with bundles belonging to the offer selected here (optional).
• Bundle categories — The category is dynamically associated with bundles associated with the categories selected here (optional). Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple bundle categories.
• Bundle reference date order — The category is dynamically associated with bundles having reference dates that meet the criteria specified here (optional). If a bundle reference date order was specified, define the bundle dates to include. Check the Disable boxes to include all reference dates.
• Popularity type — The category is dynamically associated with bundles having a popularity type selected here (optional). Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit category screen allows you to view any metadata associated with the edited category. You can search for metadata by language and type.
Figure 9.6: Edit category Screen — MetaData Tab
In addition to searching metadata by language and type, the MetaData tab allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New meta data to create metadata for the category. For more information, see “Creating Metadata” below.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
307
Delivery Management
• If metadata exists for the category, a list displays. Click a metadata type to view or modify. For more information, see “Editing Metadata” on page 309.
• Click Delete meta data to delete selected metadata from the category. For more information, see “Deleting Metadata” on page 309. Creating Metadata To create metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create meta data screen displays.
Figure 9.7: Create meta data Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of metadata to create.
3 The Create meta data screen refreshes and displays fields specific to the type selected.
• textdescription — A metadata type made up of a text message. When selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language and enter a text description for the metadata.
• picture_description — A metadata type that includes a picture file. When selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language, enter a text description, and locate the picture file to include in the metadata.
• name — A metadata type that includes a name. When selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language and enter a name for the metadata. 3. Click Submit when finished.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
308
Delivery Management
Editing Metadata To view or modify existing metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen, click a metadata type to edit.
3 The Edit metadata screen displays. NOTE: Metadata information that can be updated depends on the metadata type selected
from the MetaData tab. For more information on metadata types, see “Creating Metadata” on page 308.
2. Make changes as necessary, and click Submit when finished. Deleting Metadata To delete metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 9.6 on page 307), check the box next to one or more listed metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all listed metadata. 2. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected category meta data?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion.
Deleting a Category NOTE: Deleting a category will not delete associated bundles.
To delete a category: 1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), check the box next to one or more categories to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all categories. 2. Click Delete category.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected categories?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited categories by clicking Delete category on the Edit
category screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
309
Delivery Management
Managing Offers Offers are packages of items that can be downloaded by users that are associated to authorized groups and compatible devices. Offers are composed of the following:
• Bundles — The actual items that can be ordered by users. Each bundle defines the content to be downloaded (through Topics), the method by which they are formatted (using patterns), and which delivery scenario is to be used (through Session sequences).
• Triggers — Define when bundles should be delivered. Viewing Offers To view all authorized offers and their associated bundles: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Offers.
3 The Offers > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all offers. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Offers” on page 312.
Figure 9.8: Offers Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
310
Delivery Management
The Offers screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the offer. Click an offer name to view or modify the offer. For more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
• Description — A short description of the offer (if available). • Application Id — The application ID used to deliver contents from the offer. • End-user service — The front-office service associated with the offer. • Status — The status of the offer. Values include Published (can be downloaded), Not Validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the offer was Published, but has since been deleted).
• Technical — Indicates whether or not the offer is technical. A technical offer is an internal offer, and is linked only to technical bundles. Technical offers and bundles are used for things such as passwords, activation codes, credit notifications, or any other kind of “dynamic” content based upon a user’s profile. Technical offers are not accessible from storefronts. For more information about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
Using the Offers Screen The Offers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Offers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click an offer to edit. For more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
• Click New offer to create a new offer. For more information, see “Creating a New Offer” on page 312.
• Click Delete offer to remove all selected offers. For more information, see “Deleting an Offer” on page 336.
• Click Global end-users rights to manage users rights affecting all offers. For more information, see “Managing Global Offer Rights” on page 334.
• Click Manage download codes to export default SMS download codes associated with one or several offers. For more information, see “Managing Download Codes” on page 335.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
311
Delivery Management
Searching Offers The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of offers specific to that criteria. To manage offer filters: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click Edit filters.
3 The Offers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.9: Offers > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Offer To create a new offer: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click New offer.
3 The Create offer screen displays (Figure 9.10 on page 313). NOTE: The New offer function is also available when searching for or editing an offer. For
more information, see “Searching Offers” on page 312 and “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
312
Delivery Management
Figure 9.10: Create offer Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the offer. No two offers can have the same name. 3. In the Description field, enter a short description for the offer (optional). 4. From the End-user service list, select front-office service with which to associate the offer. Only authorized group users of the selected this service will be able to access the offer. 5. From the Application ID list, select an ID used to deliver messages. Available IDs are retrieved from messaging credentials associated to the selected front-office service. 6. From the Status list, select a status for the offer. Values include Draft or Not Validated. NOTE: Offers can be published only if they contain at least one published bundle.
7. Check the Technical box to indicate whether the offer is technical. 8. Click Submit when finished.
3 The Details tab on the Edit offer screen displays, allowing you to modify the new offer.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
313
Delivery Management
Editing an Offer To edit a offer: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click the name of an offer to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit offer screen displays. NOTE: The Edit offer screen also displays immediately after creating a new offer.
Figure 9.11: Edit offer Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Offer Screen From the Edit offer screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New offer to create a new offer. For more information about creating an offer, see “Creating a New Offer” on page 312.
• Click Delete to remove the edited offer. For more information about deleting offers, see “Deleting an Offer” on page 336.
• Click Manage download codes to export SMS download codes for the edited offer. For more information, see “Managing Download Codes” on page 335.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify offer details. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 315.
• Click the Bundle templates tab to manage bundle templates associated with the offer. For more information about managing bundles, see “Using the Bundle Templates Tab” on page 315.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
314
Delivery Management
• Click the Offer capabilities tab to manage devices compatible with the offer. For more information about viewing compatible devices, see “Viewing Offer Compatibilities” on page 330.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the offer. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 331.
• Click the End-user rights tab to manage front-office group rights on the edited offer. For more information, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332.
• Click the Administration rights tab to manage back-office group rights on the edited offer. For more information, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.11 on page 314) allows you to modify the following details about the selected offer:
• Name — The unique name of the offer. No two offers can have the same name. • Description — A short description for the offer (optional). • End-user service — The front-office service associated with the offer (cannot be modified).
• Application ID — The ID used to deliver messages. Available IDs are retrieved from messaging credentials associated to the selected end-user service.
• Status — The status of the offer. Status values include: • Published — offer can be downloaded • Draft/Not validated — offer cannot be downloaded • Deprecated — offer was Published, but has since been deleted NOTE: The offer can be published only if it contains at least one published bundle.
• Technical — Indicates whether the offer is technical. For a full description of a technical offer, see “Viewing Offers” on page 310.
Using the Bundle Templates Tab The Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.12 on page 316) allows you to manage the bundle templates used with the offer. A bundle template is used to automatically create new bundles after a topic is created. A bundle template contains all useful bundle information, delivery triggers, and topic filters. Topic filters determine whether to include or exclude newly-created topics for which to generate bundles. Delivery triggers are then defined in the bundle template and associated to the new bundle.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
315
Delivery Management
Figure 9.12: Edit offer Screen — Bundle templates Tab
The Bundle templates tab displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the bundle template. Click a name to view or modify the bundle template. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Categories — The names of the categories linked to a bundle template. • Content system — The content system used to filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the listed content system.
• Session sequence — The session sequence linked to a bundle template. • Status — The status of the bundle template. Values include: Validated (enables automatic bundle creation) or Draft. The Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bundles tab, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a bundle template to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle template. For more information about creating a bundle, see “Creating a Bundle Template” on page 316.
• Click Delete bundle to remove the edited bundle template. For more information about deleting bundles, see “Deleting a Bundle Template” on page 330.
• Click Published to change the status of selected bundle templates to Published. Creating a Bundle Template To create a bundle template: 1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen, click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle template screen displays (Figure 9.13 on page 317).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
316
Delivery Management
Figure 9.13: Create bundle template Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the bundle template. 3. From the Content system list, select a content system to use to filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the content system selected here. 4. From the Topic type list, select a topic type to use to filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is of the type selected here. 5. In the Bundle name template field, enter the naming convention the bundle template will use to name new bundles. Possible parameters include:
• $topic.name — names the bundle after the topic that triggers bundle creation • $topic.id — names the bundle after the topic ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
317
Delivery Management
• $topic.contentSystem — names the bundle after the content system ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.type — names the bundle after the type of topic that triggers bundle creation • $topic.contentBundleType — names the bundle after the content template of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.categories — names the bundle after the content categories of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.fetch count — names the bundle after the fetch count of the topic that triggers bundle creation 6. From the Session sequence list, select a sequence that defines how the contents in the bundle template are delivered. 7. From the Bundle status list, select the status of newly created bundles. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded). 8. Check the Technical box to indicate whether bundles created using the bundle template are technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337. 9. From the Categories list, select one or more categories to associate when bundles are created. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. 10. In the Reference date field, enter the reference date for each bundle created using the template. The reference date is the date criteria by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. 11. Click Submit.
3 The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen displays allowing you to modify the bundle template. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318. Editing a Bundle Template To edit a bundle template: 1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen, click the name of a bundle template to edit.
3 The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen displays (Figure 9.14 on page 319). NOTE: The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen also displays immediately
after creating a new bundle template.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
318
Delivery Management
Figure 9.14: Edit bundle template Screen — General Tab
From the Edit bundle template screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New template to create a new bundle template. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle Template” on page 316.
• Click Delete template to delete the edited bundle template. For more information, see “Deleting a Bundle Template” on page 330.
• Click the General tab to modify general information about the bundle. For more information, see “Using the General Tab” on page 319.
• Click the Topic details tab to modify topics associated with the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Topic Details Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Topic filters tab to search for topics. For more information, see “Using the Topic Filters Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Bundle Details tab to manage for the bundle template. For more information, see “Using the Bundle Details Tab” on page 321.
• Click the Content templates tab to manage content templates associated with the edited bundle template. For more information, see “Using the Content Templates Tab” on page 323.
• Click the Triggers on content tab to manage “on content” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Trigger On Content Tab” on page 324.
• Click the Triggers on message tab to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers on Message Tab” on page 325.
• Click the Triggers on schedule tab to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab” on page 326. Using the General Tab. The General tab (Figure 9.14) allows you to change the name and status of the bundle template.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
319
Delivery Management
Using the Topic Details Tab. The Topic Details tab (Figure 9.15) allows you to manage topics associated with the bundle template. Topics act as “content selectors” to retrieve contents from the “content” repository or from other content systems. When the bundle delivery is triggered, Content Manager initiates the delivery of all topics associated to the bundle template and compatible with the recipient device. Topics are ordered within a bundle to indicate which topic is delivered first. The delivery sequence of different topics is defined by the session sequence associated with the bundle. Each topic is associated with one or several patterns that define how bundle contents are converted to deliverable contents.
Figure 9.15: Edit bundle template Screen — Topic details Tab
1. From the Content system list, select a content system by which the template will filter topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the content system selected here. 2. From the Topic type list, select whether the topic is linked to a bundleid (content) or category (content category). When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is of the type selected here. 3. Click Submit when finished. Using the Topic Filters Tab. The Topic filters tab allows you to specify criteria by which to associate topics with the bundle template. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your associations. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
320
Delivery Management
Figure 9.16: Edit bundle template Screen— Topic filters Tab
Using the Bundle Details Tab. The Bundle Details tab (Figure 9.17 on page 322) allows you to view or modify bundle template details.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
321
Delivery Management
Figure 9.17: Edit bundle template Screen — Bundle Details Tab
The Bundle Details tab allows you to view or modify the following details of the associated bundle template:
• Name template — The naming convention used by the template to name newly created bundles. Possible parameters include:
• $topic.name — names the bundle after the topic that triggers bundle creation • $topic.id — names the bundle after the topic ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.contentSystem — names the bundle after the content system ID of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.type — names the bundle after the type of topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.contentBundleType — names the bundle after the content template of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.categories — names the bundle after the content categories of the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.fetch count — names the bundle after the fetch count of the topic that triggers bundle creation
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
322
Delivery Management
• Session sequence — This sequence defines how the contents in a bundle are delivered.
• Bundle status — The status of created bundles. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded).
• Technical — Indicates whether bundles created using the template are technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
• Categories — Select one or more categories to associate with the bundles created using the template. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• Reference date — The date by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. • Enable trigger on demand — Check this box to activate “on demand” triggers for the bundle. Click Submit to save any changes. Using the Content Templates Tab. The Content templates tab allows you to manage content templates associated with the bundle template.
Figure 9.18: Edit bundle template Screen — Content templates Tab
To add a content template: 1. Select one or more templates from the Available content templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. 2. Click Add.
3 The selected templates display in the Associated content templates list.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
323
Delivery Management
To remove a content template: 1. Select one or more templates from the Associated content templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. 2. Click Remove.
3 The selected templates display in the Available content templates list. Using the Trigger On Content Tab. The Trigger on content tab (Figure 9.19 on page 324) allows you to manage “on content” triggers (“push” triggers) for the bundle template. This trigger is activated when new content is detected by one of the topics associated with the bundle template. Only one “on content” trigger can be configured per bundle.
Figure 9.19: Edit bundle template Screen — Trigger on content Tab
Enabling an “on content” Trigger To enable an “on content” trigger: 1. Check the Enabled box to activate the trigger. To disable the trigger, uncheck the Enabled box. 2. Select the following information for the trigger:
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include:
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
324
Delivery Management
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously • Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule target sequences only).
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 3. Click Submit when finished. Using the Triggers on Message Tab. The Triggers on message tab (Figure 9.20) allows you to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated when a message meets certain rules and is sent or received on the application ID associated with the parent offer. The Triggers on message tab allows you to define the rules to be used to activate the bundle. You can define several triggers or “sets of rules” for the same bundle. To initiate a delivery, a message must meet ALL of the rules contained in one of the triggers. In this case, the trigger is activated even if the message does not meet the rules of the other triggers.
Figure 9.20: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on message Tab
The Triggers on message tab displays the filter criteria defined for existing triggers.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
325
Delivery Management
Creating an “on message” Trigger To create a new trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click New trigger.
3 The Create trigger screen displays, allowing you to define the filter criteria for the trigger. For information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Click Create trigger when finished. Editing an “on message” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Edit trigger next to the trigger to edit. 3 The Edit trigger on message screen displays, allowing you to modify the filter criteria for the trigger. For more information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Make changes as necessary. To delete an existing trigger filter, click the filter to remove.
next to the
3. Click Submit to save any changes. Deleting an “on message” Trigger To delete a trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Remove trigger next to the trigger to delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected trigger?” displays. 2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab. The Triggers on schedule tab (Figure 9.21 on page 327) allows you to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle template. These triggers are activated at predefined times, according to a certain schedule.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
326
Delivery Management
Figure 9.21: Edit bundle template Screen — Triggers on schedule Tab
Creating an “on schedule” Trigger To create an “on schedule” trigger: 1. Enter the following information on the Triggers on schedule tab:
• Trigger name — The name of the new trigger. • Repetitive — Check this option to repeat the schedule. Otherwise, the trigger is activated only once. Select the times when the trigger should be activated. For example, to trigger a delivery each day at 8:00 AM: from the Hours list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked. To trigger a delivery on the first Monday of each month: from the Day of week list, select “Monday”, from the Day of the month list, select “1”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
327
Delivery Management
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include: • Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value) • Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously
• Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule target sequences only).
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 2. Click Create trigger when finished.
3 The new trigger is listed on the right side of the tab. Editing an “on schedule” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the list of existing triggers, click the name of the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on schedule screen displays (Figure 9.22 on page 329).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
328
Delivery Management
Figure 9.22: Edit trigger on schedule Screen
The Edit trigger on schedule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete trigger on schedule to remove the edited trigger. • Make changes to the trigger as necessary, and click Submit when finished. Deleting an “on schedule” Trigger To delete an existing trigger: 1. From the Edit trigger on schedule screen, click Delete trigger on schedule.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
329
Delivery Management
Deleting a Bundle Template To delete a bundle template: 1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.12 on page 316), check the boxes next to the bundle templates to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all templates. 2. Click Delete bundle templates.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected bundle templates?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited bundle template by clicking Delete template on the
Edit bundle template screen.
Viewing Offer Compatibilities The Offer compatibilities tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to search for and list all devices that are compatible with the offer. A device is marked as compatible if at least one associated bundle is compatible.
Figure 9.23: Edit offer Screen — Offer compatibilities Tab
1. From the Feature list, select the feature for which to search. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for which to search. 3. From the Brands list, select one or more device brands for which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
330
Delivery Management
4. Specify whether or not to display inherited profiles. 5. Click Show filter.
3 Results of the search display at the bottom of the Offer compatibilities tab. This information is view-only.
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to review any metadata that may be associated with the offer, and create or delete metadata. You can search for metadata by language and type. Metadata types include the following:
• Billing default — default billing information (short code and price by country and operator)
• Billing MO — billing information used on sent MO (short code and price by country and operator)
• Billing MT — not currently used • Billing IVR — billing information used with IVR (short code and price by country and operator) Creating Metadata. To create metadata for an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen, click New meta data from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen.
3 The Create metadata screen displays. Select a metadata type and language, then click Submit. Editing Metadata. To edit existing metadata for an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Deleting Metadata. To delete metadata from an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected offer meta data?” displays. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
331
Delivery Management
Using the End-Users Rights Tab The End-users rights tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to define which front-office groups can receive the selected offer contents. For information about granting offer rights affecting all offers, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333. NOTE: Only those front-office groups attached to services on which you have rights are
listed.
Figure 9.24: Edit offer Screen — End-users rights Tab
Adding End-User Offer Rights The “buy offer” right is the only right available on the End-users rights tab. This right allows groups to access and download the offer’s contents through any of the bundle triggers defined for the offer. To add the “buy offer” right to front-office groups: 1. Check the box next to the “buy offer” right. 2. From the Groups list, select one or more groups to which to grant the “buy offer” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3 The groups granted the “buy-offer” right are listed on the right side of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
332
Delivery Management
Revoking End-User Offer Rights To remove the “buy offer” right from end-user groups: 1. From the End-users rights tab on the Edit offer screen, click the from which to revoke the “buy offer” right.
next to each group
Using the Administration Rights Tab The Administration rights tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to define the groups to receive the edited offer. The “Read catalog item” right is the only right available on the Administration rights tab. This right allows back-office groups to access and download the offer’s contents using any of the bundle triggers defined for the offer.
Figure 9.25: Edit offer Screen — Administration rights Tab
Adding Back-Office Offer Rights To define the groups receiving the edited offer: 1. Check the box next to the “Read catalog item” right. 2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the “Read catalog item” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 3. Click Add right.
3 The groups granted the “Read catalog item” right are listed on the right side of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
333
Delivery Management
Revoking Back-Office Offer Rights To remove rights to the offer: 1. From the Administration rights tab on the Edit offer screen, click the group from which to revoke the “Read catalog item” right.
next to each
Managing Global Offer Rights The End-users rights screen allows you to define which groups receive all offers. For information about granting access to a single offer, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332. The “Buy offer” right is the only right available on the End-users rights screen. This right allows back-office groups to access any offer and any associated content.
Adding Global Offer Rights To grant groups access to all offers: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click Global end-users rights.
3 The End-users rights screen displays. NOTE: Only those front-office groups on which you have rights are listed.
Figure 9.26: End-users rights Screen
2. Check the box next to the “buy offer” right. 3. Select the groups to which to grant the “buy offer” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
334
Delivery Management
4. Click Add right.
3 The groups granted the “buy-offer” right are listed on the right side of the tab. Revoking Global Offer Rights To remove group access to all offers: 1. From the End-users rights screen, click the the “buy offer” right.
next to each group from which to revoke
Managing Download Codes To export default (automatically generated) SMS download codes associated to one or several offers: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), check the boxes next to the offers for which to download SMS codes. 2. Click Manage download codes.
3 The Manage download codes screen displays. NOTE: You can also manage download codes related to an edited offer by clicking Manage
download codes on the Edit offer screen. For more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
The Manage download codes screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Refresh to update the list of export files. • Click Launch new export to initiate a new export. Content Manager generates SMS codes for the selected offers and their child bundles and stores them in a .csv file for download.
• To delete existing export files, check the boxes next to the files to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all files. Click Delete files.
• Click Download next to the export file to download.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
335
Delivery Management
Export File Formats The format for each export file is as follows: one line per device and per bundle, with columns separated by commas “,”. The following table defines the export file columns: Field
Type
Offer ID
String
ID (internal object key) of the parent offer of 0000010810FD309E-00325 the bundle
Description
Example
Offer name
String
Name of the parent offer
Bundle ID
String
ID (internal object key) of the bundle
0000010810FDD700-00340
Bundle name
String
Name of the bundle
GlobalBundle
Free offer
Device brand
String
Brand of the device
Motorola
Device model
String
Model of the device
C650
Terminal ID
Integer
Internal terminal ID of the device
570004
Simple SMS code
String
Simple SMS code, followed by “|”
0a4m57|
Bundle SMS code
Integer
Offer SMS code
String
Bundle/Brand (or alias)/Model (or alias) GlobalBundle m c650| Globalcodes. Each possible code is separated by “|”. Bundle motorola c650| Offer/Brand (or alias)/Model (or alias) codes. free offer m c650|free offer Each possible code is separated by “|”. motorola c650|
Deleting an Offer Deleting an offer results in the deletion of all attached bundle templates. NOTE: If you delete an active offer, its status is switched to Deprecated. If the offer is not
active, it is removed immediately.
To delete an offer: 1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), check the box next to one or more offers to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all offers. 2. Click Delete offer.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected offers?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited offer by clicking Delete offer on the Edit offer
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
336
Delivery Management
Managing Bundles From the Delivery menu, you can view, edit, create, and delete delivery bundles.
Viewing Bundles To view a list of bundles: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Bundles.
3 The Bundles > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all bundles. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Bundles” on page 339.
3 The Bundles screen displays.
Figure 9.27: Bundles Screen
The Bundles screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the bundle. Click a bundle name to view or modify the bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• Numeric alias — A digital identification number associated with the bundle. • Session sequence — The session sequence associated with the bundle. Possible sequences include:
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
337
Delivery Management
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously • Status — The status of the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the bundle was Published, but has since been deleted).
• Technical — A technical bundle is, for example, linked to a session sequence whose type is Workflow-based. A trigger is defined in the bundle, and when a SMS-MO is received and triggers this bundle, a delivery session is created and follows the Workflow-based sequence. This sequence can then create a new session and send contents by sending another bundle to the user. In effect, the technical bundle is not used to send contents directly to a user, it is used as a SMS-MO dispatcher.
Using the Bundles Screen The Bundles screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bundles screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• On the right side of the table, click Download to download the corresponding bundle. For more information, see “Using the Popularity Tab” on page 353.
• On the right side of the table, click Bulk process to create a bulk process for the corresponding bundle. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle Bulk Process” on page 357.
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle. For more information, see“Creating a Bundle” on page 339.
• Click Delete bundle to remove all selected bundles. For more information, see “Deleting a Bundle” on page 355.
• Click Publish to enable download of all selected bundles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
338
Delivery Management
Searching Bundles The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of bundles specific to that criteria. To manage bundle filters: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Edit filters.
3 The Bundles > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.28: Bundles > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a Bundle To create a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle screen displays (Figure 9.29 on page 340).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
339
Delivery Management
Figure 9.29: Create Bundle Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the bundle. 3. From the Session sequence list, select a sequence method that defines how the contents in the bundle are delivered. For more about session sequences, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337. 4. From the Status list, select a status for the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded). 5. From the Categories list, select one or more categories to associate with the bundle. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. 6. Check the Technical box to indicate whether the bundle is technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337. 7. If necessary, modify the date in the Reference date field. The reference date is the date criteria by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. For more information about dynamic categories, see “Editing a Category” on page 304. 8. Click Submit when finished.
3 The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays allowing you to modify the new bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
340
Delivery Management
Editing a Bundle To edit a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen, click the name of a bundle to edit from the Name column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays. NOTE: The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen also displays immediately after creating
a new bundle.
Figure 9.30: Edit bundle Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit bundle screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle” on page 339.
• Click Delete bundle to delete the edited bundle. For more information, see “Deleting a Bundle” on page 355.
• Click Download to download the edited bundle. • Click the Details tab to modify general information about the bundle. For more information, see “Using the General Tab” on page 319.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
341
Delivery Management
• Click the Topics tab to modify topics associated with the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Topic Details Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Bundle capabilities tab to manage device capabilities for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Bundle Details Tab” on page 321.
• Click the Triggers on message tab to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers on Message Tab” on page 348.
• Click the Triggers on schedule tab to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab” on page 348.
• Click the Triggers on content tab to manage “on content” triggers for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Content Tab” on page 352.
• Click the Popularity tab to calculate the download totals for the bundle. For more information, see “Using the Popularity Tab” on page 353.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the bundle. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 354.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab (Figure 9.30 on page 341) allows you to modify the following details of the bundle:
• Id — The internal identification number assigned to the bundle (cannot be modified). • Name — The name of the bundle. • Numeric alias — The numeric alias automatically generated for the bundle by Content Manager and used for the default MO interface (cannot be modified).
• Session sequence — The session sequence associated with the bundle. Possible sequences include:
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Failsafe: This sequence is used to process WAP content and resend it as long as a download has not started.
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously • Categories — Categories associated with the bundle. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• Status — The status of the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the offer was Published, but has since been deleted).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
342
Delivery Management
• Technical — Indicates whether the bundle is technical (cannot be modified). For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
• Reference date — The date by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. • Enable trigger on demand — Check this box to activate “on demand” triggers for the bundle. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Topics Tab The Topics tab allows you to manage topics associated with the bundle. Topics act as “content selectors” to retrieve contents from the “content” repository or from other content systems. When the bundle delivery is triggered, Content Manager initiates the delivery of all topics associated to the bundle and compatible with the recipient device. Topics are ordered within a bundle to indicate which topic is delivered first. The delivery sequence of different topics is defined by the session sequence associated with the bundle. Each topic is associated with one or several patterns that define how bundle contents are converted to deliverable contents.
Figure 9.31: Edit bundle Screen — Topics Tab
If there are topics currently associated with the bundle, the Topics tab displays the following information:
• Index — When a bundle is activated by a trigger, the first topic is activated, followed by the second, and third, and so on. The index is the number order on which a topic is activated. To reorder associated topics, select a topic from the list, then click Move up or Move down to change the order.
• Topic Name — The name of the topic. Click a topic name to edit topic pattern options. For more information, see “Managing Topic Patterns” on page 344.
• Topic patterns — The pattern used by a topic to generate a message from the content that the topic has selected.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
343
Delivery Management
Adding a Topic to a Bundle To add a topic: 1. From the Topics tab on the Edit bundle screen, click Add topic.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays. 2. Enter the criteria on which to search topics. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 3. From the list of topics, click Add topic next to each topic to add to the bundle.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays, allowing you to manage the selected topic’s patterns. For more information, see “Managing Topic Patterns” on page 344. Managing Topic Patterns Topic patterns are used by topics to generate a message from the content selected by the topic. Several patterns may be selected and placed in order for the same topic. When content is to be sent to a device, Content Manager automatically selects the first pattern compatible with the device. NOTE: Only those patterns compatible with the content templates associated with the
current topic are used.
To manage topic patterns: 1. From the Topics tab on the Edit bundle screen (Figure 9.15 on page 320), click the name of a currently associated topic.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays (Figure 9.32 on page 345). NOTE: The Topic and message patterns screen also displays immediately after adding a
topic to a bundle.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
344
Delivery Management
Figure 9.32: Topic and message patterns Screen
The Topic and message patterns screen displays the following view-only information about the topic:
• Name — The name of the topic. • Content system — The associated content system. • Type — The type of topic. Either of the following types may display: • By content id — The topic is associated to a specific content on selected content system. If the topic is linked to a content, the following information displays: • Content — The name of the content associated with the topic.
• Validity start — The date on which the content becomes valid. • Validity end — The date on which the content becomes invalid. • Content template — The content type. • By category — The topic automatically selects the last published content in selected categories. If the topic is linked to categories, the following information displays: • Content categories — Names of categories linked to the topic.
• Content template — The content type. • Number of fetched content — The number of contents retrieved by the topic simultaneously.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
345
Delivery Management
Currently associated message patterns display the following information at the bottom of the screen:
• Index — The index number relates to pattern order. When the topic is activated by a trigger, the first pattern is used to format the content retrieved by the topic. If the pattern is not compatible with the target device, the next pattern is used, and so on.
• Pattern name — The name of the pattern. Click a pattern name to view or modify the pattern. For more information, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399. In addtion, the Topic and message patterns screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit topic to edit the selected topic. For more information, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372.
• Click View topic capabilities to list all devices compatible with the edited topic. For more information, see “Using the Topic Capabilities Tab” on page 374.
• From the Pattern name list, select a pattern and click Add to add the pattern to the topic. To remove a pattern from the topic, click Remove next to the pattern to remove.
• Select an index number from the list of associated patterns and click Move up or Move down to change the order of authorized patterns.
Using the Bundle Compatibilities Tab The Bundle compatibilities tab (Figure 9.33 on page 347) allows you to manage devices compatible with the bundle. Devices are marked as compatible if at least one of the patterns and associated topics is compatible. This tab displays a list of compatible device features, models, and brands.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
346
Delivery Management
Figure 9.33: Edit bundle Screen — Bundle compatibilities Tab (With Results)
1. From the Feature list, select a feature on which to conduct a search for compatible devices. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for compatible devices. 3. From the Brands list, select one or more brands on which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 4. Select whether to display inherited profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
347
Delivery Management
5. Click Show filter when finished.
3 Results of the search display at the bottom of the tab. Using the Triggers on Message Tab The Triggers on message tab allows you to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated when a message meets certain rules and is sent or received on the application ID associated with the parent offer. The Triggers on message tab allows you to define triggers, or sets of rules, to be used to activate the bundle. You can define several triggers for the same bundle. To initiate a delivery, a message must meet all of the rules contained in one of the triggers. In this case, the trigger is activated even if the message does not meet the rules of the other triggers. The Triggers on message tab displays the filter criteria defined for existing triggers. For information about using filters in Content Manager, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. Creating an “on message” Trigger NOTE: In order to activate the trigger, all rules defined in the trigger must be met.
To create a new trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click New trigger.
3 The Create trigger screen displays, allowing you to define the filter criteria for the trigger. For information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Click Create trigger. Editing an “on message” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Edit trigger next to the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on message screen displays, allowing you to modify the filter criteria for the trigger. For more information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. 2. Make changes as necessary. To delete an existing trigger filter, click the filter to remove.
next to the
Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab The Triggers on schedule tab (Figure 9.34 on page 349) allows you to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated at predefined times, according to a certain schedule.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
348
Delivery Management
Figure 9.34: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on schedule Tab
Creating an “on schedule” Trigger To create a trigger: 1. Enter the following information on the Triggers on schedule tab:
• Trigger name — The name of the new trigger. • Schedule — Select the Repetitive option to repeat the schedule. Otherwise, the trigger is activated only once. Select the times when the trigger should be activated. For example, to trigger a delivery each day at 8:00 AM: from the Hours list, select “08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and select Repetitive. To trigger a delivery on the first Monday of each month: from the Day of week list, select “Monday”, from the Day of the month list, select “1”, and select Repetitive.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
349
Delivery Management
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include: • Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed simultaneously (X = Target count value) • Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value) • Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously
• Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule target sequences only)
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 2. Click Create trigger.
3 The new trigger is listed on the right side of the tab. Editing an “on schedule” Trigger To edit an existing trigger: 1. From the list of existing triggers, click the name of the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on schedule screen displays (Figure 9.22 on page 329).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
350
Delivery Management
Figure 9.35: Edit trigger on schedule Screen
The Edit trigger on schedule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete trigger to remove the edited trigger. • Click Subscribe end-user to associate an end-user with the selected bundle and trigger.
3The Subscribe end-user screen displays. For more information, see “Editing or Deleting a Subscription” on page 366.
• Make changes to the trigger schedule as necessary, then click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
351
Delivery Management
Deleting an “on schedule” Trigger To delete a trigger: 1. From the Edit trigger on schedule screen, click Delete trigger on schedule.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected trigger?” displays. 2. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Using the Triggers On Content Tab The Triggers on content tab allows you to manage an “on content” trigger for the bundle. This trigger is activated when new content is detected by one of the topics associated with the bundle. Only one “on content” trigger can be configured per bundle.
Figure 9.36: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on content Tab
Enabling an “on content” Trigger To enable an “on content” trigger: 1. Check the Enabled box to activate the trigger. 2. Select the following information for the trigger:
• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include: • Waiting session completion — X number of operations are processed completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
352
Delivery Management
• Limit target workflow — No more than X number of operations are •
•
processed simultaneously (X = Target count value). If selected, the Target count field displays. Specify the number of operations to process here. Schedule — X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value). If selected, the Waiting time field displays. Specify the time from between each processing operation here. Simple — All operations are processed simultaneously.
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before other operations). 3. Click Submit.
Using the Popularity Tab The Popularity tab allows you to determine how to calculate the number of times the edited bundle has been downloaded over a certain period of time. Downloaded bundles are based on the number of completed delivery sessions linked to this bundle.
Figure 9.37: Edit bundle Screen — Popularity Tab
To determine how the popularity of the bundle is calculated: 1. From the Type list, select how to calculate the number of delivery sessions for the bundle: Monthly, Daily, Hourly, Weekly, Yearly, or Absolute. 2. Click Submit. To adjust the number of downloads to date, in the Count field, enter the number of downloads for the bundle, then click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
353
Delivery Management
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen allows you to review any metadata that may be associated with the offer. You can search for metadata by language and type.
Figure 9.38: Edit bundle Screen — MetaData Tab
Creating Metadata To create metadata for the bundle: From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create metadata screen displays. 1. From the Type list, select a metadata type. Additional fields available on the Create metadata screen depend on the type selected here. Metadata types include:
• Name — Displays the name of the bundle. • Text description — Displays an additional description. • Highlight — Displays the bundle as highlighted. • CM1 contentId — References the last identification for the last content system. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for the metadata. 3. Provide other information as required by the metadata type selected. Click Submit when finished. Editing Metadata To edit existing metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
354
Delivery Management
Deleting Metadata To delete metadata from a bundle: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata. 2. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected bundle meta data?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.
Deleting a Bundle To delete a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), check one or more boxes next to the bundles to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all bundles. NOTE: You can also delete edited bundles by clicking Delete bundle on the Edit bundle
screen.
2. Click Delete bundle.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected bundle(s)?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Downloading a Bundle To download a bundle: 1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Download to the right of the bundle to download. NOTE: The Download function is also available when editing a bundle. For more
information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
3 The Download Bundle screen displays (Figure 9.39 on page 356).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
355
Delivery Management
Figure 9.39: Download Bundle Screen NOTE: All information entered is optional, unless otherwise noted.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred bundle language type. 3. Check the Determine account and device from specified address for the option to restrict the download according to the timeslots set for the end user account. If checked, the screen refreshes and the Enable using user’s timeslot preferences box displays. To restrict the download to the user’s specified timeslots, check the Enable using user’s timeslot preferences box. For more information about managing end user timeslots, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84. 4. From the Address type list, select the type of receiving device address: Mobile or Mail (email). This field is required. 5. In the Address field, type the address for the receiving device. This address must be of the type selected from the Address type list, or you can specify an IMEI address when the Select device by imei box is checked. This field is required. 6. From the Brand list, select the brand of receiving device.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
356
Delivery Management
7. From the Model list, select the model of the receiving device. 8. In the Time to start field, specify when the download begins. Time format is YYYY-MMDD HH:MM:SS. 9. In the Time to live field, specify when to initiate delivery. Time format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS. 10. In the Call back URL field, specify the URL to be called once the download is successfully complete. This is useful for clients that need to perform specific tasks following a download (for example, downloading the event to their client computer). 11. From the Interface type list, select from the following types of SMS interface used to view associated codes:
• Simple interface: A SMS interface. The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is 0aXbY (where a = content type, X = delivery bundle numeric alias, b = device brand alias, and Y = the digital portion of the device model terminal ID).
• Bundle name, brand alias, model alias interface: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is UBM (where U = delivery bundle name, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Offer name, brand alias, model alias interface: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is OBM (where O = parent delivery offer name, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Bundle id, brand alias, model alias: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is UBM (where U = delivery bundle ID, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Bundle id: Used if end-user devices are not necessary (SMS text messages or MMS messages or content types compatible with a large number of devices). This simplifies the interface for end-users.
• Simple interface (short): Similar to the Simple interface, except that the content type information is not specified. 12. Click Submit when finished.
Creating a Bundle Bulk Process To create a bulk process for a bundle: 1. From right side of the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Bulk Process next to the bundle for which to create the process.
3 The Process details tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.40 on page 358).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
357
Delivery Management
Figure 9.40: Create bulk process Screen — Process details Tab
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the process. 3. From the Status list, select the status of the process. 4. From the Priority list, select the priority level of the process. 5. In the Time to start field, enter the date and time at which the process begins (format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS). 6. In the Timeout for target reporting (in milliseconds) field, enter a timeout period. 7. Click Next.
3 The Bulk action tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.41: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk action Tab
8. From the Action type list, select the method by which to deliver the bundle contents. 9. Check the Allow delaying sessions box to have the ability to delay delivery sessions.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
358
Delivery Management
10. Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.42: Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
11. From the Target type list, select the method by which to target bundle recipients. If you select By CSV file:
• From the Language list, select the preferred language of the bundle. • In the CSV File field, enter the full path and filename to the CSV file containing recipient information. Click Browse to search for the file.
• In the CSV separator field, enter the type of field separator used in the CSV file. • Check the Use meta data box if the first line of the CSV file is to be used as metadata.
• From the Encoding list, select the type of encoding. • Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.43 on page 360). If you select By group:
• From the End-user group list, select the target group. • Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.43 on page 360).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
359
Delivery Management
Figure 9.43: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk flow control strategy Tab
12. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed according to the workflow strategy defined here. 13. Click Next.
3
The Timeslots tab displays.
Figure 9.44: The Create bulk process Screen — Timeslots Tab
14. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
360
Delivery Management
15. Click Add timeslot.
3
A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen. NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the
next
to each timeslot to remove. 16. Click Next.
3
The Confirmation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.45: Create bulk process Screen — Confirmation Tab
17. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
361
Delivery Management
Viewing Popular Downloads From the Delivery menu, you can view statistics regarding the most/least downloaded delivery bundles for all services over a certain period of time. NOTE: Bundle popularity is calculated based on the number of successfully completed
delivery sessions.
To view downloads by popularity: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Popularity.
3 The Popularity screen displays.
Figure 9.46: Popularity Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of popularity ratings to view: Daily, Monthly, Weekly, Yearly, Absolute, or Hourly. Ratings listed are current, for instance, current day or current month. NOTE: The Popularity screen refreshes the list of downloads each time a selection is
made.
3. From the End-user service list, select a service from which to view downloads. 4. Select whether to display more popular or less popular bundle downloads first. 5. From the Top list, select the number of results to display: 5, 10, 15, or 20. 6. If you choose, you can specify the number of successful delivery sessions from which to calculate popularity ratings by clicking a bundle name from the list of results.
3 The Edit popularity screen displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
362
Delivery Management
7. Enter the number of successful delivery sessions, then click Submit.
3 A message displays confirming your saved changes. The new number is used in the next calculation of popularity ratings.
Managing Triggers From the Delivery menu, you can directly manage all triggers on all offers simultaneously. To manage global triggers: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Triggers.
3 The Triggers screen displays.
Figure 9.47: Triggers Screen
2. Click the type of triggers to manage:
• Triggers on message — control all defined SMS keywords NOTE: Only manually defined keywords are listed; codes that are automatically
generated are not displayed.
• Triggers on schedule — control all programmed schedules • Triggers on content — control all defined alerts • Triggers on demand — control all message (manual) triggers
3 The Filters screen for the selected trigger type displays, allowing you to view all triggers, or specify criteria for searching triggers. To view all triggers without the use of a filter, click Show table. To modify filters after displaying the table, click Edit filters. NOTE: When managing Triggers on message, you can also manage triggers by
application ID by clicking the Triggers by appId tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
363
Delivery Management
Searching Triggers The Filters screen for a selected trigger type allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of triggers specific to that criteria. To apply filters for a search, enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. The following table describes the search criteria available: Criteria Id Offer
Description Trigger ID Parent offer of the trigger
Application Id
ID used to deliver contents from the offer
Bundle
Bundle associated to the trigger
Filters
Filters associated to the trigger
Authenticated mode
Indicates whether the authenticated mode is enabled (True) or not (False).
Schedule time
Trigger schedule
Repetition Sequence type
Triggers on message
Triggers on Triggers on schedule content
Triggers on demand
3 3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3 3
3
3
3
Indicates whether the trigger is repetitive (True) or not (False).
3 3
Indicates the type of sequence used for the trigger
3
To view all triggers without the use of a filter, click Show table. Once a list of results displays, you can perform the following tasks:
• Use the pull-down menu to show a specific number of items per page — 5, 10, 15, 20, 50, 100, or 500 items per page.
• Click Refresh to update the list. • Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page. • Click Edit filters to modify filter settings for triggers. For more information, see “Searching Triggers” on page 364.
• Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters. • Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria. • Click the column headings to sort column items alphabetically (default is descending; click again to sort ascending).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
364
Delivery Management
Managing Subscriptions The Delivery menu allows you to manage front-office subscriptions to push services, for instance, subscriptions to bundles that contain triggers on content or triggers on schedule. For information about subscribing an end-user to a bundle, see “Editing an “on schedule” Trigger” on page 328 or “Enabling an “on content” Trigger” on page 324. To manage subscriptions, from the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Subscriptions.
3 The Subscriptions screen displays.
Figure 9.48: Subscriptions Screen
The Subscriptions screen allows you to search accounts to subscribe based on an enduser’s MSISDN or account alias name.
Searching Accounts by MSISDN To search by MSISDN: 1. From the Search by address tab, enter the MSISDN of the user account for which to search. 2. Click List subscriptions by end-user address.
3 If subscriptions are found, the following subscription information displays: • • • • •
Alias — The alias name for the account. Type — The address type: Mobile, Email, or Phone. Status — The account status: Active or Inactive. First name — The account holder’s first name. Last name — The account holder’s last name.
To subscribe an end-user account, click Subscribe next to the desired account.
3 A confirmation window displays. Review the information and modify if necessary, then click Ok to create the subscription, or Cancel to void the subscription.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
365
Delivery Management
Searching Accounts by Alias To search by alias: 1. From the Search by alias tab, enter the alias name of the user account for which to search. 2. Click List subscriptions by end-user alias.
3 If subscriptions are found, the following subscription information displays: • • • •
End-user alias — The alias name for the account. Status — The account status: Active or Inactive. First name — The account holder’s first name. Last name — The account holder’s last name.
To subscribe an end-user account, click Subscribe next to the desired account.
3 A confirmation window displays. Review the information and modify if necessary, then click Ok to create the subscription, or Cancel to void the subscription.
Editing or Deleting a Subscription Once an account is subscribed to one or more bundles, you can manage all active subscriptions for a specified account. To edit a subscription, you must first locate the account for which to edit subscriptions. For information about searching accounts, see “Searching Accounts by MSISDN” on page 365 and “Searching Accounts by Alias” on page 366. Once an account with subscriptions is located, you can perform the following tasks from the Subscriptions screen:
• Select one or more subscriptions from the list and click Delete subscriptions to remove the subscriptions from the account.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected subscriptions?” displays. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
• Click an Id to view the subscription options for this account, bundle, and trigger. Options available are described in “Editing or Deleting a Subscription” on page 366.
• Click a Bundle name to edit the associated bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Click the Trigger type to edit the associated trigger. For more information, see “Managing Triggers” on page 363.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
366
Delivery Management
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights The Delivery menu allows you to manage all rights on offers, bundles, and triggers associated with back-office (administrator) groups. NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups on which you have rights are
listed. You may grant only those rights you already have on offers.
To grant offer access to front-office (end-user) groups, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333. To grant rights associated with topics, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377. Granting Catalog Rights To grant catalog rights to back-office groups: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Administration rights.
3 The Administration rights screen displays.
Figure 9.49: Administration rights Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select a service from which to display associated rights. Only services on which you have rights are listed. 3. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Catalog Rights” on page 18. 4. From the Groups list, select the groups to associate with the selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
367
Delivery Management
5. Click Add right.
3 The newly granted rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the screen. Revoking Catalog Rights To revoke a right from a group, click the
next to each right to remove.
Managing Content Topics Topics are content selectors that indicate where the contents can be found for each bundle. There are two types of topics:
• By content id — The topic is associated to one published content stored on a content system. It inherits the compatibilities and validity from the content.
• By category — The topic is associated to one or several categories on a content system. It automatically selects one or several published content in these categories. When a new content is published in any category, it activates all associated “on content” triggers.
Viewing Topics To view topics: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Topics.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of topics. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Topics” on page 370.
3 The Topics screen displays a list of all topics (Figure 9.50 on page 369).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
368
Delivery Management
Figure 9.50: Topics Screen
Using the Topics Screen The Topics screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Topics screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a topic name to modify the selected topic. For more information, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372.
• Click New topic to create a new topic. For more information, see “Creating a New Topic” on page 370.
• Click Delete topics to remove all selected topics. For more information, see “Deleting a Topic” on page 377.
• Click Administration rights to manage topic rights. For more information, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377.
• Click Publish to publish selected topics, create bundles, and offers. For more information, see “Publishing Topics” on page 379.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
369
Delivery Management
Searching Topics The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of topics specific to that criteria. To manage topic filters: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click Edit filters.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.51: Topics > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Topic To create a new topic: 1. From the Topics screen, click New topic.
3 The Create topic screen displays (Figure 9.52 on page 371).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
370
Delivery Management
Figure 9.52: Create topic Screen
2. From the Content system list, select a system from where the contents is fetched for this topic. For more information about content systems, see “Managing Content Systems” on page 381. 3. From the Type list, select a topic type: by category or by content id. 4. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the topic. No two topics should have the same name. 5. If the topic type is by category:
• Select a template for the selected content. Only contents in the selected template are selected.
• Select one or more Categories available from the selected content system. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. If you select multiple categories, all contents fetched must be associated to all selected categories.
• Enter the number of contents the topic is to retrieve. • Click Create.
3The Topic compatibilities tab on the Edit topic screen displays. For information about editing a topic, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372. 6. If the topic type is by content id:
• Select a template for the content. • Click Next.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
371
Delivery Management
• A Filters screen displays allowing you to set search criteria for the content in the topic. For information about using the Filters screen, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
3The Content selection (Step 2/3) screen displays a list of all resulting content. • Click the Create topic in the table that corresponds to the desired content. Editing a Topic To edit a topic: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click the name of a topic to edit.
3 The Edit topic screen displays. NOTE: Depending on the topic type selected, one of two screens displays:
Figure 9.53: Edit topic Screen (By Content ID)
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
372
Delivery Management
Figure 9.54: Edit topic Screen (By Category)
The Edit topic screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New topic to create a new topic. For more information, see “Creating a New Topic” on page 370.
• Click Delete topic to delete the edited topic. • Click the Details tab to modify general information about the topic. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 373.
• Click the Topic capabilities tab to manage device capabilities associated with the edited topic. For more information, see “Using the Topic Capabilities Tab” on page 374.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the topic. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 376.
Using the Details Tab From the Details tab on the Edit topic screen, you can make the following changes to the edited topic:
• If the topic type is by category: • Name — The unique name of the topic. No two topics should have the same name. • Content template — The template used by the content in the topic. • Content categories — Categories of content associated with the topic. • Number of fetched contents — The number of contents that the topic should retrieve.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
373
Delivery Management
• If the topic type is by content id: • Name — The unique name of the topic. No two topics should have the same name. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Topic Capabilities Tab From the Topic capabilities tab on the Edit topic screen, you can view the devices and features compatible with the edited topic. NOTE: The information listed on the Topic capabilities tab for by content id topics is
view-only.
In the case of by category topics, compatible devices are defined manually based on their compatibility with the content type selected. By default, only devices with a feature compatible with the selected content type are listed. For by category topics, the Topic capabilities tab displays as in Figure 9.55 on page 375.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
374
Delivery Management
Figure 9.55: Edit topic Screen — Topic capabilities Tab (By Category)
1. From the Language list, select the preferred language for devices associated with the topic. 2. To search for devices by feature, check the Feature box, and select a feature from the Feature list. 3. To search for devices by brand, check the Brands box, then select one or more brands for which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands. 4. Specify whether to display or hide inherited profiles. 5. Click Show filter to view search results.
3 Results display at the bottom of the tab.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
375
Delivery Management
6. Check the boxes next to each device to associate with the topic. Check the Assign all available compatibilities box to assign all listed devices.
Using the MetaData Tab The MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen allows you to review any metadata that may be associated with the topic. Metadata is used to attach additional data to a category. You can search for metadata by language and type. Creating Metadata To create metadata for the topic: From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create metadata screen displays. 1. From the Type list, select a metadata type. Additional fields available on the Create metadata screen depend on the type selected here. Metadata types include:
• Preview — A preview of the content. • Preview URL — An external URL leading to a content preview. • Text description — An additional description of the topic. • Author — author information • Copyright — copyright information • Content Id — The content identifier for the last content system. 2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for the metadata. 3. Provide other information as required by the metadata type selected. Click Submit when finished. Editing Metadata To edit existing metadata: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
376
Delivery Management
Deleting Metadata To delete metadata from a topic: 1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata. 2. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected topic meta data?” displays. 3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.
Deleting a Topic To delete a topic: 1. From the Topics screen, check the boxes next to the topics to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all topics. 2. Click Delete topic.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected topics?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited topic by clicking Delete topic on the Edit topic
screen.
Managing Topic Rights NOTE: Rights on topics are granted per content system. Only those back-office children
groups of groups on which you have rights are listed. You may grant only those rights you already have on topics.
Adding Topic Rights To grant topic access to a back-office group: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click Administration rights.
3 The Administration rights screen displays (Figure 9.56 on page 378).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
377
Delivery Management
Figure 9.56: Administration rights Screen
2. From the Content system list, select a content system from which to display associated rights. Only services on which you have rights are listed. 3. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content Topic Rights” on page 18. 4. From the Groups list, select the groups to associate with selected rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 5. Click Add right.
3 The newly granted rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the screen. Revoking Topic Rights To remove topic access from a group, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
378
Delivery Management
Publishing Topics To publish a topic is to associate them to bundles and offers in order for associated content to be downloaded by end-users. Two publishing options are available:
• Publish topics in an existing offer — The publications wizard creates a bundle for each selected topic and associates it to a compatible pattern. All created bundles are associated to a single offer.
• Publish topics in new offers — The publications wizard creates a bundle and offer for each selected topic. To publish topics: 1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), select the topics to publish, then click Publish.
3 The Publish Topics screen displays.
Figure 9.57: Publish Topics Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
379
Delivery Management
2. From the Type list, select the type of publication: New offer (topics will be associated with a new offer and a new bundle) or Existing offer (topics will be associated with a new bundle in an existing offer). 3. If you selected New offer:
• In the Offer name field, enter the name of the new offer. By default, offers are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• In the Description field, enter a description for the offer (optional). • From the End-user service list, select an end-user service in which the topic will be published.
• To create bundles for topics that are not yet associated with a bundle, select Yes next to Skip associated topics.
• From the Application ID list, select the application ID for the new offer. • From the Status list, select the status of the new offer. • From the Categories list, select one or several categories to be associated with the new offer. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• In the Bundle name field, enter the name of the new bundle(s). By default, bundles are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• From the Session sequence list, select the session sequence for the new bundle(s). • From the Status list, select the status of the new bundle(s). 4. If you selected Existing offer:
• To create bundles for topics that are not yet associated with a bundle, select Yes next to Skip associated topics.
• From the End-user service list, select an end-user service in which the topic will be published.
• From the Select offer list, select a parent offer in the selected service. A new bundle is created for each selected topic and is associated to the selected offer.
• In the Bundle name field, enter the name of the new bundle(s). By default, bundles are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• From the Session sequence list, select the session sequence for the new bundle(s). • From the Status list, select the status of the new bundle(s).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
380
Delivery Management
5. Click Submit when finished.
3 The topic is published, and the Published topics screen displays a list of all published topics. Click any offer or bundle name in the list to edit. For information about editing offers or bundles, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314 or “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318. NOTE: If errors occurred during the publication process, they are reported on the
Published topics screen. If no errors occurred, this line item is equal to None.
Managing Content Systems Content systems are repositories from which Content Manager retrieves content and metadata, using them to generate deliverable content. By default, two content systems are automatically created:
• Local ContentSystem By Bundle — the default content system for all “by content id” topics
• Local ContentSystem By Category — the default content system for all “by category” topics
Viewing Content Systems To view content systems: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Content systems.
3 The Content systems screen displays a list of content systems.
Figure 9.58: Content systems Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
381
Delivery Management
Using the Content Systems Screen The Content systems screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Content systems screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a content system to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Content System” on page 384.
• Click New content system to create a new content system. For more information, see “Creating a New Content System” on page 382.
• Click Delete content systems to remove all selected content systems. For more information, see “Deleting a Content System” on page 385.
Searching Content Systems The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content systems specific to that criteria. To manage category filters: 1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click Edit filters.
3 The Content systems > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.59: Content systems > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Content System To create a new content system: 1. From the Content system screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click New content system.
3 The New content system screen displays (Figure 9.60 on page 383). Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
382
Delivery Management NOTE: The New content system function is also available when searching for or editing a
content system. For more information, see “Searching Content Systems” on page 382 and “Editing a Content System” on page 384.
Figure 9.60: New content system Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of content system. Custom content systems can be added. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the content system. 4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the content system (optional). 5. From the “Content” backoffice service name list, select the back-office service to be associated with the system. This service must be registered with the Content Manager platform. 6. If the Enable topic synchronization option is checked, items on the content system and “by bundleid” topics are synchronized. NOTE: If a content system is deleted during synchronization, the associated topic is
deleted as well.
7. If the Enable capabilities synchronization for topics “by content id” option is checked, content capabilities (a list of compatible devices for each content) is synchronized with “by bundleid” topic capabilities. NOTE: If a device is deactivated within content during synchronization, it is automatically
deactivated for the associated topic as well.
8. Click Submit.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
383
Delivery Management
3 The content system is created and the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381) displays.
Editing a Content System To edit a content system: 1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click the name of a content system to modify.
3 The Edit content system screen displays.
Figure 9.61: Edit content system Screen
2. Make changes to the content system as necessary. For information about content system details, see “Creating a New Content System” on page 382. 3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
384
Delivery Management
Deleting a Content System CAUTION: If you delete content systems, contents may become undeliverable by Content Manager. To delete a content system: 1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), select the content systems to remove, and click Delete content system.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected content systems?” displays. 2. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited content system by clicking Delete content system
on the Edit content system screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
385
10
System Configuration
This chapter contains the following information: Cache Management ............................................................................................... Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details ..................................................... Managing Messaging Credentials ............................................................................. Viewing Credentials ............................................................................................... Searching Credentials ............................................................................................ Creating New Credentials ....................................................................................... Editing Credentials ................................................................................................ Deleting Credentials............................................................................................... Managing Message Patterns .................................................................................... Viewing Message Patterns....................................................................................... Searching Message Patterns.................................................................................... Creating a New Message Pattern ............................................................................. Editing a Message Pattern....................................................................................... Deleting a Message Pattern..................................................................................... Managing Session Sequences .................................................................................. Viewing Session Sequences .................................................................................... Searching Session Sequences ................................................................................. Creating a New Session Sequence ........................................................................... Editing a Session Sequence .................................................................................... Deleting a Session Sequence .................................................................................. Managing Workflows .............................................................................................. Viewing Workflows................................................................................................. Searching Workflows.............................................................................................. Creating a New Workflow........................................................................................ Editing a Workflow................................................................................................. Deleting a Workflow............................................................................................... Managing System Administration Rights ................................................................... Viewing Bulk Content Processes .............................................................................. Searching Bulk Content Processes ........................................................................... Accessing a Bulk Content Process ............................................................................ Managing Sessions ................................................................................................ Viewing Session Reports......................................................................................... Editing Session Details ........................................................................................... Purging Sessions ................................................................................................... Managing Retry Sessions ........................................................................................ Viewing Retry Sessions .......................................................................................... Searching Retry Sessions ....................................................................................... Viewing Session Details.......................................................................................... Viewing Session Details.......................................................................................... Managing Purges ................................................................................................... Viewing Purges ..................................................................................................... Searching Purged Sessions ..................................................................................... Viewing Purge Details ............................................................................................ Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports ..................................................................... Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
387 387 391 391 392 393 394 394 395 395 396 396 399 403 403 403 404 404 406 406 408 408 409 409 410 423 424 425 426 426 428 428 430 432 432 432 433 433 433 435 436 437 437 439 439
386
System Configuration
This chapter describes the Device, System management and Tracking portions of the Delivery menu, which allow you to manage all elements necessary for configuring the delivery system. For additional information about the Catalog and Content portions of the Delivery menu, see “Delivery Management” on page 299.
Cache Management The Device portion of the Delivery menu allows you to manage authorized devices and their profiles by service.
Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details To view and modify cache management details: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Device > Cache management.
3
The Brand tab on the Cache management screen displays.
Figure 10.1: Cache management Screen — Brand Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
387
System Configuration
Using the Brand Tab The Brand tab allows you to specify the device brands for which to manage cache. To view device brands: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view brands. 2. Click Show filter.
3
A list of brands associated with the selected service displays.
3. Check the boxes next to each brand to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each brand to exclude. Click Select all to select all brands, or Unselect all to deselect all brands. 4. Click Submit when finished.
Using the Model Tab The Model tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device model cache.
Figure 10.2: Cache management Screen — Model Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
388
System Configuration
To view device models: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view device models. 2. To narrow your search further, from the Select brands list, select one or more brands from which to view device models. 3. Click Show filter.
3
A list of models associated with the selected service and brands displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each model to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each model to exclude. Click Select all to select all models, or Unselect all to deselect all models. 5. Click Submit when finished.
Using the Device Profile Tab The Device profile tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device profile cache.
Figure 10.3: Cache management Screen — Device profile Tab
To view device profiles: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view device profiles.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
389
System Configuration
2. To narrow your search further:
• From the Select brands list, select a brand from which to view device profiles. • From the Select model list, select one or more device models from which to view device profiles. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple models.
• Select whether or not to display and select profiles that are inherited. 3. Click Show filter.
3
A list of device profiles associated with the selected criteria displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each profile to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each profile to exclude. Click Select all to select all profiles, or Unselect all to deselect all profiles. 5. Click Submit when finished.
Using the Device Profile Capability Tab The Device profile capability tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device profile capabilities cache.
Figure 10.4: Cache management Screen — Device profile capability Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
390
System Configuration
To view device profile capabilities: 1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view profile capabilities. 2. To narrow your search further:
• From the Select brands list, select a brand from which to view capabilities. • From the Select model list, select one or more device models from which to view capabilities. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple models.
• Select whether to select a profile or feature for which to search. Select one or more items from the list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items.
• Select whether or not to display and select profiles that are inherited. 3. Click Show filter.
3
A list of capabilities associated with the selected criteria displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each capability to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each capability to exclude. Click Select all to select all capabilities, or Unselect all to deselect all capabilities. 5. Click Submit when finished.
Managing Messaging Credentials Messaging credentials are login and password information used by Content Manager to submit messages on a messaging system. Messaging credentials are associated to different account services. For more information about account services, see “Managing Services” on page 61.
Viewing Credentials To view all previously defined messaging credentials: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Messaging.
3
The Messaging screen displays a list of end-user services with defined messaging credentials (Figure 10.5 on page 392).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
391
System Configuration
Figure 10.5: Messaging Screen
Using the Messaging Screen The Messaging screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Messaging screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the End-user service column, click a service for which to edit credentials. For more information, see “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
• Click New credentials to create new credentials for a service. For more information, see “Creating New Credentials” on page 393.
• Click Delete credentials to remove all selected credentials. For more information, see “Deleting Credentials” on page 394.
Searching Credentials The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of services with credentials specific to that criteria. To manage messaging credential filters: 1. From the Messaging screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), click Edit filters.
3
The Messaging > Filters screen displays (Figure 10.6 on page 393).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
392
System Configuration
Figure 10.6: Messaging > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating New Credentials To create new messaging credentials: 1. From the Messaging screen, click New credentials.
3
The Create credentials screen displays.
NOTE: The New credentials function is also available when searching for and editing
credentials. For more information, see “Searching Credentials” on page 392 and “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
Figure 10.7: Create credentials Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select the service for which to create credentials. 3. In the Login field, enter the login name used to access the external messaging system. 4. In the Password field, enter the password for the login used to access the external messaging system.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
393
System Configuration
5. In the Confirm password field, enter the password again to confirm. 6. Click Submit.
3
The Edit credentials screen displays, allowing you to modify the new credentials. For more information about editing credentials, see “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
Editing Credentials To edit credentials: 1. From the Messaging credentials screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), click the name of a service for which to modify credentials.
3
The Edit credentials screen displays.
Figure 10.8: Edit credentials Screen
2. Modify the login and password as necessary. 3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting Credentials CAUTION: If you delete credentials, Content Manager may no longer be able to send or deliver messages. To delete messaging credentials: 1. From the Messaging credentials screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), check the box next to one or more services that have the credentials to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all credentials.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
394
System Configuration
2. Click Delete credentials.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected credentials?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete edited credentials by clicking Delete credentials on the Edit
credentials screen.
Managing Message Patterns Message patterns are modules that enable the generation of downloadable elements from contents.
Viewing Message Patterns To view all available message patterns: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Message patterns.
3
The Message patterns screen displays.
Figure 10.9: Message patterns Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
395
System Configuration
Using the Message Patterns Screen The Message patterns screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Message Patterns screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a message pattern to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399.
• Click New message pattern to create a new pattern. For more information, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
• Click Delete message patterns to remove all selected patterns. For more information, see “Deleting a Message Pattern” on page 403.
Searching Message Patterns The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of message patterns specific to that criteria. To manage message pattern filters: 1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), click Edit filters.
3
The Message patterns > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.10: Message patterns > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Message Pattern To create a new message pattern: 1. From the Message pattern screen, click New message pattern.
3
The Create message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.11 on page 397).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
396
System Configuration
Figure 10.11: Create message pattern Screen
2. From the Message pattern type list, select a type of message pattern to create. The following table describes the types of message patterns available: NOTE: Most patterns allow you to modify only the name of the pattern. Those patterns
marked with an asterisk (*) allow for total customization. Message Pattern
Description
WAP Video pattern
formats video extracts for delivery by WAP
SMS Animation pattern
formats animations for delivery by SMS
SMS Logo Screensaver pattern
formats screensaver logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Java pattern
formats Java Applications for delivery by WAP
WAP Picture pattern SMS System pattern WAP File pattern
formats pictures for delivery by WAP formats SMS messages formats any file for delivery by WAP
SMS Logo Group pattern
formats black and white group logos for delivery by SMS
Rich text EMAIL pattern
formats emails from “RICH TEXT” content
SMS Ringtone Monophonic pattern formats monophonic ringtones for delivery by SMS SMS Logo Operator pattern
formats operator logos for delivery by SMS
*Rich text SMS pattern
formats SMS from “RICH TEXT” content (fully customizable)
SMS Logo Color pattern
formats color logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Ringtone Polyphonic pattern
formats polyphonic ringtones for delivery by WAP
MMS Postcard pattern
formats multimedia postcards for delivery by MMS
WAP Application pattern
formats SMS messages (fully customizable)
*MMS pattern
formats MMS messages (fully customizable)
Rich text MMS pattern *EMAIL pattern
formats MMS from “RICH TEXT” content formats email messages (fully customizable)
WAP Realtone pattern SMS Logo Message pattern WAP Animation pattern
Copyright 2006
formats smartphone applications for delivery by WAP
*SMS Message pattern
formats realtones for delivery by WAP formats message logos for delivery by SMS formats animated pictures for delivery by WAP
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
397
System Configuration
3. In the Name field, change the pattern name as necessary. The following table describes the additional information available to customize on the Rich text SMS, SMS Message, MMS, and EMAIL patterns: Field
Description
Rich Text SMS
SMS Message
MMS
Header
Enter the text message to be placed before the content retrieved by the topic.
3
3
3
3
Footer
Enter the text message to be placed after the content retrieved by the topic.
3
3
3
3
Receipt
Select True to request a deliver receipt for all sent messages.
3
3
Select True to automatically truncate messages at 160 characters.
3
3
Select Binary mode to enable transparent message concatenation: messages longer than 160 characters are split over several SMS and tagged so that the device automatically concatenate the different parts upon reception.
3
3
3
3
Truncate messages Concatenate message
NOTE: Not all devices support this feature. Select Text mode to enable automatic splitting of long messages into several numbered text SMS. Concatenate message
Select True to concatenate messages (if several content are to be delivered simultaneously) or False to deliver the different content in different messages.
SMS template
Enter the script used to format the message. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/ velocity/user-guide.html.
Return receipt
Select True to request a deliver receipt for all sent messages.
3
3
Ignore image
Select False to attach pictures retrieved from the content to the formatted MMS or email.
3
3
Ignore sound
Select False to attach sounds retrieved from the content to the formatted MMS or email.
3
3
Ignore video
Select False to attach video retrieved from the content to the formatted MMS.
3
Originator
The default email address or MMS subject to be used in the From field.
3
3
Default subject
The default subject of the email or MMS.
3
callbackMMSPushPath
Select the path to be used for MMS push (only if MMS Push = True).
3 3
callbackMMSPushURL
Select the URL to be used to retrieve the MMS (only if MMS Push = True).
3
callbackMMSPushParam Enter parameters to be used to generate the push notification (only if MMS Push = True).
3
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
3
3
398
System Configuration Field
Description
Rich Text SMS
SMS Message
MMS
MMSPush
Select True to bypass MMS-C and send only MMS notification by SMS to endusers. User devices will then directly download MMS content from Content Manager. Select False to push MMS messages to an external MMS-C.
3
MMS template
Enter the script used to format the message. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/ velocity/user-guide.html.
3
Text template
Enter the script used to format the message in text mode. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http:// jakarta.apache.org/velocity/userguide.html.
3
HTML template
Enter the script used to format the message in HTML mode. The script must be compliant with the Velocity language. For more information, see http:// jakarta.apache.org/velocity/userguide.html.
3
NOTE: If you enter a script, it is applied to ALL content generated by the pattern. If you
want a script to apply only to one content, specify the script when editing content. For more information, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
4. Click Submit.
3
The pattern is created, and the Edit message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.12 on page 400). For more information about editing a message pattern, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399.
Editing a Message Pattern To edit a message pattern: 1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), click the name of a message pattern to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.12 on page 400). NOTE: The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen also displays
immediately after a new pattern is created. For information about creating a message pattern, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
399
System Configuration
Figure 10.12: Edit message pattern Screen > Details Tab
The Edit message pattern screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New message pattern to create a new pattern. For more information, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
• Click Delete message pattern to delete the edited pattern. For more information, see “Deleting a Message Pattern” on page 403.
• Click the Details tab to modify general information about the pattern. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 400.
• Click the Data patterns tab to modify data patterns associated with the edited message pattern. For more information, see “Using the Data Patterns Tab” on page 400.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.12) allows you to modify the general information determined when the pattern was created. NOTE: With a few exceptions, most message patterns allow you to customize only the
pattern name. For detailed information about the information available for each message pattern, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
Using the Data Patterns Tab The Data patterns tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.13 on page 401) allows you manage a message’s data patterns. Data patterns define how the different elements of a content are combined to form a downloadable content.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
400
System Configuration
Figure 10.13: Edit message pattern Screen — Data patterns Tab
Adding Data Patterns to a Message Pattern To add a data pattern to a message pattern: 1. From the Content system list, select a content system for the data pattern. 2. From the Content template list, select a content template for the data pattern. 3. From the Data pattern type list, select a data pattern type for the data pattern. 4. Click Add new data pattern.
3
The Edit data pattern screen displays (Figure 10.14 on page 402), allowing you to verify or delete the data pattern information.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
401
System Configuration
Figure 10.14: Edit data pattern Screen
Validating a Data Pattern To validate a data pattern: 1. If there are data patterns associated with the message pattern, they are listed on the right side of the Data patterns tab (Figure 10.13). Click the name of the content template used in the existing data pattern to modify.
3
The Edit data pattern screen displays.
NOTE: The Edit data pattern screen also displays immediately after a data pattern is
created. The information on the Edit data pattern screen is view-only.
2. To continue using the selected data pattern, click Submit. Deleting a Data Pattern To delete a data pattern: 1. From the Data patterns tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.13 on page 401), check the box next to one or more data patterns to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all data patterns. 2. Click Delete data patterns.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected data patterns?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited data pattern by clicking Delete data pattern on the
Edit data pattern screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
402
System Configuration
Deleting a Message Pattern CAUTION: If a message pattern is deleted, Content Manager may no longer be able to generate download messages. To delete a message pattern: 1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), check the box next to one or more message patterns to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all message patterns. 2. Click Delete message patterns. NOTE: You can also delete an edited message pattern by clicking Delete message
pattern on the Edit message pattern screen.
Managing Session Sequences A session sequence determines the order in which a delivery is processed.
Viewing Session Sequences To view a list of available session sequences: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Session sequences.
3
The Session sequences screen displays.
Figure 10.15: Session sequences Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
403
System Configuration
Using the Session Sequences Screen The Session sequences screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Session sequences screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a session sequence to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Session Sequence” on page 406.
• Click New session sequence to create a new sequence. For more information, see “Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
• Click Delete session sequences to remove all selected sequences. For more information, see “Deleting a Session Sequence” on page 406.
Searching Session Sequences The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of session sequences specific to that criteria. To manage session sequence filters: 1. From the Session sequences screen (Figure 10.15 on page 403), click Edit filters.
3
The Session sequences > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.16: Session sequences > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Session Sequence To create a new session sequence: 1. From the Session sequence screen, click New session sequence.
3
The Create session sequence screen displays (Figure 10.17 on page 405).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
404
System Configuration
Figure 10.17: Create session sequence Screen
2. From the Type list, select a session sequence type. Sequence types available include:
• Workflow based — topics are processed as defined in the selected workflow. • Schedule topics — the system processes the first X number of topics inside the bundle, then waits for a specified period of time before processing the next X number of topics.
• Simple — all topics associated to the bundle are processed simultaneously. 3. In the Name field, enter a session sequence name for reference. 4. If the session sequence type is Workflow based, select a workflow from the Workflow drop-down list. Workflow types available include:
• Workflow Simple Interface MO: A workflow defined automatically to enable direct content download using a single MO message.
• SubscriptionWorkflow: A workflow that automatically subscribes a user to a certain bundle.
• UnsubscriptionWorkflow: A workflow that automatically unsubscribes a user from a certain bundle. 5. If the session sequence type is Schedule topics, specify the following information:
• how long (in milliseconds) the system should wait between processes • the number of topics to be processed simultaneously 6. If the session sequence type is Simple, check or uncheck the Requires acknowledge box to indicate whether or not the system should wait for a receipt from the previous topic before moving on to the next topic. 7. Enter a description of the workflow (optional).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
405
System Configuration
8. Click Submit.
3
The Session sequences screen displays (Figure 10.15 on page 403).
Editing a Session Sequence To edit a session sequence: 1. From the Session sequences screen, click the name of the sequence to modify.
3
The Edit session sequence screen displays.
NOTE: The information available for modifying depends on the sequence type selected
when the sequence was created. For information about sequence types, see “Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
Deleting a Session Sequence CAUTION: If a session sequence is deleted, Content Manager may no longer be able to trigger certain delivery operations. To delete a session sequence: 1. From the Session sequences screen (Figure 10.15 on page 403), check the box next to one or more sequences to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all sequences. 2. Click Delete session sequences.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected session sequences?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited session sequence by clicking Delete sequence on
the Edit session sequence screen. For more information about editing a session sequence, see “Editing a Session Sequence” on page 406.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
406
System Configuration
Understanding Session Sequences There are four types of session sequences:
• Simple — This session sequence is standard. The following parameters are required for Simple session sequences: • Requires acknowledge: If enabled, the sequence waits for an acknowledgement before processing the next topic. The sequence is ended only if messages are received by the handset. • Requires content: If enabled, an error occurs in the session if there is no content found. This parameter must be checked if receiving content is required.
• Workflow — This session sequence is standard. The following parameters are required for Workflow session sequences: • Requires acknowledge: If enabled, the sequence waits for an acknowledgement before processing the next topic. The sequence is ended only if messages are received by the handset.
• Schedule topics — The system processes the first X number of topics inside the bundle, then waits for a specified period of time before processing the next X number of topics. The following parameters are required for Schedule topics session sequences: • Waiting time (in milliseconds): Specify the amount of time the system should wait between each process. • Topics counts: Specify how many topics should be processed at the same time.
• Failsafe — This sequence is used to process WAP content and resend it as long as a download has not started. After a while, a bookmark leading to the content is sent, and in the end, an SMS message containing the URL of the content is sent. The following parameters are required for Failsafe session sequences: • WAP Push topics: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message only) used to create the WAP Push. The content and topic must be created before the sequence. • WAP Push pattern: Reference to the WAP Push message pattern used to send the WAP content. • Time between first and second WAP Push: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before the next WAP Push is sent. • Time between WAP Push and WAP bookmark: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before the bookmark is sent. • Enable bookmark: If disabled, the bookmark phase is skipped and the SMS message is sent directly. • Bookmark topic: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message only) used to create the WAP Bookmark. The content and topic must be created before the sequence. • Time between WAP bookmark and SMS: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before the SMS message is sent. This is used only if bookmark is enabled in the sequence.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
407
System Configuration
• SMS topic: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message only) used to create the SMS message. The content and topic must be created before the sequence. NOTE: The SMS System Message must contain “$url” in order for the URL of
the content to be sent in the SMS message.
• SMS pattern: Reference to the SMS message pattern used to send the WAP • • •
content. Time after SMS: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the content before a time out error occurs. Max number of retries: The maximum number of allowed download retries. For example, the download may be available three times, but the fourth time it’s downloaded, the content is not sent. Require content: If enabled, an error occurs if no content is found. This parameter must be checked if receiving content is required.
Managing Workflows Workflows are modules that describe how the system should behave when certain events are triggered. Each workflow is made up of states and actions, which in turn are linked by conditions and rules for both incoming and outgoing processes. For more information about states and actions, see “Using the State/Actions Tab” on page 411.
Viewing Workflows To view a list of available workflows: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Workflows.
3
The Workflows screen displays.
Figure 10.18: Workflows Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
408
System Configuration
Using the Workflows Screen The Workflows screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Workflows screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a workflow to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Workflow” on page 410.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflows to remove all selected workflows. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
Searching Workflows The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of workflows specific to that criteria. To manage workflow filters: 1. From the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408), click Edit filters.
3
The Workflows > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.19: Workflows > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating a New Workflow To create a new workflow: 1. From the Workflows screen, click New workflow.
3
The Create workflow screen displays (Figure 10.20 on page 410).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
409
System Configuration
Figure 10.20: Create workflow Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the workflow. 3. In the Description field, enter a short description of the workflow (optional). 4. Click Submit.
3
The workflow is created, and the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408) displays.
Editing a Workflow To edit a workflow: 1. From the Workflows screen, click the name of the workflow to modify.
3
The Details tab on the Edit workflow screen displays.
Figure 10.21: Edit workflow Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
410
System Configuration
The Edit workflow screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
• Click the Details tab to modify the name and description of the workflow. For more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 411.
• Click the States/Actions tab to modify states and actions associated with the edited workflow. For more information, see “Using the State/Actions Tab” on page 411.
• Click the Conditions tab to modify the conditions associated to the edited workflow. For more information, see “Using the Conditions Tab” on page 419.
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit workflow screen allows you to change the name and description of the selected workflow. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the State/Actions Tab The State/Actions tab on the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.22 on page 412) allows you to manage the states and actions associated with the selected workflow. If there are no states or actions for the workflow, you can create them by clicking New state or New action. For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413 and “Creating an Action” on page 416. If there are states and actions currently associated with the workflow, the States/Actions tab displays them in a table.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
411
System Configuration
Figure 10.22: Edit workflow Screen — States/Actions Tab
The table of existing states and actions allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Select an item or items using the check box located in the first column on the left. Click the box at the top of the column to quickly select all items in the list.
• From the Name column, click the name of a state to modify the state. For more information, see “Editing a State” on page 414.
• From the Incoming conditions and rules column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the State outputs and outgoing conditions column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the Action outputs and outgoing conditions column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
• Click New state to create a new state for the workflow, For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413.
• Click Delete states to remove all selected states from the workflow. For more information, see “Deleting States” on page 415.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
412
System Configuration
• Click New action to create a new action for the workflow. For more information, see “Creating an Action” on page 416.
• Click Delete actions to remove all selected actions. For more information, see “Deleting Actions” on page 418. Creating a State A state defines the beginning, in-process, and end point in a workflow. To create a state for the selected workflow: 1. From the States/Actions tab, click New state.
3
The Create state screen displays.
Figure 10.23: Create state Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the state. 3. From the State status list, select a status for the state. Status options include:
• Initial — the beginning point in the workflow • Intermediary — the in-process point in the workflow • Final — the end point in the workflow 4. From the Session status list, select a status for the session. Status options include:
• Pending — the session has not yet started • Processing wait — the session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation NOTE: If you select Processing wait as the session status, enter the amount of
time in seconds to wait between operations.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
413
System Configuration
5. Click Submit.
3
The States/Actions tab displays the list of created states for the workflow.
Editing a State To modify a state: 1. From the States/Actions tab (Figure 10.22 on page 412), click the name of the state to edit.
3
The Edit state screen displays.
Figure 10.24: Edit state Screen
2. From the Edit state screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change the name of the state, click Submit, and return to the States/Actions tab. • Modify the output associated with the state (if present). To modify selected output for the state, click the output name.
3 The Edit output screen displays (Figure 10.25 on page 415).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
414
System Configuration
Figure 10.25: Edit output Screen
a. From the Edit output screen, you can: • Change the name of the output, click Submit, and return to the Edit state screen. • Modify the condition associated with the output (if present). To modify the condition, click the condition name.
3 The Edit condition screen displays. For information about editing a condition, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421. To return to the Edit state screen, click the state name or > Edit state. 2. Click Submit. 3. Click > Edit workflow to return to the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.21 on page 410). Deleting States To delete a state: 1. From the States/Actions tab, check the box next to one or more states to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all states. 2. Click Delete states.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected states?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited state by clicking Delete state on the Edit state
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
415
System Configuration
Creating an Action To create an action in the selected workflow: 1. From the States/Actions tab, click New action.
3
The Create action screen displays.
Figure 10.26: Create action Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the action. 3. From the Type list, select an action type. Action types include:
• Multishot Parsing Model MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should contain the Model keyword)
• Subscription Parsing MO: subscribe or unsubscribe a user • Send topic: deliver a topic • Get account subscription: retrieve an end-user account and its subscription • Send bundle: deliver a bundle • Multishot Parsing Bundle MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should contain the Bundle keyword)
• Get account: retrieve an end-user account • Child session creation: create a new child delivery session • Subscribe user: subscribe an end-user to a bundle • Unsubscribe user: unsubscribe an end-user from a bundle • Parsing MO: parse an SMS MO to retrieve specific keywords
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
416
System Configuration
• Get account unsubscription: retrieve an end-user account and its unsubscription • Multishot Parsing Brand MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should contain the Brand keyword) NOTE: Additional information required depends on the type of action created.
4. Click Submit.
3
The States/Actions tab displays the list of created actions for the workflow.
Editing an Action To modify an action: 1. From the States/Actions tab (Figure 10.22 on page 412), click the name of the action to edit.
3
The Edit action screen displays.
Figure 10.27: Edit action Screen
2. From the Edit action screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change the name of the action and the other information required for the selected action type, then click Submit to save any changes.
• Modify the output associated with the action (if present). To modify selected output for the action, click the output name.
3 The Edit output screen displays (Figure 10.28 on page 418).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
417
System Configuration
Figure 10.28: Edit action > Edit output Screen
From the Edit output screen, you can: • Change the name of the output, click Submit, and return to the Edit action screen. • Modify the condition associated with the output (if present). To modify the condition, click the condition name.
3 The Edit condition screen displays. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• To return to the Edit action screen, click the action name or > Edit action. 3. Click Submit. 4. Click > Edit workflow to return to the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.21 on page 410). Deleting Actions CAUTION: Deleting an action may cause the parent workflow to become inactive. To delete actions: 1. From the States/Actions tab, check the box next to one or more existing actions to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all actions. 2. Click Delete actions.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected actions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited action by clicking Delete action on the Edit action
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
418
System Configuration
Using the Conditions Tab The Conditions tab on the Edit workflow screen allows you to manage the conditions associated with the selected workflow. If there are no conditions for the workflow, you can create them by clicking New condition. For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413. If there are conditions currently associated with the workflow, the Conditions tab displays them in a table.
Figure 10.29: Edit workflow Screen — Conditions Tab
The table of existing conditions allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Select an item or items using the check boxes located in the first column on the left. Click the box at the top of the column to quickly select all items in the list.
• From the Name column, click the name of a condition to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the Origins (states or actions/outputs) column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a State” on page 414 and “Editing an Action” on page 417.
• From the Rules and destinations column, click an item to modify. For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see “Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
• Click New condition to create a new condition for the workflow, For more information, see “Creating a Condition” on page 420.
• Click Delete condition to remove all selected conditions from the workflow. For more information, see “Deleting Conditions” on page 423. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
419
System Configuration
Creating a Condition To create a condition in the selected workflow: 1. From the Conditions tab, click New condition.
3
The Create condition screen displays.
Figure 10.30: Create condition Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the condition. 3. From the Type list, select a condition type. Condition type options include:
• Code OK — indicates that user input is correct and valid • Always true — indicates a pass-through condition where no validation is required. 4. From the Origins list, select one or more condition origins. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple origins. 5. Click Submit.
3
The Conditions tab displays the newly created condition in a list of conditions for the workflow.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
420
System Configuration
Editing a Condition To modify a condition: 1. From the Conditions tab (Figure 10.29 on page 419), click the name of the condition to edit.
3
The Edit condition screen displays.
Figure 10.31: Edit condition Screen
2. Make changes to the condition name and origins as necessary. 3. Click Submit to save any changes. Creating Condition Rules. To create a new rule for the condition, from the Edit condition screen, click New condition rule.
3 The Create condition rule screen displays (Figure 10.32 on page 422).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
421
System Configuration
Figure 10.32: Create condition rule Screen
1. In the Name field, enter a name for the rule. 2. From the Type list, select the type of condition (true). 3. From the Destination list, select the destination of the condition rule. 4. Click Submit. Editing Condition Rules. To edit an existing condition rule, from the Edit condition screen (Figure 10.31 on page 421), click the name of the rule in the list to modify.
3
The Edit condition rule screen displays.
Figure 10.33: Edit condition rule Screen
Make changes to the condition rule as necessary, then click Submit to save any changes.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
422
System Configuration
Deleting Condition Rules. From the Edit condition rule screen, click Remove next to each rule to delete. CAUTION: Deleting condition rules may cause the parent workflow to become inactive.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected condition rules?” displays. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
Deleting Conditions To delete a condition: 1. From the Conditions tab on the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.29 on page 419), check the box next to one or more conditions to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all conditions. 2. Click Delete conditions.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected conditions?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited condition by clicking Delete condition on the Edit
condition screen. For more information about editing conditions, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
Deleting a Workflow NOTE: When a workflow is deleted, any states, actions, and conditions associated with the
workflow are also deleted.
To delete a workflow: 1. From the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408), check the box next to one or more workflows to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all workflows. 2. Click Delete workflows.
3
A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected workflows?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited workflow by clicking Delete workflow on the Edit
workflow screen. For more information about editing a workflow, see “Editing a Workflow” on page 410.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
423
System Configuration
Managing System Administration Rights System administration rights allow back-office group access to system items (credentials, message patterns, session sequences, and so on). To define system configuration rights for a back-office group: 1. From the Delivery menu, select System Management > Administration rights.
3
The Administration rights screen displays.
Figure 10.34: Administration rights Screen
Adding System Administration Rights 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “System Administration Rights” on page 19. 2. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights
are listed. You may grant only rights that are already assigned to you for sessions and processes.
3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Revoking System Administration Rights To revoke group rights, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
424
System Configuration
Managing Bulk Content Processes A bulk process is a content delivery process that is directed toward several recipients. The Tracking portion of the Delivery menu allows you to manage elements of a bulk process.
Viewing Bulk Content Processes To view all bulk process operations launched on the platform: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Bulk processes.
3
The Bulk processes > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Bulk processes screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Bulk Content Processes” on page 426.
Figure 10.35: Bulk processes Screen
Using the Bulk Processes Screen The Bulk processes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bulk processes screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a bulk process ID for which to view details. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past bulk process reports. For more information, see “Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports” on page 439.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
425
System Configuration
Searching Bulk Content Processes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of processes specific to that criteria. To manage bulk process filters: 1. From the Bulk processes screen (Figure 10.35 on page 425), click Edit filters.
3
The Bulk processes > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.36: Bulk processes > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Accessing a Bulk Content Process To access a process: 1. From Id column on the Bulk process screen, click the process ID to access.
3
The Display bulk information screen displays (Figure 10.37 on page 427).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
426
System Configuration
Figure 10.37: Display bulk information Screen
The Display bulk information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Restart process to run the open process. • Click Pause process to temporarily pause the process. • Click Stop process to halt the process operations. • Click the Timeslots tab to view the process timeslots.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
427
System Configuration
Managing Sessions Sessions are unique delivery operations between one bundle and one user. Sessions are executed when a trigger is activated in a bundle. A process is made up of several sessions. The Delivery menu allows you to directly manage all authorized session reports.
Viewing Session Reports To view a report listing all authorized session reports: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Sessions.
3
The Search by address tab on the Sessions screen displays.
Figure 10.38: Sessions Screen > Search by address Tab
The Sessions screen includes two tabs that allow you several ways to search sessions:
• Search by address — Lists sessions by addresses or IDs you provide. • Done sessions with error — List completed sessions in which errors occurred. The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of sessions specific to that criteria. From the Done sessions with error tab, click Edit filters.
3 The Done sessions with error tab displays filter criteria (Figure 10.39 on page 429).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
428
System Configuration
Figure 10.39: Done sessions with error > Filters Tab
• Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8. If sessions matching your criteria are found for any type of search, the Sessions screen displays the following information:
• Id — The ID of the bulk operation. Click an item in the Id column to edit. For more information, see “Editing Session Details” on page 430.
• Delivery bundle — The bundle used for the bulk operation. • Bulk process (Done sessions with error tab only)— The name of the bulk process. • Status (Search by address tab only) — The session status: Pending, Processing, Processing Wait, Sleep, Done, Processing child session.
• Error — The following errors may display: • None — No error occurred during processing. • Unexpected — An unexpected and unclassifiable error has occurred during processing.
• • • • • •
Timeout — Session processing has failed because the time to live expired. Interrupted — Session processing has been interrupted by an external actor. Formatting — Session processing has failed because of a content formatting error. Protocol — An error occurred during protocol session processing. Session sequence — An error occured during session sequence processing. Billing sequence — An error occurred during billing sequence processing.
• Time created — The time the session was started. • Time finished — The time the session ended. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
429
System Configuration
In addition, the Sessions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Sessions screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a session for which to access details. For more information, see “Editing Session Details” on page 430.
• Click New session to create a new session. For more information, see “Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
• Click Purge sessions to remove all past sessions. For more information, see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
• Click Retry session(s) to retry sessions selected from the list. Editing Session Details To edit session details: 1. From the Sessions screen (Figure 10.38 on page 428), click the session ID for the session to modify.
3
The Display session information screen displays.
Figure 10.40: Display session information Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
430
System Configuration
The Display session information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Restart session to re-deliver the associated bundles. • Click Stop session to stop bundle delivery. • Click Refresh session to update viewed details. • From the Bundle id session item, click the bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318. The Display session information screen displays the following information:
• Id — The internal session ID. • Delivery bundle: The associated bundle that triggered the session. Click a bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Status: The session status. The following table describes each status option: Status
Description
Pending
The session has not yet started.
Processing
The session is currently being processed.
Processing wait
The session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation.
Sleep
The session is currently paused and will restart at the time specified (time next continue date).
Done
The session is finished.
Processing child session
The main session is finished, and a related session is being processed.
• Error — The type of error that may have occurred during the session. The following table describes each possible error message: Error
Description
None
no session error
Unexpected Timeout
an unknown error occurred the session encountered a time out
Interrupted Formatting Protocol
the session was interrupted during processing an error occurred during a formatting operation a communication error was detected
Session sequence Billing Sequence
an error occurred related to the session sequence an error occurred related to the billing sequence
• Time created — The time at which the session was created. • Time to live — The time at which the session begins. • Time next continue — The time at which the session is restarted in the case of an interruption.
• Time finished — The time at which the session ended. • Target account — The account ID and alias of the user receiving the session.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
431
System Configuration
• Target address type — The type of device associated with the session (Mobile, Email, or Phone).
• Target address — The address and associated ID of the recipient’s device. Purging Sessions To purge all finished session processes: 1. From the Sessions screen (Figure 10.38 on page 428), click Purge sessions.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the sessions purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void purging sessions.
Managing Retry Sessions You can view a list of retry session reports directly through the Delivery menu.
Viewing Retry Sessions To view all retry session reports: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Retry Sessions.
3
The Retry sessions > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Retry sessions screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Retry Sessions” on page 433.
Using the Retry Sessions Screen The Retry sessions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Retry sessions screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a session for details. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Bulk Process on the right side of the screen to create a bulk process to retry sessions. For more information, see “Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process” on page 434.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
432
System Configuration
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past session reports. For more information, see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
Searching Retry Sessions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of retry session reports specific to that criteria. To manage retry session filters: 1. From the Retry sessions screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Edit filters.
3
The Retry sessions > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.41: Retry sessions > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Session Details To view session detail information: 1. From the Retry sessions screen, click the ID of a session to view.
3
The Details tab on the Display session information screen displays.
In addition to viewing session details, the Display session information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Stop process to stop the current process. • Click the Timeslots tab to view authorized timeslots for the process. From the Timeslots tab, you can also restart, pause, and stop the process.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
433
System Configuration
Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process To create a bulk process for a retry session: 1. From right side of the Retry sessions screen, click Bulk Process next to the session for which to create the process.
3 The Process details tab on the Create bulk process screen displays 2. In the Name field, enter a name for the process. 3. From the Status list, select the status of the process. 4. From the Priority list, select the priority level of the process. 5. In the Time to start field, enter the date and time at which the process begins (format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS). 6. In the Timeout for target reporting (in milliseconds) field, 7. Click Next.
3 The Bulk action tab on the Create bulk process screen displays. 8. From the Action type list, select the method by which to gather session error information. If you select By CSV file:
• From the Sessions retry mode list, select the retry mode. • In the CSV filename field, enter the full path and filename of the CSV file. • In the CSV separator field, enter the type of field separator used in the CSV file. • From the Encoding list, select the type of encoding. • Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays. 9. From the Target type list, select the method by which to save error information. 10. Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays. 11. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed according to the workflow strategy defined here. 12. Click Next.
3
The Timeslots tab displays.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
434
System Configuration
13. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM. 14. Click Add timeslot.
3
A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen. NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the
next
to each timeslot to remove. 15. Click Next.
3
The Confirmation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
16. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit.
Purging Retry Sessions To purge all retry session processes: 1. From the Retry sessions screen (Figure 10.40 on page 430), select one or more retry sessions to purge, then click Purge bulk processes.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void purging sessions.
Managing Purges You can view a list of purged reports directly through the Delivery menu.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
435
System Configuration
Viewing Purges To view all purged session reports: 1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Purges.
3
The Purges > Filters screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Purged Sessions” on page 437.
2. Click Show table.
3
The Purges screen displays.
Figure 10.42: Purges Screen
Using the Purges Screen The Purges screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Purges screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a process for details. For more information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past session reports. For more information, see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
436
System Configuration
Searching Purged Sessions The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of purged session reports specific to that criteria. To manage purged session filters: 1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Edit filters.
3
The Purges > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.43: Purges > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Purge Details To view purge detail information: 1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click the ID of a process to view.
3
The Details tab on the Display purge process information screen displays (Figure 10.44 on page 438).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
437
System Configuration
Figure 10.44: Display purge process information Screen — Details Tab
Click the Timeslots tab to view authorized timeslots for the process. The Display purge process information screen displays the following information:
• Id — The internal purge operation ID. • Status — The status of the purge operation. The following table describes each status option: Status Pending Processing Processing wait Done Processing child session
Description The session has not yet started. The session is currently being processed. The session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation. The session is finished. The main session is finished, and a related session is being processed.
• Time created — The time at which the purge was created. • Time next continue — The time at which the purge is restarted in the case of an interruption.
• Time finished — The time at which the purge ended.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
438
System Configuration
• Action type — The type of operation: session purge. • Target type — The target of the operation: done sessions. • Processed targets — The number of sessions that were purges. • Processing position in file — The percentage of completion. • Purge will delete all sessions that have been done for — The sessions that have been purged; sessions in “done” status that are at least 1 day old.
• Workflow strategy — The workflow used to purge sessions. Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports To purge all finished bulk process reports: 1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Purge bulk processes.
3
A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void deletion.
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights To manage group global session and bulk process rights: NOTE: Individual session and process rights are granted per end-user service, and are
applied to bulk operations.
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Administration rights.
3
The Administration rights screen displays (Figure 10.45 on page 440).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
439
System Configuration
Figure 10.45: Administration rights Screen
Adding Tracking Administration Rights 1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Tracking Rights” on page 19. 2. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights are
listed. You may only grant rights that are already granted to you for sessions and processes.
3. Click Add right.
3
The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Tracking Administration Rights To revoke group rights, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each granted right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
440
11
Statistics
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Statistics Processes ................................................................................. Searching Statistic Processes .................................................................................. Viewing Process Details .......................................................................................... Statistics Tracking ................................................................................................. Viewing Statistic Compilation Details ........................................................................ Device Statistics.................................................................................................... Downloads Per Brand ............................................................................................. Downloads Per Model ............................................................................................. Content Statistics .................................................................................................. Downloads Per Provider.......................................................................................... Downloads Per Content .......................................................................................... Content Per Provider .............................................................................................. Other Statistics ..................................................................................................... Downloads Per Offer .............................................................................................. Downloads Per Service ...........................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
442 442 443 447 448 451 451 452 453 453 454 454 455 455 456
441
Statistics
The Statistics menu provides access to statistics produced by the Content Manager platform.
Managing Statistics Processes To display a list of running processes: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Statistics definitions > Statistics processes.
3 The Statistics processes > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all running processes. For more information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Statistic Processes” on page 442.
3 The Statistics processes screen displays.
Figure 11.1: Statistics processes Screen
Using the Statistics Processes Screen The Statistics processes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. You can also view further details about a process by clicking on a process ID from the Id column. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443.
Searching Statistic Processes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of statistics processes specific to that criteria. To manage statistics process filters: 1. From the Statistics processes screen (Figure 11.1 on page 442), click Edit filters.
3 The Statistics processes > Filters screen displays (Figure 11.2 on page 443).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
442
Statistics
Figure 11.2: Statistics processes > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Process Details To view detailed information about a process: 1. From the Statistics processes screen (Figure 11.1), click a process ID from the Id column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics process screen displays.
Figure 11.3: Edit statistics process Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
443
Statistics
From the Edit statistics process screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab (Figure 11.3) to view general process information, such as process name, creation and execution times, and any applied process schedule.
• Click the Statistics tables tab to view statistics information. For more information, see “Using the Statistics Tables Tab” on page 444.
• Click the Pre tasks tab to view tasks required prior to running the process. For more information, see “Using the Pre Tasks Tab” on page 446.
• Click the Post tasks tab to view tasks required after the process is finished. For more information, see “Using the Post Tasks Tab” on page 446.
Using the Statistics Tables Tab The Statistics table tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to view statistics regarding the selected process.
Figure 11.4: Edit statistics process Screen — Statistics tables Tab
From the Name column, click a statistics table to view.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables screen displays.
Figure 11.5: Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables Screen — Details Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
444
Statistics
To view further details about the specified Statistics target handler, click the target handler name. Using the Statistics Table Tab The Statistics table tab on the Edit statistics table screen allows you to view detailed information about specific sets of statistics.
Figure 11.6: Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables Screen — Statistics table Tab
To view a statistics table, click the name of a statistics table to view.
3 The Statistic results tab on the Edit statistics table screen displays.
Figure 11.7: Edit statistics table Screen — Statistics results Tab
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
445
Statistics
Using the Edit Statistics Table Screen. There are four tabs available on the Edit statistics table screen:
• Details — Click to view general information about the about the selected statistics table.
• Statistics results — Click to view a list of result reports. To view further details about a result report, click an ID number from the Id column.
3
The Edit statistic result screen displays.
• Group by • Operation Using the Pre Tasks Tab The Pre tasks tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to review any tasks scheduled to complete prior to running the process. To review a task: 1. From the Name column, click the name of a process to view.
3 The Edit pre-task screen displays further information about the selected task. Using the Post Tasks Tab The Post tasks tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to review any tasks scheduled to complete after a process has run.
Figure 11.8: Edit statistics process Screen — Post tasks Tab
To review a task: 1. From the Name column, click the name of a process to view.
3 The Edit post-task screen displays further information about the selected task.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
446
Statistics
Statistics Tracking From the Statistics menu, you can track statistics compilation information, such as the current status or execution date on currently running processes. To track currently running processes: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Statistics tracking > Statistics compilation.
3 The Statistics compilation > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of processes with a status of Processing. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Statistic Processes” on page 442.
3 The Statistics compilation screen displays.
Figure 11.9: Statistics compilation Screen
Using the Statistics Compilation Screen The Statistics compilation screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Statistics compilation screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a compilation to view. For more information, see “Viewing Statistic Compilation Details” on page 448.
• From the Statistics process column, click a process to review. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443. Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
447
Statistics
Searching Statistics Compilations The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of statistics compilations specific to that criteria. To manage statistics compilation filters: 1. From the Statistics compilation screen (Figure 11.9 on page 447), click Edit filters.
3 The Statistics compilation > Filters screen displays.
Figure 11.10: Statistics compilation > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Viewing Statistic Compilation Details To view compilation details: 1. From the Statistics compilation screen (Figure 11.9 on page 447), click a compilation from the Id column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays (Figure 11.11 on page 449).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
448
Statistics
Figure 11.11: Edit statistics compilation Screen — Details Tab
Using the Details Tab The Details tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays general information about the compilation. Click the Statistics process name to view the statistics process. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443.
Using the Bulk Processes Tab The Bulk processes tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays a list of bulk processes in the compilation. Click a process ID from the Id column to view the bulk process.
3 The Edit bulk process screen displays (Figure 11.12 on page 450).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
449
Statistics
Figure 11.12: Edit statistics compilation > Edit bulk process Screen — Details Tab NOTE: Information displayed on the Details tab is view-only.
Using the Timeslots Tab Click the Timeslot tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen to view scheduled times that the process is authorized to run. NOTE: Information displayed on the Timeslot tab is view-only.
Using the Generated Results Tab Click the Generated results tab to review statistic information about the process. Click a result ID from the Id column to view statistics results. Click a table name from the Statistics table column to edit the table. For more information about editing the statistics table, see “Using the Edit Statistics Table Screen” on page 446.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
450
Statistics
Device Statistics There are two types of device statistics available for display through the Statistics menu: Downloads per brand, and Downloads per model.
Downloads Per Brand To select and display statistics on device brands used by end-users to download content: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Device Statistics > Downloads per brand.
3 The Downloads per brand screen displays.
Figure 11.13: Downloads per brand Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • Content type (for example, WAP logos, SMS, and so on) • The number and percentage of content downloaded for each content type during the period on a device attached to the device brand
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content type 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
451
Statistics
Downloads Per Model To select and display statistics on device models used by end-users to download content: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Device Statistics > Downloads per model.
3 The Downloads per model screen displays.
Figure 11.14: Downloads per model Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The device model • The number and percentage of content types downloaded during the period on each device model
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each device model 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
452
Statistics
Content Statistics There are three types of content statistics available for display through the Statistics menu: Downloads per provider, Downloads per content, and Content per provider.
Downloads Per Provider To select and display statistics on the amount of content downloaded per provider: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Downloads per provider.
3 The Downloads per provider screen displays.
Figure 11.15: Downloads per provider Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The content name and type • The number and percentage of content types downloaded for each content provider
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content provider 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
453
Statistics
Downloads Per Content To select and display statistics on the amount of content downloaded by content type: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Downloads per content.
3 The Downloads per content screen displays.
Figure 11.16: Downloads per content Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The content name • The number and percentage of content types downloaded for each device brand • The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content type 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Content Per Provider To select and display statistics on the amount of content created, updated, and deleted per provider: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Content Per Provider.
3 The Content per provider screen displays (Figure 11.17 on page 455).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
454
Statistics
Figure 11.17: Content per provider Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information in three categories: Content created by content provider, Content modified by content provider, and Content deleted by content provider:
• The name of the content provider • The number and percentage of content created, modified, and deleted by each provider
• The number and percentage of total content created, modified, and deleted 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Other Statistics There are two types of other statistics available for display through the Statistics menu: Downloads per offer, and Downloads per service.
Downloads Per Offer To select and display statistics on the number of downloads per offer: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Other Statistics > Downloads per offer.
3 The Downloads per offer screen displays (Figure 11.18 on page 456).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
455
Statistics
Figure 11.18: Downloads per offer Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The type of offer • The number and percentage of content requests per offer • The number and percentage of total content requests 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Downloads Per Service To select and display statistics on the number of downloads per service: 1. From the Statistics menu, select Other Statistics > Downloads per service.
3 The Downloads per service screen displays.
Figure 11.19: Downloads per service Screen
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
456
Statistics
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. 3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH. NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information: • The service name • The number and percentage of content requests per service • The number and percentage of total content requests 5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
457
12
System Information
This chapter includes the following information: Managing Countries ............................................................................................... Viewing Countries.................................................................................................. Searching Countries............................................................................................... Adding a Country .................................................................................................. Editing a Country .................................................................................................. Deleting a Country ................................................................................................ Managing Mobile Network Operators ........................................................................ Viewing Mobile Network Operators ........................................................................... Searching Operators .............................................................................................. Creating a New Operator ........................................................................................ Editing an Operator ............................................................................................... Deleting an Operator ............................................................................................. Managing Phone Prefixes ........................................................................................ Viewing Prefixes .................................................................................................... Searching Prefixes ................................................................................................. Creating New Prefixes ............................................................................................ Editing a Prefix...................................................................................................... Deleting a Prefix.................................................................................................... History File Configuration ....................................................................................... Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration .................................................................... Managing History Rights.........................................................................................
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
459 459 460 461 461 462 463 463 464 465 465 466 467 467 468 469 469 470 471 471 473
458
System Information
The System menu allows you to manage basic system options, such as countries, operators, phone prefixes, history file configuration, and global system rights.
Managing Countries The Countries manager section of the System menu allows you to manage country codes previously defined in Content Manager.
Viewing Countries To view a list of previously defined countries: 1. From the System menu, select Countries manager > Countries.
3 The Countries > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of countries. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Countries” on page 460.
3 The Countries screen displays.
Figure 12.1: Countries Screen
The Countries screen displays the following information:
• Name — the name of the operator • Mcc — the country’s Mobile Country Code • Date created — the date on which the country was added to the system
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
459
System Information
Using the Countries Screen The Countries screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Countries screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a country to edit. For more information about editing countries, see “Editing a Country” on page 461.
• Click New country to add a new country. For more information, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
• Click Delete to remove all selected countries. For more information, see “Deleting a Country” on page 462.
Searching Countries The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of countries specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Countries screen (Figure 12.1 on page 459), click Edit filters.
3 The Countries > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.2: List operators > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
460
System Information
Adding a Country To add a country to the system: 1. From the Countries screen (Figure 12.1 on page 459), click New country.
3 The New country screen displays. NOTE: The New country function is also available when searching for or editing a
country. For more information, see “Editing a Country” on page 461.
Figure 12.3: New country Screen
2. In the Mcc field, enter the country’s Mobile Country Code. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the country. This name displays for end-users. 4. In the Prefix field, enter the country’s phone prefix. 5. In the Locale field, enter the locale to be used with the country. 6. Click Submit.
Editing a Country The Edit country screen allows you to modify operator details. To edit a country: 1. From the Name column on the Countries screen, click a country to edit.
3 The Edit country screen displays (Figure 12.8 on page 466).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
461
System Information
Figure 12.4: Edit country Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit country screen:
• Name — the country name • Mcc — the country’s Mobile Country Code • Prefix — the country’s phone prefix • Date created — the date on which the country was added to the system (cannot be modified).
• Date modified — The date on which the country was last edited (updated automatically). Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting a Country To delete a country: 1. From the Countries screen, check the box next to one or more countries to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all countries. 2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected countries?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited country by clicking Delete on the Edit country
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
462
System Information
Managing Mobile Network Operators The Operators manager section of the System menu allows you to manage mobile network operators on the CM system.
Viewing Mobile Network Operators To view mobile network operators: 1. From the System menu, select Operators manager > operators.
3 The Operators > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show table to view a list of all available operators. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Operators” on page 464.
3 The Operators screen displays.
Figure 12.5: Operators Screen
The Operators screen displays the following information:
• Name — the name of the operator • Mnc — the Mobile Network Code associated with the operator • Country — the operator’s country • Date created — the date on which the operator was created
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
463
System Information
Using the Operators Screen The Operators screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Operators screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click an operator to edit. For more information about editing operators, see “Editing an Operator” on page 465.
• Click New operator to create a new operator. For more information, see “Creating a New Operator” on page 465.
• Click Delete to remove all selected operators. For more information, see “Deleting an Operator” on page 466.
Searching Operators The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of operators specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Operators screen (Figure 12.5 on page 463), click Edit filters.
3 The Operators > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.6: Operators > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
464
System Information
Creating a New Operator NOTE: Countries must be defined prior to creating an operator. For information about
adding countries, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
To create a new mobile network operator: 1. From the Operators screen, click New operator.
3 The New operator screen displays. NOTE: The New operator function is also available when searching for or editing an
operator. For more information, see “Searching Operators” on page 464 and “Editing an Operator” on page 465.
Figure 12.7: New operator Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the operator. 3. From the Mcc list, select an existing Mobile Country Code for the operator. 4. In the Mnc field, enter the Mobile Network Code for the operator. This information is required. 5. Click Submit.
Editing an Operator The Edit operator screen allows you to modify operator details. To edit an operator: 1. From the Name column on the Operators screen (Figure 12.5 on page 463), click an operator to edit.
3 The Edit operator screen displays (Figure 12.8 on page 466).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
465
System Information
Figure 12.8: Edit operator Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit operator screen:
• Name — the operator name • Mcc — the Mobile Country Code for the operator • Mnc — the Mobile Network Code for the operator • Date created — the date on which the operator was created (cannot be modified) • Date modified — the date on which the operator was last edited (updated automatically) Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting an Operator To delete an operator: 1. From the Operators screen, check the box next to one or more operators to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all operators. 2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected operators?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited operator by clicking Delete on the Edit operator
screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
466
System Information
Managing Phone Prefixes The Phone prefix manager portion of the System menu allows you to manage phone prefixes. Before you can create a service, you must define all possible Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN) formats, including: prefixes, minimum and maximum lengths, and conversions to the standard phone format (international format). For example, French mobile phone numbers start with “06” and are 10 digits long. Before they can be used, these numbers must be converted to the international format, for example, starting with “336”.
Viewing Prefixes To view a list of previously defined phone prefixes: 1. From the System menu, select Phone prefix manager > Prefixes.
3 The Prefixes > Filters screen displays. 2. Click Show prefixes to view the list of prefixes. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Prefixes” on page 468.
3 The Prefixes screen displays.
Figure 12.9: Prefixes Screen
The Prefixes screen displays the following information:
• Prefix — the original prefix entered • Replace — the prefix used in place of the original prefix • Length min — the minimum length of the MSISDN allowed for the associated prefix • Length max — the maximum length of the MSISDN allowed for the associated prefix
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
467
System Information
Using the Prefixes Screen The Prefixes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Prefixes screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Prefix column, click a prefix to edit. For more information, see “Editing a Prefix” on page 469.
• Click Create prefix to create a new prefix. For more information, see “Creating New Prefixes” on page 469.
• Click Delete Prefix to remove all selected prefixes. For more information, see “Deleting a Prefix” on page 470.
Searching Prefixes The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of prefixes specific to that criteria. To edit filters: 1. From the Prefixes screen (Figure 12.9 on page 467), click Edit filters.
3 The Prefixes > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.10: Prefixes > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
468
System Information
Creating New Prefixes To create a new prefix: 1. From the Prefixes screen, click Create prefix.
3 The New prefix screen displays. NOTE: The Create prefix function is also available when searching for or editing a prefix.
For more information, see “Searching Prefixes” on page 468 and “Editing a Prefix” on page 469.
Figure 12.11: New prefix Screen
2. In the Prefix field, enter the original, authorized prefix. 3. In the Replace field, enter the prefix used to replace the authorized prefix. 4. In the Length min field, enter the minimum length of the MSISDN that can be entered. 5. In the Length max field, enter the maximum length of the MSISDN that can be entered. 6. Click Submit.
Editing a Prefix To access the Edit prefix screen: 1. From the Prefix column on the Prefixes screen, click a prefix to edit.
3 The Edit prefix screen displays (Figure 12.12 on page 470).
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
469
System Information
Figure 12.12: Edit prefix Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit prefix screen:
• Prefix — the original, authorized prefix (cannot be modified) • Replace — the prefix used to replace the authorized prefix • Length min — the minimum length of the MSISDN that can be entered • Length max — the maximum length of the MSISDN that can be entered Click Submit to save any changes.
Deleting a Prefix To delete a prefix: 1. From the Prefixes screen, check the box next to one or more prefixes to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all prefixes. 2. Click Delete prefix.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected phone prefixes?” displays. 3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion. NOTE: You can also delete an edited prefix by clicking Delete on the Edit prefix screen.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
470
System Information
History File Configuration All tracking features (user history tracking, event tracking, and so on) are managed by a single component. You can edit the configuration for this component through the System menu.
Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration The dispatch file is where history logs and information on how they are generated are stored on the server. To access the History Configuration Edit screen: 1. From the System menu, select History Configuration > Edit.
3 The History Configuration > Edit screen displays.
Figure 12.13: History Configuration > Edit Screen
The History Configuration >Edit screen displays the following information: NOTE: The information displayed on the History Configuration > Edit screen is view-
only. Contact your system administrator to make changes to the history file configuration.
• History folder — The relative directory where history files are stored. • Absolute History path — The directory path to where history files are stored (calculated from the relative directory path).
• History root filename — The root filename for all history files. • Dispatch options — Indicates whether history files are to be dispatched by owner, and whether to close history files each day or every hour.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
471
System Information
Purging History Files To view purging options: 1. From the History Configuration > Edit screen, click the Purge configuration tab.
3 The Purge configuration tab displays.
Figure 12.14: History Configuration > Edit Screen — Purge configuration Tab
The Purge configuration tab displays the following information: NOTE: The information displayed on the Purge configuration tab is view-only.
• Purge activated — Indicates whether the purge function is active. • Purge files older than (days) — Indicates how long history files are stored (in days).
• Purge scheduling — Indicates how often history files are purged. Purging History Files To manually purge history files: 1. From the Purge configuration tab on the History Configuration > Edit screen, click Purge now.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to launch the purge process? During the purge, X files will be removed from the persistence system.” displays. 2. Click Ok to purge, or Cancel to void the purge process.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
472
System Information
Managing History Rights To establish history rights: 1. From the System menu, select History rights > Define global rights.
3 The Define global rights screen displays.
Figure 12.15: Define global rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “System History Rights” on page 15. NOTE: You may only grant history rights that are already granted to you.
3. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to assign rights. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups. 4. Click Add right.
3 The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen. Revoking Global Rights To revoke group rights, click the
Copyright 2006
next to each right to remove.
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
473
Glossary
Account A record of information about a Content Manager user. It includes credentials (login, password, IP address), name, and other Content Manager-specific information, for example, group membership. There are two types of accounts: End-user and Administrator. Administrator accounts can be used by physical persons or by external systems. End-user accounts are associated to mobile subscribers, identified by their IMSI, MSISDN or any other unique ID.
Administrator An Administrator has rights on the back-office and uses an Administrator account. In most cases, this account is used by a physical person to access the Content Manager web backoffice to administrate Content Manager. An administrator account is attached to one or several back-office groups.
Back-Office See Administrator.
Bulk process A bulk delivery of one or several bundles to several users. To decrease the load on the platform, the bulk process follows a certain session sequence.
Bundle A bundle (formerly called a package option) enables association between topics, patterns and triggers. It is always associated with a parent offer.
Bundle Template A bundle template contains all useful bundle information, delivery triggers, and topic filters. A bundle template’s format is used to automatically format new bundles.
Capability group A list of devices that share one common capability — they are compatible with a certain Handset Manager feature, have access to a certain online help, and so on. Capability groups are associated to compatible content templates.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
474
Glossary
Capability group handler Capability group handlers are used to automatically define capability groups.
Category A classification of information that can be used to tag a content or an offer.
Content A series of binary and/or text data identified by a unique ID and uses a content template. It is made up of one or several content versions and content metadata.
Content metadata An element of a content that is not used directly for delivery to a device, but adds other information to the content.
Content provider An entity that publishes contents. It can be a remote system, a group of administrator accounts, or an application, for example. Contents can be published by the entity itself or by those accounts which have rights to publish contents on behalf of this entity.
Content template A template describing the different elements required to generate a content that can be delivered to a device.
Content version A content version is an element of a content that can be delivered to a device. A content version is compatible with one or several devices.
Content version template A template describing the different elements of a content version that can be delivered to a device.
Device A device is a terminal used by an end-user that can be addressed by Content Manager. Each device is associated to a type (mobile phone, for example), an address (a phone number, for example), a model (Nokia 3330, for example), an IMEI.
End-user An account that allows a user to purchase and receive contents from Content Manager and access the front-office interface. It is associated to one or several devices.
Feature A type of content that can be delivered to a device.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
475
Glossary
Formatting Token Formatting tokens are used to balance the load between two formatting applications sending content to any given handset.
Front-Office See End-user.
Group A set of end-user or administrator accounts with similar rights. A group inherits rights from parent groups and passes on its rights to child groups.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) The most popular standard for mobile phones in the world. GSM service is used by over 1.5 billion people across more than 210 countries and territories. The ubiquity of the GSM standard makes international roaming very common between mobile phone operators, enabling subscribers to use their phones in many parts of the world. GSM differs significantly from its predecessors in that both signaling and speech channels are digital, which means that it is considered a second generation mobile phone system.
Handset Manager A handset device management application that communicates with Content Manager to allow for administrative tasks such as adding, updating, or deleting handsets. Handset Manager is not intended for use by clients, but rather intended for use by internal system administrators or developers.
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) A unique number given to every single mobile phone, typically found behind the battery. IMEI numbers of cellular phones connected to a GSM network are stored in a database (EIR Equipment Identity Register) containing all valid mobile phone equipment. When a phone is reported stolen or is not type approved, the number is marked invalid.
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) The ability to send messages using a combination of text, sounds, images and video to MMS capable handsets. Similar to SMS, MMS is a store and forward method of transmitting graphics, video clips, sound files and short text messages over wireless networks using the WAP protocol. Carriers deploy special servers, dubbed MMS Centers (MMSCs) to implement the offerings on their systems. MMS also supports e-mail addressing, so the device can send e-mails directly to an e-mail address. The most common use of MMS is for communication between mobile phones.
Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN) Number The dialable number that callers use to reach a mobile subscriber. Some phones can support multiple MSISDNs, for example, a US-based MSISDN and a Canadian-based MSISDN. Callers dialing either number will reach the subscriber.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
476
Glossary
Offer An offer (formerly called a package) is a set of bundles. It is associated to a certain frontoffice service and can be downloaded by end-user members of certain groups.
Pattern A pattern can format contents (following a certain template) into messages for delivery over a certain media. A pattern also includes information on content adaptation to different devices.
Right An entitlement attributed to members of a group to perform certain actions (view, create, use, delete) on a certain resource (another group, a category, a billing model) in Content Manager.
Service An instance of Content Manager that uses its own accounts, content, and services. Several Content Manager services can share common resources, for example and end-user account database, a content database, and so on.
Session The process where several bundles are delivered to a device after a trigger is activated. This process follows a certain kinematics, described by the session sequence.
Short Messaging Service (SMS) A general name for the technology that allows users to send and receive text messages using mobile phones.Messages can be up to 160 characters of text in length. Many new mobile phones let you send bigger messages, and automatically split your message up into 160character chunks. Messages can comprise of words or numbers or an alphanumeric combination (binary format is even supported). SMS is a store and forward service, which means messages are not sent directly from sender to recipient, but always through an SMS Center instead.
Template A predefined format used to create items and store contents in Content Manager. See also Bundle template, Content template, and Content version template.
Terminal ID A unique number assigned by a system administrator that identifies the handset device for administrative purposes (for example, adding, updating, or deleting handsets). The Terminal ID is required for communications between the Content Manager application and Handset Manager.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
477
Glossary
Topic An association between one or several categories where contents and one or several events is retrieved. Contents must be associated to all selected categories to be fetched by the topic.
Trigger An event that activates the delivery of a certain bundle. The triggering event may be the reception of a message, a request from an end-user, the publication of a new content, and such.
User agent User agent information is included in the http headers of a WAP page or the Multimedia Messaging Services Center (MMS-C). This information is detected when a device accesses a WAP page or the MMS-C. The correct device can be identified based on the user agent profile.
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) The leading standard for information services on wireless terminals like digital mobile phones. Wireless Markup Language (WML) is the language used to create pages to be displayed in a WAP browser. The wireless industry came up with the idea of WAP. The point of this standard was to show internet contents on wireless clients, like mobile phones.
Wireless Markup Language (WML) The language used to create pages to be displayed in a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) browser.
Copyright 2006
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
478
Index
A about Content Manager 2 filters 8–10 rights management 12–20 session sequences 407 access granting to a resource 48–49 removing from a resource 49 accessing bulk content processes 426 bulk import process 164 account imports, bulk creating 102–104 managing 101–104 searching 102 viewing 101–102 accounts quick start, importing 25–27 searching by alias 366 searching by MSISDN 365 accounts, back-office adding 53 adding parent groups 57 creating 53 deleting 59 deleting parent groups 57 editing 54–59 managing 51–59 managing IP restrictions 58 parent groups 56 rights 12 searching 52 viewing 51–52 accounts, front-office creating 83–84 deleting 97 Copyright 2006
accounts, front-office, continued editing 84–98 editing services 87 managing 81–97 managing addresses 91–93 managing credit information 95 managing devices 89–90 managing SIM cards 93–94 managing timeslots 94 parent groups 87 rights 12 searching 81–82 actions workflows 411–418 workflows, creating 416 workflows, deleting 418 workflows, editing 417–418 activating device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 238 device features 200 device IMEI ranges 186, 251 device profile capabilities 281 device profiles 276 device user agents 190, 255 devices 177, 194 adding actions, workflow 416 back-office accounts 53 back-office groups 43 back-office parent groups 57 bulk account imports 102–104 bundles 339 capability groups 204 condition rules, workflow 421 conditions, workflow 420 content 139–140 content categories 116
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
479
Index adding, continued content metadata 151 content providers 109 content systems 382–384 content topics 370 content versions 144–146 countries 461 delivery categories 302 device application types 230 device application versions 243 device applications 236 device profile capabilities 262 devices 180 formatting tokens 216 front-office accounts 83–84 front-office groups 73 IMEI ranges 185 message patterns 396–399 messaging credentials 393–394 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 316 offers 312 phone prefixes 469 services 62 session sequences 404–406 states, workflow 413 subscriptions 365–366 synchronizations, trust source 296 trust sources 286 user agents 189 versions to trust sources 285 workflows 409 addresses front-office account 91–93 searching front-office accounts by 82 administrator group. See back-office group
application types, device, continued managing 226–231 searching 228 viewing 226–228 application versions, device activating 244 associated device applications 235 creating 243 deactivating 244 deleting 244 details 241 editing 240–242 managing 238–244 searching 240 user agents 242 viewing 238–240 applications, device activating 238 application versions 235 creating 236 deactivating 238 deleting 237 details 235 editing 233–236 managing 232–238 searching 233 user agents 235 viewing 232 applying filters 8–10 archives, DKB generating 291 managing 290 association type, user 73–75 automatic user association 73–75
Administrators menu 41 aliases devices by brand 176 devices by model 182–183 searching accounts by 366 searching front-office accounts by 82 application types, device activating 231 creating 230 deactivating 231 deleting 231 editing 228
Copyright 2006
B back-office account adding 53 adding parent groups 57 creating 53 deleting 59 deleting parent groups 57 editing 54–59 managing 51–59 managing IP restrictions 58 managing parent groups 56
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
480
Index bulk process, continued rights 19 viewing statistics compilation 449
back-office account, continued rights 12 searching 52 viewing 51–52
bundle templates capabilities 321 content templates 323 creating 316 deleting 330 details 319 editing 318–329 managing on offers 315–330 on content triggers 324–325 on message triggers 325–326 on schedule triggers 326–329 searching topics 320 topics 320
back-office group adding 43 creating 43 defining rights 47–48 deleting 49 editing 44–45 managing 41–50 rights 12–13 searching 42 viewing 41–42 brands, device aliases 176 cache management 388 deactivating 177 details 175 editing 174–176 managing 172–176 searching 173 browser, device profiles 266 bulk account imports creating 102–104 managing 101–104 searching 102 viewing 101–102 bulk campaign, quick start guide 22–39 bulk content accessing a process 426 deleting process reports 439 importing 158–163 managing processes 425–427 process rights 439 searching processes 426 viewing processes 425–426 bulk import accessing a process 164 creating a process 160–163 deleting a process 164 process timeslots 163, 361 searching 159 bulk process bundle, creating 357–361 quick start creation 37–39 retry sessions, creating 434–435
Copyright 2006
bundles bulk processes 357–361 compatibilities 346 creating 339 deleting 355 details 342 downloading 355–357 editing 341–354 managing 337–357 metadata 354 on content triggers 352 on message triggers 348 on schedule triggers 348–352 popularity 353 searching 339 topic patterns 344 topics 343–346 viewing 337–339
C cache editing management 387–391 managing 387–391 cache management brands 388 device profile capabilities 390 device profiles 389 models 388 capabilities content topic devices 374 offer bundle templates 321
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
481
Index capabilities, device profile activating 281 deactivating 281 deleting 280 editing 279 managing 260–263, 278–281 searching 277 capability group handlers creating 207 deleting 211 editing 208–211 managing 206–211 searching 207 viewing 206–207
categories, content creating 116 deleting 121 details 119 editing 117–121 managing 114–123 managing providers 119–120 rights 16–17, 120, 121–123 searching 116 viewing 115–116 categories, delivery creating 302 deleting 309 editing 304–309 managing 300–309 searching 302 viewing 300–302 changing login password 3 cloning content 157 compatibilities bundles 346 offer 330
Copyright 2006
condition rules workflows, creating 421 workflows, deleting 423 workflows, editing 422 conditions workflows 419–423 workflows, creating 420 workflows, deleting 423 workflows, editing 421
capability groups creating 204 deleting 205 editing 203–204 managing 201–205 resetting 204 searching 202 searching handler created 210 viewing 201–202 viewing handler created 209 catalog rights 18, 367–368
compilations searching statistics 448 viewing bulk processes 449 viewing statistics details 448
configuring bulk campaign 22–39 content repository, quick start 23–25 delivery options, quick start 33–36 end-user database structure, quick start 22–23 history files 471–472 MO interface, quick start 36–37 content adding 139–140 adding metadata 151 bulk imports 158–163 cloning 157 copying 157 creating 139–140 creating versions 144–146 deleting 157 deleting metadata 153 deleting versions 149 details 142 download statistics 454 editing 140–156 editing metadata 152 editing versions 147–148 files 160 managing 137–158 managing metadata 150–153 quick start, creating 28–33 searching 138 statistics 453 statistics per provider 454 using xml files 165–169 using zip files 164 viewing 137–138 viewing categories 115–116 viewing versions 143
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
482
Index content topics, continued editing 372–376 managing 368–381 metadata 376 publishing 379 rights 18, 377 searching 370 viewing 368–370
content categories creating 116 deleting 121 details 119 editing 117–121 global rights 121–123 managing 114–123 managing providers 119–120 rights 16–17, 120 searching 116
content triggers 324–325, 352
Content Manager about 2 interface overview 5 logging in 3 logging out 4 menu bar 5 rights definitions 11–19 version information 6 Welcome screen, Content Manager 5 Content menu 107 content providers creating 109 deleting 113 details 111 editing 110–113 managing 107–114 managing templates 111–112 rights 15–16, 112–113 viewing 107–108 content repository configuration, quick start 23– 25 content systems creating 382–384 deleting 385 editing 384 managing 381–385 searching 382 viewing 381–382 content templates editing 124–136 managing 123–136 offer bundle templates 323 viewing 123 content topics creating 370 deleting 377 details 373 device capabilities 374
Copyright 2006
content versions, managing devices 148, 153–156 content, bulk accessing a process 426 managing processes 425–427 searching processes 426 viewing processes 425–426 copying content 157 countries creating 461 deleting 462 editing 461 managing 459–462 searching 460 viewing 459 creating actions, workflow 416 back-office accounts 53 back-office groups 43 bulk account imports 102–104 bulk import process 160–163 bulk process, quick start 37–39 bundle bulk process 357–361 bundles 339 capability group handlers 207 capability groups 204 condition rules, workflow 421 conditions, workflow 420 content 139–140 content categories 116 content metadata 151 content providers 109 content systems 382–384 content topics 370 content versions 144–146 content, quick start 28–33 countries 461 delivery categories 302 device application types 230 device application versions 243
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
483
Index creating, continued device applications 236 device detection rules 222–223 device features 197 device profile capabilities 262 device profiles on devices 191 devices 180 formatting tokens 216 front-office accounts 83–84 front-office groups 73 IMEI ranges 185 message patterns 396–399 messaging credentials 393–394 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 316 offers 312 phone prefixes 469 retry session bulk process 434–435 services 62 session sequences 404–406 states, workflow 413 subscriptions 365–366 synchronizations, trust source 296 trust sources 286 user agents 189 versions for trust sources 285 workflows 409 credentials, messaging creating 393–394 deleting 394 editing 394 managing 391–395 searching 392 viewing 391–393 credit information, front-office account 95 criteria, filter 8–10 csv files 160
D data patterns, managing 400–402 deactivating brands 177 device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 238 device features 200 device IMEI ranges 186, 252
Copyright 2006
deactivating, continued device profile capabilities 281 device profiles 276 device user agents 190, 255 devices 194 defining back-office global group rights 49–50 back-office group rights 47–48 back-office offer rights 333 bulk process rights 439 catalog rights 367–368 content category rights 120 Content Manager rights 11–19 content provider rights 112–113 content topic rights 377 front-office group rights 76–77 front-office group rules 78–80 front-office offer rights 332, 334 global content category rights 121–123 global service rights 69–71 history rights 473 navigation rights 48–49 service rights 66–67 session rights 439 system administration rights 424 deleting access to a resource 49 actions, workflow 418 back-office accounts 59 back-office groups 49 back-office parent groups 57 bulk import process 164 bulk process reports 439 bundles 355 capability group handlers 211 capability groups 205 condition rules, workflow 423 conditions, workflow 423 content 157 content categories 121 content metadata 153 content providers 113 content systems 385 content topic 377 content versions 149 countries 462 delivery categories 309 device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 237 device detection rules 223
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
484
Index deleting, continued device features 200 device IMEI ranges 186, 251 device profile capabilities 262, 280 device profiles 276 device profiles from devices 193 device user agents 190, 254 devices 194 DKB versions 290 formatting tokens 218 front-office accounts 97 front-office groups 80 message patterns 403 messaging credentials 394 mobile network operators 466 offer bundle templates 330 offers 336 phone prefixes 470 services 69 session sequences 406 states, workflow 415 trust sources 287 versions from trust sources 285 workflows 423
details, continued offer bundle templates 319 purge 437–439 session 433 statistics processes 443 workflows 411 detection rules, detection tool 225 detection rules, device creating 222–223 deleting 223 editing 220–221 managing 218–224 searching 219 viewing 218–219 detection sets, device managing 224 viewing 224 detection tool 225 device brands aliases 176 details 175 device features activating 200 deactivating 200 deleting 200 details 198 device profile compatibility 198 editing 197–199
delivery categories creating 302 deleting 309 dynamic data 305 editing 304–309 managing 300–309 metadata 307 searching 302 viewing 300–302
Device Knowledge Base See DKB.
delivery options, quick start configuration 33–36
Device menu 170–298
details bundles 342 content 142 content category 119 content providers 111 content topic 373 device application versions 241 device applications 235 device feature 198 device profiles 259 devices by brand 175 devices by model 182 editing session 430–432 formatting tokens 214 message patterns 400 offer 315
device models aliases 182–183 editing 180–193
Copyright 2006
device profile capabilities cache management 390 formatting tokens 215 device profiles activating 276 browser 266 cache management 389 capabilities 260–263 creating capabilties 262 creating on devices 191 deactivating 276 deleting 276
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
485
Index device profiles, continued deleting capabilties 262 deleting from devices 193 details 259 device feature compatibility 198 editing 258–275 editing capabilties 261 hardware 263 hardware extensions 264 importing to devices 192 managing 256–277 managing on devices 191–193 MMS 271 network 268 OMA DM CP 275 Push 270 searching 255 settings 272 SMS 273 software 265 WAP 268 devices activating 177, 194 activating application types 231 activating application versions 244 activating applications 238 activating IMEI ranges 186, 251 activating user agents 190, 255 creating 180 creating application versions 243 creating applications 236 creating detection rules 222–223 creating device profiles 191 creating features 197 creating IMEI ranges 185 creating user agents 189 deactivating 194 deactivating application types 231 deactivating application versions 244 deactivating applications 238 deactivating IMEI ranges 186, 252 deactivating user agents 190, 255 deleting 194 deleting application types 231 deleting application versions 244 deleting applications 237 deleting detection rules 223 deleting device profiles 193 deleting IMEI ranges 186, 251 deleting user agents 190, 254 download statistics by brand 451
Copyright 2006
devices, continued download statistics by model 452 editing application types 228, 230 editing application versions 240–242 editing applications 233–236 editing by brand 174–176 editing detection rules 220–221 editing features 197–199 editing IMEI ranges 184 editing user agents 187 front-office account 89–90 importing device profiles 192 managing application types 226–231 managing application versions 238–244 managing applications 232–238 managing by brand 172–176 managing by IMEI range 249–252 managing by model 178–194 managing by user agent 253–255 managing detection rules 218–224 managing detection sets 224 managing device profiles 191–193 managing features 195–200 managing for content versions 148, 153–156 managing IMEI ranges 183–186 managing rights 297 managing user agents 187–191 rights 17 searching application types 228 searching application versions 240 searching applications 233 searching by brand 173 searching by IMEI 249 searching by unresolved IMEI 100–101 searching by user agent 252 searching detection rules 219 searching features 196 statistics 451 using Quick Search 248 viewing application types 226–228 viewing application versions 238–240 viewing applications 232 viewing detection rules 218–219 viewing detection sets 224 devices, mobile managing 99–101 searching by IMEI 99–101 DKB deleting versions 290 editing versions 289 generating archives 291
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
486
Index DKB, continued managing archives 290 managing versions 287–290 rights 17 searching versions 288 synchronizations 291–297 viewing versions 287 download codes, managing 335 download statistics per brand 451 per content 454 per model 452 per offer 455 per provider 453 per service 456 downloading bundles 355–357 downloads, viewing popular 362–363 dynamic data, delivery categories 305
E editing actions, workflow 417–418 back-office accounts 54–59 back-office groups 44–45 bundles 341–354 cache management 387–391 capability group handlers 208–211 capability groups 203–204 condition rules, workflow 422 conditions, workflow 421 content 140–156 content categories 117–121 content metadata 152 content providers 110–113 content systems 384 content templates 124–136 content topics 372–376 content versions 147–148 countries 461 delivery categories 304–309 device application types 228 device application versions 240–242 device applications 233–236 device detection rules 220–221 device features 197–199 device profile capabilities 261, 279 device profiles 258–275
Copyright 2006
editing, continued device user agents 187 devices by brand 174–176 devices by model 180–193 DKB versions 289 formatting tokens 213–216 front-office account services 87 front-office accounts 84–98 front-office groups 74–80 IMEI ranges on devices 184 message patterns 399–402 messaging credentials 394 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 318–329 offers 314–336 phone prefixes 469 services 64–67 session details 430–432 session sequences 406 states, workflow 414–415 subscriptions 366 trust sources 283–285 workflows 410–423 end-user database structure configuration, quick start 22–23 end-user. See front-office End-users menu 61 errors, session 431 export file formats 336
F features, device activating 200 creating 197 deactivating 200 deleting 200 details 198 device profile capability 198 editing 197–199 managing 195–200 searching 196 file formats, export 336 files content 160 csv 160 history, configuring 471–472
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
487
Index files, continued history, purging 472 history, viewing configurations 471
G
filters applying 8–10 criteria and operators 8–10 text operators 9–10
glossary 474–478 granting access to a resource 48–49
formatting systems managing 245–246 searching 245 viewing 245 formatting tokens creating 216 deleting 218 details 214 device profile capabilities 215 editing 213–216 managing 212–218 searching 213 viewing 212–213 front-office accounts creating 83–84 deleting 97 editing 84–98 editing services 87 managing 81–97 managing addresses 91–93 managing credit information 95 managing devices 89–90 managing parent groups 87 managing SIM cards 93–94 managing timeslots 94 rights 12 searching 81–82 front-office groups creating 73 defining rights 76–77 defining rules 78–80 deleting 80 editing 74–80 rights 12–13 searching 72 viewing 71–72
Copyright 2006
generating DKB archives 291
groups, back-office adding 43 creating 43 deleting 49 editing 44–45 managing 41–50 rights 12–13 searching 42 viewing 41–42 groups, capability creating 204 deleting 205 editing 203–204 managing 201–205 resetting 204 searching 202 viewing 201–202 groups, front-office adding 73 creating 73 deleting 80 editing 74–80 rights 12–13 searching 72 viewing 71–72 groups, parent adding to back-office accounts 57 managing 46–47 removing from back-office accounts 57
H handlers, capability group creating 207 deleting 211 editing 208–211 managing 206–211 searching 207 searching created groups 210 viewing 206–207 viewing created groups 209
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
488
Index history rights, managing 473 system rights 15 viewing user 96–98
logging into Content Manager 3 logging out of Content Manager 4 login password, changing 3
history files configuring 471–472 purging 472 viewing configurations 471
M
I IMEI searching devices by 99–101 unresolved, searching devices by 100–101 IMEI ranges activating from devices 251 activating on devices 186 creating 185 deactivating from devices 252 deactivating on devices 186 deleting from devices 251 editing 184 managing devices by 249–252 managing on devices 183–186 removing from devices 186 searching devices by 249 import, bulk process accessing 164 contents 158–163 creating 160–163 deleting 164 timeslots 163, 361 importing accounts, quick start 25–27 device profiles to devices 192 imports, bulk account creating 102–104 managing 101–104 searching 102 viewing 101–102 interface, Content Manager 5 IP restrictions, managing 58
L lists, viewing and working with 6–7
Copyright 2006
managing back-office accounts 51–59 back-office groups 41–50 back-office parent groups 56 bulk account imports 101–104 bulk content processes 425–427 bundles 337–357 cache 387–391 capability group handlers 206–211 capability groups 201–205 content 137–158 content categories 114–123 content metadata 150–153 content provider templates 111–112 content providers 107–114 content providers by category 119–120 content systems 381–385 content templates 123–136 content topics 368–381 content version devices 148, 153–156 countries 459–462 data patterns 400–402 delivery categories 300–309 device application types 226–231 device application versions 238–244 device applications 232–238 device detection rules 218–224 device detection sets 224 device features 195–200 device IMEI ranges 183–186 device profile capabilities 278–281 device profiles 256–277 device profiles on devices 191–193 device rights 297 device user agents 187–191 devices by brand 172–176 devices by IMEI range 249–252 devices by model 178–194 devices by user agent 253–255 DKB archives 290 DKB versions 287–290 formatting systems 245–246 formatting tokens 212–218 front-office account addresses 91–93
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
489
Index managing, continued front-office account credit information 95 front-office account devices 89–90 front-office account SIM cards 93–94 front-office account timeslots 94 front-office accounts 81–97 front-office parent groups 87 history rights 473 IP restrictions, back-office account 58 message patterns 395–403 messaging credentials 391–395 mobile devices 99–101 mobile network operators 463–466 offer bundle templates 315–330 offer download codes 335 offers 310–336 parent groups 46–47 phone prefixes 467–470 purges 435–439 retry sessions 432 rights 12–20 services 61–71 session sequences 403–406 sessions 428–432 statistics processes 442–446 subscriptions 365–366 synchronizations, DKB 291–297 triggers 363–364 trust sources 282–287 versions for trust sources 283–285 workflows 408–423 manual user association 73–75 menu bar, Content Manager 5 menus Administrators 41 Content 107 Device 170–298 End-users 61 Statistics 442 System 459 message patterns creating 396–399 deleting 403 details 400 editing 399–402 managing 395–403 searching 396 types 397–399 viewing 395–396
Copyright 2006
message triggers 325–326, 348 messaging credentials creating 393–394 deleting 394 editing 394 managing 391–395 searching 392 viewing 391–393 metadata bundles 354 content topic 376 offers 331 metadata, content adding 151 deleting 153 editing 152 managing 150–153 metadata, delivery categories 307 MMS, device profiles 271 MO interface, quick start configuration 36–37 mobile devices managing 99–101 searching by IMEI 99–101 mobile network operators adding 465 creating 465 deleting 466 editing 465 managing 463–466 modifying 465 searching 464 viewing 463–464 models, cache management 388 models, device aliases 182–183 details 182 editing 180–193 managing 178–194 searching 179 modifying actions, workflow 417–418 back-office accounts 54–59 back-office groups 44–45 bundles 341–354 cache management 387–391 condition rules, workflow 422
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
490
Index modifying, continued conditions, workflow 421 content 140–156 content categories 117–121 content providers 110–113 content systems 384 content templates 124–136 content topics 372–376 content versions 147–148 countries 461 delivery categories 304–309 device application types 228 device application versions 240–242 device features 197–199 device profile capabilities 279 device profiles 258–275 devices by brand 174–176 devices by model 180–193 DKB versions 289 formatting tokens 213–216 front-office account services 87 front-office accounts 84–98 front-office groups 74–80 IMEI ranges 184 message patterns 399–402 mobile network operators 465 offer bundle templates 318–329 offers 314–336 preferences 6 services 64–67 session sequences 406 states, workflow 414–415 workflows 410–423 monitoring a synchronization process 293 MSISDN quick start, searching 27–28 searching accounts by 365 See also phone prefixes.
N navigation defining rights 48–49 rights overview 14 network, device profiles 268
Copyright 2006
O offers back-office rights 333 bundle template capabilities 321 bundle template details 319 bundle template topics 320 bundle template triggers, on content 324–325 bundle template triggers, on message 325–326 bundle template triggers, on schedule 326–329 compatibilities 330 creating 312 creating bundle templates 316 deleting 336 deleting bundle templates 330 details 315 download statistics 455 editing 314–336 editing bundle templates 318–329 front-office rights 332, 334 managing 310–336 managing bundle templates 315–330 managing download codes 335 metadata 331 rights 19 searching 312 searching bundle template topics 320 viewing 310–312 OMA DM CP, device profiles 275 operators, filter 8–10 operators, mobile network adding 465 creating 465 deleting 466 editing 465 managing 463–466 modifying 465 searching 464 viewing 463–464 overview, Content Manager interface 5
P parent groups, back-office adding to accounts 57 managing 46–47, 56 removing from accounts 57
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
491
Index parent groups, managing front-office 87 password, changing 3 patterns, managing data 400–402 patterns, message creating 396–399 deleting 403 details 400 editing 399–402 managing 395–403 searching 396 types 397–399 viewing 395–396 patterns, topic 344 phone prefixes creating 469 deleting 470 editing 469 managing 467–470 searching 468 viewing 467–468 popular downloads, viewing 362–363 popularity, bundles 353 post tasks, statistics processes 446 pre tasks, statistics processes 446 preferences, modifying 6 prefixes, phone creating 469 deleting 470 editing 469 managing 467–470 searching 468 viewing 467–468 processes, bulk rights 19 viewing statistics compilation 449 processes, bulk content accessing 426 deleting reports 439 managing 425–427 rights 439 searching 426 viewing 425–426 processes, bulk import accessing 164 creating 160–163
Copyright 2006
processes, bulk import, continued deleting 164 timeslots 163, 361 processes, statistics details 443 managing 442–446 post tasks 446 pre tasks 446 searching 442 statistics tables 444–446 profiles, device activating 276 activating capabilities 281 browser 266 capabilities 260–263 creating capabilities 262 deactivating 276 deactivating capabilities 281 deleting 276 deleting capabilities 262, 280 details 259 editing 258–275 editing capabilities 261, 279 hardware 263 hardware extensions 264 managing 256–277 managing capabilities 278–281 MMS 271 network 268 OMA DM CP 275 Push 270 searching 255 searching capabilities 277 settings 272 SMS 273 software 265 WAP 268 providers, content content statistics 454 creating 109 deleting 113 details 111 download statistics 453 editing 110–113 managing 107–114 managing by category 119–120 managing templates 111–112 rights 15–16, 112–113 searching 108 viewing 107–108
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
492
Index publishing content topics 379
repository, quick configuration of content 23–25
purges managing 435–439 searching 437 viewing 436–437 viewing details 437–439
resetting capability groups 204 resource granting access to 48–49 removing access from 49 restrictions, managing IP 58
purging bulk process reports 439 history files 472 sessions 432, 435
retry sessions bulk processes 434–435 managing 432 searching 433 viewing 432
Push, device profiles 270
Q Quick Search 248 quick start configuring a bulk campaign 22–39 configuring content repository 23–25 configuring delivery options 33–36 configuring end-user database 22–23 configuring MO interface 36–37 creating a bulk process 37–39 creating content 28–33 import accounts 25–27 searching for MSISDN 27–28
R removing bundle templates 330 bundles 355 capability group handlers 211 capability groups 205 countries 462 device application types 231 device application versions 244 device applications 237 device features 200 device profile capabilities 262, 280 device profiles 276 device profiles from devices 193 device user agents 190 devices 194 DKB versions 290 formatting tokens 218 trust sources 287 versions to trust sources 285
Copyright 2006
rights account 12 back-office group 47–48 back-office offers 333 bulk process 19, 439 catalog 18, 367–368 content categories 16–17, 120 Content Manager 11–19 content provider 15–16, 112–113 content topic 18, 377 device 17, 297 DKB 17 front-office group 76–77 front-office offers 332, 334 global back-office group 49–50 global content categories 121–123 global service 69–71 group 12–13 history 15, 473 management 12–20 navigation 14, 48–49 offers 19 service 14–15, 66–67 session 19, 439 session and bulk process 439 system 424 system administration 19 tracking 19 rules, condition creating 421 deleting 423 editing 422 rules, device detection creating 222–223 deleting 223 detection tool 225 editing 220–221
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
493
Index rules, device detection, continued managing 218–224 searching 219 viewing 218–219 rules, front-office group 78–80
S scheduled triggers 326–329, 348–352 searching accounts by alias 366 accounts by MSISDN 365 applying filters 8–10 back-office accounts 52 back-office groups 42 bulk account imports 102 bulk content processes 426 bundles 339 capability group handlers 207 capability groups 202 content 138 content categories 116 content providers 108 content systems 382 content topics 370 countries 460 delivery categories 302 device application types 228 device application versions 240 device applications 233 device detection rules 219 device features 196 device profile capabilities 277 device profiles 255 devices by brand 173 devices by IMEI range 249 devices by model 179 devices by unresolved IMEI 100–101 devices by user agent 252 DKB versions 288 formatting systems 245 formatting tokens 213 front-office accounts 81–82 front-office accounts by address 82 front-office accounts by alias 82 front-office groups 72 handler created capability groups 210 import processes 159 message patterns 396 messaging credentials 392
Copyright 2006
searching, continued mobile devices by IMEI 99–101 mobile network operators 464 MSISDN, quick start 27–28 offers 312 operators 464 phone prefixes 468 purges 437 retry sessions 433 services 62 session sequences 404 statistics compilations 448 statistics processes 442 synchronizations, trust source 293 triggers 364 using Quick Search 248 workflows 409 sequences, session about 407 creating 404–406 deleting 406 editing 406 managing 403–406 searching 404 viewing 403–404 services adding 62 creating 62 defining rights 66–67 deleting 69 download statistics 456 editing 64–67 managing 61–71 rights 14–15 searching 62 viewing 61–62 session sequences about 407 creating 404–406 deleting 406 editing 406 managing 403–406 searching 404 viewing 403–404 workflows 405 sessions editing details 430–432 errors 431 managing 428–432 purging 432, 435
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
494
Index statuses, session 431
sessions, continued rights 19, 439 statuses 431 viewing 428–429 viewing details 433
subscriptions creating 365–366 editing 366 managing 365–366
sessions, retry bulk process 434–435 managing 432 searching 433 viewing 432
synchronizations, DKB creating 296 managing 291–297 monitoring 293 searching 293 viewing 292
sets, device detection managing 224 viewing 224 settings, device profiles 272
system administration rights 19, 424 history rights 15
SIM cards, front-office account 93–94
System menu 459
SMS, device profiles 273
systems, content creating 382–384 deleting 385 editing 384 managing 381–385 searching 382 viewing 381–382
software, device profiles 265 states workflows 411–418 workflows, creating 413 workflows, deleting 415 workflows, editing 414–415
systems, formatting managing 245–246 searching 245 viewing 245
statistics contents 453 contents per provider 454 device 451 downloads per brand 451 downloads per content 454 downloads per model 452 downloads per offer 455 downloads per provider 453 downloads per service 456 Statistics menu 442 tracking 447–450
T templates, bundle adding to offers 316 capabilities 321 content templates 323 deleting 330 details 319 editing from offers 318–329 managing on offers 315–330 searching topics 320 topics 320
statistics compilations searching 448 viewing bulk processes 449 viewing details 448 statistics processes details 443 managing 442–446 post tasks 446 pre tasks 446 searching 442 statistics tables 444–446
templates, content bundle templates 323 editing 124–136 managing 123–136 managing for providers 111–112 viewing 123
statistics tables, statistics processes 444–446
Copyright 2006
text operators, filter 9–10
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
495
Index timeslots bulk import process 163, 361 front-office account 94 tokens, formatting creating 216 deleting 218 details 214 device profile capabilities 215 editing 213–216 managing 212–218 searching 213 viewing 212–213 tool, detection 225 topic patterns, bundles 344 topics, bundle templates managing 320 searching 320 topics, bundles 343–346 topics, content creating 370 deleting 377 details 373 device capabilities 374 editing 372–376 managing 368–381 metadata 376 publishing 379 rights 18, 377 searching 370 viewing 368–370
user agents activating from devices 255 activating on devices 190 associated device application versions 242 associated device applications 235 creating 189 deactivating from devices 255 deactivating on devices 190 deleting from devices 190, 254 editing on devices 187 managing devices by 253–255 managing on devices 187–191 searching devices by 252
user, viewing history 96–98 using xml files 165–169 zip files 164
V version information, Content Manager 6
triggers managing 363–364 on content offer bundle templates 324–325 on content, bundles 352 on message offer bundle templates 325–326 on message, bundles 348 on schedule offer bundle templates 326–329 on schedule, bundles 348–352 searching 364
Copyright 2006
U
user association types 73–75
tracking rights 19, 439 statisitics 447–450
trust sources creating 286 creating versions 285 deleting 287 deleting versions 285
trust sources, continued editing 283–285 managing 282–287 managing versions 283–285 viewing 282
versions creating for trust sources 285 deleting from trust sources 285 managing for trust sources 283–285 versions, application device application associated 235 versions, content creating 144–146 deleting 149 editing 147–148 viewing 143 viewing back-office accounts 51–52 back-office groups 41–42 bulk account imports 101–102 bulk content processes 425–426
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
496
Index viewing, continued bundles 337–339 capability group handlers 206–207 capability groups 201–202 content 137–138 content categories 115–116 content providers 107–108 content statistics 453 content systems 381–382 content templates 123 content topics 368–370 content versions 143 countries 459 delivery categories 300–302 device application types 226–228 device application versions 238–240 device applications 232 device detection rules 218–219 device detection sets 224 device statistics 451 DKB versions 287 formatting systems 245 formatting tokens 212–213 front-office groups 71–72 handler created capability groups 209 history file configuration 471 lists 6–7 message patterns 395–396 messaging credentials 391–393 mobile network operators 463–464 offers 310–312 phone prefixes 467–468 popular downloads 362–363 purge details 437–439 purges 436–437 retry sessions 432 services 61–62 session details 433 session sequences 403–404 sessions 428–429 statistics compilation bulk processes 449 statistics compilation details 448 synchronizations, trust source 292 trust sources 282 user history 96–98
Copyright 2006
viewing, continued version information, Content Manager 6 workflows 408–409
W WAP, device profiles 268 Welcome screen 5 workflows actions 411–418 conditions 419–423 creating 409 creating actions 416 creating condition rules 421 creating conditions 420 creating states 413 deleting 423 deleting actions 418 deleting condition rules 423 deleting conditions 423 deleting states 415 details 411 editing 410–423 editing actions 417–418 editing condition rules 422 editing conditions 421 editing states 414–415 managing 408–423 searching 409 states 411–418 viewing 408–409 workflows, session sequence 405 working with lists 6–7
X xml files, using 165–169
Z zip files, using 164
Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential
497
Related Documents
Content Manager User Guide
November 2019 33
Meeting Manager User Guide
April 2020 10
Content Authors User Guide
November 2019 34
Test Manager User Guide
May 2020 11
Webhost Manager 7 User Guide
June 2020 4